[opensuse-translation-commit] r90698 - trunk/yast/eo/po

Author: keichwa Date: 2014-11-03 17:10:21 +0100 (Mon, 03 Nov 2014) New Revision: 90698 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/add-on-creator.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/add-on.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/audit-laf.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/auth-client.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/auth-server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/autoinst.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/base.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/bootloader.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/ca-management.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/cio.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/cluster.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/country.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/crowbar.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/dhcp-server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/dns-server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/drbd.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/fcoe-client.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/firewall-services.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/firewall.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/firstboot.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/ftp-server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/heartbeat.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/http-server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/inetd.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/installation.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/instserver.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/iplb.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/iscsi-client.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/iscsi-lio-server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/iscsi-server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/isns.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/kdump.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/kerberos-server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/kerberos.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/ldap-client.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/ldap-server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/ldap.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/linux-user-mgmt.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/live-installer.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/lxc.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/mail.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/multipath.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/ncurses-pkg.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/network.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/nfs.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/nfs_server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/nis.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/nis_server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/ntp-client.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/oneclickinstall.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/online-update-configuration.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/online-update.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/packager.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/pkg-bindings.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/printer.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/product-creator.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/proxy.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/qt-pkg.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/rear.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/registration.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/reipl.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/relocation-server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/s390.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/samba-client.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/samba-server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/samba-users.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/scanner.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/security.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/services-manager.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/slp-server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/snapper.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/sound.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/squid.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/storage.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/sudo.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/support.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/sysconfig.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/tftp-server.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/tune.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/update.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/users.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/vm.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/wagon.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/xpram.eo.po trunk/yast/eo/po/yast2-apparmor.eo.po Log: merged Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/add-on-creator.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/add-on-creator.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/add-on-creator.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -257,9 +257,7 @@ #. command line message, do not translate 'create', 'clone' #: src/clients/add-on-creator.rb:864 -msgid "" -"There is no add-on product configuration present. Create a new one using the " -"'create' or 'clone' commands." +msgid "There is no add-on product configuration present. Create a new one using the 'create' or 'clone' commands." msgstr "" #. error message @@ -299,14 +297,12 @@ #. help text #: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:156 -msgid "" -"<p>Start creating a new add-on product configuration with <b>Add</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Start creating a new add-on product configuration with <b>Add</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text #: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:160 -msgid "" -"<p>Use <b>Edit</b> to modify the selected add-on product configuration.</p>" +msgid "<p>Use <b>Edit</b> to modify the selected add-on product configuration.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text @@ -316,9 +312,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/add-on-creator/complex.rb:166 -msgid "" -"<p>Build the new add-on product based on the selected configuration with " -"<b>Build</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Build the new add-on product based on the selected configuration with <b>Build</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. table header item @@ -1040,23 +1034,17 @@ #. help text for start menu #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:44 -msgid "" -"<p>This module offers guidance for the creation of an add-on product.</p>" +msgid "<p>This module offers guidance for the creation of an add-on product.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for start menu, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:48 -msgid "" -"<p>Select how to create the new add-on product. You can create it from the " -"beginning or base it on an existing product.</p>" +msgid "<p>Select how to create the new add-on product. You can create it from the beginning or base it on an existing product.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for start menu, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:52 -msgid "" -"<p>When basing the new product on an existing product, check <b>Generate " -"Package Descriptions</b> to generate new descriptions of packages in the " -"existing product.</p>" +msgid "<p>When basing the new product on an existing product, check <b>Generate Package Descriptions</b> to generate new descriptions of packages in the existing product.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for initial data (paragraph title) @@ -1076,9 +1064,7 @@ #. help text for initial data, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:64 -msgid "" -"<p>Select the product to which the new add-on product can be applied. This " -"selection forms the <b>REQUIRES</b> value of the <tt>content</tt> file.</p>" +msgid "<p>Select the product to which the new add-on product can be applied. This selection forms the <b>REQUIRES</b> value of the <tt>content</tt> file.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for initial data (paragraph title), cont. @@ -1088,9 +1074,7 @@ #. help text for initial data, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:70 -msgid "" -"<p>Choose the path to the directory containing the RPM packages that should " -"form your add-on product.</p>" +msgid "<p>Choose the path to the directory containing the RPM packages that should form your add-on product.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for initial data (paragraph title), cont. @@ -1100,11 +1084,7 @@ #. help text for initial data, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:76 -msgid "" -"<p>Optionally, choose the path to the directory containing the RPM packages " -"from the product the add-on product should be based on. These packages will " -"not be contained in the add-on product, but could be used for creating the " -"patterns later in the workflow.</p>" +msgid "<p>Optionally, choose the path to the directory containing the RPM packages from the product the add-on product should be based on. These packages will not be contained in the add-on product, but could be used for creating the patterns later in the workflow.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for content file editor (<tt>content</tt> is a name of file) @@ -1114,10 +1094,7 @@ #. help text for content file editor, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:84 -msgid "" -"<p>Enter the information required to identify the add-on product. Deselect " -"<b>Show Only Required Keywords</b> to see all attributes of the <tt>content file.</p>" +msgid "<p>Enter the information required to identify the add-on product. Deselect <b>Show Only Required Keywords</b> to see all attributes of the <tt>content</tt> file.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for content file editor, cont. @@ -1127,32 +1104,22 @@ #. help text for package description files #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:92 -msgid "" -"<p>Edit the language-specific descriptions of packages (<tt>packages.lang files) here.</p>" +msgid "<p>Edit the language-specific descriptions of packages (<tt>packages.lang</tt> files) here.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for package description files, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:96 -msgid "" -"<p>Use <b>Add Language</b> to add a description file for a new language. The " -"list of available languages is read from the <b>LINGUAS</b> value of the " -"<tt>content</tt> file. Import an existing file with package descriptions " -"with <b>Import</b>. Delete the description file with <b>Delete</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Use <b>Add Language</b> to add a description file for a new language. The list of available languages is read from the <b>LINGUAS</b> value of the <tt>content</tt> file. Import an existing file with package descriptions with <b>Import</b>. Delete the description file with <b>Delete</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for package description files, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:100 -msgid "" -"<p>Use <b>Add</b> and <b>Edit</b> in the second table to modify description " -"entries for the selected package.</p>" +msgid "<p>Use <b>Add</b> and <b>Edit</b> in the second table to modify description entries for the selected package.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for package description files, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:104 -msgid "" -"<p>Optionally, choose the path for the file providing <b>Additional Package " -"Dependencies</b> (EXTRA_PROV).</p>" +msgid "<p>Optionally, choose the path for the file providing <b>Additional Package Dependencies</b> (EXTRA_PROV).</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for patterns @@ -1162,103 +1129,69 @@ #. help text for patterns, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:112 -msgid "" -"<p>Use <b>New</b> to create a new pattern or <b>Import</b> to import an " -"existing one.</p>" +msgid "<p>Use <b>New</b> to create a new pattern or <b>Import</b> to import an existing one.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for patterns, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:116 -msgid "" -"<p>Use <b>Add</b> and <b>Edit</b> in the second table to modify pattern " -"attributes.</p>" +msgid "<p>Use <b>Add</b> and <b>Edit</b> in the second table to modify pattern attributes.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for patterns, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:120 msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Required pattern</b> to mark the selected pattern as required " -"for\n" -"the add-on product. Such a pattern will be automatically preselected when " -"the installation of the add-on product is started.</p>" +"<p>Check <b>Required pattern</b> to mark the selected pattern as required for\n" +"the add-on product. Such a pattern will be automatically preselected when the installation of the add-on product is started.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for the 'various settings' dialog #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:124 -msgid "" -"<p>Specify the path to the directory in which the add-on product should be " -"created. Select <b>Create ISO Image</b> to create the ISO image of the " -"product in the output directory.</p>" +msgid "<p>Specify the path to the directory in which the add-on product should be created. Select <b>Create ISO Image</b> to create the ISO image of the product in the output directory.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for the 'various settings' dialog #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:128 -msgid "" -"<p>Use <b>Generate Changelog</b> to generate a changelog file containing all " -"changes of packages on the add-on product made in the last two years.</p>" +msgid "<p>Use <b>Generate Changelog</b> to generate a changelog file containing all changes of packages on the add-on product made in the last two years.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for the 'various settings' dialog #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:132 -msgid "" -"<p>Adapt the workflow of the add-on product with <b>Configure Workflow</b>. " -"Use <b>Optional Files</b> to configure texts of <tt>README</tt> files, " -"licenses, and other optional values.</p>" +msgid "<p>Adapt the workflow of the add-on product with <b>Configure Workflow</b>. Use <b>Optional Files</b> to configure texts of <tt>README</tt> files, licenses, and other optional values.</p>" msgstr "" #. workflow help text #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:136 -msgid "" -"<p>Here, you can enter the files necessary for customizing your add-on " -"product workflow.</p>" +msgid "<p>Here, you can enter the files necessary for customizing your add-on product workflow.</p>" msgstr "" #. workflow help text #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:140 -msgid "" -"<p>Enter the location of the file with the workflow description. This file " -"is an alternative to <tt>control.xml</tt> and is saved as <tt>installation." -"xml</tt> in the add-on product's base directory.</p>" +msgid "<p>Enter the location of the file with the workflow description. This file is an alternative to <tt>control.xml</tt> and is saved as <tt>installation.xml</tt> in the add-on product's base directory.</p>" msgstr "" #. workflow help text #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:144 -msgid "" -"<p>To use custom YaST modules during the installation of the add-on product, " -"enter the path to the <tt>y2update.tgz</tt> archive where these modules are " -"stored or configure the contents of <tt>y2update.tgz</tt> by specifying the " -"YaST RPM packages in <b>Import the Packages</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>To use custom YaST modules during the installation of the add-on product, enter the path to the <tt>y2update.tgz</tt> archive where these modules are stored or configure the contents of <tt>y2update.tgz</tt> by specifying the YaST RPM packages in <b>Import the Packages</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for expert dialog 1 #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:148 -msgid "" -"<p>The optional <tt>info.txt</tt> file gives information about the add-on " -"that should be displayed as a pop-up window with an <b>OK</b> button.</p>" +msgid "<p>The optional <tt>info.txt</tt> file gives information about the add-on that should be displayed as a pop-up window with an <b>OK</b> button.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for expert dialog 1, cont #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:152 -msgid "" -"<p>The text of the license is displayed in a window with <b>Agree</b> and " -"<b>Disagree</b> buttons before the installation starts. The files with the " -"license texts in different languages are compressed to the <tt>license.zip archive and stored in the <tt>media.1</tt> directory.</p>" +msgid "<p>The text of the license is displayed in a window with <b>Agree</b> and <b>Disagree</b> buttons before the installation starts. The files with the license texts in different languages are compressed to the <tt>license.zip</tt> archive and stored in the <tt>media.1</tt> directory.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for expert dialog 2 #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:156 -msgid "" -"<p>The <tt>COPYRIGHT</tt> and <tt>COPYING</tt> files can have various " -"language modifications and are stored in the root directory of the add-on " -"product.</p>" +msgid "<p>The <tt>COPYRIGHT</tt> and <tt>COPYING</tt> files can have various language modifications and are stored in the root directory of the add-on product.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for signing dialog #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:160 -msgid "" -"<p>Here, configure the signing of the add-on product. Choose a secret key " -"from the list of keys available or create a new one with <b>Create</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Here, configure the signing of the add-on product. Choose a secret key from the list of keys available or create a new one with <b>Create</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for signing dialog, cont. @@ -1268,51 +1201,37 @@ #. help text for signing dialog, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:166 -msgid "" -"<p>Decide if you want to <b>Sign All Packages</b> of the add-on product with " -"the selected key. All previous package signatures will be removed.</p>" +msgid "<p>Decide if you want to <b>Sign All Packages</b> of the add-on product with the selected key. All previous package signatures will be removed.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for generating new key dialog #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:170 -msgid "" -"<p>Enter the values necessary for generating the new primary key pair.</p>" +msgid "<p>Enter the values necessary for generating the new primary key pair.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for generating new key dialog, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:174 -msgid "" -"<p>The default size of a DSA key is 1024 bits. RSA keys may be between 1024 " -"and 4096 bits long.</p>" +msgid "<p>The default size of a DSA key is 1024 bits. RSA keys may be between 1024 and 4096 bits long.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for generating new key dialog, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:178 -msgid "" -"<p>As <b>Expiration Date</b>, enter the number of days after which the key " -"expires. If the number is followed by <tt>w</tt>,<tt>m</tt>, or <tt>y</tt>, " -"it indicates the number of weeks, months, or years. Leave the entry empty " -"for a key that never expires.</p>" +msgid "<p>As <b>Expiration Date</b>, enter the number of days after which the key expires. If the number is followed by <tt>w</tt>,<tt>m</tt>, or <tt>y</tt>, it indicates the number of weeks, months, or years. Leave the entry empty for a key that never expires.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for generating new key dialog, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:182 -msgid "" -"<p>Use <b>Name</b>, <b>Comment</b>, and <b>E-Mail Address</b> to provide the " -"user identification with which the new key should be associated.</p>" +msgid "<p>Use <b>Name</b>, <b>Comment</b>, and <b>E-Mail Address</b> to provide the user identification with which the new key should be associated.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for overview dialog #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:186 -msgid "" -"<p>Here, see the overview of data for generating the add-on product.</p>" +msgid "<p>Here, see the overview of data for generating the add-on product.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for overview dialog, cont. #: src/include/add-on-creator/helps.rb:190 -msgid "" -"<p>Press <b>Finish</b> to create the add-on product in the output directory." -"</p>" +msgid "<p>Press <b>Finish</b> to create the add-on product in the output directory.</p>" msgstr "" #. text entry label @@ -1425,9 +1344,7 @@ #. help text for content file 'BASEARCHS' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:164 -msgid "" -"Space-separated list of product architectures. Matches the available product-" -"release packages architectures. " +msgid "Space-separated list of product architectures. Matches the available product-release packages architectures. " msgstr "" #. label of content file 'VERSION' key @@ -1453,10 +1370,7 @@ #. help text for content file 'DISTRIBUTION' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:194 -msgid "" -"Some string denoting the distribution. The same string is most probably used " -"in the .rpms to denote the distribution. Usually a composition of the name, " -"version and architecture." +msgid "Some string denoting the distribution. The same string is most probably used in the .rpms to denote the distribution. Usually a composition of the name, version and architecture." msgstr "" #. label of content file key @@ -1486,9 +1400,7 @@ #. help text for content file '' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:227 -msgid "" -"UTF-8 encoded label. Default label if <b>LINGUAS</b> is omitted or no " -"default language can be determined." +msgid "UTF-8 encoded label. Default label if <b>LINGUAS</b> is omitted or no default language can be determined." msgstr "" #. label of content file 'LINGUAS' key @@ -1558,10 +1470,7 @@ #. help text for content file 'LABEL.lang' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:304 -msgid "" -"UTF-8-encoded <b>LABEL</b>. <tt>lang</tt> has the same syntax as the " -"<b>LINGUAS</b> values. For each language in <b>LINGUAS</b>, a matching " -"<b>LABEL.lang</b> is expected." +msgid "UTF-8-encoded <b>LABEL</b>. <tt>lang</tt> has the same syntax as the <b>LINGUAS</b> values. For each language in <b>LINGUAS</b>, a matching <b>LABEL.lang</b> is expected." msgstr "" #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:328 @@ -1600,9 +1509,7 @@ #. help text for 'Cat' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:366 -msgid "" -"One line category in the default language used to group patterns. Categories " -"are intended for the user and can be specified freely." +msgid "One line category in the default language used to group patterns. Categories are intended for the user and can be specified freely." msgstr "" #. help text for 'Cat.lang' pattern key @@ -1637,8 +1544,7 @@ #. help text for 'Prc' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:400 -msgid "" -"These packages are installed by default but can be removed without complaint." +msgid "These packages are installed by default but can be removed without complaint." msgstr "" #. label for 'Prs' pattern key @@ -1651,9 +1557,7 @@ #. help text for 'SUGGESTS' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:410 src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:503 #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:712 -msgid "" -"These are just hints for an application and not handled during dependency " -"resolution." +msgid "These are just hints for an application and not handled during dependency resolution." msgstr "" #. label for 'Ico' pattern key @@ -1665,12 +1569,7 @@ #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:420 msgid "" "If unspecified, the pattern name is used \n" -" instead (with blanks in the name replaced by underscores). If the filename " -"does not include a .png or .jpg extension, .png is appended. If no path is " -"specified, icons are searched for in the theme icon path (first /usr/share/" -"YaST2/theme/current/icons/32x32/apps/ then /usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/" -"icons/48x48/apps/). Absolute and relative paths (to the theme path /usr/" -"share/YaST2/theme/current/) are allowed." +" instead (with blanks in the name replaced by underscores). If the filename does not include a .png or .jpg extension, .png is appended. If no path is specified, icons are searched for in the theme icon path (first /usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/icons/32x32/apps/ then /usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/icons/48x48/apps/). Absolute and relative paths (to the theme path /usr/share/YaST2/theme/current/) are allowed." msgstr "" #. label for 'Ord' pattern key @@ -1680,9 +1579,7 @@ #. help text for 'Ord' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:431 -msgid "" -"This three-digit integer value defines the order of the pattern when listing " -"multiple patterns in the user interface." +msgid "This three-digit integer value defines the order of the pattern when listing multiple patterns in the user interface." msgstr "" #. label for 'Req' pattern key @@ -1702,11 +1599,7 @@ #. help text for 'Prv' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:453 -msgid "" -"Capabilities this pattern provides. They can be used to match <b>REQUIRES from others. Every resolvable has a provide by default--its own name and " -"edition. For example, package <i>bar-1.42-1</i> provides the capability " -"<tt>bar = 1.42-1</tt>." +msgid "Capabilities this pattern provides. They can be used to match <b>REQUIRES</b> from others. Every resolvable has a provide by default--its own name and edition. For example, package <i>bar-1.42-1</i> provides the capability <tt>bar = 1.42-1</tt>." msgstr "" #. label for 'Con' pattern key @@ -1716,9 +1609,7 @@ #. help text for 'Con' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:463 -msgid "" -"This pattern cannot be installed if the specified resolvable or one that " -"provides the capability is installed." +msgid "This pattern cannot be installed if the specified resolvable or one that provides the capability is installed." msgstr "" #. label for 'Obs' pattern key @@ -1740,9 +1631,7 @@ #. help text for 'Rec' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:483 -msgid "" -"A weak version of REQUIRES. If recommended patterns cannot be installed, no " -"error is shown." +msgid "A weak version of REQUIRES. If recommended patterns cannot be installed, no error is shown." msgstr "" #. label for 'Sup' pattern key @@ -1752,10 +1641,7 @@ #. help text for 'Sup' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:493 -msgid "" -"A reverse <b>Rec</b>. This pattern is installed if the specified capability " -"is provided by an installed resolvable. The dependency resolver installs it. " -"Uninstalling it is silently accepted." +msgid "A reverse <b>Rec</b>. This pattern is installed if the specified capability is provided by an installed resolvable. The dependency resolver installs it. Uninstalling it is silently accepted." msgstr "" #. label for 'Sug' pattern key @@ -1770,9 +1656,7 @@ #. help text for 'Fre' pattern key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:513 -msgid "" -"The current pattern is only considered for installation if the pattern " -"specified here is installed." +msgid "The current pattern is only considered for installation if the pattern specified here is installed." msgstr "" #. label for 'Ext' pattern key @@ -1832,9 +1716,7 @@ #. help text for 'Ins' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:601 -msgid "" -"An informal message shown to the user if the package is selected, such as a " -"test version warning or a commercial license." +msgid "An informal message shown to the user if the package is selected, such as a test version warning or a commercial license." msgstr "" #. label for 'Del' key @@ -1844,9 +1726,7 @@ #. help text for 'Del' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:610 -msgid "" -"An informal message shown to the user if the package is selected for " -"deletion, such as a warning that the system is unusable without the package." +msgid "An informal message shown to the user if the package is selected for deletion, such as a warning that the system is unusable without the package." msgstr "" #. label for 'Eul' key @@ -1856,9 +1736,7 @@ #. help text for 'Eul' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:619 -msgid "" -"Text of the EULA. This text is displayed before the package installation. If " -"the user does not accept the EULA, the package is not installed." +msgid "Text of the EULA. This text is displayed before the package installation. If the user does not accept the EULA, the package is not installed." msgstr "" #. label of key @@ -1868,9 +1746,7 @@ #. help text for 'REQUIRES' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:662 -msgid "" -"<p>Resolvables that must be installed on the system to meet product " -"requirements.</p>" +msgid "<p>Resolvables that must be installed on the system to meet product requirements.</p>" msgstr "" #. label of PROVIDES key @@ -1880,9 +1756,7 @@ #. help text for 'PROVIDES' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:672 -msgid "" -"Capabilities this product provides. They can be used to match <b>requires from others." +msgid "Capabilities this product provides. They can be used to match <b>requires</b> from others." msgstr "" #. label of 'CONFLICTS' key @@ -1892,9 +1766,7 @@ #. help text for 'CONFLICTS' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:682 -msgid "" -"This resolvable cannot be installed if the specified resolvable or one that " -"provides the capability is installed." +msgid "This resolvable cannot be installed if the specified resolvable or one that provides the capability is installed." msgstr "" #. label of 'OBSOLETES' key @@ -1904,9 +1776,7 @@ #. help text for 'OBSOLETES' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:692 -msgid "" -"When this resolvable is installed, it uninstalls any other resolvable with a " -"name matching this keyword." +msgid "When this resolvable is installed, it uninstalls any other resolvable with a name matching this keyword." msgstr "" #. label of 'RECOMMENDS' key @@ -1916,9 +1786,7 @@ #. help text for 'RECOMMENDS' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:702 -msgid "" -"A weak version of <b>requires</b>. An attempt is made to fulfill " -"<b>RECOMMENDS</b>, but they are silently ignored if no match is possible." +msgid "A weak version of <b>requires</b>. An attempt is made to fulfill <b>RECOMMENDS</b>, but they are silently ignored if no match is possible." msgstr "" #. label of 'SUGGESTS' key @@ -1948,9 +1816,7 @@ #. help text for 'productline' key #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:747 -msgid "" -"A short name for the product, which does not change between service packs " -"and versions." +msgid "A short name for the product, which does not change between service packs and versions." msgstr "" #. table item label @@ -1965,9 +1831,7 @@ #. help text for media type #: src/modules/AddOnCreator.rb:761 -msgid "" -"Type of media that will be used for target product. Possible values are: cd, " -"ftp, dvd5, dvd9." +msgid "Type of media that will be used for target product. Possible values are: cd, ftp, dvd5, dvd9." msgstr "" #. table item label Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/add-on.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/add-on.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/add-on.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -37,9 +37,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/add-on.rb:64 -msgid "" -"Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is missing. Use " -"xmlfile= command line option." +msgid "Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is missing. Use xmlfile= command line option." msgstr "" #. dialog caption @@ -124,8 +122,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: help text #: src/clients/inst_language_add-on.rb:226 -msgid "" -"<p>Select the language extensions to be installed then click <b>OK</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Select the language extensions to be installed then click <b>OK</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: popup question @@ -363,9 +360,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: dialog help adp/2 #: src/include/add-on/add-on-workflow.rb:1288 -msgid "" -"<p>Click <b>Add</b> to add a new add-on product, or <b>Delete</b> to remove " -"an add-on which is in use.</p>" +msgid "<p>Click <b>Add</b> to add a new add-on product, or <b>Delete</b> to remove an add-on which is in use.</p>" msgstr "" #. no items Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/audit-laf.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/audit-laf.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/audit-laf.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -460,8 +460,7 @@ #. Read dialog help 1/2 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:35 msgid "" -"<p><b><big>Initializing Configuration of Linux Audit Framework</big><br>\n" +"<p><b><big>Initializing Configuration of Linux Audit Framework</big></b><br>\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -492,21 +491,15 @@ #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:54 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Auditd Log File Configuration</big></b><br>\n" -"The audit daemon is the component of the Linux Auditing System which is " -"responsible for writing all relevant audit events to the log file <i>/var/" -"log/audit/audit.log</i> (default).\n" -"Events may come from the <i>apparmor</i> kernel module, from applications " -"which use <i>libaudit</i> (e.g. PAM) or incidents caused by rules (e.g. file " -"watches).</p>" +"The audit daemon is the component of the Linux Auditing System which is responsible for writing all relevant audit events to the log file <i>/var/log/audit/audit.log</i> (default).\n" +"Events may come from the <i>apparmor</i> kernel module, from applications which use <i>libaudit</i> (e.g. PAM) or incidents caused by rules (e.g. file watches).</p>" msgstr "" #. logfile_settings dialog help 2/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:60 msgid "" -"<p>The <b>Rules for auditctl</b> dialog offers more information about rules " -"and the possibility to add rules.\n" -"Detailed information about the log file settings can be obtained from the " -"manual page ('man auditd.conf').</p>" +"<p>The <b>Rules for auditctl</b> dialog offers more information about rules and the possibility to add rules.\n" +"Detailed information about the log file settings can be obtained from the manual page ('man auditd.conf').</p>" msgstr "" #. logfile_settings dialog help 3/8 @@ -519,42 +512,33 @@ #. logfile_settings dialog help 4/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:68 msgid "" -"<p><b>Format</b>: set <i>RAW</i> to log all data (store in a format exactly " -"as the kernel\n" -"sends it) or <i>NOLOG</i> to discard all audit information instead of " -"writing it on disk (does not affect\n" +"<p><b>Format</b>: set <i>RAW</i> to log all data (store in a format exactly as the kernel\n" +"sends it) or <i>NOLOG</i> to discard all audit information instead of writing it on disk (does not affect\n" "data sent to the dispatcher).</p> " msgstr "" #. logfile_settings dialog help 5/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:74 msgid "" -"<p><b>Flush</b>: describes how to write the data to disk. If set to " -"<i>INCREMENTAL</i> the\n" -"<b>Frequency</b> parameter tells how many records to write before issuing an " -"explicit flush to disk.\n" -"<i>NONE</i> means: no special effort is made to flush data, <i>DATA</i>: " -"keep data portion synced,\n" +"<p><b>Flush</b>: describes how to write the data to disk. If set to <i>INCREMENTAL</i> the\n" +"<b>Frequency</b> parameter tells how many records to write before issuing an explicit flush to disk.\n" +"<i>NONE</i> means: no special effort is made to flush data, <i>DATA</i>: keep data portion synced,\n" "<i>SYNC</i>: keep data and meta-data fully synced.</p>" msgstr "" #. logfile_settings dialog help 6/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:81 msgid "" -"<p>Configure the maximum log file size (in megabytes) and the action to take " -"when this\n" +"<p>Configure the maximum log file size (in megabytes) and the action to take when this\n" "value is reached via <b>Size and Action</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. logfile_settings dialog help 7/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:85 msgid "" -"<p>If the action is set to <i>ROTATE</i> the <b>Number of Log Files</b> " -"specifies the number\n" -"of files to keep. Set to <i>SYSLOG</i>, the audit daemon will write a " -"warning\n" -"to /var/log/messages. With <i>SUSPEND</i> the daemon stops writing records " -"to\n" +"<p>If the action is set to <i>ROTATE</i> the <b>Number of Log Files</b> specifies the number\n" +"of files to keep. Set to <i>SYSLOG</i>, the audit daemon will write a warning\n" +"to /var/log/messages. With <i>SUSPEND</i> the daemon stops writing records to\n" "disk. <i>IGNORE</i> means do nothing, <i>KEEP_LOGS</i> is similar\n" "to ROTATE, but log files are not overwritten.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -562,13 +546,10 @@ #. logfile_settings dialog help 8/8 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:93 msgid "" -"<p><b>Computer Name Format</b> describes how to write the computer name to " -"the\n" +"<p><b>Computer Name Format</b> describes how to write the computer name to the\n" "log file. If <i>USER</i> is set, the <b>User Defined Name</b> is\n" -"used. <i>NONE</i> means no computer name is inserted. <i>HOSTNAME</i> uses " -"the\n" -"name returned by the 'gethostname' syscall. <i>FQD</i> uses the fully " -"qualified\n" +"used. <i>NONE</i> means no computer name is inserted. <i>HOSTNAME</i> uses the\n" +"name returned by the 'gethostname' syscall. <i>FQD</i> uses the fully qualified\n" "domain name.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -576,28 +557,23 @@ #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:101 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Auditd Dispatcher Configuration</big></b><br>\n" -"Detailed information about the dispatcher settings can be obtained from the " -"manual page\n" +"Detailed information about the dispatcher settings can be obtained from the manual page\n" "('man auditd.conf').</p>" msgstr "" #. dispatcher dialog help 2/5 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:107 msgid "" -"<p><b>Dispatcher</b>: The dispatcher program is started by the audit daemon " -"and\n" +"<p><b>Dispatcher</b>: The dispatcher program is started by the audit daemon and\n" "gets all audit events on stdin.</p>" msgstr "" #. dispatcher dialog help 3/5 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:111 msgid "" -"<p><b>Communication</b>: Controls the communication between the daemon and " -"the dispatcher\n" -"program. A <i>lossy</i> communication means that events going to the " -"dispatcher are discarded\n" -"when the queue (a 128kB buffer) is full. Choose <i>lossless</i> if you want " -"a blocking/lossless\n" +"<p><b>Communication</b>: Controls the communication between the daemon and the dispatcher\n" +"program. A <i>lossy</i> communication means that events going to the dispatcher are discarded\n" +"when the queue (a 128kB buffer) is full. Choose <i>lossless</i> if you want a blocking/lossless\n" "communication.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -605,8 +581,7 @@ #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:118 msgid "" "<p>The dispatcher 'audispd' is an audit event multiplexor.\n" -"For more information see the manual pages ('man audispd' and 'man audispd." -"conf').</p>" +"For more information see the manual pages ('man audispd' and 'man audispd.conf').</p>" msgstr "" #. dispatcher dialog help 5/5 @@ -627,28 +602,23 @@ #. disk space dialog help 2/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:132 msgid "" -"<p><b>Space Left</b> (in megabytes) tells the audit daemon when to perform " -"an <b>Action</b> because\n" +"<p><b>Space Left</b> (in megabytes) tells the audit daemon when to perform an <b>Action</b> because\n" "the system is starting to run low on space.</p>" msgstr "" #. disk space dialog help 3/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:136 msgid "" -"<p>The value for <b>Admin Space Left</b> should be lower than above. The " -"system <b>is running\n" -"low</b> on disk space if the value is reached and the specified <b>Action will be performed.</p>" +"<p>The value for <b>Admin Space Left</b> should be lower than above. The system <b>is running\n" +"low</b> on disk space if the value is reached and the specified <b>Action</b> will be performed.</p>" msgstr "" #. disk space dialog hep 4/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:140 msgid "" "<p>If an action is set to <i>EMAIL</i>, a warning mail will be sent to the\n" -"account specified in <b>Action Mail Account</b>.<br> <i>SYSLOG</i> means " -"the\n" -"disk space warning will be written to /var/log/messages. <i>IGNORE</i> " -"means\n" +"account specified in <b>Action Mail Account</b>.<br> <i>SYSLOG</i> means the\n" +"disk space warning will be written to /var/log/messages. <i>IGNORE</i> means\n" "do nothing. <i>EXEC</i> runs the script specified in <b>Path to\n" "Script</b>. <i>SUSPEND</i> stops writing records to disk. <i>SINGLE</i>\n" "switches the system to single user mode. <i>HALT</i> shuts down the\n" @@ -658,10 +628,8 @@ #. disk space dialog help 5/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:150 msgid "" -"<p>You can also specify a <b>Disk Full Action</b> (disk has become full " -"already) and\n" -"a <b>Disk Error Action</b> (performed whenever an error is detected while " -"writing to disk).\n" +"<p>You can also specify a <b>Disk Full Action</b> (disk has become full already) and\n" +"a <b>Disk Error Action</b> (performed whenever an error is detected while writing to disk).\n" "Available actions are the same as above (except for <i>EMAIL</i>).</p>" msgstr "" @@ -669,8 +637,7 @@ #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:156 msgid "" "<p><b>Note:</b> All scripts specified for <i>EXEC</i> must be owned\n" -"by 'root', have '0750' file permissions, and the full path name has to be " -"entered.</p>\n" +"by 'root', have '0750' file permissions, and the full path name has to be entered.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. rules dialog help 1/6 @@ -679,39 +646,31 @@ "<p><b><big>Rules for auditctl</big></b><br>\n" "This dialog offers the possibility to enable or to disable the syscall\n" "auditing as well as to lock the audit configuration.\n" -"The selected flag from <b>Set Enabled Flag</b> will be added to the rules." +"The selected flag from <b>Set Enabled Flag</b> will be added to the rules.</p>" msgstr "" #. rules dialog help 2/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:167 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Note:</b><br>Locking the rules means they cannot be changed until next " -"reboot.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Note:</b><br>Locking the rules means they cannot be changed until next reboot.</p>" msgstr "" #. rules dialog help 3/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:171 msgid "" "<p>Enabling auditing without additional rules will cause the\n" -" applications which use <i>libaudit</i>, e.g. PAM to log to /var/log/audit/" -"audit.log (default).</p> " +" applications which use <i>libaudit</i>, e.g. PAM to log to /var/log/audit/audit.log (default).</p> " msgstr "" #. rules dialog help 4/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:175 msgid "" -"<p>You can also edit the rules manually, which we only recommended for " -"advanced users.<br>\n" +"<p>You can also edit the rules manually, which we only recommended for advanced users.<br>\n" "For more information about all options, see 'man auditctl'.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. rules dialog help 5/6 #: src/include/audit-laf/helps.rb:179 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Check Syntax</b> sends the rules via <i>auditctl</i> to the audit " -"subsystem and checks the syntax.<br><b>Restore</b> restores the settings " -"from /etc/audit/audit.rules.</p>\n" +msgid "<p><b>Check Syntax</b> sends the rules via <i>auditctl</i> to the audit subsystem and checks the syntax.<br><b>Restore</b> restores the settings from /etc/audit/audit.rules.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. rules dialog help 6/6 @@ -751,9 +710,7 @@ #. skip it during initial and second stage or when create AY profile #: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:318 -msgid "" -"<p>To continue the configuration of Linux Auditing, the package <b>%1</b> " -"must be installed.</p>" +msgid "<p>To continue the configuration of Linux Auditing, the package <b>%1</b> must be installed.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuditLaf.rb:321 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/auth-client.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/auth-client.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/auth-client.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -197,25 +197,7 @@ #. initialize GUI #: src/include/dialogs.rb:553 -msgid "" -"SSSD provides a set of daemons to manage access to remote directories and " -"authentication mechanisms.<br>You have to confiugre at least one " -"authentication domain.<br>The first you have to set for a authentication " -"domain is the identification and auth provider used for the domain.<br>In " -"the next step you have to set some mandatory parameter for the selected " -"providers.You can select later all parameters available for the selected " -"identification and auth provider.SSSD provides following id_provider:" -"<br><b>proxy</b>: Support a legacy NSS provider.<br><b>local</b>: SSSD " -"internal provider for local users.<br><b>ldap</b>: LDAP provider. See sssd-" -"ldap(5) for more information on configuring LDAP.<br><b>ipa</b>: FreeIPA and " -"Red Hat Enterprise Identity Management provider.<br><b>ad</b>: Active " -"Directory provider.<br>Supported auth providers are:<br><b>ldap</b> for " -"native LDAP authentication.<br><b>krb5</b> for Kerberos authentication." -"<br><b>ipa</b> FreeIPA and Red Hat Enterprise Identity Management provider." -"<br><b>ad</b> Active Directory provider.<br><b>proxy</b> for relaying " -"authentication to some other PAM target.<br><b>none</b> disables " -"authentication explicitly.<br>The default auth provider is the id_provider." -"<br>" +msgid "SSSD provides a set of daemons to manage access to remote directories and authentication mechanisms.<br>You have to confiugre at least one authentication domain.<br>The first you have to set for a authentication domain is the identification and auth provider used for the domain.<br>In the next step you have to set some mandatory parameter for the selected providers.You can select later all parameters available for the selected identification and auth provider.SSSD provides following id_provider:<br><b>proxy</b>: Support a legacy NSS provider.<br><b>local</b>: SSSD internal provider for local users.<br><b>ldap</b>: LDAP provider. See sssd-ldap(5) for more information on configuring LDAP.<br><b>ipa</b>: FreeIPA and Red Hat Enterprise Identity Management provider.<br><b>ad</b>: Active Directory provider.<br>Supported auth providers are:<br><b>ldap</b> for native LDAP authentication.<br><b>krb5</b> for Kerberos authentication.<br><b>ipa</b> FreeIPA and Red Hat Enterprise Identity Management provider.<br><b>ad</b> Active Directory provider.<br><b>proxy</b> for relaying authentication to some other PAM target.<br><b>none</b> disables authentication explicitly.<br>The default auth provider is the id_provider.<br>" msgstr "" #. Define Global Parameters @@ -224,70 +206,48 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:21 -msgid "" -"Comma separated list of services that are started when sssd itself starts." +msgid "Comma separated list of services that are started when sssd itself starts." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:26 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:79 -msgid "" -"Number of times services should attempt to reconnect in the event of a Data " -"Provider crash or restart before they give up" +msgid "Number of times services should attempt to reconnect in the event of a Data Provider crash or restart before they give up" msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:30 -msgid "" -"SSSD can use more domains at the same time, but at least one must be " -"configured or SSSD won't start." +msgid "SSSD can use more domains at the same time, but at least one must be configured or SSSD won't start." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:31 -msgid "" -"This parameter contains the list of domains in the order these will be " -"queried." +msgid "This parameter contains the list of domains in the order these will be queried." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:35 -msgid "" -"Default regular expression that describes how to parse the string containing " -"user name and domain into these components" +msgid "Default regular expression that describes how to parse the string containing user name and domain into these components" msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:39 -msgid "" -"The default printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a " -"(name, domain) tuple into a fully qualified name." +msgid "The default printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a (name, domain) tuple into a fully qualified name." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:43 -msgid "" -"SSSD monitors the state of resolv.conf to identify when it needs to update " -"its internal DNS resolver." +msgid "SSSD monitors the state of resolv.conf to identify when it needs to update its internal DNS resolver." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:44 -msgid "" -"By default, we will attempt to use inotify for this, and will fall back to " -"polling resolv.conf every five seconds if inotify cannot be used." +msgid "By default, we will attempt to use inotify for this, and will fall back to polling resolv.conf every five seconds if inotify cannot be used." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:48 -msgid "" -"Directory on the filesystem where SSSD should store Kerberos replay cache " -"files." +msgid "Directory on the filesystem where SSSD should store Kerberos replay cache files." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:52 -msgid "" -"This string will be used as a default domain name for all names without a " -"domain name component." +msgid "This string will be used as a default domain name for all names without a domain name component." msgstr "" #. Define Global Services Parameters #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:59 -msgid "" -"Bit mask that indicates which debug levels will be visible. 0x0010 is the " -"default value as well as the lowest allowed value, 0xFFF0 is the most " -"verbose mode." +msgid "Bit mask that indicates which debug levels will be visible. 0x0010 is the default value as well as the lowest allowed value, 0xFFF0 is the most verbose mode." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:64 @@ -303,42 +263,28 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:84 -msgid "" -"This option specifies the maximum number of file descriptors that may be " -"opened at one time by this SSSD process." +msgid "This option specifies the maximum number of file descriptors that may be opened at one time by this SSSD process." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:89 -msgid "" -"This option specifies the number of seconds that a client of an SSSD process " -"can hold onto a file descriptor without communicating on it." +msgid "This option specifies the number of seconds that a client of an SSSD process can hold onto a file descriptor without communicating on it." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:94 -msgid "" -"If a service is not responding to ping checks (see the “timeout” option), it " -"is first sent the SIGTERM signal that instructs it to quit gracefully." +msgid "If a service is not responding to ping checks (see the “timeout” option), it is first sent the SIGTERM signal that instructs it to quit gracefully." msgstr "" #. NSS configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:102 -msgid "" -"How many seconds should cache nss_sss enumerations (requests for info about " -"all users)?" +msgid "How many seconds should cache nss_sss enumerations (requests for info about all users)?" msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:107 -msgid "" -"The entry cache can be set to automatically update entries in the background " -"if they are requested beyond a percentage of the entry_cache_timeout value " -"for the domain." +msgid "The entry cache can be set to automatically update entries in the background if they are requested beyond a percentage of the entry_cache_timeout value for the domain." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:112 -msgid "" -"Specifies for how many seconds nss_sss should cache negative cache hits " -"(that is, queries for invalid database entries, like nonexistent ones) " -"before asking the back end again." +msgid "Specifies for how many seconds nss_sss should cache negative cache hits (that is, queries for invalid database entries, like nonexistent ones) before asking the back end again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:117 @@ -350,20 +296,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:127 -msgid "" -"If you want filtered user to still be group members set this option to false." +msgid "If you want filtered user to still be group members set this option to false." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:131 -msgid "" -"Override the user's home directory. You can either provide an absolute value " -"or a template." +msgid "Override the user's home directory. You can either provide an absolute value or a template." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:135 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1101 -msgid "" -"Set a default template for a user's home directory if one is not specified " -"explicitly by the domain's data provider." +msgid "Set a default template for a user's home directory if one is not specified explicitly by the domain's data provider." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:139 @@ -379,50 +320,36 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:152 -msgid "" -"The default shell to use if an allowed shell is not installed on the machine." +msgid "The default shell to use if an allowed shell is not installed on the machine." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:156 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1105 -msgid "" -"The default shell to use if the provider does not return one during lookup." +msgid "The default shell to use if the provider does not return one during lookup." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:161 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:204 -msgid "" -"Specifies time in seconds for which the list of subdomains will be " -"considered valid." +msgid "Specifies time in seconds for which the list of subdomains will be considered valid." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:166 -msgid "" -"Specifies time in seconds for which records in the in-memory cache will be " -"valid." +msgid "Specifies time in seconds for which records in the in-memory cache will be valid." msgstr "" #. PAM configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:174 -msgid "" -"If the authentication provider is offline, how long we should allow cached " -"logins (in days since the last successful online login)." +msgid "If the authentication provider is offline, how long we should allow cached logins (in days since the last successful online login)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:179 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:184 -msgid "" -"The time in minutes which has to pass after offline_failed_login_attempts " -"has been reached before a new login attempt is possible." +msgid "The time in minutes which has to pass after offline_failed_login_attempts has been reached before a new login attempt is possible." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:189 -msgid "" -"Controls what kind of messages are shown to the user during authentication." +msgid "Controls what kind of messages are shown to the user during authentication." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:194 -msgid "" -"For any PAM request while SSSD is online, the SSSD will attempt to " -"immediately update the cached identity information for the user in order to " -"ensure that authentication takes place with the latest information." +msgid "For any PAM request while SSSD is online, the SSSD will attempt to immediately update the cached identity information for the user in order to ensure that authentication takes place with the latest information." msgstr "" #. The kerberos domain section @@ -433,37 +360,27 @@ #. SUDO configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:212 -msgid "" -"Whether or not to evaluate the sudoNotBefore and sudoNotAfter attributes " -"that implement time-dependent sudoers entries." +msgid "Whether or not to evaluate the sudoNotBefore and sudoNotAfter attributes that implement time-dependent sudoers entries." msgstr "" #. AUTOFS configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:220 -msgid "" -"Specifies for how many seconds the autofs responder should cache negative " -"hits before asking the back end again." +msgid "Specifies for how many seconds the autofs responder should cache negative hits before asking the back end again." msgstr "" #. SSH configuration options #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:228 -msgid "" -"Whether or not to hash host names and addresses in the managed known_hosts " -"file." +msgid "Whether or not to hash host names and addresses in the managed known_hosts file." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:233 -msgid "" -"How many seconds to keep a host in the managed known_hosts file after its " -"host keys were requested." +msgid "How many seconds to keep a host in the managed known_hosts file after its host keys were requested." msgstr "" #. DOMAIN SECTIONS #. These configuration options can be present in a domain configuration section, that is, in a section called “[domain/NAME]” #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:242 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:247 -msgid "" -"UID and GID limits for the domain. If a domain contains an entry that is " -"outside these limits, it is ignored." +msgid "UID and GID limits for the domain. If a domain contains an entry that is outside these limits, it is ignored." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:252 @@ -471,51 +388,35 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:257 -msgid "" -"If the service does not terminate after “force_timeout” seconds, the monitor " -"will forcibly shut it down by sending a SIGKILL signal." +msgid "If the service does not terminate after “force_timeout” seconds, the monitor will forcibly shut it down by sending a SIGKILL signal." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:262 -msgid "" -"How many seconds nss_sss should consider entries valid before asking the " -"backend again." +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider entries valid before asking the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:267 -msgid "" -"How many seconds nss_sss should consider user entries valid before asking " -"the backend again." +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider user entries valid before asking the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:272 -msgid "" -"How many seconds nss_sss should consider group entries valid before asking " -"the backend again." +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider group entries valid before asking the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:277 -msgid "" -"How many seconds nss_sss should consider netgroup entries valid before " -"asking the backend again." +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider netgroup entries valid before asking the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:282 -msgid "" -"How many seconds nss_sss should consider service entries valid before asking " -"the backend again." +msgid "How many seconds nss_sss should consider service entries valid before asking the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:287 -msgid "" -"How many seconds sudo should consider rules valid before asking the backend " -"again." +msgid "How many seconds sudo should consider rules valid before asking the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:292 -msgid "" -"How many seconds the autofs service should consider automounter maps valid " -"before asking the backend again." +msgid "How many seconds the autofs service should consider automounter maps valid before asking the backend again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:297 @@ -523,9 +424,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:302 -msgid "" -"Number of days entries are left in cache after last successful login before " -"being removed during a cleanup of the cache." +msgid "Number of days entries are left in cache after last successful login before being removed during a cleanup of the cache." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:307 @@ -533,9 +432,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:312 -msgid "" -"Use the full name and domain (as formatted by the domain's full_name_format) " -"as the user's login name reported to NSS." +msgid "Use the full name and domain (as formatted by the domain's full_name_format) as the user's login name reported to NSS." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:318 @@ -547,8 +444,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:330 -msgid "" -"The provider which should handle change password operations for the domain." +msgid "The provider which should handle change password operations for the domain." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:336 @@ -572,27 +468,19 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:365 -msgid "" -"Regular expression for this domain that describes how to parse the string " -"containing user name and domain into these components." +msgid "Regular expression for this domain that describes how to parse the string containing user name and domain into these components." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:370 -msgid "" -"A printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a (name, " -"domain) tuple for this domain into a fully qualified name." +msgid "A printf(3)-compatible format that describes how to translate a (name, domain) tuple for this domain into a fully qualified name." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:376 -msgid "" -"Provides the ability to select preferred address family to use when " -"performing DNS lookups." +msgid "Provides the ability to select preferred address family to use when performing DNS lookups." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:381 -msgid "" -"Defines the amount of time (in seconds) to wait for a reply from the DNS " -"resolver before assuming that it is unreachable." +msgid "Defines the amount of time (in seconds) to wait for a reply from the DNS resolver before assuming that it is unreachable." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:385 @@ -600,9 +488,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:386 -msgid "" -"If service discovery is used in the back end, specifies the domain part of " -"the service discovery DNS query." +msgid "If service discovery is used in the back end, specifies the domain part of the service discovery DNS query." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:390 @@ -614,15 +500,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:400 -msgid "" -"When a user or group is looked up by name in the proxy provider, a second " -"lookup by ID is performed to 'canonicalize' the name in case the requested " -"name was an alias." +msgid "When a user or group is looked up by name in the proxy provider, a second lookup by ID is performed to 'canonicalize' the name in case the requested name was an alias." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:405 -msgid "" -"Use this homedir as default value for all subdomains within this domain." +msgid "Use this homedir as default value for all subdomains within this domain." msgstr "" #. Following options will be provided by SSSD's 'simple' access-control provider @@ -631,9 +513,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:416 -msgid "" -"Comma separated list of groups who are allowed to log in. This applies only " -"to groups within this SSSD domain." +msgid "Comma separated list of groups who are allowed to log in. This applies only to groups within this SSSD domain." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:421 @@ -641,9 +521,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:426 -msgid "" -"Comma separated list of groups that are explicitly denied access. This " -"applies only to groups within this SSSD domain." +msgid "Comma separated list of groups that are explicitly denied access. This applies only to groups within this SSSD domain." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:432 @@ -653,32 +531,23 @@ #. The local domain section #. This section contains settings for domain that stores users and groups in SSSD native database, that is, a domain that uses id_provider=local. #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:441 -msgid "" -"The tools append the login name to base_directory and use that as the home " -"directory." +msgid "The tools append the login name to base_directory and use that as the home directory." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:446 -msgid "" -"Indicate if a home directory should be created by default for new users." +msgid "Indicate if a home directory should be created by default for new users." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:451 -msgid "" -"Indicate if a home directory should be removed by default for deleted users." +msgid "Indicate if a home directory should be removed by default for deleted users." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:456 -msgid "" -"Used by sss_useradd(8) to specify the default permissions on a newly created " -"home directory." +msgid "Used by sss_useradd(8) to specify the default permissions on a newly created home directory." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:461 -msgid "" -"The skeleton directory, which contains files and directories to be copied in " -"the user's home directory, when the home directory is created by " -"sss_useradd(8)" +msgid "The skeleton directory, which contains files and directories to be copied in the user's home directory, when the home directory is created by sss_useradd(8)" msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:466 @@ -691,15 +560,11 @@ #. The ldap domain section #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:479 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:484 -msgid "" -"Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD " -"should connect in the order of preference." +msgid "Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD should connect in the order of preference." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:490 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:496 -msgid "" -"Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD " -"should connect in the order of preference to change the password of a user." +msgid "Specifies the comma-separated list of URIs of the LDAP servers to which SSSD should connect in the order of preference to change the password of a user." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:501 @@ -743,8 +608,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:551 -msgid "" -" The LDAP attribute that contains the name of the user's home directory." +msgid " The LDAP attribute that contains the name of the user's home directory." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:556 @@ -760,106 +624,67 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:571 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:776 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the " -"parent object." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the parent object." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:576 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " -"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (date of the last " -"password change)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (date of the last password change)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:581 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " -"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (minimum password " -"age)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (minimum password age)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:586 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " -"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (maximum password " -"age)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (maximum password age)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:591 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " -"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password warning " -"period)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password warning period)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:596 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an " -"LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password " -"inactivity period)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (password inactivity period)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:601 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow or ldap_account_expire_policy=shadow, this " -"parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its " -"shadow(5) counterpart (account expiration date)." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=shadow or ldap_account_expire_policy=shadow, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute corresponding to its shadow(5) counterpart (account expiration date)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:606 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of " -"an LDAP attribute storing the date and time of last password change in " -"kerberos." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the date and time of last password change in kerberos." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:611 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of " -"an LDAP attribute storing the date and time when current password expires." +msgid "When using ldap_pwd_policy=mit_kerberos, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the date and time when current password expires." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:616 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name " -"of an LDAP attribute storing the expiration time of the account." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the expiration time of the account." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:621 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name " -"of an LDAP attribute storing the user account control bit field." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=ad, this parameter contains the name of an LDAP attribute storing the user account control bit field." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:626 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=rhds or equivalent, this parameter " -"determines if access is allowed or not." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=rhds or equivalent, this parameter determines if access is allowed or not." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:631 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines if " -"access is allowed or not." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines if access is allowed or not." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:636 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines until " -"which date access is granted." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines until which date access is granted." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:641 -msgid "" -"When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines the " -"hours of a day in a week when access is granted." +msgid "When using ldap_account_expire_policy=nds, this attribute determines the hours of a day in a week when access is granted." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:646 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains the user's Kerberos User Principal Name " -"(UPN)." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the user's Kerberos User Principal Name (UPN)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:650 @@ -867,10 +692,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:655 -msgid "" -"Some directory servers, for example Active Directory, might deliver the " -"realm part of the UPN in lower case, which might cause the authentication to " -"fail." +msgid "Some directory servers, for example Active Directory, might deliver the realm part of the UPN in lower case, which might cause the authentication to fail." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:656 @@ -878,16 +700,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:661 -msgid "" -"Specifies how many seconds SSSD has to wait before refreshing its cache of " -"enumerated records." +msgid "Specifies how many seconds SSSD has to wait before refreshing its cache of enumerated records." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:666 -msgid "" -"Determine how often to check the cache for inactive entries (such as groups " -"with no members and users who have never logged in) and remove them to save " -"space." +msgid "Determine how often to check the cache for inactive entries (such as groups with no members and users who have never logged in) and remove them to save space." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:671 @@ -899,17 +716,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:681 -msgid "" -"If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=authorized_service, SSSD will " -"use the presence of the authorizedService attribute in the user's LDAP entry " -"to determine access privilege." +msgid "If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=authorized_service, SSSD will use the presence of the authorizedService attribute in the user's LDAP entry to determine access privilege." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:686 -msgid "" -"If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=host, SSSD will use the " -"presence of the host attribute in the user's LDAP entry to determine access " -"privilege." +msgid "If access_provider=ldap and ldap_access_order=host, SSSD will use the presence of the host attribute in the user's LDAP entry to determine access privilege." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:696 @@ -937,30 +748,19 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:726 -msgid "" -" The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the " -"parent object." +msgid " The LDAP attribute that contains timestamp of the last modification of the parent object." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:732 -msgid "" -"If ldap_schema is set to a schema format that supports nested groups (e.g. " -"RFC2307bis), then this option controls how many levels of nesting SSSD will " -"follow." +msgid "If ldap_schema is set to a schema format that supports nested groups (e.g. RFC2307bis), then this option controls how many levels of nesting SSSD will follow." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:738 -msgid "" -"This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific " -"feature which may speed up group lookup operations on deployments with " -"complex or deep nested groups." +msgid "This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific feature which may speed up group lookup operations on deployments with complex or deep nested groups." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:744 -msgid "" -"This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific " -"feature which might speed up initgroups operations (most notably when " -"dealing with complex or deep nested groups)." +msgid "This option tells SSSD to take advantage of an Active Directory-specific feature which might speed up initgroups operations (most notably when dealing with complex or deep nested groups)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:750 @@ -976,13 +776,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:766 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains the (host, user, domain) netgroup triples." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the (host, user, domain) netgroup triples." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:771 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains the UUID/GUID of an LDAP netgroup object." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the UUID/GUID of an LDAP netgroup object." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:781 @@ -990,9 +788,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:786 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains the name of service attributes and their " -"aliases." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the name of service attributes and their aliases." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:791 @@ -1000,52 +796,35 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:796 -msgid "" -"The LDAP attribute that contains the protocols understood by this service." +msgid "The LDAP attribute that contains the protocols understood by this service." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:802 -msgid "" -"An optional base DN, search scope and LDAP filter to restrict LDAP searches " -"for this attribute type." +msgid "An optional base DN, search scope and LDAP filter to restrict LDAP searches for this attribute type." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:807 -msgid "" -" Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches are allowed to run " -"before they are cancelled and cached results are returned (and offline mode " -"is entered)." +msgid " Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches are allowed to run before they are cancelled and cached results are returned (and offline mode is entered)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:812 -msgid "" -"Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches for user and group " -"enumerations are allowed to run before they are cancelled and cached results " -"are returned (and offline mode is entered)." +msgid "Specifies the timeout (in seconds) that ldap searches for user and group enumerations are allowed to run before they are cancelled and cached results are returned (and offline mode is entered)." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:817 -msgid "" -"Specifies the timeout (in seconds) after which the poll(2)/select(2) " -"following a connect(2) returns in case of no activity." +msgid "Specifies the timeout (in seconds) after which the poll(2)/select(2) following a connect(2) returns in case of no activity." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:822 -msgid "" -"Specifies a timeout (in seconds) after which calls to synchronous LDAP APIs " -"will abort if no response is received." +msgid "Specifies a timeout (in seconds) after which calls to synchronous LDAP APIs will abort if no response is received." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:827 -msgid "" -"Specifies a timeout (in seconds) that a connection to an LDAP server will be " -"maintained." +msgid "Specifies a timeout (in seconds) that a connection to an LDAP server will be maintained." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:832 -msgid "" -"Specify the number of records to retrieve from LDAP in a single request. " -"Some LDAP servers enforce a maximum limit per-request." +msgid "Specify the number of records to retrieve from LDAP in a single request. Some LDAP servers enforce a maximum limit per-request." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:837 @@ -1053,33 +832,23 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:842 -msgid "" -"When communicating with an LDAP server using SASL, specify the minimum " -"security level necessary to establish the connection." +msgid "When communicating with an LDAP server using SASL, specify the minimum security level necessary to establish the connection." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:847 -msgid "" -"Specify the number of group members that must be missing from the internal " -"cache in order to trigger a dereference lookup." +msgid "Specify the number of group members that must be missing from the internal cache in order to trigger a dereference lookup." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:853 -msgid "" -"Specifies what checks to perform on server certificates in a TLS session, if " -"any." +msgid "Specifies what checks to perform on server certificates in a TLS session, if any." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:858 -msgid "" -"Specifies the file that contains certificates for all of the Certificate " -"Authorities that sssd will recognize." +msgid "Specifies the file that contains certificates for all of the Certificate Authorities that sssd will recognize." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:863 -msgid "" -"Specifies the path of a directory that contains Certificate Authority " -"certificates in separate individual files." +msgid "Specifies the path of a directory that contains Certificate Authority certificates in separate individual files." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:867 @@ -1095,16 +864,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:881 -msgid "" -"Specifies that the id_provider connection must also use tls to protect the " -"channel." +msgid "Specifies that the id_provider connection must also use tls to protect the channel." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:886 -msgid "" -"Specifies that SSSD should attempt to map user and group IDs from the " -"ldap_user_objectsid and ldap_group_objectsid attributes instead of relying " -"on ldap_user_uid_number and ldap_group_gid_number." +msgid "Specifies that SSSD should attempt to map user and group IDs from the ldap_user_objectsid and ldap_group_objectsid attributes instead of relying on ldap_user_uid_number and ldap_group_gid_number." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:890 @@ -1120,9 +884,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:905 -msgid "" -"If set to true, the LDAP library would perform a reverse lookup to " -"canonicalize the host name during a SASL bind." +msgid "If set to true, the LDAP library would perform a reverse lookup to canonicalize the host name during a SASL bind." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:910 @@ -1138,8 +900,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:925 -msgid "" -"Select the policy to evaluate the password expiration on the client side." +msgid "Select the policy to evaluate the password expiration on the client side." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:930 @@ -1151,28 +912,19 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:939 -msgid "" -"Specifies the service name to use to find an LDAP server which allows " -"password changes when service discovery is enabled." +msgid "Specifies the service name to use to find an LDAP server which allows password changes when service discovery is enabled." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:944 -msgid "" -"Specifies whether to update the ldap_user_shadow_last_change attribute with " -"days since the Epoch after a password change operation." +msgid "Specifies whether to update the ldap_user_shadow_last_change attribute with days since the Epoch after a password change operation." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:949 -msgid "" -"If using access_provider = ldap and ldap_access_order = filter (default), " -"this option is mandatory. It specifies an LDAP search filter criterion that " -"must be met for the user to be granted access on this host." +msgid "If using access_provider = ldap and ldap_access_order = filter (default), this option is mandatory. It specifies an LDAP search filter criterion that must be met for the user to be granted access on this host." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:954 -msgid "" -" With this option a client side evaluation of access control attributes can " -"be enabled." +msgid " With this option a client side evaluation of access control attributes can be enabled." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:960 @@ -1184,15 +936,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:970 -msgid "" -"Allows to retain local users as members of an LDAP group for servers that " -"use the RFC2307 schema." +msgid "Allows to retain local users as members of an LDAP group for servers that use the RFC2307 schema." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:993 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:997 -msgid "" -"Specifies the comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the " -"Kerberos servers to which SSSD should connect, in the order of preference." +msgid "Specifies the comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the Kerberos servers to which SSSD should connect, in the order of preference." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1002 @@ -1200,9 +948,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1007 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1012 -msgid "" -"If the change password service is not running on the KDC, alternative " -"servers can be defined here." +msgid "If the change password service is not running on the KDC, alternative servers can be defined here." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1017 @@ -1214,39 +960,27 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1027 -msgid "" -" Timeout in seconds after an online authentication request or change " -"password request is aborted." +msgid " Timeout in seconds after an online authentication request or change password request is aborted." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1032 -msgid "" -"Verify with the help of krb5_keytab that the TGT obtained has not been " -"spoofed." +msgid "Verify with the help of krb5_keytab that the TGT obtained has not been spoofed." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1037 -msgid "" -"The location of the keytab to use when validating credentials obtained from " -"KDCs." +msgid "The location of the keytab to use when validating credentials obtained from KDCs." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1042 -msgid "" -"Store the password of the user if the provider is offline and use it to " -"request a TGT when the provider comes online again." +msgid "Store the password of the user if the provider is offline and use it to request a TGT when the provider comes online again." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1046 -msgid "" -"Request a renewable ticket with a total lifetime, given as an integer " -"immediately followed by a time unit." +msgid "Request a renewable ticket with a total lifetime, given as an integer immediately followed by a time unit." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1050 -msgid "" -"Request ticket with a with a lifetime, given as an integer immediately " -"followed by a time unit." +msgid "Request ticket with a with a lifetime, given as an integer immediately followed by a time unit." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1054 @@ -1254,9 +988,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1059 -msgid "" -"Enables flexible authentication secure tunneling (FAST) for Kerberos pre-" -"authentication." +msgid "Enables flexible authentication secure tunneling (FAST) for Kerberos pre-authentication." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1063 @@ -1273,16 +1005,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1085 src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1089 -msgid "" -"The comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the AD servers to " -"which SSSD should connect in order of preference." +msgid "The comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the AD servers to which SSSD should connect in order of preference." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1093 -msgid "" -"Optional. May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the " -"fully qualified name used in the Active Directory domain to identify this " -"host." +msgid "Optional. May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the fully qualified name used in the Active Directory domain to identify this host." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1097 @@ -1290,15 +1017,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1110 -msgid "" -" Specifies the lower bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping " -"Active Directory user and group SIDs." +msgid " Specifies the lower bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping Active Directory user and group SIDs." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1115 -msgid "" -"Specifies the upper bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping " -"Active Directory user and group SIDs." +msgid "Specifies the upper bound of the range of POSIX IDs to use for mapping Active Directory user and group SIDs." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1120 @@ -1314,9 +1037,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1133 -msgid "" -"Changes the behavior of the ID-mapping algorithm to behave more similarly to " -"winbind's “idmap_autorid” algorithm." +msgid "Changes the behavior of the ID-mapping algorithm to behave more similarly to winbind's “idmap_autorid” algorithm." msgstr "" #. The Active Directory domain section @@ -1325,21 +1046,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1149 -msgid "" -"The comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the IPA servers to " -"which SSSD should connect in the order of preference." +msgid "The comma-separated list of IP addresses or hostnames of the IPA servers to which SSSD should connect in the order of preference." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1153 -msgid "" -"May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the fully " -"qualified name." +msgid "May be set on machines where the hostname(5) does not reflect the fully qualified name." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1158 -msgid "" -"This option tells SSSD to automatically update the DNS server built into " -"FreeIPA v2 with the IP address of this client." +msgid "This option tells SSSD to automatically update the DNS server built into FreeIPA v2 with the IP address of this client." msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1163 @@ -1347,8 +1062,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/sssd-parameters.rb:1167 -msgid "" -"Choose the interface whose IP address should be used for dynamic DNS updates." +msgid "Choose the interface whose IP address should be used for dynamic DNS updates." msgstr "" #. end Export Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/auth-server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/auth-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/auth-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -99,9 +99,7 @@ #. error popup #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:58 #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:228 -msgid "" -"The LDAP database has already been created. You can change the settings " -"later in the installed system." +msgid "The LDAP database has already been created. You can change the settings later in the installed system." msgstr "" #. y2error( "sysconfig var is '%1'", SCR::Read( .sysconfig.openldap.OPENLDAP_REGISTER_SLP ) ); @@ -114,9 +112,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:106 -msgid "" -"Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set an LDAP server password to " -"continue." +msgid "Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set an LDAP server password to continue." msgstr "" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:112 @@ -205,9 +201,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:309 -msgid "" -"OpenLDAP Replication Setup failed. Reconfigure after the installation has " -"finished." +msgid "OpenLDAP Replication Setup failed. Reconfigure after the installation has finished." msgstr "" #: src/clients/auth-server_proposal.rb:344 @@ -228,10 +222,8 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/complex.rb:107 msgid "" -"You have an existing configuration, but the LDAP server is currently not " -"running.\n" -"Do you want to start the server now and re-read its configuration data or do " -"you \n" +"You have an existing configuration, but the LDAP server is currently not running.\n" +"Do you want to start the server now and re-read its configuration data or do you \n" "want to create a new configuration from scratch?" msgstr "" @@ -312,9 +304,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:199 -msgid "" -"Do you want to start it now to re-read its configuration data or do you want " -"to create a new configuration from scratch?" +msgid "Do you want to start it now to re-read its configuration data or do you want to create a new configuration from scratch?" msgstr "" #. get helps page @@ -522,9 +512,7 @@ #. Doing these checks during installation will #. most probably fail #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1277 -msgid "" -"Failed to open connection to the \"cn=config\" database on the provider " -"server.\n" +msgid "Failed to open connection to the \"cn=config\" database on the provider server.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1280 @@ -562,15 +550,12 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1383 -msgid "" -"Setting up cascaded replication of the cn=config is currently not supported." +msgid "Setting up cascaded replication of the cn=config is currently not supported." msgstr "" #. 2. Verify that the binddn/credential combination acutally works #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1410 -msgid "" -"Checking the authentication credentials defined in the replication " -"configuration on the provider server failed.\n" +msgid "Checking the authentication credentials defined in the replication configuration on the provider server failed.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1413 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1971 @@ -597,8 +582,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/dialogs.rb:1525 msgid "" "\n" -"(Remote access to the Configuration database will be restricted to " -"encrypted\n" +"(Remote access to the Configuration database will be restricted to encrypted\n" "LDAP Connections.)\n" msgstr "" @@ -629,10 +613,8 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:21 msgid "" "<p>Select <b>Yes</b> if the LDAP server should be started automatically as \n" -"part of the boot process. Select <b>No</b> if the LDAP server should not be " -"started. Note:\n" -"After selecting <b>No</b>, you cannot change the OpenLDAP configuration.\n" +"part of the boot process. Select <b>No</b> if the LDAP server should not be started. Note:\n" +"After selecting <b>No</b>, you cannot change the OpenLDAP configuration.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:26 @@ -645,18 +627,14 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:30 msgid "" -"<p><b>LDAP</b> is the standard LDAP interface on Port 389. TLS/SSL secured " -"communication\n" -"is possible with the StartTLS operation when you have a server certificate " -"configured.</p>" +"<p><b>LDAP</b> is the standard LDAP interface on Port 389. TLS/SSL secured communication\n" +"is possible with the StartTLS operation when you have a server certificate configured.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:33 msgid "" -"<p><b>LDAPS</b> enables the \"LDAP over SSL (ldaps)\" interface for SSL " -"protected\n" -"connections on port 636. This only works if you have a server certificate " -"configured (see \"Global Settings\"/\"TLS Settings\").\n" +"<p><b>LDAPS</b> enables the \"LDAP over SSL (ldaps)\" interface for SSL protected\n" +"connections on port 636. This only works if you have a server certificate configured (see \"Global Settings\"/\"TLS Settings\").\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:36 @@ -683,17 +661,13 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:49 msgid "" -"<p>Choose the <b>Database</b> from <b>hdb</b> <b>bdb</b> and <b>mdb</b>. " -"<b>Hdb</b> is a\n" -"variant of the <b>bdb</b> backend that uses a hierarchical database layout " -"and\n" +"<p>Choose the <b>Database</b> from <b>hdb</b> <b>bdb</b> and <b>mdb</b>. <b>Hdb</b> is a\n" +"variant of the <b>bdb</b> backend that uses a hierarchical database layout and\n" "supports subtree renames. Otherwise it is identical to <b>bdb</b>. A\n" "<b>hdb</b>-Database needs a larger <b>idlcachesize</b> than a\n" "<b>bdb</b>-Database for a good search performance.\n" -"<b>mdb</b>-Database uses OpenLDAP's Lightning Memory-Mapped DB (LMDB) " -"library to store data.\n" -"It similar to the <b>hdb</b> backend but it is both more space-efficient and " -"more execution-efficient.</p>\n" +"<b>mdb</b>-Database uses OpenLDAP's Lightning Memory-Mapped DB (LMDB) library to store data.\n" +"It similar to the <b>hdb</b> backend but it is both more space-efficient and more execution-efficient.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:58 @@ -704,24 +678,18 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:61 msgid "" -"<p>The <b>Administrator DN</b> along with a <b>LDAP Administrator Password \n" -"specifies a superuser identity for the database, surpassing all ACLs and " -"other \n" -"administrative limit restrictions. Checking <b>Append Base DN</b> appends " -"the \n" -"<b>Base DN</b> entered above, for example, a base DN of <tt>dc=example," -"dc=com</tt>\n" -"and Administrator DN of <tt>c=Admin</tt> would combine to an effective " -"Administrator DN\n" +"<p>The <b>Administrator DN</b> along with a <b>LDAP Administrator Password</b> \n" +"specifies a superuser identity for the database, surpassing all ACLs and other \n" +"administrative limit restrictions. Checking <b>Append Base DN</b> appends the \n" +"<b>Base DN</b> entered above, for example, a base DN of <tt>dc=example,dc=com</tt>\n" +"and Administrator DN of <tt>c=Admin</tt> would combine to an effective Administrator DN\n" "of <tt>c=Admin,dc=example,dc=com</tt>.</p> " msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:69 msgid "" "<p>If this wizard was started during installation, the \n" -"<b>LDAP Administrator Password</b> is initially set to the system's root " -"password\n" +"<b>LDAP Administrator Password</b> is initially set to the system's root password\n" "entered earlier in the installation process.</p> " msgstr "" @@ -755,8 +723,7 @@ "click <b>Change Password</b>. \n" "A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the \n" "<b>Password Encryption</b>. \n" -"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already " -"been \n" +"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been \n" "set in the configuration.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -770,35 +737,25 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:101 msgid "" -"<p>Enter the complete DN or only the first part and append the base DN " -"automatically\n" +"<p>Enter the complete DN or only the first part and append the base DN automatically\n" "with <b>Append Base DN</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:104 msgid "" -"<p>To change the password for the administrator account, click <b>Change " -"Password</b>.\n" -"A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the <b>Password " -"Encryption</b>.\n" -"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been " -"set in the configuration.</p>\n" +"<p>To change the password for the administrator account, click <b>Change Password</b>.\n" +"A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the <b>Password Encryption</b>.\n" +"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been set in the configuration.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:109 msgid "" -"<p>With the <b>Entry Cache</b> and <b>Index Cache (IDL cache)</b> you can " -"adjust\n" -"the sizes of OpenLDAP's internal caches. The <b>Entry Cache</b> defines the " -"number of entries\n" -"that are kept in OpenLDAP's in-memory entry cache. If it is possible (enough " -"RAM) this number\n" -"should be large enough to keep the whole database in memory. The <b>Index " -"Cache (IDL cache)</b> \n" -"is used to speed up searches on indexed attributes. In general especially " -"HDB-Databases require a\n" -"large IDL cache for good search performance (three times the size of the " -"entry cache as a rule of\n" +"<p>With the <b>Entry Cache</b> and <b>Index Cache (IDL cache)</b> you can adjust\n" +"the sizes of OpenLDAP's internal caches. The <b>Entry Cache</b> defines the number of entries\n" +"that are kept in OpenLDAP's in-memory entry cache. If it is possible (enough RAM) this number\n" +"should be large enough to keep the whole database in memory. The <b>Index Cache (IDL cache)</b> \n" +"is used to speed up searches on indexed attributes. In general especially HDB-Databases require a\n" +"large IDL cache for good search performance (three times the size of the entry cache as a rule of\n" "thumbs).</p>" msgstr "" @@ -814,14 +771,10 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:122 msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Hash Clear Text Passwords</b> to specify that the OpenLDAP " -"server\n" -"should encrypt clear text passwords present in add and modify requests " -"before storing them\n" -"in the database. Note that this violates the X.500/LDAP information model, " -"but may be\n" -"needed to compensate for LDAP clients that do not use the password modify " -"extended operation \n" +"<p>Check <b>Hash Clear Text Passwords</b> to specify that the OpenLDAP server\n" +"should encrypt clear text passwords present in add and modify requests before storing them\n" +"in the database. Note that this violates the X.500/LDAP information model, but may be\n" +"needed to compensate for LDAP clients that do not use the password modify extended operation \n" "to manage passwords.</p> " msgstr "" @@ -835,15 +788,12 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:136 -msgid "" -"<p>Enter the name of the default policy object in <b>Default Policy Object " -"DN</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Enter the name of the default policy object in <b>Default Policy Object DN</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:139 msgid "" -"<p>Create or change the default policy by clicking <b>Edit Policy</b>. You " -"may\n" +"<p>Create or change the default policy by clicking <b>Edit Policy</b>. You may\n" "be asked to enter the LDAP administrator password afterwards to allow the\n" "Policy Object being read from the server.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -857,33 +807,28 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:146 -msgid "" -"<p>The table displays a list of attributes which currently have an index " -"defined.</p>" +msgid "<p>The table displays a list of attributes which currently have an index defined.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:149 msgid "" "<p>Indexes are used by OpenLDAP to improve search performance on specific\n" "types of searches. Indexes should be configured corresponding to the most\n" -"common searches on a database. YaST allows you to setup three different " -"types\n" +"common searches on a database. YaST allows you to setup three different types\n" "of indexes.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:155 msgid "" "<p><b>Presence</b>: This index is used for searches with presence filters\n" -"(i.e. <tt>(attributeType=*)</tt>). Presence indexes should only be " -"configured\n" +"(i.e. <tt>(attributeType=*)</tt>). Presence indexes should only be configured\n" "for attributes that occur rarely in the database.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:160 msgid "" "<p><b>Equality</b>: This index is used for searches with equality filters \n" -"(i.e.(<tt>(attributeType=<exact values>)</tt>). An <b>Equality</b> " -"index\n" +"(i.e.(<tt>(attributeType=<exact values>)</tt>). An <b>Equality</b> index\n" "should always be configured with the <tt>objectclass</tt> attribute.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -902,11 +847,9 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:173 msgid "" -"<p>Note: Depending on the database size it can take a while until newly " -"added\n" +"<p>Note: Depending on the database size it can take a while until newly added\n" "indexes will get active on a database. After the configuration has been\n" -"written to the server, a background task will start to generate the " -"indexing\n" +"written to the server, a background task will start to generate the indexing\n" "information for the database.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -922,8 +865,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:185 msgid "" -"<p>For each rule, you can see which target objects it matches. To see a " -"more\n" +"<p>For each rule, you can see which target objects it matches. To see a more\n" "detailed view of a rule or to change one, select the rule in the table and\n" "click <b>Edit</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -936,11 +878,9 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:193 msgid "" -"<p>OpenLDAP's access control evaluation stops at the first rule whose " -"target\n" +"<p>OpenLDAP's access control evaluation stops at the first rule whose target\n" "definition (DN, filter and attributes) matches the entry being\n" -"accessed. Therefore you should order the rules according to your needs, " -"using\n" +"accessed. Therefore you should order the rules according to your needs, using\n" "the <b>Up</b> and <b>Down</b> buttons.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -950,8 +890,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:202 msgid "" -"<p>Select the \"<b>Enable ldapsync provider for this database</b>\" " -"checkbox, if you want to \n" +"<p>Select the \"<b>Enable ldapsync provider for this database</b>\" checkbox, if you want to \n" "be able to replicate the currently selected database to another server.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -961,16 +900,11 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:206 msgid "" -"<p>Here you can specify how often the synchronization state indicator " -"(stored\n" -"in the \"<i>contextCSN</i>\"-Attribute) is written to the database. It is " -"synced\n" -"to the database after the number of write \"<i>Operations</i>\" you specify " -"or\n" -"after more than the specified \"<i>Minutes</i>\" have passed since the " -"indicator\n" -"has last been written. By default (both values are '0') the state indicator " -"is\n" +"<p>Here you can specify how often the synchronization state indicator (stored\n" +"in the \"<i>contextCSN</i>\"-Attribute) is written to the database. It is synced\n" +"to the database after the number of write \"<i>Operations</i>\" you specify or\n" +"after more than the specified \"<i>Minutes</i>\" have passed since the indicator\n" +"has last been written. By default (both values are '0') the state indicator is\n" "only written after a clean shutdown. Writing it more often can result in\n" "a faster startup time after an unclean shutdown but might result in a small\n" "performance hit in environments with many LDAP write operations.</p>\n" @@ -982,14 +916,10 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:217 msgid "" -"<p>Configures an in-memory session log for recording information about write " -"operations\n" -"made on the database. Specify how many write operation should be recorded in " -"the session log. \n" -"Configuring a session log is only useful for \"<i>refreshOnly</i>\" " -"replication. In \n" -"such a case it can speed up replication and reduce the load on the master " -"server.</p>" +"<p>Configures an in-memory session log for recording information about write operations\n" +"made on the database. Specify how many write operation should be recorded in the session log. \n" +"Configuring a session log is only useful for \"<i>refreshOnly</i>\" replication. In \n" +"such a case it can speed up replication and reduce the load on the master server.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:223 @@ -998,8 +928,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:226 msgid "" -"<p>Select \"<b>This database is a Replication Consumer</b>\" if you want " -"the\n" +"<p>Select \"<b>This database is a Replication Consumer</b>\" if you want the\n" "database to be a replica of a database on another server.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1013,8 +942,7 @@ "server here. Select the protocol to use (<b>ldap</b> or <b>ldaps</b>) and\n" "enter the fully qualified hostname of the master server. It is important to\n" "use the fully qualified hostname to verify the master server's TLS/SSL\n" -"certificate. Adjust the port number if the master server is using non-" -"standard\n" +"certificate. Adjust the port number if the master server is using non-standard\n" "ldap ports.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1047,10 +975,8 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:252 msgid "" -"<p>Specify a DN and password which the slave server should use to " -"authenticate against the master.\n" -"The specified DN needs to have read access to all entries in the replicated " -"database on the master.</p>\n" +"<p>Specify a DN and password which the slave server should use to authenticate against the master.\n" +"The specified DN needs to have read access to all entries in the replicated database on the master.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:255 @@ -1061,10 +987,8 @@ msgid "" "<p>As the slave database is readonly, the slave server will answer write\n" "operations with an LDAP referral. \n" -"By default, this referral points the client to the master server. You can " -"configure a different update referral here.\n" -"This is e.g. useful in a cascaded replication setup where the provider for " -"the\n" +"By default, this referral points the client to the master server. You can configure a different update referral here.\n" +"This is e.g. useful in a cascaded replication setup where the provider for the\n" "slave server is as slave server too. </p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1105,15 +1029,11 @@ #. Configuration Wizard Step 1 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:289 -msgid "" -"<p>With <b>Start LDAP Server Yes or No</b>, start or stop the LDAP server. " +msgid "<p>With <b>Start LDAP Server Yes or No</b>, start or stop the LDAP server.</p> " msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:292 -msgid "" -"<p>If you select <b>Yes</b>, click <b>Next</b> to start the configuration " -"wizard.</p>" +msgid "<p>If you select <b>Yes</b>, click <b>Next</b> to start the configuration wizard.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:295 @@ -1124,15 +1044,12 @@ #. Configuration Wizard Step 2 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:299 -msgid "" -"<p>Select the type of LDAP server you want to setup. The following scenarios " -"are available:</p>" +msgid "<p>Select the type of LDAP server you want to setup. The following scenarios are available:</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:302 msgid "" -"<p><b>Stand-alone server</b>: Setup a single stand-alone OpenLDAP server " -"with\n" +"<p><b>Stand-alone server</b>: Setup a single stand-alone OpenLDAP server with\n" "no preparations for replication.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1144,8 +1061,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:308 msgid "" -"<p><b>Replica slave server</b>: Setup an OpenLDAP slave server that " -"replicates all its data,\n" +"<p><b>Replica slave server</b>: Setup an OpenLDAP slave server that replicates all its data,\n" "including configuration, from a master server.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -1167,18 +1083,15 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:321 msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Enable LDAP over SSL (ldaps) interface</b>, to enable the " -"server\n" +"<p>Check <b>Enable LDAP over SSL (ldaps) interface</b>, to enable the server\n" "to accept LDAPS connections on port 636. If not checked, OpenLDAP will only\n" -"support TLS encrypted connections through the StartTLS extended operation.\n" +"support TLS encrypted connections through the StartTLS extended operation.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:326 msgid "" "<p>If you already have a common server certificate installed using the\n" -"corresponding YaST Module, check <b>Use common Server Certificate</b> so " -"that\n" +"corresponding YaST Module, check <b>Use common Server Certificate</b> so that\n" "the OpenLDAP server uses this certificate.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1189,10 +1102,8 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:332 msgid "" "<p>If you have no common server certificate or you want OpenLDAP to use a\n" -"different certificate, enter the file names of the <b>CA Certificate File,\n" -"<b>Certificate File</b> and <b>Certificate Key File</b> into the " -"corresponding\n" +"different certificate, enter the file names of the <b>CA Certificate File</b>,\n" +"<b>Certificate File</b> and <b>Certificate Key File</b> into the corresponding\n" "textfields.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1210,26 +1121,21 @@ #. Tree Item Dialog "schema" 1/ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:346 msgid "" -"<p>Add schema files in this dialog. Press <b>Add</b> to open a file dialog " -"in which to choose\n" -"a new schema. Note: OpenLDAP (when used with back-config) does currently not " -"support the removal of \n" +"<p>Add schema files in this dialog. Press <b>Add</b> to open a file dialog in which to choose\n" +"a new schema. Note: OpenLDAP (when used with back-config) does currently not support the removal of \n" "Schema Data</p>" msgstr "" #. Tree Item Dialog "loglevel" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:352 msgid "" -"<p>Select the subsystems that should log debugging statements and " -"statistics\n" +"<p>Select the subsystems that should log debugging statements and statistics\n" "to syslog.</p>" msgstr "" #. Tree Item Dialog "allow" 1/1 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:356 -msgid "" -"<p>Select which special features the OpenLDAP Server should allow or " -"disallow:</p>" +msgid "<p>Select which special features the OpenLDAP Server should allow or disallow:</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:359 @@ -1238,17 +1144,14 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:360 msgid "" -"<p><b>LDAPv2 Bind Requests</b>: To let the server accept LDAPv2 bind " -"requests.\n" +"<p><b>LDAPv2 Bind Requests</b>: To let the server accept LDAPv2 bind requests.\n" "Note that OpenLDAP does not truly implement LDAPv2.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:363 msgid "" -"<p><b>Anonymous Bind when credentials not empty</b>: To allow anonymous bind " -"when \n" -"credentials are not empty (i.e. password is present but bind DN is not " -"present) </p>" +"<p><b>Anonymous Bind when credentials not empty</b>: To allow anonymous bind when \n" +"credentials are not empty (i.e. password is present but bind DN is not present) </p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:366 @@ -1259,8 +1162,7 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:369 msgid "" -"<p><b>Unauthenticated Update Operations to process</b>: To allow " -"unauthenticated\n" +"<p><b>Unauthenticated Update Operations to process</b>: To allow unauthenticated\n" "(anonymous) update operations to be processed. They are still subject to\n" "access controls and other administrative limits.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1278,16 +1180,14 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:380 msgid "" -"<p><b>Disable Simple Bind authentication</b>: Completely disable Simple " -"Bind\n" +"<p><b>Disable Simple Bind authentication</b>: Completely disable Simple Bind\n" "authentication</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:383 msgid "" "<p><b>Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation\n" -"receipt</b>: The server will no longer force an authenticated connection " -"back\n" +"receipt</b>: The server will no longer force an authenticated connection back\n" "to the anonymous state when receiving the StartTLS operation.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1302,12 +1202,9 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:394 msgid "" "<p>This lists shows all configured databases. The databases with the type\n" -"\"frontend\" and \"config\" represent special internal databases. The " -"\"Frontend\"\n" -"database is use to configure global access control restrictions and " -"overlays\n" -"that apply to all databases. The \"Config\" database holds the configuration " -"of\n" +"\"frontend\" and \"config\" represent special internal databases. The \"Frontend\"\n" +"database is use to configure global access control restrictions and overlays\n" +"that apply to all databases. The \"Config\" database holds the configuration of\n" "the LDAP server itself.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1318,84 +1215,63 @@ #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:403 msgid "" -"<p>To delete a database, select a database from the list and press <b>Delete " -"Database...</b>.\n" +"<p>To delete a database, select a database from the list and press <b>Delete Database...</b>.\n" "You cannot delete the \"config\" and \"frontend\" databases.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:406 msgid "" -"<p>Enter a password for the configuration database (\"<i>cn=config</i>\") " -"here. This is required to make\n" +"<p>Enter a password for the configuration database (\"<i>cn=config</i>\") here. This is required to make\n" "the configuration database accessible remotely.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:409 msgid "" -"<p>If the server is supposed to participate in a MirrorMode setup, select " -"the \"<b>Prepare for MirrorMode replication</b>\"\n" -"checkbox. This will ensure that the serverId attribute is generated as " -"needed for MirrorMode replication.</p>\n" +"<p>If the server is supposed to participate in a MirrorMode setup, select the \"<b>Prepare for MirrorMode replication</b>\"\n" +"checkbox. This will ensure that the serverId attribute is generated as needed for MirrorMode replication.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:412 msgid "" -"<p>To setup a slave server some details need to be queried from the master " -"server. Please enter the master\n" -"server's hostname, adjust the protocol (either \"<i>ldap</i>\" or " -"\"<i>ldaps</i>\") and port number as needed and enter the password\n" +"<p>To setup a slave server some details need to be queried from the master server. Please enter the master\n" +"server's hostname, adjust the protocol (either \"<i>ldap</i>\" or \"<i>ldaps</i>\") and port number as needed and enter the password\n" "for the master's configuration database (\"<i>cn=config</i>\").</p>" msgstr "" #. ########## kerberos #. Help text: basic settings 1/2 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:419 -msgid "" -"<p>Specify the <big>Realm</big> and the <big>Master Password</big> for your " -"Kerberos server.</p>" +msgid "<p>Specify the <big>Realm</big> and the <big>Master Password</big> for your Kerberos server.</p>" msgstr "" #. Help text: basic settings 2/2 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:423 -msgid "" -"<p>Although your Kerberos realm can be any ASCII string, the convention is " -"to use upper-case letters as in your domain name.</p>\n" +msgid "<p>Although your Kerberos realm can be any ASCII string, the convention is to use upper-case letters as in your domain name.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. advanced item help: database_name #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:427 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the location of the Kerberos database for this " -"realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This string specifies the location of the Kerberos database for this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help: acl_file #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:431 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the location of the access control list (ACL) file " -"that kadmin uses to determine the principals' permissions on the database." +msgid "<p>This string specifies the location of the access control list (ACL) file that kadmin uses to determine the principals' permissions on the database.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help: admin_keytab #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:435 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the location of the keytab file that kadmin uses to " -"authenticate to the database.</p>" +msgid "<p>This string specifies the location of the keytab file that kadmin uses to authenticate to the database.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help: default_principal_expiration #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:439 -msgid "" -"<p>This absolute time specifies the default expiration date of principals " -"created in this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This absolute time specifies the default expiration date of principals created in this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help principal_flags 1/13 #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:443 -msgid "" -"<p>These flags specify the default attributes of the principal created in " -"this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>These flags specify the default attributes of the principal created in this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:446 @@ -1440,9 +1316,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 6/13 :Enable user-to-user authentication #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:466 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain a session key for another " -"user, permitting user-to-user authentication for this principal." +msgid "Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain a session key for another user, permitting user-to-user authentication for this principal." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:469 @@ -1451,12 +1325,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 7/13 :Requires preauth #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:471 -msgid "" -"If this flag is enabled on a client principal, that principal is required to " -"preauthenticate to the KDC before receiving any tickets. If you enable this " -"flag on a service principal, the service tickets for this principal will " -"only be issued to clients with a TGT that has the preauthenticated ticket " -"set." +msgid "If this flag is enabled on a client principal, that principal is required to preauthenticate to the KDC before receiving any tickets. If you enable this flag on a service principal, the service tickets for this principal will only be issued to clients with a TGT that has the preauthenticated ticket set." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:474 @@ -1465,9 +1334,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 8/13 :Requires hwauth #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:476 -msgid "" -"If this flag is enabled, the principal is required to preauthenticate using " -"a hardware device before receiving any tickets." +msgid "If this flag is enabled, the principal is required to preauthenticate using a hardware device before receiving any tickets." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:479 @@ -1476,9 +1343,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 9/13 :Allow service #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:481 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag allows the KDC to issue service tickets for this " -"principal." +msgid "Enabling this flag allows the KDC to issue service tickets for this principal." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:484 @@ -1487,10 +1352,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 10/13 :Allow tgs request #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:486 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag allows a principal to obtain tickets based on a ticket-" -"granting-ticket, rather than repeating the authentication process that was " -"used to obtain the TGT." +msgid "Enabling this flag allows a principal to obtain tickets based on a ticket-granting-ticket, rather than repeating the authentication process that was used to obtain the TGT." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:489 @@ -1499,10 +1361,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 11/13 :Allow tickets #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:491 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag means that the KDC will issue tickets for this " -"principal. Disabling this flag essentially deactivates the principal within " -"this realm." +msgid "Enabling this flag means that the KDC will issue tickets for this principal. Disabling this flag essentially deactivates the principal within this realm." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:494 @@ -1520,49 +1379,33 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 13/13 :Password changing service #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:499 -msgid "" -"If this flag is enabled, it marks this principal as a password change " -"service. This should only be used in special cases, for example, if a " -"user's password has expired, the user has to get tickets for that " -"principal to be able to change it without going through the normal password " -"authentication." +msgid "If this flag is enabled, it marks this principal as a password change service. This should only be used in special cases, for example, if a user's password has expired, the user has to get tickets for that principal to be able to change it without going through the normal password authentication." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : dict_file #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:503 -msgid "" -"<p>The string location of the dictionary file containing strings that are " -"not allowed as passwords. If this tag is not set or if there is no policy " -"assigned to the principal, no check will be done.</p>" +msgid "<p>The string location of the dictionary file containing strings that are not allowed as passwords. If this tag is not set or if there is no policy assigned to the principal, no check will be done.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kadmind_port #. advanced item help : kpasswd_port #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:507 src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:511 -msgid "" -"<p>This port number specifies the port on which the kadmind daemon listens " -"for this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This port number specifies the port on which the kadmind daemon listens for this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : key_stash_file #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:515 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the location where the master key has been stored " -"with kdb5_stash.</p>" +msgid "<p>This string specifies the location where the master key has been stored with kdb5_stash.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdc_ports #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:519 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the list of ports that the KDC listens to for this " -"realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This string specifies the list of ports that the KDC listens to for this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : master_key_name #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:523 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the name of the principal associated with the " -"master key. The default value is K/M.</p>" +msgid "<p>This string specifies the name of the principal associated with the master key. The default value is K/M.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : master_key_type @@ -1572,69 +1415,47 @@ #. advanced item help : max_life #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:531 -msgid "" -"<p>This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be " -"valid for in this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be valid for in this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : max_renew_life #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:535 -msgid "" -"<p>This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be " -"renewed for in this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be renewed for in this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : supported_enctypes #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:539 -msgid "" -"<p>A list of key/salt strings that specifies the default key/salt " -"combinations of principals for this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>A list of key/salt strings that specifies the default key/salt combinations of principals for this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdc_supported_enctypes #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:543 -msgid "" -"<p>Specifies the permitted key/salt combinations of principals for this " -"realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>Specifies the permitted key/salt combinations of principals for this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : reject_bad_transit #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:547 -msgid "" -"<p>Specifies whether or not the list of transited realms for cross-realm " -"tickets should be checked against the transit path computed from the realm " -"names and the [capaths] section of its krb5.conf file</p>" +msgid "<p>Specifies whether or not the list of transited realms for cross-realm tickets should be checked against the transit path computed from the realm names and the [capaths] section of its krb5.conf file</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : ldap_conns_per_server #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:551 -msgid "" -"<p>This LDAP specific tag indicates the number of connections to be " -"maintained via the LDAP server.</p>" +msgid "<p>This LDAP specific tag indicates the number of connections to be maintained via the LDAP server.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : ldap_service_password_file #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:555 -msgid "" -"<p>This LDAP-specific tag indicates the file containing the stashed " -"passwords for the objects used for starting the Kerberos servers.</p>" +msgid "<p>This LDAP-specific tag indicates the file containing the stashed passwords for the objects used for starting the Kerberos servers.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdb_subtrees #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:559 -msgid "" -"<p>Specifies the list of subtrees containing the principals of a realm. The " -"list contains the DNs of the subtree objects separated by colon(:).<p>The search scope specifies the scope for searching the principals under " -"the subtree.</p>" +msgid "<p>Specifies the list of subtrees containing the principals of a realm. The list contains the DNs of the subtree objects separated by colon(:).</p><p>The search scope specifies the scope for searching the principals under the subtree.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdb_containerref #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:563 -msgid "" -"<p>Specifies the DN of the container object in which the principals of a " -"realm will be created. If the container reference is not configured for a " -"realm, the principals will be created in the realm container.</p>" +msgid "<p>Specifies the DN of the container object in which the principals of a realm will be created. If the container reference is not configured for a realm, the principals will be created in the realm container.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdb_maxtktlife @@ -1644,9 +1465,7 @@ #. advanced item help : kdb_maxrenewlife #: src/include/auth-server/helps.rb:571 -msgid "" -"<p>Specifies maximum renewable life of tickets for principals in this realm." -"</p>" +msgid "<p>Specifies maximum renewable life of tickets for principals in this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. ################################################################################# @@ -1971,9 +1790,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:50 -msgid "" -"This server is not setup as a MirrorMode Node. Click \"Next\" to launch the " -"standard OpenLDAP configuration wizard." +msgid "This server is not setup as a MirrorMode Node. Click \"Next\" to launch the standard OpenLDAP configuration wizard." msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:85 @@ -1981,8 +1798,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:127 -msgid "" -"Deleting the host on which you started this YaST Module is not possible.\n" +msgid "Deleting the host on which you started this YaST Module is not possible.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:130 @@ -2294,9 +2110,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:197 -msgid "" -"Disable acceptance of anonymous Bind Requests (does not prohibit anonymous " -"directory access)" +msgid "Disable acceptance of anonymous Bind Requests (does not prohibit anonymous directory access)" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:201 @@ -2304,8 +2118,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:204 -msgid "" -"Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation receipt" +msgid "Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation receipt" msgstr "" #: src/include/auth-server/widgets.rb:210 @@ -2820,8 +2633,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1995 -msgid "" -"Please verify that the target server is enabled to be a LDAPsync provider" +msgid "Please verify that the target server is enabled to be a LDAPsync provider" msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:2094 @@ -3046,9 +2858,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1830 -msgid "" -"Waiting for OpenLDAP background indexing tasks to complete (this might take " -"some minutes)" +msgid "Waiting for OpenLDAP background indexing tasks to complete (this might take some minutes)" msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1831 @@ -3068,9 +2878,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1953 -msgid "" -"An error occurred while waiting for the OpenLDAP database indexer to " -"finish.\n" +msgid "An error occurred while waiting for the OpenLDAP database indexer to finish.\n" msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:1954 @@ -3172,9 +2980,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:2860 -msgid "" -"A master server for replication cannot work correctly without knowing its " -"own fully qualified hostname." +msgid "A master server for replication cannot work correctly without knowing its own fully qualified hostname." msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3376 src/modules/AuthServer.pm:3389 @@ -3205,9 +3011,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4033 -msgid "" -"The value of the \"c\" attribute must contain a valid ISO-3166 country 2-" -"letter code." +msgid "The value of the \"c\" attribute must contain a valid ISO-3166 country 2-letter code." msgstr "" #. parameter check failed @@ -3249,8 +3053,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4887 -msgid "" -"Error while trying to verify the server certificate of the provider server.\n" +msgid "Error while trying to verify the server certificate of the provider server.\n" msgstr "" #: src/modules/AuthServer.pm:4888 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/autoinst.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/autoinst.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/autoinst.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -117,8 +117,7 @@ #. if we get no argument or map of options we are not in command line #: src/clients/clone_system.rb:46 -msgid "" -"Client for creating an AutoYaST profile based on the currently running system" +msgid "Client for creating an AutoYaST profile based on the currently running system" msgstr "" #: src/clients/clone_system.rb:56 @@ -147,18 +146,15 @@ #: src/clients/files_auto.rb:170 msgid "" "<p>Using this dialog, copy the contents of the file and specify the final\n" -"path on the installed system. YaST will copy this file to the specified " -"location.</p>" +"path on the installed system. YaST will copy this file to the specified location.</p>" msgstr "" #. help 2/2 #: src/clients/files_auto.rb:177 msgid "" "<p>To protect copied files, set the owner and the permissions of the files.\n" -"Set the owner using the syntax <i>userid:groupid</i>. Permissions can be a " -"symbolic\n" -"representation of changes to make or an octal number representing the bit " -"pattern for the\n" +"Set the owner using the syntax <i>userid:groupid</i>. Permissions can be a symbolic\n" +"representation of changes to make or an octal number representing the bit pattern for the\n" "new permissions.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -231,10 +227,8 @@ #: src/clients/files_auto.rb:321 msgid "" "<p>For many applications and services, you might have prepared\n" -"a configuration file that should be copied in a complete form to a location " -"in the\n" -"installed system. For example, this is the case if you are installing a web " -"server\n" +"a configuration file that should be copied in a complete form to a location in the\n" +"installed system. For example, this is the case if you are installing a web server\n" "and have an httpd.conf configuration file prepared.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -606,8 +600,7 @@ #: src/clients/report_auto.rb:217 msgid "" -"<p>Depending on your experience, you can skip, log, and show (with time-" -"out)\n" +"<p>Depending on your experience, you can skip, log, and show (with time-out)\n" "installation messages.</p> \n" msgstr "" @@ -630,8 +623,7 @@ #: src/clients/software_auto.rb:88 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Select one of the following <b>base</b> selections and click <i>Detailed<i> " -"to add\n" +"Select one of the following <b>base</b> selections and click <i>Detailed<i> to add\n" "more <b>add-on</b> selections and packages.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -644,8 +636,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/software_auto.rb:128 -msgid "" -"The inst-source of this system (you can't create images if you choose this)" +msgid "The inst-source of this system (you can't create images if you choose this)" msgstr "" #: src/clients/software_auto.rb:164 @@ -661,12 +652,9 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Mount in /etc/fstab By:</b>\n" "\tNormally, a file system to mount is identified in /etc/fstab\n" -"\tby the device name. This identification can be changed so the file system " -"to mount\n" -"\tis found by searching for a UUID or a volume label. Not all file systems " -"can be\n" -"\tmounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is disabled, it is not " -"possible.\n" +"\tby the device name. This identification can be changed so the file system to mount\n" +"\tis found by searching for a UUID or a volume label. Not all file systems can be\n" +"\tmounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is disabled, it is not possible.\n" "\t" msgstr "" @@ -674,8 +662,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/AdvancedPartitionDialog.rb:71 msgid "" "<p><b>Volume Label:</b>\n" -"\t The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually " -"makes sense only \n" +"\t The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually makes sense only \n" "\t when you activate the option for mounting by volume label.\n" "\t A volume label cannot contain the / character or spaces.\n" "\t " @@ -844,8 +831,7 @@ #. user selected this partition to be part of volgroup #: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:589 -msgid "" -"Size \"auto\" is only valid if mount point \"/boot\" or \"swap\" is selected." +msgid "Size \"auto\" is only valid if mount point \"/boot\" or \"swap\" is selected." msgstr "" #: src/include/autoinstall/PartitionDialog.rb:597 @@ -1284,9 +1270,7 @@ #. @param list menu items #. @return [Symbol] #: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:565 -msgid "" -"Do you really want to apply the settings of the module '%1' to your current " -"system?" +msgid "Do you really want to apply the settings of the module '%1' to your current system?" msgstr "" #. opening/parsing the xml file failed @@ -1301,9 +1285,7 @@ #. FIXME: sucks sucks sucks sucks sucks #: src/include/autoinstall/conftree.rb:740 -msgid "" -"Do you really want to apply the settings of the profile to your current " -"system?" +msgid "Do you really want to apply the settings of the profile to your current system?" msgstr "" #. EXIT @@ -1431,8 +1413,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/dialogs.rb:348 msgid "" "Kickstart file was imported.\n" -"Check the imported syntax and make sure the package selection and " -"partitioning\n" +"Check the imported syntax and make sure the package selection and partitioning\n" "were imported correctly." msgstr "" @@ -1559,16 +1540,14 @@ "The installation confirmation option is selected by default\n" "to avoid unwanted installation. It stops the system\n" "during installation and shows a summary of requested operations in the\n" -"usual proposal screen. Uncheck this option to install automatically without " -"interruption.\n" +"usual proposal screen. Uncheck this option to install automatically without interruption.\n" "</P>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/autoinstall/general_dialogs.rb:155 msgid "" "<P>\n" -"If you turn off the second stage of AutoYaST, the installation continues in " -"manual mode\n" +"If you turn off the second stage of AutoYaST, the installation continues in manual mode\n" "after the first reboot (after package installation).\n" "</P>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1709,8 +1688,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:17 msgid "" -"<p>This tool uses <em>xmllint</em> to validate the profile against the DTD " -"and\n" +"<p>This tool uses <em>xmllint</em> to validate the profile against the DTD and\n" "it checks for missing data. Some missing data might be intentional and any\n" "reported errors can be ignored, for example, when creating classes.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1736,8 +1714,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>This tool creates a reference profile by reading\n" "information from this system. Select the resources to read from this system\n" -"in addition to the default resources, like partitioning and package " -"selections.</p>\n" +"in addition to the default resources, like partitioning and package selections.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:36 @@ -1746,8 +1723,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:37 msgid "" -"<p>The table to the right shows the partitions to create on the target " -"system.\n" +"<p>The table to the right shows the partitions to create on the target system.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1780,8 +1756,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:53 msgid "" "If no partitions are defined and the specified drive is also\n" -"the drive where the root partition should reside, the following partitions " -"are\n" +"the drive where the root partition should reside, the following partitions are\n" "created automatically:" msgstr "" @@ -1796,12 +1771,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:62 -msgid "" -"By default, AutoYaST will create an extended partition and adds all new " -"partitions as logical devices. It is possible, however, to instruct AutoYaST " -"to create a certain partition as a primary partition or as extended " -"partition. Additionally, it is possible to specify the size of a partition " -"using sectors rather than size in MBytes." +msgid "By default, AutoYaST will create an extended partition and adds all new partitions as logical devices. It is possible, however, to instruct AutoYaST to create a certain partition as a primary partition or as extended partition. Additionally, it is possible to specify the size of a partition using sectors rather than size in MBytes." msgstr "" #: src/include/autoinstall/helps.rb:65 @@ -1814,8 +1784,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "For LVM and RAID setup, consult the documentation and add the configuration\n" -"to an existing control file. You can only create unformatted LVM and RAID " -"partitions as\n" +"to an existing control file. You can only create unformatted LVM and RAID partitions as\n" "a preparation.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1912,8 +1881,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<h3>Postinstallation Scripts</h3>\n" -"<P>You can also add commands to execute on the system after the " -"installation\n" +"<P>You can also add commands to execute on the system after the installation\n" "is completed. These scripts are run outside the chroot environment.\n" "</P>" msgstr "" @@ -1926,8 +1894,7 @@ "<P>For your postinstallation script to run inside the chroot\n" "environment, choose the <i>chroot scripts</i> options. Those scripts are\n" "run before the system reboots for the first time. By default, the chroot \n" -"scripts are run in the installation system. To access files in the " -"installed \n" +"scripts are run in the installation system. To access files in the installed \n" "system, always use the mount point \"/mnt\" in your scripts.\n" "</P>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1937,8 +1904,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<p>It is possible to run chroot scripts in a later stage after\n" -"the boot loader has been configured using the special boolean tag \"chrooted" -"\".\n" +"the boot loader has been configured using the special boolean tag \"chrooted\".\n" "This runs the scripts in the installed system. \n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1961,8 +1927,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<H3>Interpreter:</H3>\n" -"<P>Preinstallation scripts can only be shell scripts. Do not use <i>Perl</i> " -"or \n" +"<P>Preinstallation scripts can only be shell scripts. Do not use <i>Perl</i> or \n" "<i>Python</i> for preinstallation scripts.\n" "</P>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1973,12 +1938,9 @@ "<H3>Network Access:</H3>\n" "<P>While executing postinstallation scripts, the network is disabled and\n" "requires initialization in the scripts to make the network accessible. An\n" -"alternative for postinstallation scripts with network is using init scripts, " -"which\n" -"guarantee a fully configured system when running the scripts. If you did an " -"installation\n" -"over a network, you can use the <b>Network</b> option for the postscript, " -"too.\n" +"alternative for postinstallation scripts with network is using init scripts, which\n" +"guarantee a fully configured system when running the scripts. If you did an installation\n" +"over a network, you can use the <b>Network</b> option for the postscript, too.\n" "</P>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1986,10 +1948,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<H3>Feedback and Debug:</H3>\n" -"<P>All scripts except the init scripts can show STDOUT+STDERR in a pop-up " -"box as feedback.\n" -"If you turn on debugging, you get more output in the feedback dialog that " -"might help\n" +"<P>All scripts except the init scripts can show STDOUT+STDERR in a pop-up box as feedback.\n" +"If you turn on debugging, you get more output in the feedback dialog that might help\n" "you to debug your script.</P>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2076,8 +2036,7 @@ #: src/include/autoinstall/script_dialogs.rb:474 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"By adding scripts to the autoinstallation process, customize the " -"installation for\n" +"By adding scripts to the autoinstallation process, customize the installation for\n" "your needs and take control in different stages of the installation.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2106,9 +2065,7 @@ #. @return [Boolean] true on success #. autoyast has read the autoyast configuration file but something went wrong #: src/modules/AutoInstallRules.rb:914 src/modules/Profile.rb:725 -msgid "" -"The XML parser reported an error while parsing the autoyast profile. The " -"error message is:\n" +msgid "The XML parser reported an error while parsing the autoyast profile. The error message is:\n" msgstr "" #. backdoor for merging problems. @@ -2180,10 +2137,8 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstConfig.rb:452 msgid "" -"<p>Most of the modules used to create the configuration are identical to " -"those available\n" -"through the YaST Control Center. Instead of configuring this system, the " -"data\n" +"<p>Most of the modules used to create the configuration are identical to those available\n" +"through the YaST Control Center. Instead of configuring this system, the data\n" "entered is collected and exported to the control file that can be used to\n" "install another system using AutoYaST.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -2192,8 +2147,7 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstConfig.rb:459 msgid "" "<p>In addition to the existing and familiar modules,\n" -"new interfaces were created for special and complex configurations, " -"including\n" +"new interfaces were created for special and complex configurations, including\n" "partitioning, general options, and software.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2381,9 +2335,7 @@ #. Install #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:363 -msgid "" -"Image creation failed while pattern installation. Please check /tmp/ay_image." -"log" +msgid "Image creation failed while pattern installation. Please check /tmp/ay_image.log" msgstr "" #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:371 @@ -2391,9 +2343,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:381 -msgid "" -"Image creation failed while package installation. Please check /tmp/ay_image." -"log" +msgid "Image creation failed while package installation. Please check /tmp/ay_image.log" msgstr "" #. Popup::Message( _("in the next file dialog you have to choose the target directory to save the image") ); @@ -2406,8 +2356,7 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:421 msgid "" "You can do changes to the image now in %1/\n" -"If you press the ok-button, the image will be compressed and can't be " -"changed anymore." +"If you press the ok-button, the image will be compressed and can't be changed anymore." msgstr "" #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:435 @@ -2451,8 +2400,7 @@ #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:616 msgid "" -"You can do changes to the ISO now in %1, like adding a complete different " -"AutoYaST XML file.\n" +"You can do changes to the ISO now in %1, like adding a complete different AutoYaST XML file.\n" "If you press the ok-button, the iso will be created." msgstr "" @@ -2495,16 +2443,12 @@ #. Solve dependencies #: src/modules/AutoinstSoftware.rb:907 -msgid "" -"The package resolver run failed. Please check your software section in the " -"autoyast profile." +msgid "The package resolver run failed. Please check your software section in the autoyast profile." msgstr "" #. 1 cyl buffer per partition #: src/modules/AutoinstStorage.rb:494 -msgid "" -"The partition plan configured in your XML profile does not fit on the hard " -"disk. %1MB missing" +msgid "The partition plan configured in your XML profile does not fit on the hard disk. %1MB missing" msgstr "" #: src/modules/AutoinstStorage.rb:922 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/base.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/base.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/base.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -228,16 +228,12 @@ #. error message - command line option xmlfile is missing #: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:944 -msgid "" -"Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is missing. Use " -"xmlfile= command line option." +msgid "Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is missing. Use xmlfile= command line option." msgstr "" #. error message - command line option xmlfile is missing #: library/commandline/src/modules/CommandLine.rb:956 -msgid "" -"Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is empty. Use xmlfile= " -"command line option." +msgid "Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is empty. Use xmlfile= command line option." msgstr "" #. translators: fallback name for a module at command line @@ -378,8 +374,7 @@ "See %3 for more information about YaST logs." msgstr "" "Indas raporti ĉi tio eraro ĉe %1.\n" -"Bonvole, kunmetu ankaŭ ĉiujn konservitajn YaST-protokolojn je la dosierujo " -"'%2'.\n" +"Bonvole, kunmetu ankaŭ ĉiujn konservitajn YaST-protokolojn je la dosierujo '%2'.\n" "Vizitu %3 por pliaj informoj pri YaST-protokoloj." #. link to the Yast Bug Reporting HOWTO @@ -765,8 +760,7 @@ "containing the key and click <b>Add</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p><big><b>Aldoni Ekzistantan TSIG-Ŝlosilon</b></big><br>\n" -"Por aldoni jam kreitan TSIG-ŝlosilon, elektu iun <b>Dosiernomon</b> el la " -"dosiero\n" +"Por aldoni jam kreitan TSIG-ŝlosilon, elektu iun <b>Dosiernomon</b> el la dosiero\n" "kiu enhavas la ŝlosilon kaj alklaku <b>Aldoni</b>.</p>\n" #. tsig keys management dialog help 3/4 @@ -961,11 +955,7 @@ #. NCurses Control Center help 2/10 #: library/desktop/src/clients/menu.rb:334 -msgid "" -"<p>Tree navigation is also done by arrow keys. To open or close a branch use " -"[SPACE]. For modules showing a tree (might look like a list) of " -"configuration items on the left side use [ENTER] to get corresponding dialog " -"on the right.</p>" +msgid "<p>Tree navigation is also done by arrow keys. To open or close a branch use [SPACE]. For modules showing a tree (might look like a list) of configuration items on the left side use [ENTER] to get corresponding dialog on the right.</p>" msgstr "" #. NCurses Control Center help 3/10 @@ -1004,8 +994,7 @@ #: library/desktop/src/clients/menu.rb:363 msgid "" "<p>3) <i>Function Keys</i><br>\n" -"F keys provide a quick access to main functions. The function key bindings " -"for the current dialog are shown in the bottom line.</p>" +"F keys provide a quick access to main functions. The function key bindings for the current dialog are shown in the bottom line.</p>" msgstr "" #. NCurses Control Center help 8/10 @@ -1793,8 +1782,7 @@ #: library/gpg/src/modules/GPGWidgets.rb:286 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Create a new GPG key</b></big><br>\n" -"<tt>gpg --gen-key</tt> is started, see <tt>gpg</tt> manual pager for more " -"information.\n" +"<tt>gpg --gen-key</tt> is started, see <tt>gpg</tt> manual pager for more information.\n" "Press Ctrl+C to cancel.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -1855,8 +1843,7 @@ "and select the action to process.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Por trakti altnivelajn agojn aŭ konservi la protokolon en dosiero, alklaku " -"<b>%1</b>\n" +"Por trakti altnivelajn agojn aŭ konservi la protokolon en dosiero, alklaku <b>%1</b>\n" "kaj elektu la agon por trakti.</p>" #. help for the log widget, part 2, alt. 2, %1 is a menu button label @@ -1878,8 +1865,7 @@ "to which to save the log.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Por konservi la protokolon en dosiero, alklaku <b>Konservi Protokolon</b> " -"kaj elektu la dosieron\n" +"Por konservi la protokolon en dosiero, alklaku <b>Konservi Protokolon</b> kaj elektu la dosieron\n" "kies konservos la protokolon.</p>\n" #. menu button @@ -2719,82 +2705,57 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: Proposal informative text "Firewall is enabled (disable)" with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:582 -msgid "" -"Firewall is enabled (disable</a>)" -msgstr "" -"Aktiva barilo (malaktivigi</a>)" +msgid "Firewall is enabled (disable</a>)" +msgstr "Aktiva barilo (malaktivigi</a>)" #. TRANSLATORS: Proposal informative text "Firewall is disabled (enable)" with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:587 -msgid "" -"Firewall is disabled (enable</a>)" -msgstr "" -"Malaktiva barilo (aktivigi</a>)" +msgid "Firewall is disabled (enable</a>)" +msgstr "Malaktiva barilo (aktivigi</a>)" #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:621 -msgid "" -"SSH port is open (close</a>)" -msgstr "" -"Malfermita SSH-pordo (fermi)" +msgid "SSH port is open (close</a>)" +msgstr "Malfermita SSH-pordo (fermi</a>)" #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:626 -msgid "" -"SSH port is blocked (open</a>)" -msgstr "" -"Blokita SSH-pordo (malfermi</a>)" +msgid "SSH port is blocked (open</a>)" +msgstr "Blokita SSH-pordo (malfermi</a>)" #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:646 msgid "" -"SSH port is open (close</a>), " -"but\n" +"SSH port is open (close</a>), but\n" "there are no network interfaces configured" msgstr "" -"Malfermita SSH-pordo (fermi), sed\n" +"Malfermita SSH-pordo (fermi</a>), sed\n" "ne estas agorditaj retinterfacoj" #. TRANSLATORS: This is a warning message. Installation over SSH without SSH allowed on firewall #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:661 -msgid "" -"You are installing a system over SSH, but you have not opened the SSH port " -"on the firewall." -msgstr "" -"Vi instaligas sistemon per SSH, sed vi ne malfermigis la SSH-pordon en la " -"fajromuro." +msgid "You are installing a system over SSH, but you have not opened the SSH port on the firewall." +msgstr "Vi instaligas sistemon per SSH, sed vi ne malfermigis la SSH-pordon en la fajromuro." #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text "Remote Administration (VNC) is enabled" with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:703 -msgid "" -"Remote Administration (VNC) ports are open (close</a>)" +msgid "Remote Administration (VNC) ports are open (close</a>)" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text "Remote Administration (VNC) is disabled" with link around #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:708 -msgid "" -"Remote Administration (VNC) ports are blocked (open</a>)" +msgid "Remote Administration (VNC) ports are blocked (open</a>)" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: This is a warning message. Installation over VNC without VNC allowed on firewall #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:718 -msgid "" -"You are installing a system using remote administration (VNC), but you have " -"not opened the VNC ports on the firewall." +msgid "You are installing a system using remote administration (VNC), but you have not opened the VNC ports on the firewall." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Network proposal informative text @@ -2810,15 +2771,9 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: This is a warning message. Installation to iSCSI without iSCSI allowed on firewall #: library/network/src/modules/SuSEFirewallProposal.rb:746 #, fuzzy -#| msgid "" -#| "You are installing a system over SSH, but you have not opened the SSH " -#| "port on the firewall." -msgid "" -"You are installing a system using iSCSI Target, but you have not opened the " -"needed ports on the firewall." -msgstr "" -"Vi instaligas sistemon per SSH, sed vi ne malfermigis la SSH-pordon en la " -"fajromuro." +#| msgid "You are installing a system over SSH, but you have not opened the SSH port on the firewall." +msgid "You are installing a system using iSCSI Target, but you have not opened the needed ports on the firewall." +msgstr "Vi instaligas sistemon per SSH, sed vi ne malfermigis la SSH-pordon en la fajromuro." #. Returns service definition. #. See @services for the format. @@ -2991,18 +2946,15 @@ #: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:669 msgid "" "Ignoring a package failure may result in a broken system.\n" -"The system should be later verified by running the Software Management " -"module." +"The system should be later verified by running the Software Management module." msgstr "" #. error report #: library/packages/src/modules/PackageCallbacks.rb:792 msgid "" "<p>The repository at the specified URL now provides a different media ID.\n" -"If the URL is correct, this indicates that the repository content has " -"changed. To \n" -"continue using this repository, start <b>Installation Repositories</b> " -"from \n" +"If the URL is correct, this indicates that the repository content has changed. To \n" +"continue using this repository, start <b>Installation Repositories</b> from \n" "the YaST control center and refresh the repository.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -3475,8 +3427,7 @@ "<p><b><big>License Confirmation</big></b><br>\n" "The package in the headline of the dialog requires an explicit confirmation\n" "of acceptance of its license.\n" -"If you reject the license of the package, the package will not be " -"installed.\n" +"If you reject the license of the package, the package will not be installed.\n" "<br>\n" "To accept the license of the package, click <b>I Agree</b>.\n" "To reject the license of the package, click <b>I Disagree</b></p>." @@ -3486,10 +3437,8 @@ #: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:331 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"\t\t This dialog allows you to define this system's tasks and what software " -"to install.\n" -"\t\t Available tasks and software for this system are shown by category in " -"the left\n" +"\t\t This dialog allows you to define this system's tasks and what software to install.\n" +"\t\t Available tasks and software for this system are shown by category in the left\n" "\t\t column. To view a description for an item, select it in the list.\n" "\t\t </p>" msgstr "" @@ -3514,8 +3463,7 @@ #: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:351 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"\t\t The disk usage display in the lower right corner shows the remaining " -"disk space\n" +"\t\t The disk usage display in the lower right corner shows the remaining disk space\n" "\t\t after all requested changes will have been performed.\n" "\t\t Hard disk partitions that are full or nearly full can degrade\n" "\t\t system performance and in some cases even cause serious problems.\n" @@ -3622,9 +3570,7 @@ msgstr "" #: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:669 -msgid "" -"<P><BIG><B>Installation Report</B></BIG><BR>Here is a summary of installed " -"or removed packages.</P>" +msgid "<P><BIG><B>Installation Report</B></BIG><BR>Here is a summary of installed or removed packages.</P>" msgstr "" #: library/packages/src/modules/PackagesUI.rb:677 @@ -3712,8 +3658,7 @@ msgid "" "No checksum for file %1 was found in the repository.\n" "This means that the file is part of the signed repository,\n" -"but the list of checksums in this repository does not mention this file. " -"Using the file\n" +"but the list of checksums in this repository does not mention this file. Using the file\n" "may put the integrity of your system at risk.\n" "\n" "Use it anyway?" @@ -3891,8 +3836,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>A warning dialog opens for every package that\n" "is not signed by a trusted (imported) key. If you do not trust the key,\n" -"the packages or repositories created by the owner of the key will not be " -"used.</p>" +"the packages or repositories created by the owner of the key will not be used.</p>" msgstr "" #. popup message - label, part 1, %1 stands for repository name, %2 for its URL @@ -3958,8 +3902,7 @@ "but the expected checksum is not known.\n" "\n" "This means that the origin and integrity of the file\n" -"cannot be verified. Using the file puts the integrity of your system at " -"risk.\n" +"cannot be verified. Using the file puts the integrity of your system at risk.\n" "\n" "Use it anyway?\n" msgstr "" @@ -3968,8 +3911,7 @@ "sed la atendita kontrolsumo estas nekonata.\n" "\n" "Tio ĉi signifas ke la deveno kaj integreco de la dosiero\n" -"ne povas esti kontrolitaj. Uzi la dosieron endanĝerigas la integrecon de via " -"sistemo.\n" +"ne povas esti kontrolitaj. Uzi la dosieron endanĝerigas la integrecon de via sistemo.\n" "\n" "Ĉu tamen uzi ĝin?\n" @@ -4020,11 +3962,7 @@ msgstr "<p>Pakaĵoj instaliĝas.</p>" #: library/packages/src/modules/SlideShow.rb:648 -msgid "" -"<P><B>Aborting Installation</B> Package installation can be aborted using " -"the <B>Abort</B> button. However, the system then can be in an inconsistent " -"or unusable state or it may not boot if the basic system component is not " -"installed.</P>" +msgid "<P><B>Aborting Installation</B> Package installation can be aborted using the <B>Abort</B> button. However, the system then can be in an inconsistent or unusable state or it may not boot if the basic system component is not installed.</P>" msgstr "" #. Translators: Tab name, keep short, %s is product name, e.g. SLES @@ -5585,8 +5523,7 @@ "\n" "A valid reverse IPv4 consists of four integers in the range 0-255\n" "separated by a dot then followed by the string '.in-addr.arpa.'.\n" -"For example, '1.32.168.192.in-addr.arpa.' for the IPv4 address " -"'192.168.32.1'.\n" +"For example, '1.32.168.192.in-addr.arpa.' for the IPv4 address '192.168.32.1'.\n" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Popup error message, user can't use hostname %1 because it doesn't make Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/bootloader.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/bootloader.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/bootloader.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -96,15 +96,12 @@ #. warning text in the summary richtext #: src/clients/bootloader_proposal.rb:115 -msgid "" -"No boot loader is selected for installation. Your system might not be " -"bootable." +msgid "No boot loader is selected for installation. Your system might not be bootable." msgstr "" #. error in the proposal #: src/clients/bootloader_proposal.rb:125 -msgid "" -"Because of the partitioning, the bootloader cannot be installed properly" +msgid "Because of the partitioning, the bootloader cannot be installed properly" msgstr "" #. proposal part - bootloader label @@ -138,10 +135,8 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:24 msgid "" "<p><b>Set active Flag in Partition Table for Boot Partition</b><br>\n" -"To activate the partition which contains the boot loader. The generic MBR " -"code will then\n" -"boot the active partition. Older BIOSes require one partition to be active " -"even\n" +"To activate the partition which contains the boot loader. The generic MBR code will then\n" +"boot the active partition. Older BIOSes require one partition to be active even\n" "if the boot loader is installed in the MBR.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -163,8 +158,7 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/routines/common_helps.rb:23 msgid "" "<p><b>Timeout in Seconds</b><br>\n" -"Specifies the time the bootloader will wait until the default kernel is " -"loaded.</p>\n" +"Specifies the time the bootloader will wait until the default kernel is loaded.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:33 @@ -179,46 +173,38 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:41 msgid "" -"<p><b>Write generic Boot Code to MBR</b> replace the master boot record of " -"your disk with generic code (OS independent code which\n" +"<p><b>Write generic Boot Code to MBR</b> replace the master boot record of your disk with generic code (OS independent code which\n" "boots the active partition).</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:44 msgid "" -"<p><b>Boot from Boot Partition</b> is one of the recommended options, the " -"other is\n" +"<p><b>Boot from Boot Partition</b> is one of the recommended options, the other is\n" "<b>Boot from Root Partition</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:47 msgid "" -"<p><b>Boot from Master Boot Record</b> is not recommended if you have " -"another operating system\n" +"<p><b>Boot from Master Boot Record</b> is not recommended if you have another operating system\n" "installed on your computer</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:50 msgid "" -"<p><b>Boot from Root Partition</b> is the recommended option whenever there " -"is a suitable\n" -"partition. Either select <b>Set active Flag in Partition Table for Boot " -"Partition</b> and <b>Write generic Boot Code to MBR</b>\n" -"in <b>Boot Loader Options</b> to update the master boot record if that is " -"needed or configure your other boot manager\n" +"<p><b>Boot from Root Partition</b> is the recommended option whenever there is a suitable\n" +"partition. Either select <b>Set active Flag in Partition Table for Boot Partition</b> and <b>Write generic Boot Code to MBR</b>\n" +"in <b>Boot Loader Options</b> to update the master boot record if that is needed or configure your other boot manager\n" "to start this section.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:56 msgid "" -"<p><b>Boot from Extended Partition</b> should be selected if your root " -"partition is on \n" +"<p><b>Boot from Extended Partition</b> should be selected if your root partition is on \n" "logical partition and the /boot partition is missing</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:59 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Custom Boot Partition</b> lets you choose a partition to boot from.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Custom Boot Partition</b> lets you choose a partition to boot from.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:62 @@ -230,26 +216,21 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:65 msgid "" "<p><b>Use Serial Console</b> lets you define the parameters to use\n" -"for a serial console. Please see the grub documentation (<code>info grub2) for details.</p>" +"for a serial console. Please see the grub documentation (<code>info grub2</code>) for details.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:68 msgid "" "<p><b>Terminal Definition</b></p><br>\n" -"Defines the type of terminal you want to use. For a serial terminal (eg. a " -"serial console),\n" -"you have to specify <code>serial</code>. You can also pass <code>console to the\n" -"command, as <code>serial console</code>. In this case, a terminal in which " -"you\n" +"Defines the type of terminal you want to use. For a serial terminal (eg. a serial console),\n" +"you have to specify <code>serial</code>. You can also pass <code>console</code> to the\n" +"command, as <code>serial console</code>. In this case, a terminal in which you\n" "press any key will be selected as a GRUB terminal.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:75 msgid "" -"<p><b>Fallback Sections if default Fails</b> contains a list of section " -"numbers\n" +"<p><b>Fallback Sections if default Fails</b> contains a list of section numbers\n" "that will be used for booting in case the default section is unbootable.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -260,8 +241,7 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/grub/helps.rb:81 msgid "" "<p><b>Protect Boot Loader with Password</b><br>\n" -"Define the password that will be required to access the boot menu. YaST will " -"only accept the password if you repeat\n" +"Define the password that will be required to access the boot menu. YaST will only accept the password if you repeat\n" "it in <b>Retype Password</b>.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -442,40 +422,27 @@ #. #. $Id: helps.ycp 58279 2009-08-04 16:01:51Z juhliarik $ #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:23 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Optional Kernel Command Line Parameter</b> lets you define additional " -"parameters to pass to the kernel.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Optional Kernel Command Line Parameter</b> lets you define additional parameters to pass to the kernel.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:26 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Vga Mode</b> defines the VGA mode the kernel should set the " -"<i>console</i> to when booting.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Vga Mode</b> defines the VGA mode the kernel should set the <i>console</i> to when booting.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:29 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Failsafe Kernel Command Line Parameter</b> lets you define failsafe " -"parameters to pass to the kernel.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Failsafe Kernel Command Line Parameter</b> lets you define failsafe parameters to pass to the kernel.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:32 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Probe Foreign OS</b> by means of os-prober for multiboot with other " -"foreign distribution </p>" +msgid "<p><b>Probe Foreign OS</b> by means of os-prober for multiboot with other foreign distribution </p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:35 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Protective MBR flag</b> is expert only settings, that is needed only " -"on exotic hardware. For details see Protective MBR in GPT disks. Do not " -"touch if you are not sure.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Protective MBR flag</b> is expert only settings, that is needed only on exotic hardware. For details see Protective MBR in GPT disks. Do not touch if you are not sure.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:38 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Distributor</b> specifies name of distributor of kernel used to create " -"boot entry name. </p>" +msgid "<p><b>Distributor</b> specifies name of distributor of kernel used to create boot entry name. </p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/bootloader/grub2/helps.rb:44 @@ -692,10 +659,8 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:52 msgid "" "<P>From <B>Other</B>,\n" -"you can manually edit the boot loader configuration files, clear the " -"current \n" -"configuration and propose a new configuration, start from scratch, or " -"reread\n" +"you can manually edit the boot loader configuration files, clear the current \n" +"configuration and propose a new configuration, start from scratch, or reread\n" "the configuration saved on your disk. %1</P>" msgstr "" @@ -762,8 +727,7 @@ "- In the <b>Boot Sector</b> of the <tt>/boot</tt> or <tt>/</tt> (root) \n" "partition. This is the recommended option whenever there is a suitable\n" "partition. Either set <b>Activate Boot Loader Partition</b> and\n" -"<b>Replace MBR with Generic Code</b> in <b>Boot Loader Installation Details\n" +"<b>Replace MBR with Generic Code</b> in <b>Boot Loader Installation Details</b>\n" "to update the master boot record\n" "if it is needed or configure your other boot manager\n" "to start &product;.</p>" @@ -830,8 +794,7 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:223 msgid "" "<p><b>Section Name</b><br>\n" -"Use <b>Section Name</b> to specify the boot loader section name. The " -"section\n" +"Use <b>Section Name</b> to specify the boot loader section name. The section\n" "name must be unique.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -875,8 +838,7 @@ #: src/include/bootloader/routines/helps.rb:257 msgid "" "<p>Select <b>Menu Section</b> to add a section that \n" -"loads configuration file (the list of boot sections) from a partition of the " -"disk. This is used for\n" +"loads configuration file (the list of boot sections) from a partition of the disk. This is used for\n" "booting other operating systems.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -984,52 +946,39 @@ #. error report #: src/include/bootloader/routines/wizards.rb:36 -msgid "" -"Because of the partitioning, the boot loader cannot be installed properly." +msgid "Because of the partitioning, the boot loader cannot be installed properly." msgstr "" #. FATE#303643 Enable one-click changes in bootloader proposal #. #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:193 -msgid "" -"Install bootcode into MBR (do not install</a>)" +msgid "Install bootcode into MBR (do not install</a>)" msgstr "" #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:197 -msgid "" -"Do not install bootcode into MBR (install</a>)" +msgid "Do not install bootcode into MBR (install</a>)" msgstr "" #. check for separated boot partition, use root otherwise #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:210 -msgid "" -"Install bootcode into /boot partition (do not " -"install</a>)" +msgid "Install bootcode into /boot partition (do not install</a>)" msgstr "" #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:214 -msgid "" -"Do not install bootcode into /boot partition (install</a>)" +msgid "Do not install bootcode into /boot partition (install</a>)" msgstr "" #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:220 -msgid "" -"Install bootcode into \"/\" partition (do not " -"install</a>)" +msgid "Install bootcode into \"/\" partition (do not install</a>)" msgstr "" #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:224 -msgid "" -"Do not install bootcode into \"/\" partition (install</a>)" +msgid "Do not install bootcode into \"/\" partition (install</a>)" msgstr "" #. no location chosen, so warn user that it is problem unless he is sure #: src/modules/BootGRUB2.rb:234 -msgid "" -"Warning: No location for bootloader stage1 selected.Unless you know what you " -"are doing please select above location." +msgid "Warning: No location for bootloader stage1 selected.Unless you know what you are doing please select above location." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: title for list of location proposals @@ -1076,11 +1025,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: description of technical problem. Do not translate technical terms unless native language have well known translation. #: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:140 -msgid "" -"Boot from MBR does not work together with btrfs filesystem and GPT disk " -"label without bios_grub partition.To fix this issue, create bios_grub " -"partition or use any ext filesystem for boot partition or do not install " -"stage 1 to MBR." +msgid "Boot from MBR does not work together with btrfs filesystem and GPT disk label without bios_grub partition.To fix this issue, create bios_grub partition or use any ext filesystem for boot partition or do not install stage 1 to MBR." msgstr "" #. check if boot device is on raid0 @@ -1090,9 +1035,7 @@ #. bnc#501043 added check for valid configuration #: src/modules/BootSupportCheck.rb:188 -msgid "" -"The boot device is on software RAID1. Select other bootloader location, e.g. " -"Master Boot Record" +msgid "The boot device is on software RAID1. Select other bootloader location, e.g. Master Boot Record" msgstr "" #. if partitioning worked before upgrade, it will keep working (bnc#886604) Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/ca-management.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/ca-management.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/ca-management.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -94,8 +94,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:100 -msgid "" -"P12 password (Security: This should be given by an environment variable)" +msgid "P12 password (Security: This should be given by an environment variable)" msgstr "" #: src/clients/ca_mgm.rb:112 @@ -112,11 +111,9 @@ #: src/clients/ca_mgm_auto.rb:172 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"YaST generates a default CA and certificate automatically. This CA and " -"certificate\n" +"YaST generates a default CA and certificate automatically. This CA and certificate\n" "is used for communicating with the Apache server.\n" -"Here, change the settings of this CA and certificate or import a CA and " -"certificate from a file.\n" +"Here, change the settings of this CA and certificate or import a CA and certificate from a file.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -361,9 +358,7 @@ #. #. Proposal function dispatcher for CA Management #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:107 -msgid "" -"Cannot evaluate the name of the local machine. Change the values of Server " -"Name and E-Mail." +msgid "Cannot evaluate the name of the local machine. Change the values of Server Name and E-Mail." msgstr "" #. new handling of force reset because of (#238754) @@ -385,15 +380,13 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:296 src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:338 -msgid "" -"Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set a CA password to continue." +msgid "Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set a CA password to continue." msgstr "" #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:325 msgid "" "The password is too short to use for the certificates. \n" -"Enter a valid password for the certificates or disable certificate " -"creation.\n" +"Enter a valid password for the certificates or disable certificate creation.\n" msgstr "" #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:351 @@ -448,10 +441,8 @@ #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:406 msgid "" -"The root password is too short for use as the password for the " -"certificates.\n" -" Enter a valid password for the certificates or disable certificate " -"creation.\n" +"The root password is too short for use as the password for the certificates.\n" +" Enter a valid password for the certificates or disable certificate creation.\n" msgstr "" #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:413 @@ -463,9 +454,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/ca_mgm_proposal.rb:427 -msgid "" -"<p>Is the default hostname <b>linux</b> really unique? The certificate is " -"only valid if the hostname is correct.</p>" +msgid "<p>Is the default hostname <b>linux</b> really unique? The certificate is only valid if the hostname is correct.</p>" msgstr "" #. menu title @@ -503,8 +492,7 @@ #: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:103 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"In this frame, select the desired installation method for <b>CAs</b> and " -"<b>certificates</b>\n" +"In this frame, select the desired installation method for <b>CAs</b> and <b>certificates</b>\n" "while completing the installation.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -512,8 +500,7 @@ #: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:112 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"You also have the possibility of creating the default CA and certificate in " -"the installed system \n" +"You also have the possibility of creating the default CA and certificate in the installed system \n" "if you do not want to create or import it now.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -609,8 +596,7 @@ #: src/clients/ca_select_proposal.rb:388 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"YaST generates a <b>default CA and certificate</b> automatically. This CA " -"and certificate\n" +"YaST generates a <b>default CA and certificate</b> automatically. This CA and certificate\n" "is used for communicating with the <b>Apache server</b>.\n" "Here, change these <b>default settings</b>.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -636,51 +622,37 @@ #. help text 1/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:77 -msgid "" -"<p>A Server Certificate is used by services which provide SSL/TLS encrypted " -"network connections.</p>" +msgid "<p>A Server Certificate is used by services which provide SSL/TLS encrypted network connections.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:84 -msgid "" -"<p>The purpose of the <b>Common Server Certificate</b> is, to provide a " -"certificate for several services running on this host. " +msgid "<p>The purpose of the <b>Common Server Certificate</b> is, to provide a certificate for several services running on this host. " msgstr "" #. help text 3/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:92 -msgid "" -"Some YaST modules provide the capability to use this certificate during " -"configuration of such a service.</p>" +msgid "Some YaST modules provide the capability to use this certificate during configuration of such a service.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 4/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:100 -msgid "" -"<p>With the <b>Import/Replace</b> button you can add a new server " -"certificate or replace the current one.</p>" +msgid "<p>With the <b>Import/Replace</b> button you can add a new server certificate or replace the current one.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 5/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:108 -msgid "" -"<p>You can remove the Certificates by clicking the <b>Remove</b> button. But " -"make sure, that it is not used anymore by other services.</p>" +msgid "<p>You can remove the Certificates by clicking the <b>Remove</b> button. But make sure, that it is not used anymore by other services.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 6/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:116 -msgid "" -"<p>Certificates can be written to a file using <b>Export to File</b> in " -"section <b>Certificate</b> in the <b>CA Management</b> module.</p>" +msgid "<p>Certificates can be written to a file using <b>Export to File</b> in section <b>Certificate</b> in the <b>CA Management</b> module.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 7/8 #: src/clients/common_cert.rb:124 -msgid "" -"<p>Certificates to import from disk must have been written in <b>PKCS12 " -"format with CA chain</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Certificates to import from disk must have been written in <b>PKCS12 format with CA chain</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 8/8 @@ -740,9 +712,7 @@ #. help text 2/2 #: src/include/ca-management/ca.rb:70 -msgid "" -"<p>Special information about the current CA is provided by <b>Certificates, <b>CRL</b>, and <b>Advanced</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Special information about the current CA is provided by <b>Certificates</b>, <b>CRL</b>, and <b>Advanced</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. getDescriptionCA - description of a CA @@ -860,9 +830,7 @@ #. help text 1/4 #: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:51 -msgid "" -"<p>When creating a new subCA or certificate, the system suggests some " -"default values.</p>" +msgid "<p>When creating a new subCA or certificate, the system suggests some default values.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/4 @@ -874,16 +842,12 @@ #. help text 3/3 #: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:62 #: src/include/ca-management/crlDefault.rb:153 -msgid "" -"<p>However, the modified settings will be used for <b>new</B> entries only." +msgid "<p>However, the modified settings will be used for <b>new</B> entries only.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 4/4 #: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:69 -msgid "" -"<p>You can edit the default settings for <b>subCAs</b>, <b>client " -"certificates</b>, and <b>server certificates</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>You can edit the default settings for <b>subCAs</b>, <b>client certificates</b>, and <b>server certificates</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:79 @@ -904,9 +868,7 @@ #. help text 1/2 #: src/include/ca-management/certDefault.rb:136 -msgid "" -"<p>This frame gives an overview of all default settings before they are " -"saved.</p>" +msgid "<p>This frame gives an overview of all default settings before they are saved.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/2 @@ -1020,10 +982,7 @@ #. help text 1/6 #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:46 -msgid "" -"<p>First, see a list view with all available certificates from this CA. The " -"columns are the DN of the certificates including the e-mail address and the " -"state of the certificate (such as valid or revoked).</p>" +msgid "<p>First, see a list view with all available certificates from this CA. The columns are the DN of the certificates including the e-mail address and the state of the certificate (such as valid or revoked).</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/6 @@ -1033,16 +992,12 @@ #. help text 3/6 #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:57 -msgid "" -"<p><b>View</b> opens a window with a text representation of the complete " -"certificate.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>View</b> opens a window with a text representation of the complete certificate.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 4/6 #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:64 -msgid "" -"<p>Furthermore, you can <b>Revoke</b>, <b>Delete</b>, or <b>Export</b> a " -"certificate.</p>" +msgid "<p>Furthermore, you can <b>Revoke</b>, <b>Delete</b>, or <b>Export</b> a certificate.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 5/6 @@ -1052,9 +1007,7 @@ #. help text 6/6 #: src/include/ca-management/certificate.rb:78 -msgid "" -"<p>In the area below, see the most important values of the selected " -"certificate.</p>" +msgid "<p>In the area below, see the most important values of the selected certificate.</p>" msgstr "" #. popup window header @@ -1363,8 +1316,7 @@ #. help text 1/3 #: src/include/ca-management/crlDefault.rb:142 -msgid "" -"<p>When creating a new CRL, the system suggests some default values.</p>" +msgid "<p>When creating a new CRL, the system suggests some default values.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/3 @@ -1401,11 +1353,7 @@ #. Translators: long help text - security information #: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:111 -msgid "" -"Warning!<br>Activating the automatic creation and export of a CRL will write " -"the CA password to a configuration file on disk. The password will be stored " -"there in plain text as it is needed to create a CRL. The file will only be " -"readable for the root user." +msgid "Warning!<br>Activating the automatic creation and export of a CRL will write the CA password to a configuration file on disk. The password will be stored there in plain text as it is needed to create a CRL. The file will only be readable for the root user." msgstr "" #. Editing CRL defaults of a selected CA @@ -1421,19 +1369,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:384 -msgid "" -"<p>To set up a repeated recreation of the CRL, select <b>Repeated recreation " -"and export</b>. In this case, set the interval for the recreation in " -"<b>Periodic interval</b>. If you set the interval to 24 hours, you can " -"additionally select the hour for the export. Make sure you read and " -"understand the <b>Security Information</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>To set up a repeated recreation of the CRL, select <b>Repeated recreation and export</b>. In this case, set the interval for the recreation in <b>Periodic interval</b>. If you set the interval to 24 hours, you can additionally select the hour for the export. Make sure you read and understand the <b>Security Information</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:387 -msgid "" -"<p>You can activate an export of the CRL to a local file or to an LDAP " -"server or both. Set up the respective parameters in <b>Export to local file and <b>Export to LDAP</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>You can activate an export of the CRL to a local file or to an LDAP server or both. Set up the respective parameters in <b>Export to local file</b> and <b>Export to LDAP</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/crlExport.rb:401 @@ -1608,9 +1548,7 @@ #. help text 5/7 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:117 -msgid "" -"<p><b>CA Name</b> is the name of a CA certificate. Use only the characters, " -"\"a-z\", \"A-Z\", \"-\", and \"_\".</p>" +msgid "<p><b>CA Name</b> is the name of a CA certificate. Use only the characters, \"a-z\", \"A-Z\", \"-\", and \"_\".</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:123 @@ -1618,28 +1556,21 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:129 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Common Name</b> is the name of the user for whom to create the " -"certificate.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Common Name</b> is the name of the user for whom to create the certificate.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:136 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Common Name</b> is the fully qualified domain name of the server.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Common Name</b> is the fully qualified domain name of the server.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 6/7 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:145 -msgid "" -"<p><b>E-Mail Addresses</b> are valid e-mail addresses of the user or server " -"administrator.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>E-Mail Addresses</b> are valid e-mail addresses of the user or server administrator.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 7/7 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:152 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Organization</b>, <b>Organizational Unit</b>, <b>Locality</b>, and " -"<b>State</b> are often optional.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Organization</b>, <b>Organizational Unit</b>, <b>Locality</b>, and <b>State</b> are often optional.</p>" msgstr "" #. To translators: pushbutton label @@ -1671,24 +1602,17 @@ #. help text 1/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:469 -msgid "" -"<p>The private key of the CA needs a <B>Password</B> with a minimum length " -"of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next field." +msgid "<p>The private key of the CA needs a <B>Password</B> with a minimum length of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next field.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:476 -msgid "" -"<p>Each CA has its own <b>Key Length</b>. Some applications that use " -"certificates need special key lengths.</p>" +msgid "<p>Each CA has its own <b>Key Length</b>. Some applications that use certificates need special key lengths.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 3/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:484 -msgid "" -"<p>The CA is valid for only specific period (<b>Valid Period</b>). Enter the " -"time frame in days.</p>" +msgid "<p>The CA is valid for only specific period (<b>Valid Period</b>). Enter the time frame in days.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 4/4 @@ -1697,47 +1621,32 @@ #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:492 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:521 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:543 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Advanced Options</b> are very special options. If you change these " -"options, SUSE cannot guarantee that the generated certificate will work " -"correctly.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Advanced Options</b> are very special options. If you change these options, SUSE cannot guarantee that the generated certificate will work correctly.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 1/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:498 -msgid "" -"<p>The private key of the certificate needs a <B>Password</B> with a minimum " -"length of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next " -"field.</p>" +msgid "<p>The private key of the certificate needs a <B>Password</B> with a minimum length of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next field.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:505 -msgid "" -"<p>Each certificate has its own <b>Key Length</b>. Some applications that " -"use certificates need special key lengths.</p>" +msgid "<p>Each certificate has its own <b>Key Length</b>. Some applications that use certificates need special key lengths.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 3/4 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:513 -msgid "" -"<p>The certificate is valid for only specific period (<b>Valid Period</b>). " -"Enter the time frame in days.</p>" +msgid "<p>The certificate is valid for only specific period (<b>Valid Period</b>). Enter the time frame in days.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 1/3 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:528 -msgid "" -"<p>The private key of the request needs a <B>Password</B> with a minimum " -"length of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next " -"field.</p>" +msgid "<p>The private key of the request needs a <B>Password</B> with a minimum length of five characters. For verification reasons, reenter it in the next field.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:535 -msgid "" -"<p>Each request has its own <b>Key Length</b>. Some applications that use " -"certificates need special key lengths.</p>" +msgid "<p>Each request has its own <b>Key Length</b>. Some applications that use certificates need special key lengths.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:561 @@ -1772,9 +1681,7 @@ #. help text 1/2 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:700 -msgid "" -"<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the CA that will be " -"created.</p>" +msgid "<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the CA that will be created.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/2 @@ -1784,9 +1691,7 @@ #. help text 1/2 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:710 -msgid "" -"<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the certificate that " -"will be created.</p>" +msgid "<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the certificate that will be created.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/2 @@ -1796,9 +1701,7 @@ #. help text 1/2 #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert.rb:721 -msgid "" -"<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the request that will be " -"created.</p>" +msgid "<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the request that will be created.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/2 @@ -1911,11 +1814,7 @@ #. #. Creating a new CA/Certificate #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:55 -msgid "" -"<P>This frame shows further attributes and OpenSSL X509v3 extensions that " -"can be set. If you are not familiar with these extensions, refer to the " -"file /usr/share/doc/packages/openssl-doc/openssl.txt (package openssl-doc)." +msgid "<P>This frame shows further attributes and OpenSSL X509v3 extensions that can be set. If you are not familiar with these extensions, refer to the file /usr/share/doc/packages/openssl-doc/openssl.txt (package openssl-doc).</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/new_cert_items.rb:61 @@ -1979,9 +1878,7 @@ #. help text 1/6 #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:47 -msgid "" -"<p>First, see a list view with all available requests of this CA. The " -"columns are the DN of the request including the e-mail address.</p>" +msgid "<p>First, see a list view with all available requests of this CA. The columns are the DN of the request including the e-mail address.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/6 @@ -1991,29 +1888,22 @@ #. help text 3/6 #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:58 -msgid "" -"<p><b>View</b> opens a window with a text representation of the complete " -"request.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>View</b> opens a window with a text representation of the complete request.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 4/6 #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:65 -msgid "" -"<p>You can also <b>Sign</b>, <b>Delete</b>, or <b>Export</b> a request.</p>" +msgid "<p>You can also <b>Sign</b>, <b>Delete</b>, or <b>Export</b> a request.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 5/6 #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:72 -msgid "" -"<p>With <b>Import</b>, read a new request. With <b>Add</b>, generate a new " -"request.</p>" +msgid "<p>With <b>Import</b>, read a new request. With <b>Add</b>, generate a new request.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 6/6 #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:79 -msgid "" -"<p>In the area below, see the most important values of the selected request." -"</p>" +msgid "<p>In the area below, see the most important values of the selected request.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/request.rb:326 @@ -2103,14 +1993,12 @@ #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:708 -msgid "" -"<p>The request has special request extensions, which you can accept.</p>" +msgid "<p>The request has special request extensions, which you can accept.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 3/3 #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:715 -msgid "" -"<p>If you reject these extensions, the default values are taken instead.</p>" +msgid "<p>If you reject these extensions, the default values are taken instead.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:731 @@ -2123,9 +2011,7 @@ #. help text 1/2 #: src/include/ca-management/signRequest.rb:777 -msgid "" -"<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the request that will be " -"signed.</p>" +msgid "<p>This frame gives an overview of all settings for the request that will be signed.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/2 @@ -2179,14 +2065,12 @@ #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/ca-management/startup.rb:149 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Create Root CA</b> generates a new root certificate authority.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Create Root CA</b> generates a new root certificate authority.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 3/3 #: src/include/ca-management/startup.rb:156 -msgid "" -"<p>For more information about CA Management, please read the manual.</p>" +msgid "<p>For more information about CA Management, please read the manual.</p>" msgstr "" #. To translators: pushbutton label @@ -2396,15 +2280,12 @@ #: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1216 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Importing Common Server Certificate (PKCS12 + CA Chain Format)\n" -" from Disk:</big></b> Select one file name and press <b>Next</b> to continue." -"</p>\n" +" from Disk:</big></b> Select one file name and press <b>Next</b> to continue.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1222 -msgid "" -"Import a server certificate and corresponding CA and copy them to a place " -"where other YaST modules look for such a common certificate." +msgid "Import a server certificate and corresponding CA and copy them to a place where other YaST modules look for such a common certificate." msgstr "" #. help text 3/3 @@ -2442,8 +2323,7 @@ #: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1369 msgid "" "The hostname of this server (command: hostname --long) have to match \n" -"either the common name of the certificate (CN) or on of the values in " -"subject alternative names." +"either the common name of the certificate (CN) or on of the values in subject alternative names." msgstr "" #. popup window header @@ -2512,8 +2392,7 @@ #: src/include/ca-management/util.rb:1658 msgid "" "Key Password is required. \n" -"It must be the password for the encrypted key or a new one in case of a not " -"encrypted key." +"It must be the password for the encrypted key or a new one in case of a not encrypted key." msgstr "" #. Error popup Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/cio.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/cio.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/cio.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -86,8 +86,7 @@ #: src/lib/iochannel/unban_dialog.rb:106 msgid "" "List of ranges of channels to unban separated by comma.\n" -"Range can be channel, part of channel which will be filled to zero or range " -"specified with dash.\n" +"Range can be channel, part of channel which will be filled to zero or range specified with dash.\n" "Example value: 0.0.0001, AA00, 0.1.0100-200" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/cluster.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/cluster.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/cluster.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -135,9 +135,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:270 -msgid "" -"Only passive or active can be chosen if multiple interface used. Set to " -"passive." +msgid "Only passive or active can be chosen if multiple interface used. Set to passive." msgstr "" #. BNC#871970, change member address struct to memberaddr @@ -219,15 +217,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:740 -msgid "" -"For a newly created cluster, push the button below to generate /etc/corosync/" -"authkey." +msgid "For a newly created cluster, push the button below to generate /etc/corosync/authkey." msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:745 -msgid "" -"To join an existing cluster, please copy /etc/corosync/authkey from other " -"nodes manually." +msgid "To join an existing cluster, please copy /etc/corosync/authkey from other nodes manually." msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:773 @@ -359,8 +353,7 @@ #. SaveCsync2(); #: src/include/cluster/dialogs.rb:1383 msgid "" -"Conntrackd is a daemon which helps to duplicate firewall status between " -"cluster nodes.\n" +"Conntrackd is a daemon which helps to duplicate firewall status between cluster nodes.\n" "YaST can help to configure some basic aspects of conntrackd.\n" "You need to start it with the ocf:heartbeat:conntrackd." msgstr "" @@ -388,116 +381,47 @@ #. All helps are here #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:35 msgid "" -"<p><b><big>Bind Network Address</big></b><br>This specifies the address " -"which the openais executive should bind. This address should always end in " -"zero. If the totem traffic should be routed over 192.168.5.92, set " -"bindnetaddr to 192.168.5.0.<br>This may also be an IPV6 address, in which " -"case IPV6 networking will be used. In this case, the full address must be " -"specified and there is no automatic selection of the network interface " -"within a specific subnet as with IPv4. If IPv6 networking is used, the " -"nodeid field must be specified.<br></p>\n" -"<p><b><big>Multicast Address</big></b><br>This is the multicast address used " -"by openais executive. The default should work for most networks, but " -"the network administrator should be queried about a multicast address " -"to use. Avoid 224.x.x.x because this is a \"config\" multicast address." -"<br>This may also be an IPV6 multicast address, in which case IPV6 " -"networking will be used. If IPv6 networking is used, the nodeid field must " -"be specified.</p>\n" -"<p><b><big>Port</big></b><br>This specifies the UDP port number. It is " -"possible to use the same multicast address on a network with the openais " -"services configured for different UDP ports.<br></p>\n" -"<p><b><big>Member Address</big></b><br>This list specifies all the nodes in " -"the cluster by IP address. This could be configurable when using " -"udpu(Unicast). <br></p>\n" -"<p><b><big>Node ID</big></b><br>This configuration option is optional " -"when using IPv4 and required when using IPv6. This is a 32 bit value " -"specifying the node identifier delivered to the cluster membership service. " -"If this is not specified with IPv4, the node id will be determined from " -"the 32 bit IP address the system to which the system is bound with ring " -"identifier of 0. The node identifier value of zero is reserved and should " -"not be used.<br></p>\n" -"<p><b><big>rrp_mode</big></b><br>This specifies the mode of redundant ring, " -"which may be none, active, or passive. Active replication offers " -"slightly lower latency from transmit to delivery in faulty network " -"environments but with less performance. Passive replication may nearly " -"double the speed of the totem protocol if the protocol doesn't become " -"cpu bound. The final option is none, in which case only one network " -"interface will be used to operate the totem protocol. If only one " -"interface directive is specified, none is automatically chosen. If multiple " -"interface directives are specified, only active or passive may be chosen." -"<br></p>\n" -"<p><b><big>Expected votes</big></b><br>Expect vote number for voting " -"quorum. Will be automatically calculated when the nodelist {} section is " -"present in corosync.conf or can be specified in the quorum {} section.<br>\n" -"<p><b><big>Auto Generate Node ID</big></b><br>Nodeid is required when using " -"IPv6. Auto node ID enabled will generate nodeid automatically.<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Bind Network Address</big></b><br>This specifies the address which the openais executive should bind. This address should always end in zero. If the totem traffic should be routed over 192.168.5.92, set bindnetaddr to 192.168.5.0.<br>This may also be an IPV6 address, in which case IPV6 networking will be used. In this case, the full address must be specified and there is no automatic selection of the network interface within a specific subnet as with IPv4. If IPv6 networking is used, the nodeid field must be specified.<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Multicast Address</big></b><br>This is the multicast address used by openais executive. The default should work for most networks, but the network administrator should be queried about a multicast address to use. Avoid 224.x.x.x because this is a \"config\" multicast address.<br>This may also be an IPV6 multicast address, in which case IPV6 networking will be used. If IPv6 networking is used, the nodeid field must be specified.</p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Port</big></b><br>This specifies the UDP port number. It is possible to use the same multicast address on a network with the openais services configured for different UDP ports.<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Member Address</big></b><br>This list specifies all the nodes in the cluster by IP address. This could be configurable when using udpu(Unicast). <br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Node ID</big></b><br>This configuration option is optional when using IPv4 and required when using IPv6. This is a 32 bit value specifying the node identifier delivered to the cluster membership service. If this is not specified with IPv4, the node id will be determined from the 32 bit IP address the system to which the system is bound with ring identifier of 0. The node identifier value of zero is reserved and should not be used.<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>rrp_mode</big></b><br>This specifies the mode of redundant ring, which may be none, active, or passive. Active replication offers slightly lower latency from transmit to delivery in faulty network environments but with less performance. Passive replication may nearly double the speed of the totem protocol if the protocol doesn't become cpu bound. The final option is none, in which case only one network interface will be used to operate the totem protocol. If only one interface directive is specified, none is automatically chosen. If multiple interface directives are specified, only active or passive may be chosen.<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Expected votes</big></b><br>Expect vote number for voting quorum. Will be automatically calculated when the nodelist {} section is present in corosync.conf or can be specified in the quorum {} section.<br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Auto Generate Node ID</big></b><br>Nodeid is required when using IPv6. Auto node ID enabled will generate nodeid automatically.<br></p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:45 msgid "" "\n" -"<p><b><big>Threads</big></b><br>This directive controls how many threads are " -"used to encrypt and send multicast messages. If secauth is off, the " -"protocol will never use threaded sending. If secauth is on, this " -"directive allows systems to be configured to use multiple threads to " -"encrypt and send multicast messages. A thread directive of 0 indicates " -"that no threaded send should be used. This mode offers best performance for " -"non-SMP systems. The default is 0. <br></p>\n" -"<p><b><big>Enable Security Auth</big></b><br>This specifies that HMAC/SHA1 " -"authentication should be used to authenticate all messages. It further " -"specifies that all data should be encrypted with the sober128 " -"encryption algorithm to protect data from eavesdropping. Enabling this " -"option adds a 36 byte header to every message sent by totem which reduces " -"total throughput. Encryption and authentication consume 75% of CPU cycles " -"in aisexec as measured with gprof when enabled. For 100Mbit networks " -"with 1500 MTU frame transmissions: A throughput of 9Mb/s is possible " -"with 100% cpu utilization when this option is enabled on 3GHz cpus. A " -"throughput of 10Mb/s is possible wth 20% cpu utilization when this option " -"is disabled on 3GHz cpus. For gig-e networks with large frame " -"transmissions: A throughput of 20Mb/s is possible when this option is " -"enabled on 3GHz cpus. A throughput of 60Mb/s is possible when this " -"option is disabled on 3GHz cpus. The default is on. <br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Threads</big></b><br>This directive controls how many threads are used to encrypt and send multicast messages. If secauth is off, the protocol will never use threaded sending. If secauth is on, this directive allows systems to be configured to use multiple threads to encrypt and send multicast messages. A thread directive of 0 indicates that no threaded send should be used. This mode offers best performance for non-SMP systems. The default is 0. <br></p>\n" +"<p><b><big>Enable Security Auth</big></b><br>This specifies that HMAC/SHA1 authentication should be used to authenticate all messages. It further specifies that all data should be encrypted with the sober128 encryption algorithm to protect data from eavesdropping. Enabling this option adds a 36 byte header to every message sent by totem which reduces total throughput. Encryption and authentication consume 75% of CPU cycles in aisexec as measured with gprof when enabled. For 100Mbit networks with 1500 MTU frame transmissions: A throughput of 9Mb/s is possible with 100% cpu utilization when this option is enabled on 3GHz cpus. A throughput of 10Mb/s is possible wth 20% cpu utilization when this option is disabled on 3GHz cpus. For gig-e networks with large frame transmissions: A throughput of 20Mb/s is possible when this option is enabled on 3GHz cpus. A throughput of 60Mb/s is possible when this option is disabled on 3GHz cpus. The default is on. <b r></p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:50 msgid "" "\n" -"\t\t\t<p><b><big>Booting</big></b><br>Starting corosync service during boot " -"or not</p>\n" -"\t\t\t<p><b><big>Firewall Settings</big></b><br>Enable the port when " -"Firewall is enabled</p>\n" +"\t\t\t<p><b><big>Booting</big></b><br>Starting corosync service during boot or not</p>\n" +"\t\t\t<p><b><big>Firewall Settings</big></b><br>Enable the port when Firewall is enabled</p>\n" "\t\t\t" msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:56 msgid "" "\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>Sync Host</big></b><br>The hostnames used here must be the " -"local hostnames of the cluster nodes. That means you must use exactly the " -"same string as printed out by the hostname command.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>Sync File</big></b><br>The full absolute filename to be " -"synced.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>Pre-Shared-Keys</big></b><br>Authentication is performed " -"using the IP addresses and pre-shared-keys in Csync2. The key file is " -"generated with csync2 -k /etc/csync2/key_hagroup. The file key_hagroup " -"should be copied to all members of the cluster manually after it's created.\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Sync Host</big></b><br>The hostnames used here must be the local hostnames of the cluster nodes. That means you must use exactly the same string as printed out by the hostname command.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Sync File</big></b><br>The full absolute filename to be synced.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Pre-Shared-Keys</big></b><br>Authentication is performed using the IP addresses and pre-shared-keys in Csync2. The key file is generated with csync2 -k /etc/csync2/key_hagroup. The file key_hagroup should be copied to all members of the cluster manually after it's created.</p>\n" "\t" msgstr "" #: src/include/cluster/helps.rb:63 msgid "" "\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>Dedicated Interface</big></b><br>A dedicated network " -"interface for syncing. The interface must support multicast, and is UP for " -"using. You may have to have it pre-configured. </p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>IP</big></b><br>The IPv4 address assigned to the dedicated " -"network interface. This is detected automatically.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>Multicast Address</big></b><br>The multicast address to be " -"used for syncing.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b><big>Group Number</big></b><br>A numeric ID indicate the group for " -"syncing.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Dedicated Interface</big></b><br>A dedicated network interface for syncing. The interface must support multicast, and is UP for using. You may have to have it pre-configured. </p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>IP</big></b><br>The IPv4 address assigned to the dedicated network interface. This is detected automatically.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Multicast Address</big></b><br>The multicast address to be used for syncing.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b><big>Group Number</big></b><br>A numeric ID indicate the group for syncing.</p>\n" "\t" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/country.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/country.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/country.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -49,8 +49,7 @@ #. error message (%1 is given layout); do not translate 'list' #: keyboard/src/clients/keyboard.rb:179 -msgid "" -"Keyboard layout '%1' is invalid. Use a 'list' command to see possible values." +msgid "Keyboard layout '%1' is invalid. Use a 'list' command to see possible values." msgstr "" #. summary item @@ -79,9 +78,7 @@ #. help text for keyboard expert screen cont. #: keyboard/src/include/keyboard/dialogs.rb:60 -msgid "" -"<p>Settings made here apply only to the console keyboard. Configure the " -"keyboard for the graphical user interface with another tool.</p>\n" +msgid "<p>Settings made here apply only to the console keyboard. Configure the keyboard for the graphical user interface with another tool.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. heading text @@ -161,8 +158,7 @@ "Choose the <b>Keyboard Layout</b> to use for\n" "installation and in the installed system. \n" "Test the layout in <b>Test</b>.\n" -"For advanced options, such as repeat rate and delay, select <b>Expert " -"Settings</b>.\n" +"For advanced options, such as repeat rate and delay, select <b>Expert Settings</b>.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -179,10 +175,8 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "Choose the <b>Keyboard Layout</b> to use in the system.\n" -"For advanced options, such as repeat rate and delay, select <b>Expert " -"Settings</b>.</p>\n" -"<p>Find more options as well as more layouts in the keyboard layout tool of " -"your desktop environment.</p>\n" +"For advanced options, such as repeat rate and delay, select <b>Expert Settings</b>.</p>\n" +"<p>Find more options as well as more layouts in the keyboard layout tool of your desktop environment.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Screen title for keyboard screen @@ -313,8 +307,7 @@ #. error message (%1 is given layout); do not translate 'list' #: language/src/clients/language.rb:303 -msgid "" -"%1 is not a valid language. Use the list command to see possible values." +msgid "%1 is not a valid language. Use the list command to see possible values." msgstr "" #. label text @@ -361,8 +354,7 @@ #: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:231 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Additional packages with support for the selected primary and secondary " -"languages will be installed. Packages no longer needed will be removed.\n" +"Additional packages with support for the selected primary and secondary languages will be installed. Packages no longer needed will be removed.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -422,11 +414,8 @@ #: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:300 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Check <b>Adapt Keyboard Layout</b> to change the keyboard layout to the " -"primary language.\n" -"Check <b>Adapt Time Zone</b> to change the current time zone according to " -"the primary language. If the keyboard layout or time zone is already adapted " -"to the default language setting, the respective option is disabled.\n" +"Check <b>Adapt Keyboard Layout</b> to change the keyboard layout to the primary language.\n" +"Check <b>Adapt Time Zone</b> to change the current time zone according to the primary language. If the keyboard layout or time zone is already adapted to the default language setting, the respective option is disabled.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -472,8 +461,7 @@ #. help text for langauge expert screen #: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:592 msgid "" -"<p><b>ctype Only</b>: root has the same LC_CTYPE as a normal user. Other " -"values\n" +"<p><b>ctype Only</b>: root has the same LC_CTYPE as a normal user. Other values\n" "are unset.<br>\n" "<b>Yes</b>: root has the same locale settings as normal user.<br>\n" "<b>No</b>: root has all locale variables unset.\n" @@ -482,10 +470,7 @@ #. help text for langauge expert screen #: language/src/clients/select_language.rb:601 -msgid "" -"<p>Use <b>Detailed Locale Setting</b> to set a locale for the primary " -"language that is not offered in the list in the main dialog. Translation may " -"not be available for the selected locale.</p>" +msgid "<p>Use <b>Detailed Locale Setting</b> to set a locale for the primary language that is not offered in the list in the main dialog. Translation may not be available for the selected locale.</p>" msgstr "" #. heading text @@ -552,8 +537,7 @@ #: language/src/modules/Language.rb:1287 msgid "" "Only minimal support for the selected language is included on this media.\n" -"Add the Language add-on CD as an additional repository in order to get the " -"appropriate support\n" +"Add the Language add-on CD as an additional repository in order to get the appropriate support\n" "for this language.\n" msgstr "" @@ -645,15 +629,12 @@ #: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:105 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Specify whether your machine is set to local time or UTC in <b>Hardware " -"Clock Set To</b>.\n" -"Most PCs that also have other operating systems installed (such as " -"Microsoft\n" +"Specify whether your machine is set to local time or UTC in <b>Hardware Clock Set To</b>.\n" +"Most PCs that also have other operating systems installed (such as Microsoft\n" "Windows) use local time.\n" "Machines that have only Linux installed are usually\n" "set to Universal Time Coordinated (UTC).\n" -"If the hardware clock is set to UTC, your system can switch from standard " -"time\n" +"If the hardware clock is set to UTC, your system can switch from standard time\n" "to daylight saving time and back automatically.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -673,14 +654,11 @@ #: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:131 msgid "" "\n" -"You selected local time, but only Linux seems to be installed on your " -"system.\n" +"You selected local time, but only Linux seems to be installed on your system.\n" "In such case, it is strongly recommended to use UTC, and to click Cancel.\n" "\n" -"If you want to keep local time, you must adjust the CMOS clock twice the " -"year\n" -"because of Day Light Saving switches. If you miss to adjust the clock, " -"backups may fail,\n" +"If you want to keep local time, you must adjust the CMOS clock twice the year\n" +"because of Day Light Saving switches. If you miss to adjust the clock, backups may fail,\n" "your mail system may drop mail messages, etc.\n" "\n" "If you use UTC, Linux will adjust the time automatically.\n" @@ -690,9 +668,7 @@ #. help text for set time dialog #: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:187 -msgid "" -"<p>The current system time and date are displayed. If required, change them " -"to the correct values manually or use Network Time Protocol (NTP).</p>" +msgid "<p>The current system time and date are displayed. If required, change them to the correct values manually or use Network Time Protocol (NTP).</p>" msgstr "" #. help text, cont. @@ -812,8 +788,7 @@ #: timezone/src/include/timezone/dialogs.rb:814 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"To select the time zone to use in your system, first select the <b>Region.\n" +"To select the time zone to use in your system, first select the <b>Region</b>.\n" "In <b>Time Zone</b>, then select the appropriate time zone, country, or \n" "region from those available.\n" "</p>\n" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/crowbar.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/crowbar.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/crowbar.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -42,10 +42,8 @@ "Some examples of how the URL could look like:\n" "</p><p>\n" "<ul>\n" -"<li><i>http://smt.example.com/repo/$RCE/SLES11-SP3-Pool/sle-11-x86_64/</i> " -"for SMT server\n" -"<li><i>http://manager.example.com/ks/dist/child/suse-cloud-3.0-pool-x86_64/" -"sles11-sp3-x86_64/</i> for SUSE Manager Server.\n" +"<li><i>http://smt.example.com/repo/$RCE/SLES11-SP3-Pool/sle-11-x86_64/</i> for SMT server\n" +"<li><i>http://manager.example.com/ks/dist/child/suse-cloud-3.0-pool-x86_64/sles11-s...</i> for SUSE Manager Server.\n" "</p><p>\n" "For detailed description, check the Deployment Guide.\n" "</p>" @@ -79,10 +77,8 @@ #. help text for the Network mode tab (do not translate bastion) #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:203 msgid "" -"<p>Here, define a <b>Network Mode</b> with relevant <b>Bonding Policy</b>.\n" -"<p>You can also specify interface names for the bastion network conduits as " -"space-separated list.</p>" +"<p>Here, define a <b>Network Mode</b> with relevant <b>Bonding Policy</b>.</p>\n" +"<p>You can also specify interface names for the bastion network conduits as space-separated list.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -283,8 +279,7 @@ #. label (hint for user) #: src/include/crowbar/complex.rb:1385 -msgid "" -"If no user is present, user 'crowbar' with default password will be used." +msgid "If no user is present, user 'crowbar' with default password will be used." msgstr "" #. tab header Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/dhcp-server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/dhcp-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/dhcp-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -544,8 +544,7 @@ #. at least minimal configuration #: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:616 msgid "" -"One or more selected network interfaces is not configured (no assigned IP " -"address \n" +"One or more selected network interfaces is not configured (no assigned IP address \n" "and netmask)." msgstr "" @@ -746,8 +745,7 @@ #: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1594 #: src/include/dhcp-server/dialogs2.rb:1617 msgid "" -"The dynamic DHCP address range must be in the same network as the DHCP " -"server.\n" +"The dynamic DHCP address range must be in the same network as the DHCP server.\n" "IP %1 does not match the network %2/%3." msgstr "" @@ -897,8 +895,7 @@ msgid "" "You have specified an alternate configuration file for the DHCP server.\n" "\n" -"YaST does not supported this. The DHCP server module can only read and " -"write\n" +"YaST does not supported this. The DHCP server module can only read and write\n" "/etc/dhcpd.conf. The new configuration from %1 will not be imported. All\n" "changes will be saved to the default configuration file.\n" " \n" @@ -919,8 +916,7 @@ "<p><b><big>Adding a New Range of DNS Records</big></b><br />\n" "<b>First IP Address</b> defines\n" "the starting address of the range and <b>Last IP Address</b> defines\n" -"the last one. <b>Hostname Base</b> is a string that determines how " -"hostnames\n" +"the last one. <b>Hostname Base</b> is a string that determines how hostnames\n" "are created (such as <tt>dhcp-%i</tt> or <tt>e25-%i-a</tt>).\n" "<tt>%i</tt> is replaced with the number of the host in the range.\n" "If no <tt>%i</tt> is defined, the number is added at the end of the\n" @@ -944,8 +940,7 @@ #: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-helps.rb:42 msgid "" "<p><b>New Zone Name</b> or <b>Reverse Zone Name</b>\n" -"are taken from your current DHCP server and network settings and cannot be " -"changed.</p>\n" +"are taken from your current DHCP server and network settings and cannot be changed.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: DNS Wizard - step 1 (part 3) @@ -980,8 +975,7 @@ #: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-helps.rb:67 msgid "" "<p>To add a <b>New Name Server</b>, click <b>Add</b>, complete the form,\n" -"then click <b>Ok</b>. If the new name server name is included in the " -"current\n" +"then click <b>Ok</b>. If the new name server name is included in the current\n" "DNS zone, also enter its IP address. This is mandatory because it is used\n" "during the zone creation.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1001,8 +995,7 @@ "<p><b><big>DNS Records</big></b><br />\n" "Define DNS hostnames for all DHCP clients. You do not need to define\n" "all hostnames one by one. Set simple rules for how\n" -"the hostnames are created. These rules define the ranges of IP addresses to " -"use\n" +"the hostnames are created. These rules define the ranges of IP addresses to use\n" "and the string from which hostnames are generated for a range.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1070,13 +1063,10 @@ "<p>\n" " To create or remove a single DNS record,\n" "click <b>Add</b> or <b>Delete</b>.\n" -"To synchronize the DNS entries with their reverse forms in the " -"corresponding\n" +"To synchronize the DNS entries with their reverse forms in the corresponding\n" "reverse zone, select <b>Synchronize with Reverse Zone</b>.\n" "Use <b>Remove DNS Records Matching Range</b> \n" -"from <b>Special Tasks</b> to delete any information relating to this range " -"of IP addresses from the DNS server. To create a new range of DNS records, " -"select\n" +"from <b>Special Tasks</b> to delete any information relating to this range of IP addresses from the DNS server. To create a new range of DNS records, select\n" "<b>Add New Range of DNS Records</b> from <b>Special Tasks</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1339,8 +1329,7 @@ #: src/include/dhcp-server/dns-server-wizard.rb:234 msgid "" "No IP address has been provided for a name server in the current DNS zone.\n" -"This may not work because each zone needs the name and IP of its name server " -"defined. \n" +"This may not work because each zone needs the name and IP of its name server defined. \n" "Really use the current settings?\n" msgstr "" @@ -1746,8 +1735,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b><big>Zones to Update</big></b><br>\n" "Specify forward and reverse zones to update. For both, also specify \n" -"their primary name server. If the name server runs on the same host as the " -"DHCP\n" +"their primary name server. If the name server runs on the same host as the DHCP\n" "server, you can leave the fields empty.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -1755,10 +1743,8 @@ #: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:149 msgid "" "<p><b><big>DHCP Server Start-Up Arguments</big></b><br>\n" -"Here you can specify parameters that you want DHCP Server to be started " -"with \n" -"(e.g. \"-p 1234\") for a non-standard port to listen on). For all possible " -"options,\n" +"Here you can specify parameters that you want DHCP Server to be started with \n" +"(e.g. \"-p 1234\") for a non-standard port to listen on). For all possible options,\n" "consult dhcpd manual page. If left blank, default values will be used.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -1766,8 +1752,7 @@ #: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:156 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Network Card Selection</big></b><br>\n" -"Select one or more of the listed network cards to use for the DHCP server.\n" +"Select one or more of the listed network cards to use for the DHCP server.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Optional field - used with LDAP support @@ -1816,8 +1801,7 @@ #. Wizard Installation - Step 2 7/9 #: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:189 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Print Server</b> offers this server as the default print server.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Print Server</b> offers this server as the default print server.</p>" msgstr "" #. Wizard Installation - Step 2 8/9 @@ -1830,8 +1814,7 @@ #. Wizard Installation - Step 2 9/9 #: src/include/dhcp-server/helps.rb:197 msgid "" -"<p><b>Default Lease Time</b> sets the time after which the leased IP " -"expires\n" +"<p><b>Default Lease Time</b> sets the time after which the leased IP expires\n" "and the client must ask for an IP again.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -1849,8 +1832,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b><big>IP Address Range</big></b><br>\n" "Set the <b>First IP Address</b> and the <b>Last IP Address</b>\n" -"of the address range to be leased to clients. These addresses must have the " -"same netmask.\n" +"of the address range to be leased to clients. These addresses must have the same netmask.\n" "For instance, <tt>192.168.1.1</tt> and <tt>192.168.1.64</tt>. Check the <b>\n" "Allow Dynamic BOOTP</b> flag if the specified range may be dynamically\n" "assigned to BOOTP clients as well as DHCP clients</p>.\n" @@ -2306,7 +2288,7 @@ "Aborting now." msgstr "" -#. error report +#. error report #: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:1474 msgid "" "Cannot determine hostname. LDAP-based configuration of \n" @@ -2414,7 +2396,7 @@ msgid "Error occurred while creating %1." msgstr "" -#. error report, %1 is LDAP record key +#. error report, %1 is LDAP record key #: src/modules/DhcpServer.pm:2738 msgid "Error occurred while updating %1." msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/dns-server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/dns-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/dns-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -556,15 +556,13 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command #. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command #: src/clients/dns-server.rb:1180 src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:294 -msgid "" -"Name server (in fully qualified format finished with a dot or relative name)" +msgid "Name server (in fully qualified format finished with a dot or relative name)" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command #. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command #: src/clients/dns-server.rb:1187 src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:301 -msgid "" -"Mail server (in fully qualified format finished with a dot or relative name)" +msgid "Mail server (in fully qualified format finished with a dot or relative name)" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command @@ -624,8 +622,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command #. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command #: src/clients/dns-server.rb:1257 src/include/dns-server/cmdline.rb:371 -msgid "" -"DNS resource record value, such as 192.0.34.166 for example.org's A record" +msgid "DNS resource record value, such as 192.0.34.166 for example.org's A record" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: commandline short help for command @@ -1490,8 +1487,7 @@ #. %{type} replaced with record type (TXT or SPF) #: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:1916 msgid "" -"Invalid %{type} record key. It should consist of printable US-ASCII " -"characters excluding '='\n" +"Invalid %{type} record key. It should consist of printable US-ASCII characters excluding '='\n" "and must be at least one character long." msgstr "" @@ -1582,8 +1578,7 @@ #: src/include/dns-server/dialog-masterzone.rb:2612 msgid "" "Current zone records are automatically generated from %1 zone.\n" -"To change records manually disable the Automatically Generate Records From " -"feature." +"To change records manually disable the Automatically Generate Records From feature." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Text entry @@ -1768,10 +1763,8 @@ #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:99 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Master Servers</big></b><br>\n" -"Set the IP addresses of the master name servers for this zone. Use <b>Add\n" -"to add a new master name server. Select an existing one then click " -"<b>Delete</b>\n" +"Set the IP addresses of the master name servers for this zone. Use <b>Add</b>\n" +"to add a new master name server. Select an existing one then click <b>Delete</b>\n" "to remove an existing one.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -1780,8 +1773,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b><big>Zone Type</big></b><br>\n" "To make this name server the primary source of the data of the zone,\n" -"select <b>Master</b>. To make it the secondary name server, select <b>Slave\n" +"select <b>Master</b>. To make it the secondary name server, select <b>Slave</b>\n" "or <b>Stub</b>, so the data of the zone will be mirrored from the master\n" "server.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -1790,8 +1782,7 @@ #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:114 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Zone Direction</big></b><br>\n" -"DNS is used both for translating from domain names to IP addresses and " -"back.\n" +"DNS is used both for translating from domain names to IP addresses and back.\n" "Select if this zone will be used to translate from domain names to IP\n" "addresses (<b>Forward</b>) or from IP addresses to domain names\n" "(<b>Reverse</b>).</p>\n" @@ -1849,8 +1840,7 @@ #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:153 msgid "" "<p><b>Serial</b> number is used for determining if the zone has changed on\n" -"the master servers (so that slave servers do not always need to synchronize " -"the\n" +"the master servers (so that slave servers do not always need to synchronize the\n" "entire zone).</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1893,10 +1883,8 @@ "<p><b><big>TSIG Key Management</big></b><br>\n" "Define TSIG keys used for dynamic zone updates.\n" "To add a new TSIG key, use the \n" -"<b>File Name</b> text field or the <b>Browse</b> button then click <b>Add.\n" -"To delete an existing TSIG key, select it in the list and click <b>Delete.\n" +"<b>File Name</b> text field or the <b>Browse</b> button then click <b>Add</b>.\n" +"To delete an existing TSIG key, select it in the list and click <b>Delete</b>.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -1978,14 +1966,11 @@ #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:242 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Select <b>Log to System Log</b> to save DNS server log messages to the " -"system log. \n" +"Select <b>Log to System Log</b> to save DNS server log messages to the system log. \n" "To save the DNS server log messages to a separate file, select \n" -"<b>Log to File</b> and set the <b>Filename</b> to which to save the log " -"and \n" +"<b>Log to File</b> and set the <b>Filename</b> to which to save the log and \n" "the <b>Maximum Size</b> of the log file.\n" -"The DNS server automatically rotates the log files. Use <b>Maximum Versions\n" +"The DNS server automatically rotates the log files. Use <b>Maximum Versions</b>\n" "to specify how many log files should be saved.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2032,8 +2017,7 @@ "<p>To add an already created key, set the <b>Filename</b>\n" "(or use the <b>Browse</b> button to select it) and click <b>Add</b>.\n" "To generate a new key, enter the <b>Filename</b> and the <b>Key ID</b>\n" -"then click <b>Generate</b>. The new key will be generated and also added.\n" +"then click <b>Generate</b>. The new key will be generated and also added.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Expert Mode Configuration - Keys 3/3 @@ -2053,19 +2037,16 @@ #. Expert Mode Configuration - Zones #2 #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:298 msgid "" -"<p>To add a new zone, enter its <b>Zone Name</b>, select the <b>Zone Type,\n" +"<p>To add a new zone, enter its <b>Zone Name</b>, select the <b>Zone Type</b>,\n" "and click <b>Add</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Expert Mode Configuration - Zones #3 #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:302 msgid "" -"<p>To add a new IPv4 reverse zone, enter a part of the reverse IPv4 address " -"followed by\n" +"<p>To add a new IPv4 reverse zone, enter a part of the reverse IPv4 address followed by\n" "<tt>.in-addr.arpa</tt> as its <b>Zone Name</b> (for example, zone name\n" -"<tt>0.168.192.in-addr.arpa</tt> for network <tt>192.168.0.0/24</tt>), " -"select\n" +"<tt>0.168.192.in-addr.arpa</tt> for network <tt>192.168.0.0/24</tt>), select\n" "the <b>Zone Type</b>, and click <b>Add</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2073,10 +2054,8 @@ #. %1, %2, %3, and %4 are replaced with examples #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:311 msgid "" -"<p>To add a new IPv6 reverse zone, enter a part of the reverse IPv6 address " -"followed by\n" -"<tt>%1</tt> as its <b>Zone Name</b>. Several formats for entering the zone " -"name are\n" +"<p>To add a new IPv6 reverse zone, enter a part of the reverse IPv6 address followed by\n" +"<tt>%1</tt> as its <b>Zone Name</b>. Several formats for entering the zone name are\n" "supported: Standard form: <tt>%2</tt>;\n" "Forward form: <tt>%3</tt>;\n" "Forward form without netmask bits: <tt>%4</tt>\n" @@ -2095,8 +2074,7 @@ #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:334 msgid "" "<p><b><big>DDNS and Zone Transport</big></b><br>\n" -"Use this dialog to change dynamic DNS settings of the zone and control " -"access\n" +"Use this dialog to change dynamic DNS settings of the zone and control access\n" "to the zone.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2140,8 +2118,7 @@ #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:371 msgid "" "<p><b><big>NS Records</big></b><br>\n" -"To add a new name server, enter the name server address and click <b>Add.\n" +"To add a new name server, enter the name server address and click <b>Add</b>.\n" "To remove one of the listed name servers, select it and click\n" "<b>Delete</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2161,8 +2138,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Serial</b> is the number used for determining if the zone has \n" "changed on\n" -"the master servers (then slave servers do not always need to synchronize " -"the\n" +"the master servers (then slave servers do not always need to synchronize the\n" "entire zone).</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2230,8 +2206,7 @@ #: src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:452 src/include/dns-server/helps.rb:479 msgid "" "<p><b>NS: Name Server</b>:\n" -"<b>Record Key</b> is a zone name relative to the current zone or an " -"absolute\n" +"<b>Record Key</b> is a zone name relative to the current zone or an absolute\n" "domain name followed by a dot.\n" "<b>Value</b> is a hostname relative to the current zone or fully qualified\n" "hostname followed by a dot. It must be represented by an A record.</p>\n" @@ -2253,8 +2228,7 @@ "<p><b>PTR: Reverse Translation</b>:\n" "<b>Record Key</b> is a full reverse zone name (derived from the IP address)\n" "followed by a dot\n" -"(such as <tt>1.0.168.192.in-addr.arpa.</tt> for IP address <tt>192.168.0.1)\n" +"(such as <tt>1.0.168.192.in-addr.arpa.</tt> for IP address <tt>192.168.0.1</tt>)\n" " or a part of reverse zone name relative to the current zone\n" "(such as <tt>1</tt> for IP address <tt>192.168.0.1</tt> in zone\n" "<tt>0.168.192.in-addr.arpa.</tt>).\n" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/drbd.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/drbd.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/drbd.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -208,33 +208,19 @@ #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:69 msgid "" -"<p>Clicking \"Add\", \"Edit\", \"Delete\" button to add, edit or delete a " -"resource</p>\n" +"<p>Clicking \"Add\", \"Edit\", \"Delete\" button to add, edit or delete a resource</p>\n" "\t\t" msgstr "" #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:75 msgid "" "\n" -"\t\t<p>\"Name\" is mandatory and must match the Linux host name (uname -n) " -"of one of the nodes. Should not include \".\" in hostname.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>\"Address:Port\": A resource needs one IP address per device, which " -"is used to wait for incoming connections from the partner device to reach " -"the device. Each DRBD resource needs a TCP port which is used to connect to " -"the node's partner device.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>\"Device\": The name of the block device node of the resource being " -"described. You must use this device with your application (file system) and " -"you must not use the low level block device which is specified with the disk " -"parameter,following its minor number. Or either omit the name or minor and " -"the minor number. If you omit the name a default of /dev/drbdminor will be " -"used.\n" -"\t\tLike: '/dev/drbd{service} minor {minor drbd number [0...255]}' or '/dev/" -"drbd{minor drbd number [0...255]}'</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>\"Disk\": DRBD uses this block device to actually store and retrieve " -"the data. Never access such a device while DRBD is running on top of it.\n" -"\t\t<p>\"Meta-disk\": internal. Internal means that the last part of the " -"backing device is used to store the meta-data.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Name\" is mandatory and must match the Linux host name (uname -n) of one of the nodes. Should not include \".\" in hostname.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Address:Port\": A resource needs one IP address per device, which is used to wait for incoming connections from the partner device to reach the device. Each DRBD resource needs a TCP port which is used to connect to the node's partner device.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Device\": The name of the block device node of the resource being described. You must use this device with your application (file system) and you must not use the low level block device which is specified with the disk parameter,following its minor number. Or either omit the name or minor and the minor number. If you omit the name a default of /dev/drbdminor will be used.\n" +"\t\tLike: '/dev/drbd{service} minor {minor drbd number [0...255]}' or '/dev/drbd{minor drbd number [0...255]}'</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Disk\": DRBD uses this block device to actually store and retrieve the data. Never access such a device while DRBD is running on top of it.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>\"Meta-disk\": internal. Internal means that the last part of the backing device is used to store the meta-data.</p>\n" "\t\t" msgstr "" @@ -242,47 +228,25 @@ msgid "" "\n" "\t\t<p><b>Protocol</b></p>\n" -"\t\t<p>Protocol A: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached " -"local disk and local TCP send buffer.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>Protocol B: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached " -"local disk and remote buffer cache.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p>Protocol C: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached both " -"local and remote disk.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>Protocol A: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached local disk and local TCP send buffer.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>Protocol B: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached local disk and remote buffer cache.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p>Protocol C: write IO is reported as completed, if it has reached both local and remote disk.</p>\n" "\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t\t \n" "\t\t<p><b>wfc-timeout</b>: Wait for connection timeout</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>degr-wfc-timeout</b>: Wait for connection timeout, if this node " -"was a degraded cluster</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>degr-wfc-timeout</b>: Wait for connection timeout, if this node was a degraded cluster</p>\n" "\n" -"\t\t<p><b>on-io-error</b>: What to do when the lower level device reports io-" -"error to the upper layers</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>on-io-error</b>: What to do when the lower level device reports io-error to the upper layers</p>\n" "\t\t<p><b>sndbuf-size</b>: The size of the TCP socket send buffer</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>max-buffers</b>: Maximum number of requests to be allocated by " -"DRBD</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>max-buffers</b>: Maximum number of requests to be allocated by DRBD</p>\n" "\n" -"\t\t<p><b>timeout</b>: If the partner node fails to send an expected " -"response packet within time 10ths of a second, the partner node is " -"considered dead and therefore the TCP/IP connection is abandoned. This must " -"be lower than connect-int and ping-int. The default value is 60 = 6 seconds, " -"the unit 0.1 seconds.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>connect-int</b>: The time the peer has time to answer to a keep-" -"alive packet. In case the peer's reply is not received within this time " -"period, it is considered as dead. The default value is 500ms, the default " -"unit is 100ms</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>ping-int</b>: The time the peer has time to answer to a keep-alive " -"packet</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>timeout</b>: If the partner node fails to send an expected response packet within time 10ths of a second, the partner node is considered dead and therefore the TCP/IP connection is abandoned. This must be lower than connect-int and ping-int. The default value is 60 = 6 seconds, the unit 0.1 seconds.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>connect-int</b>: The time the peer has time to answer to a keep-alive packet. In case the peer's reply is not received within this time period, it is considered as dead. The default value is 500ms, the default unit is 100ms</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>ping-int</b>: The time the peer has time to answer to a keep-alive packet</p>\n" "\n" -"\t\t<p><b>max-epoch-size</b>: The highest number of data blocks between two " -"write barriers</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>ko-count</b>: the secondary node fails to complete a single write " -"request for count times the timeout, it is expelled from the cluster. The " -"default value is 0, which disables this feature.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>rate</b>: To ensure a smooth operation of the application on top " -"of DRBD, it is possible to limit the bandwidth which may be used by " -"background synchronizations. The default is 250 KB/sec, the default unit is " -"KB/sec.</p>\n" -"\t\t<p><b>al-extents</b>: parameter you control how big the hot area (= " -"active set) can get. The default number of extents is 127. (Minimum: 7, " -"Maximum: 3843)</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>max-epoch-size</b>: The highest number of data blocks between two write barriers</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>ko-count</b>: the secondary node fails to complete a single write request for count times the timeout, it is expelled from the cluster. The default value is 0, which disables this feature.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>rate</b>: To ensure a smooth operation of the application on top of DRBD, it is possible to limit the bandwidth which may be used by background synchronizations. The default is 250 KB/sec, the default unit is KB/sec.</p>\n" +"\t\t<p><b>al-extents</b>: parameter you control how big the hot area (= active set) can get. The default number of extents is 127. (Minimum: 7, Maximum: 3843)</p>\n" "\t\t" msgstr "" @@ -291,20 +255,16 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:115 -msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>\"Disable IP Verification\"</b> to disable one of drbdadm's " -"sanity check</p>" +msgid "<p>Check <b>\"Disable IP Verification\"</b> to disable one of drbdadm's sanity check</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/drbd/helps.rb:118 msgid "" -"<p><b>Dialog Refresh:</b> The user dialog counts and displays the seconds it " -"waited so\n" +"<p><b>Dialog Refresh:</b> The user dialog counts and displays the seconds it waited so\n" " far. You might want to disable this if you have the console\n" " of your server connected to a serial terminal server with\n" " limited logging capacity.\n" -" The Dialog will print the count each 'dialog-refresh' " -"seconds,\n" +" The Dialog will print the count each 'dialog-refresh' seconds,\n" " set it to 0 to disable redrawing completely. </p>" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/fcoe-client.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/fcoe-client.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/fcoe-client.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -365,25 +365,17 @@ #. Services dialog help 1/3 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:71 -msgid "" -"<p><b><big>Starting of services</big><br></b><br>Enable or disable the start " -"of the services <b>fcoe</b> and <b>lldpad</b> at boot time.</p>" +msgid "<p><b><big>Starting of services</big><br></b><br>Enable or disable the start of the services <b>fcoe</b> and <b>lldpad</b> at boot time.</p>" msgstr "" #. Services dialog help 2/3 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:76 -msgid "" -"<p>Starting the service <b>fcoe</b> means starting the <i>Fibre Channel over " -"Ethernet</i> service daemon <i>fcoemon</i> which controls the FCoE " -"interfaces and establishes a connection with the daemon <i>lldpad</i>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Starting the service <b>fcoe</b> means starting the <i>Fibre Channel over Ethernet</i> service daemon <i>fcoemon</i> which controls the FCoE interfaces and establishes a connection with the daemon <i>lldpad</i>.</p>" msgstr "" #. Services dialog help 3/3 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:82 -msgid "" -"<p>The <b>lldpad</b> service provides the <i>Link Layer Discovery Protocol agent daemon <i>lldpad</i>, which informs <i>fcoemon</i> about DCB (Data " -"Center Bridging) features and configuration of the interfaces.</p>" +msgid "<p>The <b>lldpad</b> service provides the <i>Link Layer Discovery Protocol</i> agent daemon <i>lldpad</i>, which informs <i>fcoemon</i> about DCB (Data Center Bridging) features and configuration of the interfaces.</p>" msgstr "" #. Interfaces dialog help 1/5 @@ -393,37 +385,22 @@ #. Interfaces dialog help 2/5 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:92 -msgid "" -"<p>The interfaces dialog shows all detected netcards including the status of " -"VLAN and FCoE configuration.<br>FCoE is possible if a VLAN interface is " -"configured for FCoE on the switch.<br>For every netcard (network interface), " -"this is shown in column <i>FCoE VLAN Interface</i>.</p>" +msgid "<p>The interfaces dialog shows all detected netcards including the status of VLAN and FCoE configuration.<br>FCoE is possible if a VLAN interface is configured for FCoE on the switch.<br>For every netcard (network interface), this is shown in column <i>FCoE VLAN Interface</i>.</p>" msgstr "" #. Interfaces dialog help 3/5 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:99 -msgid "" -"<p>It's possible to retry the check for FCoE services by using <b>Retry " -"Detection</b>(might be required for interfaces needing some time to get up)." -"</p>" +msgid "<p>It's possible to retry the check for FCoE services by using <b>Retry Detection</b>(might be required for interfaces needing some time to get up).</p>" msgstr "" #. Interfaces dialog help 4/5 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:103 -msgid "" -"<p>The values for <i>FCoE VLAN Interface</i> in detail:<br><b>not available: Fibre Channel over Ethernet is not possible (must be enabled on the " -"switch first).<br><b>not configured</b>: FCoE is possible but not yet " -"activated.<br>Press <b>Create FCoE VLAN Interface</b> to activate.<br>If the " -"FCoE VLAN interface has already been created, the name is shown in the " -"column, e.g. eth3.200.</p>" +msgid "<p>The values for <i>FCoE VLAN Interface</i> in detail:<br><b>not available</b>: Fibre Channel over Ethernet is not possible (must be enabled on the switch first).<br><b>not configured</b>: FCoE is possible but not yet activated.<br>Press <b>Create FCoE VLAN Interface</b> to activate.<br>If the FCoE VLAN interface has already been created, the name is shown in the column, e.g. eth3.200.</p>" msgstr "" #. Interfaces dialog help 4/5 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:113 -msgid "" -"<p>To change the configuration of a FCoE VLAN interface, click on <b>Change " -"Settings</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>To change the configuration of a FCoE VLAN interface, click on <b>Change Settings</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. Configuration dialog help 1/3 @@ -433,19 +410,14 @@ #. Configuration dialog help 2/3 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:121 -msgid "" -"<p>Configure the general settings for the FCoE system service. The settings " -"are written to '/etc/fcoe/config'.</p>" +msgid "<p>Configure the general settings for the FCoE system service. The settings are written to '/etc/fcoe/config'.</p>" msgstr "" #. Configuration dialog help 3/3 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:125 msgid "" "<p>The values are:<br>\n" -"<b>Debug</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>This is used to enable or disable " -"debugging messages from the fcoe service script and <i>fcoemon</i>." -"<br><b>Use syslog</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>Messages are sent to the " -"system log if set to <i>yes</i> (data are logged to /var/log/messages).</p>" +"<b>Debug</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>This is used to enable or disable debugging messages from the fcoe service script and <i>fcoemon</i>.<br><b>Use syslog</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>Messages are sent to the system log if set to <i>yes</i> (data are logged to /var/log/messages).</p>" msgstr "" #. edit dialog help 1/3 @@ -455,20 +427,12 @@ #. Edit dialog help 2/3 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:137 -msgid "" -"<p>The daemon <i>fcoemon</i> reads these configuration files on " -"initialization.<br>There is a file for every interface and the values " -"indicate whether FCoE instances should be created and if DCB is required.</p>" +msgid "<p>The daemon <i>fcoemon</i> reads these configuration files on initialization.<br>There is a file for every interface and the values indicate whether FCoE instances should be created and if DCB is required.</p>" msgstr "" #. Edit dialog help 3/3 #: src/include/fcoe-client/helps.rb:143 -msgid "" -"<p>The values are:<br><b>FCoE Enable</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>Enable " -"or disable the creation of FCoE instances.<br><b>DCB Required</b>: <i>yes or <i>no</i><br>The default is <i>yes</i>, DCB is usually required." -"<br><b>AUTO VLAN</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>If set to <i>yes</i> " -"'fcoemon' will create the VLAN interfaces automatically.</p>" +msgid "<p>The values are:<br><b>FCoE Enable</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>Enable or disable the creation of FCoE instances.<br><b>DCB Required</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>The default is <i>yes</i>, DCB is usually required.<br><b>AUTO VLAN</b>: <i>yes</i> or <i>no</i><br>If set to <i>yes</i> 'fcoemon' will create the VLAN interfaces automatically.</p>" msgstr "" #. Header of tab in tab widget @@ -513,9 +477,7 @@ #. don't check interactively for packages (bnc#367300) -> comment from iscsi-client #. skip it during initial and second stage or when create AY profile #: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:413 -msgid "" -"<p>To continue the FCoE configuration, the <b>%1</b> package must be " -"installed.</p>" +msgid "<p>To continue the FCoE configuration, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/modules/FcoeClient.rb:416 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/firewall-services.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/firewall-services.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/firewall-services.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -23,8 +23,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: avahi, RPM: avahi), used as a common label or an item in table #: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:40 -msgid "" -"Zeroconf/Bonjour Multicast DNS (mDNS) ports for Service Discovery (DNS-SD)" +msgid "Zeroconf/Bonjour Multicast DNS (mDNS) ports for Service Discovery (DNS-SD)" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: cyrus-imapd, RPM: cyrus-imapd), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... @@ -118,9 +117,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: nfs-client, RPM: nfs-client), used as a common label or an item in table #: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:106 -msgid "" -"Firewall configuration for NFS client. Open ports for NFS client to allow " -"connection to an NFS server." +msgid "Firewall configuration for NFS client. Open ports for NFS client to allow connection to an NFS server." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: nfs-kernel-server, RPM: nfs-kernel-server), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... @@ -130,9 +127,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: Description of a Service (File name: nfs-kernel-server, RPM: nfs-kernel-server), used as a common label or an item in table #: library/network/src/yast2-services-translations.rb:114 -msgid "" -"Firewall configuration for NFS kernel server. Open ports for NFS to allow " -"other hosts to connect." +msgid "Firewall configuration for NFS kernel server. Open ports for NFS to allow other hosts to connect." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Name of Service (File name: ntp, RPM: ntp), can be used as check box, item in multiple selection box... Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/firewall.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/firewall.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/firewall.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -238,12 +238,10 @@ "\n" "<p>To allow a service, select the <b>Zone</b> and the\n" "<b>Service to Allow</b> then press <b>Add</b>.\n" -"To remove an allowed service, select the <b>Zone</b> and the <b>Allowed " -"Service</b> then press <b>Delete</b>.</p>\n" +"To remove an allowed service, select the <b>Zone</b> and the <b>Allowed Service</b> then press <b>Delete</b>.</p>\n" "\n" "<p>By deselecting <b>Protect Firewall from Internal Zone</b>, you remove\n" -"protection from the zone. All services and ports in your internal network " -"will\n" +"protection from the zone. All services and ports in your internal network will\n" "be unprotected.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -251,13 +249,11 @@ #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:89 msgid "" "<p>Additional settings can be configured using <b>Advanced</b>.\n" -"Entries must be separated by a space. There you can allow TCP, UDP, and RPC " -"ports and\n" +"Entries must be separated by a space. There you can allow TCP, UDP, and RPC ports and\n" "IP protocols.</p>\n" "<p>TCP and UDP ports can be entered as port names (<tt>ftp-data</tt>),\n" "port numbers (<tt>3128</tt>), and port ranges (<tt>8000:8520</tt>).\n" -"RPC ports must be entered as service names (<tt>portmap</tt> or " -"<tt>nlockmgr</tt>).\n" +"RPC ports must be entered as service names (<tt>portmap</tt> or <tt>nlockmgr</tt>).\n" "Enter IP protocols as the protocol name (<tt>esp</tt>).\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -266,10 +262,8 @@ #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:100 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Masquerading</big></b>\n" -"<br>Masquerading is a function that hides your internal network behind your " -"firewall and allows\n" -"your internal network to access the external network, such as the Internet, " -"transparently. Requests\n" +"<br>Masquerading is a function that hides your internal network behind your firewall and allows\n" +"your internal network to access the external network, such as the Internet, transparently. Requests\n" "from the external network to the internal one are blocked.\n" "Select <b>Masquerade Networks</b> to masquerade your networks\n" "to the external network.</p>\n" @@ -279,52 +273,38 @@ #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:109 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Although requests from the external network cannot reach your internal " -"network, it is possible to\n" -"transparently redirect any requested ports on your firewall to any internal " -"IP. \n" -"To add a new redirect rule, press <b>Add</b> and complete the redirect form." -"</p>\n" +"Although requests from the external network cannot reach your internal network, it is possible to\n" +"transparently redirect any requested ports on your firewall to any internal IP. \n" +"To add a new redirect rule, press <b>Add</b> and complete the redirect form.</p>\n" "\n" -"<p>To removed any redirect rule, select it in the table and press <b>Delete.</p>\n" +"<p>To removed any redirect rule, select it in the table and press <b>Delete</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Simple broadcast configuration dialog help #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:118 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Broadcast Configuration</big></b>\n" -"<br>Broadcast packets are special UDP packets sent to the whole network to " -"find \n" +"<br>Broadcast packets are special UDP packets sent to the whole network to find \n" "neighboring computers or send information to each computer in the network.\n" -"For example, CUPS servers provide information about their printing queues " -"using broadcast packets.</p>\n" +"For example, CUPS servers provide information about their printing queues using broadcast packets.</p>\n" "\n" -"<p>SuSEfirewall2 services selected in allowed interfaces automatically add " -"needed broadcast\n" -"ports here. To remove any or add any others, edit lists of space-separated " -"ports for\n" +"<p>SuSEfirewall2 services selected in allowed interfaces automatically add needed broadcast\n" +"ports here. To remove any or add any others, edit lists of space-separated ports for\n" "particular zones.</p>\n" "\n" -"<p>Other dropped broadcast packets are logged. It could be quite a lot of " -"packets in wider networks.\n" -"To suppress logging of these packets, deselect <b>Log Not Accepted Broadcast " -"Packets</b>\n" +"<p>Other dropped broadcast packets are logged. It could be quite a lot of packets in wider networks.\n" +"To suppress logging of these packets, deselect <b>Log Not Accepted Broadcast Packets</b>\n" "for the desired zones.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:132 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Broadcast Reply</big></b><br>\n" -"Firewall usually drops packets that are sent by another machines as their " -"reply\n" -"to broadcast packets sent by your system, e.g., Samba browsing or SLP " -"browsing.</p>\n" +"Firewall usually drops packets that are sent by another machines as their reply\n" +"to broadcast packets sent by your system, e.g., Samba browsing or SLP browsing.</p>\n" "\n" -"<p>Here you can configure which packets are allowed to pass through the " -"firewall. Use <b>Add</b>\n" -"button to add a new rule. You will have to choose the firewall zone and also " -"choose from\n" +"<p>Here you can configure which packets are allowed to pass through the firewall. Use <b>Add</b>\n" +"button to add a new rule. You will have to choose the firewall zone and also choose from\n" "some already defined services or set your rule completely manually.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -332,31 +312,24 @@ #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:142 msgid "" "<p><b><big>IPsec Support</big></b>\n" -"<br>IPsec is an encrypted communication between trusted hosts or networks " -"through untrusted networks, such as\n" +"<br>IPsec is an encrypted communication between trusted hosts or networks through untrusted networks, such as\n" "the Internet. This dialog opens IPsec for an external zone using\n" "<b>Enabled</b>.</p>\n" "\n" "<p><b>Details</b> configures how to handle successfully decrypted\n" -"IPsec packets. For example, they could be handled as if they were from the " -"internal zone.</p>\n" +"IPsec packets. For example, they could be handled as if they were from the internal zone.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Base Logging configuration dialog help #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:152 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Logging Level</big></b>\n" -"<br>This is a base configuration dialog for IP packet logging settings. " -"Here,\n" -"configure logging for incoming connection packets. Outgoing ones are not " -"logged at all.</p>\n" +"<br>This is a base configuration dialog for IP packet logging settings. Here,\n" +"configure logging for incoming connection packets. Outgoing ones are not logged at all.</p>\n" "\n" -"<p>There are two groups of logged IP packets: <b>Accepted Packets</b> and " -"<b>Not Accepted Packets</b>.\n" -"You can choose from three levels of logging for each group: <b>Log All</b> " -"for logging every\n" -"packet, <b>Log Only Critical</b> for logging only interesting ones, or <b>Do " -"Not Log Any</b>\n" +"<p>There are two groups of logged IP packets: <b>Accepted Packets</b> and <b>Not Accepted Packets</b>.\n" +"You can choose from three levels of logging for each group: <b>Log All</b> for logging every\n" +"packet, <b>Log Only Critical</b> for logging only interesting ones, or <b>Do Not Log Any</b>\n" "for no logging. You should log at least critical accepted packets.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -365,23 +338,18 @@ msgid "" "<p><b><big>Summary</big></b>\n" "<br>Here, find a summary of your configuration settings.\n" -"This summary is divided into general configuration and parts for each " -"firewall zone.\n" +"This summary is divided into general configuration and parts for each firewall zone.\n" "Every existing zone is summarized here.</p>\n" "\n" "<p><b>Firewall Starting</b> shows whether the firewall is started in the\n" "<b>boot process</b> or only <b>manually</b>.</p>\n" "\n" -"<p>Firewall zones must have a network interface assigned to list the " -"following items in the summary:</p>\n" +"<p>Firewall zones must have a network interface assigned to list the following items in the summary:</p>\n" "\n" -"<p><b>Interfaces</b>: All interfaces are listed using their configuration " -"name and device name.</p>\n" +"<p><b>Interfaces</b>: All interfaces are listed using their configuration name and device name.</p>\n" "\n" -"<p><b>Open Services, Ports, and Protocols</b>: This lists all allowed " -"network services, additional\n" -"TCP (Transmission Control Protocol), UDP (User Datagram Protocol), and RPC " -"(Remote Procedure Call)\n" +"<p><b>Open Services, Ports, and Protocols</b>: This lists all allowed network services, additional\n" +"TCP (Transmission Control Protocol), UDP (User Datagram Protocol), and RPC (Remote Procedure Call)\n" "ports, and IP (Internet Protocol) protocols.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -406,8 +374,7 @@ #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:193 msgid "" "<p><b>RPC Ports</b> is a list of RPC services, such as\n" -"<tt>nlockmgr</tt>, <tt>ypbind</tt>, or <tt>portmap</tt>, separated by spaces." -"</p>" +"<tt>nlockmgr</tt>, <tt>ypbind</tt>, or <tt>portmap</tt>, separated by spaces.</p>" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Additional Services dialog help 4/6 @@ -424,8 +391,7 @@ #. please, do not modify examples #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:206 msgid "" -"<p>The <b>Port Range</b> consists of two colon-separated numbers that " -"represent\n" +"<p>The <b>Port Range</b> consists of two colon-separated numbers that represent\n" "all numbers inside the range including the numbers themselves.\n" "The first port number must be lower than the second one,\n" "for example, <tt>200:215</tt>.</p>" @@ -443,8 +409,7 @@ #: src/include/firewall/helps.rb:219 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Firewall</big></b><br />\n" -"A firewall is a defensive mechanism that protects your computer from network " -"attacks.</p>\n" +"A firewall is a defensive mechanism that protects your computer from network attacks.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: general help for Custom Rules 1/5 @@ -1018,9 +983,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:486 -msgid "" -"Network: <i>%1</i>, Protocol: <i>%2</i>, Destination port: <i>%3</i>, Source " -"port: <i>%4</i>, Options: <i>%5</i>" +msgid "Network: <i>%1</i>, Protocol: <i>%2</i>, Destination port: <i>%3</i>, Source port: <i>%4</i>, Options: <i>%5</i>" msgstr "" #: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:489 src/include/firewall/summary.rb:492 @@ -1060,8 +1023,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: Summary text item #: src/include/firewall/summary.rb:622 -msgid "" -"Firewall <b>will be stopped</b> after the configuration has been written" +msgid "Firewall <b>will be stopped</b> after the configuration has been written" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: Summary text item @@ -1177,8 +1139,7 @@ #. (!IsThisExpertConfiguration() ? #. TRANSLATORS: informative label #: src/include/firewall/uifunctions.rb:1035 -msgid "" -"Masquerading needs at least one external interface and one other interface." +msgid "Masquerading needs at least one external interface and one other interface." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: popup message Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/firstboot.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/firstboot.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/firstboot.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -37,10 +37,8 @@ #. help text #: src/clients/firstboot_auto.rb:89 msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Enable Firstboot Sequence</b> to start YaST firstboot utility on " -"the first boot after configuration.</p>\n" -"<p>Check the documentation of yast2-firstboot module for further information." -"</p>\n" +"<p>Check <b>Enable Firstboot Sequence</b> to start YaST firstboot utility on the first boot after configuration.</p>\n" +"<p>Check the documentation of yast2-firstboot module for further information.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. encoding: utf-8 @@ -201,10 +199,8 @@ #: src/clients/firstboot_finish.rb:128 msgid "" "<p>If desired, experts can use the full range of SuSE's configuration\n" -"modules at this time. Check <b>Start YaST Control Center</b> and it will " -"start\n" -"after <b>Finish</b>. Note: The Control Center does not have a back button " -"to\n" +"modules at this time. Check <b>Start YaST Control Center</b> and it will start\n" +"after <b>Finish</b>. Note: The Control Center does not have a back button to\n" "return to this installation sequence.</p>\n" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/ftp-server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/ftp-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/ftp-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -79,8 +79,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:142 -msgid "" -"The maximum data transfer rate permitted for local authenticated users (KB/s)" +msgid "The maximum data transfer rate permitted for local authenticated users (KB/s)" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -100,9 +99,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:181 -msgid "" -"Welcome message is the text to display when someone connects to the server " -"(vsftpd only)." +msgid "Welcome message is the text to display when someone connects to the server (vsftpd only)." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -112,16 +109,12 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:199 -msgid "" -"If enabled, this option will permit SSL v2 protocol connections (vsftpd " -"only)." +msgid "If enabled, this option will permit SSL v2 protocol connections (vsftpd only)." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:208 -msgid "" -"If enabled, this option will permit SSL v3 protocol connections (vsftpd " -"only)." +msgid "If enabled, this option will permit SSL v3 protocol connections (vsftpd only)." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -131,9 +124,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:226 -msgid "" -"Disallow downloading of files that were uploaded but not validated by a " -"local admin (pure-ftpd only)." +msgid "Disallow downloading of files that were uploaded but not validated by a local admin (pure-ftpd only)." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -230,8 +221,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/ftp-server.rb:362 -msgid "" -"Welcome message is the text to display when someone connects to the server." +msgid "Welcome message is the text to display when someone connects to the server." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -1310,8 +1300,7 @@ #: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:40 msgid "" "<p><b>Selected Service</b><br>\n" -" The frame shows which daemon is currently configured: <b>vsftpd, pure-" -"ftpd, \n" +" The frame shows which daemon is currently configured: <b>vsftpd, pure-ftpd, \n" " </b>. If you have installed both daemons you can switch between them.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1370,8 +1359,7 @@ #: src/include/ftp-server/helps.rb:88 msgid "" "<p><b>Umask for Authenticated Users:</b><br>\n" -"The value to which the umask for file creation is set for authenticated " -"users. \n" +"The value to which the umask for file creation is set for authenticated users. \n" "If you want to specify octal values, remember the \"0\" prefix, otherwise \n" "the value will be treated as a base 10 integer.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -1446,10 +1434,8 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Enable/Disable Anonymous and Local Users</b><br>\n" "<b>Anonymous Only</b>: If enabled, only anonymous logins are permitted.\n" -"<b>Authenticated Users Only</b>: If enabled, only authenticated users are " -"permitted.\n" -"<b>Both</b> If enabled, authenticated users and anonymous users are " -"permitted.\n" +"<b>Authenticated Users Only</b>: If enabled, only authenticated users are permitted.\n" +"<b>Both</b> If enabled, authenticated users and anonymous users are permitted.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1468,8 +1454,7 @@ "<p><b>Anonymous Can Upload</b><br>\n" "If enabled anonymous users will be permitted to upload.\n" "<i>vsftpd only: </i>If you want to allow anonymous users to upload, you \n" -"need an existing directory with write permission in the home directory after " -"login.\n" +"need an existing directory with write permission in the home directory after login.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1478,10 +1463,8 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Anonymous Can Create Dirs</b><br>\n" "If enabled, anonymous users can create directories.\n" -"<i>vsftpd only:</i> If you want to allow anonymous users to create " -"directories,\n" -"you need an existing directory with write permission in the home directory " -"after login.</p>\n" +"<i>vsftpd only:</i> If you want to allow anonymous users to create directories,\n" +"you need an existing directory with write permission in the home directory after login.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. -----------================= EXPERT SETTINGS SCREEN =============---------- @@ -1568,8 +1551,7 @@ "<p><b>Security Settings</b><br>\n" "<i>Disable SSL/TLS</i> Disable SSL/TLS encryption layer.\n" "<i>Accept SSL and TLS</i> Accept both, traditional and encrypted sessions.\n" -"<i>Refuse Connections Without SSL/TLS</i> Refuse connections that do not use " -"SSL/TLS security mechanisms, including anonymous sessions.\n" +"<i>Refuse Connections Without SSL/TLS</i> Refuse connections that do not use SSL/TLS security mechanisms, including anonymous sessions.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -1734,15 +1716,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1227 -msgid "" -"For anonymous connections the home directory of an anonymous user should " -"have no write access.\n" +msgid "For anonymous connections the home directory of an anonymous user should have no write access.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1314 -msgid "" -"For anonymous connections the home directory of an anonymous user should " -"have no write access." +msgid "For anonymous connections the home directory of an anonymous user should have no write access." msgstr "" #. Valid function of "Max Port for Pas. Mode" @@ -1766,9 +1744,7 @@ #. Valid function of "Security Settings" #. check of existing certificate #: src/include/ftp-server/wid_functions.rb:1722 -msgid "" -"The <tt>/etc/ssl/private/pure-ftpd.pem</tt> certificate for the SSL " -"connection is missing." +msgid "The <tt>/etc/ssl/private/pure-ftpd.pem</tt> certificate for the SSL connection is missing." msgstr "" #. 0 => anonymous only, 1 => authenticated only, 2=> both @@ -1795,9 +1771,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/FtpServer.rb:839 -msgid "" -"You have installed both daemons. Therefore you have to run the configuration " -"in interactive mode." +msgid "You have installed both daemons. Therefore you have to run the configuration in interactive mode." msgstr "" #. Progress stage 1/2 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/heartbeat.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/heartbeat.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/heartbeat.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -18,8 +18,7 @@ #. Command line help text for the Heartbeat module #: src/clients/heartbeat.rb:76 -msgid "" -"Configuration of high availability (HA) cluster using Heartbeat service." +msgid "Configuration of high availability (HA) cluster using Heartbeat service." msgstr "" #. translators: command line help text for add action @@ -64,8 +63,7 @@ #. translators: command line help text for the 'play' option #: src/clients/heartbeat.rb:142 -msgid "" -"Set the communication mode to 'bcast' for broadcast or 'mcast' for multicast." +msgid "Set the communication mode to 'bcast' for broadcast or 'mcast' for multicast." msgstr "" #. translators: command line help text for the 'play' option @@ -324,8 +322,7 @@ #: src/include/heartbeat/helps.rb:79 msgid "" "<p>This cluster installation program does not copy the Heartbeat\n" -"software package to cluster nodes. Prior to running this installation " -"program, the\n" +"software package to cluster nodes. Prior to running this installation program, the\n" "Heartbeat software package must be installed on all nodes that will be\n" "part of your cluster.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -340,8 +337,7 @@ #: src/include/heartbeat/helps.rb:91 msgid "" -"<p>If you need to specify a different node name after adding a node to the " -"cluster,\n" +"<p>If you need to specify a different node name after adding a node to the cluster,\n" "double-click the node to edit, change its name, then click <b>Edit</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -512,8 +508,7 @@ #: src/include/heartbeat/helps.rb:217 msgid "" -"<p><b>Keep Alive</b> specifies the interval at which a node announces itself " -"on\n" +"<p><b>Keep Alive</b> specifies the interval at which a node announces itself on\n" "the network.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -525,16 +520,14 @@ #: src/include/heartbeat/helps.rb:223 msgid "" -"<p><b>Warn Time</b> is the time after which Heartbeat warns in the log " -"files\n" +"<p><b>Warn Time</b> is the time after which Heartbeat warns in the log files\n" "that a node has been slow in sending its heartbeats. This should\n" "probably default to three times the Keep Alive interval.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/heartbeat/helps.rb:228 msgid "" -"<p><b>Init Dead Time</b> is the time a node waits after start-up for the " -"other\n" +"<p><b>Init Dead Time</b> is the time a node waits after start-up for the other\n" "nodes, given that sometimes network interfaces, routing, etc., take a\n" "while to stabilize. It should default to at least twice the Dead Time.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -556,16 +549,12 @@ #: src/include/heartbeat/helps.rb:244 msgid "" -"<p>If enabled, Heartbeat needs a <b>Ping List</b> of external nodes to " -"ping.\n" -"The minimum if IP fail is enabled is one. A maximum of four to eight nodes " -"seems sensible.</p>\n" +"<p>If enabled, Heartbeat needs a <b>Ping List</b> of external nodes to ping.\n" +"The minimum if IP fail is enabled is one. A maximum of four to eight nodes seems sensible.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/heartbeat/helps.rb:247 -msgid "" -"<p>For more complex configurations, Heartbeat also supports <i>Ping Groups." +msgid "<p>For more complex configurations, Heartbeat also supports <i>Ping Groups</i>." msgstr "" #: src/include/heartbeat/helps.rb:250 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/http-server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/http-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/http-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -343,38 +343,29 @@ #. translators: Wizard dialog 1/5 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:38 -msgid "" -"<p>The <b>Port</b> value defines the port on which Apache2 listens. The " -"default is 80.</p>" +msgid "<p>The <b>Port</b> value defines the port on which Apache2 listens. The default is 80.</p>" msgstr "" #. translators: Wizard dialog 1/5 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:42 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Listen on Interfaces</b> contains the list of all IP addresses " -"configured for this host. Checked IP addresses are those on which Apache2 " -"listens. If you are unsure, check all.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Listen on Interfaces</b> contains the list of all IP addresses configured for this host. Checked IP addresses are those on which Apache2 listens. If you are unsure, check all.</p>" msgstr "" #. translators: Wizard dialog 2/5 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:46 -msgid "" -"<p>Here, enable the script languages the Apache2 server should support.</p>" +msgid "<p>Here, enable the script languages the Apache2 server should support.</p>" msgstr "" #. translators: Wizard dialog 5/5 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:50 -msgid "" -"<p>The summary displays the settings that will be written to the Apache2 " -"configuration when you press <b>Finish</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>The summary displays the settings that will be written to the Apache2 configuration when you press <b>Finish</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. translators: Wizard dialog 5/5 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:54 msgid "" "<p>Press <b>HTTP Server Expert Configuration</b> \n" -"\t\tto create a more detailed configuration before writing the configuration." -"</p>" +"\t\tto create a more detailed configuration before writing the configuration.</p>" msgstr "" #. module dialog help 1/3 @@ -384,8 +375,7 @@ "The table contains a list of all available Apache2 modules.\n" "The first column contains the name of the module. \n" "The second column shows whether the module should be\n" -"loaded by the server. Enabled modules will be loaded. The last column " -"displays a short description\n" +"loaded by the server. Enabled modules will be loaded. The last column displays a short description\n" "of the module.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -393,8 +383,7 @@ #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:67 msgid "" "<p>To change the status of a module, \n" -"choose the appropriate entry of the table and click <b>Toggle Status</b>.\n" +"choose the appropriate entry of the table and click <b>Toggle Status</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. module dialog help 3/3 @@ -408,8 +397,7 @@ #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:75 msgid "" "<p><b><big>HTTP Server Settings</big></b><br>\n" -"Activate the HTTP server by choosing <b>Enabled</b>. To deactivate it, " -"choose\n" +"Activate the HTTP server by choosing <b>Enabled</b>. To deactivate it, choose\n" "<b>Disabled</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -440,9 +428,7 @@ #. server configuration overview help 2/2 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:102 -msgid "" -"<p>Choose an appropriate entry from the table and click <b>Edit</b> to " -"change settings.</p>" +msgid "<p>Choose an appropriate entry from the table and click <b>Edit</b> to change settings.</p>" msgstr "" #. help of menu button for server configuration 1/1 @@ -455,8 +441,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b><big>Configured Hosts</big></b><br>\n" "This is a list of already configured hosts. One of the hosts is \n" -"marked as default (the asterisk next to the server name). A default host is " -"used if no other host\n" +"marked as default (the asterisk next to the server name). A default host is used if no other host\n" "matches for an incoming request. To set a host as default,\n" "press <b>Set as Default</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -464,49 +449,40 @@ #. hosts list help 2/2 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:116 msgid "" -"<p>Choose an appropriate entry of the table and click <b>Edit</b> to change " -"the host.\n" -"To add a host, click <b>Add</b>. To remove a host, select it and click " -"<b>Delete</b>.</p>" +"<p>Choose an appropriate entry of the table and click <b>Edit</b> to change the host.\n" +"To add a host, click <b>Add</b>. To remove a host, select it and click <b>Delete</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. host editing help 1/2 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:120 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Host Configuration</big></b><br>\n" -"To edit the host settings, choose the appropriate entry of the table then " -"click <b>Edit</b>.\n" -"To add a new option, click <b>Add</b>. To remove an option, select it and " -"click <b>Delete</b>.</p>" +"To edit the host settings, choose the appropriate entry of the table then click <b>Edit</b>.\n" +"To add a new option, click <b>Add</b>. To remove an option, select it and click <b>Delete</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. host editing help 2/2 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:126 msgid "" "<p>The <b>Server Resolution</b> options set the resolution when using\n" -"\tvirtual hosts. However, when you choose <b>Resolution via HTTP Headers,\n" +"\tvirtual hosts. However, when you choose <b>Resolution via HTTP Headers</b>,\n" "\tthe default server will never be served requests to the IP address of\n" -"\ta name-based virtual host. If you plan to configure a SSL based vhost, use " -"<b>Resolution via IP address</b></p>" +"\ta name-based virtual host. If you plan to configure a SSL based vhost, use <b>Resolution via IP address</b></p>" msgstr "" #. listen dialog editor help 1/2 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:133 msgid "" "<p><b><big><i>Listen</i> Settings for a Host</big></b><br>\n" -"The <i>Listen</i> directive allows selection of ports and network " -"interfaces\n" +"The <i>Listen</i> directive allows selection of ports and network interfaces\n" "where the HTTP server should listen for incoming requests.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. listen dialog editor help 2/2 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:139 msgid "" -"<p>Choose an appropriate entry of the table and click <b>Edit</b> to change " -"the entry.\n" -"To add a new entry, click <b>Add</b>. To remove an entry, select it and " -"click <b>Delete</b>.</p>" +"<p>Choose an appropriate entry of the table and click <b>Edit</b> to change the entry.\n" +"To add a new entry, click <b>Add</b>. To remove an entry, select it and click <b>Delete</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. ssl options dialog help 1/4 @@ -522,8 +498,7 @@ #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:150 msgid "" "<p>General behavior is determined by the SSL option. The host can\n" -"not support SSL at all (<tt>No SSL</tt>), allow both non-SSL and SSL access " -"(<tt>Allowed</tt>),\n" +"not support SSL at all (<tt>No SSL</tt>), allow both non-SSL and SSL access (<tt>Allowed</tt>),\n" "or accept only connections encrypted via SSL (<tt>Required</tt>).\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -531,10 +506,8 @@ #. ssl options dialog help 3/4 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:157 msgid "" -"<p>Choose an appropriate option of the table and click <b>Edit</b> to change " -"the option.\n" -"To add a new option, click <b>Add</b>. To remove an option, select it and " -"click <b>Delete</b>.</p>" +"<p>Choose an appropriate option of the table and click <b>Edit</b> to change the option.\n" +"To add a new option, click <b>Add</b>. To remove an option, select it and click <b>Delete</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. ssl options dialog help 3/4 (empty in simple mode) @@ -558,16 +531,14 @@ #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:175 msgid "" "<p><b><big>New Host</big></b><br>\n" -"This dialog allows you to enter a basic information about a new virtual host." -"</p>" +"This dialog allows you to enter a basic information about a new virtual host.</p>" msgstr "" #. new host dialog help 2/3 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:179 msgid "" "<p><b>Server Identification</b> specifies the content and\n" -"the presentation of the the new virtual host. <b>Server Name</b> is the DNS " -"name returned as a part\n" +"the presentation of the the new virtual host. <b>Server Name</b> is the DNS name returned as a part\n" "of the HTTP headers of the server response. <b>Server Contents Root</b>\n" "is an absolute path to a directory containing all documents provided by\n" "this virtual host. <b>Administrator E-Mail</b> allows setup of an e-mail\n" @@ -582,11 +553,9 @@ "settings it should use to create a response for an HTTP request. \n" "There are two basic approaches. If using HTTP headers\n" "from the incoming request, the server looks up the host name specified by\n" -"the HTTP request headers. The other possibility is to determine the virtual " -"host\n" +"the HTTP request headers. The other possibility is to determine the virtual host\n" "by the IP address used by the client when connecting to the server.\n" -"If you plan to configure SSL-based vhost, use <b>Resolution via IP address\n" +"If you plan to configure SSL-based vhost, use <b>Resolution via IP address</b>\n" "Consult the Apache2 manual for further details.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -594,16 +563,14 @@ #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:200 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Details for New Host</big></b><br>\n" -"This dialog allows you to specify additional information about a new virtual " -"host.</p>" +"This dialog allows you to specify additional information about a new virtual host.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced new host dialog 2/5 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:204 msgid "" "<p>Select <b>Enable CGI Support</b>\n" -"to run CGI scripts in the path in <b>CGI Directory Path</b> using the alias " -"<tt>/cgi-bin/</tt>.</p>" +"to run CGI scripts in the path in <b>CGI Directory Path</b> using the alias <tt>/cgi-bin/</tt>.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced new host dialog 3/5 @@ -617,10 +584,7 @@ #. advanced new host dialog 4/5 #: src/include/http-server/helps.rb:215 -msgid "" -"<p>In <b>Directory Index</b>, enter a space-separated list of files that " -"Apache should look for and provide when a URL for a directory (one that ends " -"in <tt>/</tt>) is requested. The first matching file found is provided.</p>" +msgid "<p>In <b>Directory Index</b>, enter a space-separated list of files that Apache should look for and provide when a URL for a directory (one that ends in <tt>/</tt>) is requested. The first matching file found is provided.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced new host dialog 5/5 @@ -745,9 +709,7 @@ #. notification about package needed 1/2 #: src/modules/HttpServer.rb:170 -msgid "" -"<p>To configure the HTTP server, the <b>%1</b> packages must be installed." +msgid "<p>To configure the HTTP server, the <b>%1</b> packages must be installed.</p>" msgstr "" #. notification about package needed 2/2 @@ -1415,9 +1377,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:32 -msgid "" -"Mapping different parts of the host file system in the document tree and for " -"URL redirection" +msgid "Mapping different parts of the host file system in the document tree and for URL redirection" msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:47 @@ -1441,8 +1401,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:96 -msgid "" -"Generates directory indices, automatically, similar to the Unix ls command" +msgid "Generates directory indices, automatically, similar to the Unix ls command" msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:117 @@ -1470,9 +1429,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:187 -msgid "" -"Associates the requested file name's extensions with the file's behavior and " -"content" +msgid "Associates the requested file name's extensions with the file's behavior and content" msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:212 @@ -1480,9 +1437,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:222 -msgid "" -"Allows the setting of environment variables based on characteristics of the " -"request" +msgid "Allows the setting of environment variables based on characteristics of the request" msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:233 @@ -1510,9 +1465,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:302 -msgid "" -"Allows an LDAP directory to be used to store the database for HTTP Basic " -"authentication" +msgid "Allows an LDAP directory to be used to store the database for HTTP Basic authentication" msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:320 src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:495 @@ -1544,9 +1497,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:413 -msgid "" -"Pass the response body through an external program before delivery to the " -"client" +msgid "Pass the response body through an external program before delivery to the client" msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:426 @@ -1566,9 +1517,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:469 -msgid "" -"LDAP connection pooling and result caching services for use by other LDAP " -"modules" +msgid "LDAP connection pooling and result caching services for use by other LDAP modules" msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:489 @@ -1576,8 +1525,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:509 -msgid "" -"Determines the MIME type of a file by looking at a few bytes of its contents" +msgid "Determines the MIME type of a file by looking at a few bytes of its contents" msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:518 @@ -1601,8 +1549,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:592 -msgid "" -"Provides a rule-based rewriting engine to rewrite requested URLs on the fly" +msgid "Provides a rule-based rewriting engine to rewrite requested URLs on the fly" msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:619 @@ -1610,14 +1557,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:628 -msgid "" -"Strong cryptography using the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) and Transport Layer " -"Security (TLS) protocols" +msgid "Strong cryptography using the Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) and Transport Layer Security (TLS) protocols" msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:668 -msgid "" -"Provides an environment variable with a unique identifier for each request" +msgid "Provides an environment variable with a unique identifier for each request" msgstr "" #: src/modules/YaPI/HTTPDModules.pm:674 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/inetd.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/inetd.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/inetd.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -433,15 +433,13 @@ "<p><b><big>Services Status:</big></b><br>\n" "All services marked with <b>---</b> are inactive (locked).\n" "All services marked with <b>On</b> are active (unlocked).\n" -"All services marked with <b>NI</b> are not installed and cannot be " -"configured.</p>" +"All services marked with <b>NI</b> are not installed and cannot be configured.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:81 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Changing Service Status:</big></b><br>\n" -"Select the service to enable or disable and press <b>Toggle Status (On or " -"Off)</b>.</p>\n" +"Select the service to enable or disable and press <b>Toggle Status (On or Off)</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:84 @@ -466,8 +464,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b><big>Canceling Configuration:</big></b>\n" "Leave the configuration untouched by pressing the <b>Cancel</b> button.\n" -"If you do so, all your changes will be lost and the original configuration " -"will remain.</p>\n" +"If you do so, all your changes will be lost and the original configuration will remain.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Help for the EditOrCreateServiceDlg () dialog. @@ -495,9 +492,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:122 -msgid "" -"<p>This is a short description. For details, see <b>info xinetd.conf</b>.\n" +msgid "<p>This is a short description. For details, see <b>info xinetd.conf</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:125 @@ -516,8 +511,7 @@ #: src/include/inetd/helps.rb:134 msgid "" -"<p>The <b>protocol</b> must be a valid protocol as specified in /etc/" -"protocols.\n" +"<p>The <b>protocol</b> must be a valid protocol as specified in /etc/protocols.\n" "Examples include <i>tcp</i>,<i>udp</i>,<i>rpc/tcp</i>, and <i>rpc/udp</i>.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/installation.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/installation.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/installation.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -34,45 +34,31 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: help text #: src/clients/clone_proposal.rb:39 msgid "" -"<p>Use <b>Clone System Settings</b> if you want to create an AutoYaST " -"profile.\n" -"AutoYaST is a way to do a complete SUSE Linux installation without user " -"interaction. AutoYaST\n" -"needs a profile to know what the installed system should look like. If this " -"option is\n" -"selected, a profile of the current system is stored in <tt>/root/autoinst." -"xml</tt>.</p>" +"<p>Use <b>Clone System Settings</b> if you want to create an AutoYaST profile.\n" +"AutoYaST is a way to do a complete SUSE Linux installation without user interaction. AutoYaST\n" +"needs a profile to know what the installed system should look like. If this option is\n" +"selected, a profile of the current system is stored in <tt>/root/autoinst.xml</tt>.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>Uzu la elekteblon <b>Agordoj de la klonsistemo</b> se vi volas krei " -"AutoYaST-profilon.\n" -"AutoYaST estas maniero fari kompletan instalon de SUSE Linux sen interveno " -"de la uzanto. AutoYaST\n" -"bezonas profilon por scii kia devas esti la instalota sistemo. Se ĉi tiu " -"elekteblo estas\n" -"elektita, profilo de la aktuala sistemo estas konversita en <tt>/root/" -"autoinst.xml</tt>.</p>" +"<p>Uzu la elekteblon <b>Agordoj de la klonsistemo</b> se vi volas krei AutoYaST-profilon.\n" +"AutoYaST estas maniero fari kompletan instalon de SUSE Linux sen interveno de la uzanto. AutoYaST\n" +"bezonas profilon por scii kia devas esti la instalota sistemo. Se ĉi tiu elekteblo estas\n" +"elektita, profilo de la aktuala sistemo estas konversita en <tt>/root/autoinst.xml</tt>.</p>" #. this is a heading #: src/clients/clone_proposal.rb:68 -#| msgid "Writing the system configuration..." msgid "Clone System Configuration" msgstr "Agordo de la klonsistemo" #. this is a menu entry #: src/clients/clone_proposal.rb:70 -#| msgid "&Skip Configuration" msgid "&Clone System Configuration" msgstr "&Agordoj de la klonsistemo" #. TRANSLATORS: Installation overview #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: src/clients/clone_proposal.rb:98 -msgid "" -"The AutoYaST profile will be written under /root/autoinst.xml (do not write it</a>)." -msgstr "" -"La AutoYaST-profilo konserviĝos en /root/autoinst.xml (ne " -"konversi ĝin</a>)." +msgid "The AutoYaST profile will be written under /root/autoinst.xml (do not write it</a>)." +msgstr "La AutoYaST-profilo konserviĝos en /root/autoinst.xml (ne konversi ĝin</a>)." #. TRANSLATORS: Installation overview #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text @@ -117,12 +103,8 @@ msgstr "Instalado el Ekzaktaj Kopioj de Diskoj" #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:119 -msgid "" -"Here you can choose to use Novell pre-defined images to speed up RPM " -"installation." -msgstr "" -"Ĉi tie vi povas elekti uzi antaŭdifinitajn ekzaktajn kopiojn de diskoj el " -"Novell por rapidigi RPM-instaladon." +msgid "Here you can choose to use Novell pre-defined images to speed up RPM installation." +msgstr "Ĉi tie vi povas elekti uzi antaŭdifinitajn ekzaktajn kopiojn de diskoj el Novell por rapidigi RPM-instaladon." #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:133 msgid "&Install from Images" @@ -133,12 +115,8 @@ msgstr "&Ne Instali el Ekzaktaj Kopioj de Diskoj" #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:153 -msgid "" -"Custom images deployment - this needs a URL to be configured as installation " -"source" -msgstr "" -"Propra disponigo el ekzaktaj kopioj de diskoj - ĉi tio bezonas agorditan " -"retejan adreson kiel instala fonto." +msgid "Custom images deployment - this needs a URL to be configured as installation source" +msgstr "Propra disponigo el ekzaktaj kopioj de diskoj - ĉi tio bezonas agorditan retejan adreson kiel instala fonto." #. Image name, Image location #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:162 @@ -146,20 +124,12 @@ msgstr "Ĉi tie vi povas krei proprajn ekzaktajn kopiojn de diskoj.\n" #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:163 -msgid "" -"You have to configure the software selection first before you can create an " -"image here" -msgstr "" -"Vi devas unue agordi la program-elektadon antaŭ vi povi krei ekzaktajn " -"kopiojn de diskoj ĉi tie" +msgid "You have to configure the software selection first before you can create an image here" +msgstr "Vi devas unue agordi la program-elektadon antaŭ vi povi krei ekzaktajn kopiojn de diskoj ĉi tie" #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:174 -msgid "" -"Create an image file (AutoYaST will fetch it from the given location during " -"installation)" -msgstr "" -"Krei ekzaktan dosierkopion de disko (AutoYaST venigos ĝin el la elekta loko " -"dum instalado)" +msgid "Create an image file (AutoYaST will fetch it from the given location during installation)" +msgstr "Krei ekzaktan dosierkopion de disko (AutoYaST venigos ĝin el la elekta loko dum instalado)" #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:181 msgid "Create Image" @@ -175,8 +145,7 @@ #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:211 msgid "Create ISO (image and autoinst.xml will be on the media)" -msgstr "" -"Krei ISO (ekzakta kopio de disko kaj autoinst.xml estos en la datumportilo)" +msgstr "Krei ISO (ekzakta kopio de disko kaj autoinst.xml estos en la datumportilo)" #. TRANSLATORS: help text #. TRANSLATORS: help text @@ -184,51 +153,37 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Installation from Images</b> is used to speed the installation up.\n" "Images contain compressed snapshots of an installed system matching your\n" -"selection of patterns. The rest of the packages which are not contained in " -"the\n" +"selection of patterns. The rest of the packages which are not contained in the\n" "images will be installed from packages the standard way.</p>\n" msgstr "" -"<p><b>Instalado el Ekzaktaj Kopioj de Diskoj</b> estas uzata por rapidigi la " -"instaladon.\n" -"Ekzaktaj Kopioj de Diskoj enhavas densigitajn kopiojn el instalita sistemo " -"laŭ via\n" -"selekto de modeloj. La restaj pakaĵoj kiuj ne estas en la diskokopioj " -"instaliĝos el pakaĵoj per ĝenerala maniero.<p>\n" +"<p><b>Instalado el Ekzaktaj Kopioj de Diskoj</b> estas uzata por rapidigi la instaladon.\n" +"Ekzaktaj Kopioj de Diskoj enhavas densigitajn kopiojn el instalita sistemo laŭ via\n" +"selekto de modeloj. La restaj pakaĵoj kiuj ne estas en la diskokopioj instaliĝos el pakaĵoj per ĝenerala maniero.<p>\n" #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:233 msgid "" "<p><b>Creating own Images</b> is used if you\n" -"want to skip the complete step of RPM installation. Instead AutoYaST will " -"dump an\n" -"image on the harddisk which is a lot faster and can be pre-configured " -"already.\n" -"Everything else than RPM installation is done like during a normal auto-" -"installation.</p>" +"want to skip the complete step of RPM installation. Instead AutoYaST will dump an\n" +"image on the harddisk which is a lot faster and can be pre-configured already.\n" +"Everything else than RPM installation is done like during a normal auto-installation.</p>" msgstr "" "<p><b>Krei Proprajn Ekzaktajn Kopiojn de Diskoj</b> estas uzata se vi\n" -"volas preterpasi la kompletan paŝon de RPM-instalado. Anstataŭ AutoYaST " -"ŝutos\n" -"ekzaktan kopion de disko al via fiksita disko, kiu estas multe pli rapida " -"kaj povas esti jam antaŭ-agordita.\n" +"volas preterpasi la kompletan paŝon de RPM-instalado. Anstataŭ AutoYaST ŝutos\n" +"ekzaktan kopion de disko al via fiksita disko, kiu estas multe pli rapida kaj povas esti jam antaŭ-agordita.\n" "Ĉio alia ol RPM-instalado fariĝos dum ordinara aŭtoinstalado.</p>" #: src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:336 src/clients/deploy_image_auto.rb:347 msgid "you need to do the software selection before creating an image" -msgstr "" -"vi devas fari la programar-elektadon antaŭ krei ekzaktan kopion de disko" +msgstr "vi devas fari la programar-elektadon antaŭ krei ekzaktan kopion de disko" #. TRANSLATORS: help text #: src/clients/deploying_proposal.rb:76 msgid "" -"<p>Note that when installing from images, the time stamps of all packages " -"originating from the images will\n" -"not match the installation date but rather the date the image was created." +"<p>Note that when installing from images, the time stamps of all packages originating from the images will\n" +"not match the installation date but rather the date the image was created.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>Rimarku kiam instalas el ekzaktaj kopioj de diskoj, la tempindikoj de " -"ĉiuj pakaĵoj kiuj devenas el diskokopioj\n" -"ne kongruos kun la instala dato sed kun la dato de kiam la diskokopio estis " -"kreita.</p>" +"<p>Rimarku kiam instalas el ekzaktaj kopioj de diskoj, la tempindikoj de ĉiuj pakaĵoj kiuj devenas el diskokopioj\n" +"ne kongruos kun la instala dato sed kun la dato de kiam la diskokopio estis kreita.</p>" #. TRANSLATORS: help text #: src/clients/deploying_proposal.rb:80 @@ -270,17 +225,13 @@ #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: src/clients/deploying_proposal.rb:166 msgid "Installation from images is enabled (disable</a>)." -msgstr "" -"Instalado el ekzaktaj kopioj de diskoj estas aktiva (malaktivigi</a>)." +msgstr "Instalado el ekzaktaj kopioj de diskoj estas aktiva (malaktivigi</a>)." #. TRANSLATORS: Installation overview #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: src/clients/deploying_proposal.rb:181 msgid "Installation from images is disabled (enable</a>)." -msgstr "" -"Instalado el ekzaktaj kopioj de diskoj estas malaktiva (aktivigi</a>)." +msgstr "Instalado el ekzaktaj kopioj de diskoj estas malaktiva (aktivigi</a>)." #. progress step title #: src/clients/desktop_finish.rb:70 @@ -405,15 +356,12 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "The license must be accepted before the installation continues.\n" -"Use <b>License Translations...</b> to show the license in all available " -"translations.\n" +"Use <b>License Translations...</b> to show the license in all available translations.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Nepras konsenti kun la kondiĉoj de la permesilo por la daŭrigo de la " -"instalado.\n" -"Uzu la elekteblon <b>Tradukoj de la permesilo...</b> por vidi la permesilon " -"en ĉiuj disponeblaj tradukoj.\n" +"Nepras konsenti kun la kondiĉoj de la permesilo por la daŭrigo de la instalado.\n" +"Uzu la elekteblon <b>Tradukoj de la permesilo...</b> por vidi la permesilon en ĉiuj disponeblaj tradukoj.\n" "</p>\n" #. help text, continued @@ -462,14 +410,12 @@ #: src/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:230 #: src/clients/inst_download_release_notes.rb:139 #: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:299 -#| msgid "Release Notes" msgid "Re&lease Notes..." msgstr "E&ldonnotoj..." #: src/clients/inst_complex_welcome.rb:342 msgid "You must accept the license to install this product" -msgstr "" -"Nepras konsenti kun la kondiĉoj de la permesilo por instali ĉi tiun produkton" +msgstr "Nepras konsenti kun la kondiĉoj de la permesilo por instali ĉi tiun produkton" #. TRANSLATORS: check box, see #ZMD #: src/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:107 @@ -549,20 +495,14 @@ #: src/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:214 msgid "" "<p>Use <b>Clone</b> if you want to create an AutoYaST profile.\n" -"AutoYaST is a way to do a complete SUSE Linux installation without user " -"interaction. AutoYaST\n" -"needs a profile to know what the installed system should look like. If this " -"option is\n" -"selected, a profile of the current system is stored in <tt>/root/autoinst." -"xml</tt>.</p>" +"AutoYaST is a way to do a complete SUSE Linux installation without user interaction. AutoYaST\n" +"needs a profile to know what the installed system should look like. If this option is\n" +"selected, a profile of the current system is stored in <tt>/root/autoinst.xml</tt>.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>Uzu la elekteblon <b>Kloni</b> se vi volas krei AutoYaST-profilon.\n" -"AutoYaST estas maniero fari kompletan instalon de SUSE Linux sen interveno " -"de la uzanto. AutoYaST\n" -"bezonas profilon por scii kia devas esti la instalota sistemo. Se ĉi tiu " -"elekteblo estas\n" -"elektita, profilo de la aktuala sistemo estas konversita en <tt>/root/" -"autoinst.xml</tt>.</p>" +"AutoYaST estas maniero fari kompletan instalon de SUSE Linux sen interveno de la uzanto. AutoYaST\n" +"bezonas profilon por scii kia devas esti la instalota sistemo. Se ĉi tiu elekteblo estas\n" +"elektita, profilo de la aktuala sistemo estas konversita en <tt>/root/autoinst.xml</tt>.</p>" #. Dialog busy message #. TRANSLATORS: busy message @@ -574,10 +514,8 @@ #. #187558 #. Load Add-On products configured in the fist stage #: src/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:308 -msgid "" -"<p>To clone the current system, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>Por kloni la aktualan sistemon, la <b>%1</b> pakaĵo vi devas instali.</p>" +msgid "<p>To clone the current system, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" +msgstr "<p>Por kloni la aktualan sistemon, la <b>%1</b> pakaĵo vi devas instali.</p>" #: src/clients/inst_congratulate.rb:311 msgid "<p>Install it now?</p>" @@ -617,12 +555,10 @@ #: src/clients/inst_deploy_image.rb:199 msgid "" "Debugging has been turned on.\n" -"YaST will open a software manager for you to check the current status of " -"packages." +"YaST will open a software manager for you to check the current status of packages." msgstr "" "Sencimigo estas ŝaltita.\n" -"YaST malfermos programarmastrumilon por ke vi kontrolu la aktualan staton de " -"la pakaĵoj." +"YaST malfermos programarmastrumilon por ke vi kontrolu la aktualan staton de la pakaĵoj." #. unknown image #: src/clients/inst_deploy_image.rb:375 @@ -656,12 +592,8 @@ msgstr "&Disko uzota" #: src/clients/inst_disk_for_image.rb:93 -msgid "" -"Select the disk, which the image will be deployed to. All data on the disk " -"will be lost and the disk will be partitioned as defined in the image." -msgstr "" -"Elektu la diskon kiun oni disponigos por la bildo. Ĉiuj datumoj en la disko " -"perdiĝos kaj la disko estos dispartigita kiel difinite en la bildo." +msgid "Select the disk, which the image will be deployed to. All data on the disk will be lost and the disk will be partitioned as defined in the image." +msgstr "Elektu la diskon kiun oni disponigos por la bildo. Ĉiuj datumoj en la disko perdiĝos kaj la disko estos dispartigita kiel difinite en la bildo." #: src/clients/inst_disk_for_image.rb:100 msgid "Hard Disk for Image Deployment" @@ -694,7 +626,6 @@ msgstr "Agordi &iSCSI-diskoj" #: src/clients/inst_disks_activate.rb:112 -#| msgid "Saving network configuration..." msgid "Change Net&work Configuration" msgstr "Ŝanĝi agordon de la ret&karto" @@ -739,8 +670,7 @@ #. yes/no popup question #: src/clients/inst_extrasources.rb:168 msgid "Start the software manager to check and install the updates?" -msgstr "" -"Ĉu startigi la programarmastrumilon por kontroli kaj instali ĝisdatigojn?" +msgstr "Ĉu startigi la programarmastrumilon por kontroli kaj instali ĝisdatigojn?" #. check box #: src/clients/inst_extrasources.rb:512 @@ -840,7 +770,6 @@ #. dialog caption #: src/clients/inst_installation_options.rb:83 -#| msgid "Installation Mode" msgid "Installation Options" msgstr "Instalopcioj" @@ -863,9 +792,6 @@ #. help text for installation method #: src/clients/inst_installation_options.rb:201 -#| msgid "" -#| "<p><big><b>Installation Mode</b></big><br>\n" -#| "Select what to do:</p>" msgid "<p><big><b>Installation Options</b></big></p>" msgstr "<p><big><b>Instalopcioj</b></big></p>" @@ -884,23 +810,17 @@ #: src/clients/inst_installation_options.rb:208 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"To install an add-on product from separate media together with &product;, " -"select\n" +"To install an add-on product from separate media together with &product;, select\n" "<b>Include Add-on Products from Separate Media</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Por instali kromajn produktojn per apartaj memoriloj kune kun &product;, " -"elektut\n" +"Por instali kromajn produktojn per apartaj memoriloj kune kun &product;, elektut\n" "<b>Inkluzivi kromajn produktojn per apartaj memoriloj</b>.</p>\n" #. help text: additional help for installation #: src/clients/inst_installation_options.rb:211 -msgid "" -"<p>If you need specific hardware drivers for installation, see <i>http://" -"drivers.suse.com</i> site.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>Se vi bezonas specifajn aparatarpelilojn por la instalo, vizitu la " -"retejon <i>http://drivers.suse.com</i> site.</p>" +msgid "<p>If you need specific hardware drivers for installation, see <i>http://drivers.suse.com</i> site.</p>" +msgstr "<p>Se vi bezonas specifajn aparatarpelilojn por la instalo, vizitu la retejon <i>http://drivers.suse.com</i> site.</p>" #. Error message #: src/clients/inst_license.rb:128 @@ -956,12 +876,10 @@ #: src/clients/inst_network_check.rb:145 msgid "" "<p>A configured network is needed for using remote repositories\n" -"or add-on products. If you do not use remote repositories, skip the " -"configuration.</p>\n" +"or add-on products. If you do not use remote repositories, skip the configuration.</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>Agordita reto estas neceso por uzi forajn deponejojn\n" -"aŭ kromajn produktojn. Se vi ne uzas forajn deponejojn, preterpasu tiun ĉi " -"agordadon.</p>\n" +"aŭ kromajn produktojn. Se vi ne uzas forajn deponejojn, preterpasu tiun ĉi agordadon.</p>\n" #. error popup #: src/clients/inst_network_check.rb:187 @@ -975,36 +893,26 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: help text, part 1 #: src/clients/inst_new_desktop.rb:57 msgid "" -"<p>At Linux <b>choice</b> is a top priority. <i>openSUSE</i> offers a " -"number \n" -"of different desktop environments. Below you see a list of the 2 major " -"ones \n" +"<p>At Linux <b>choice</b> is a top priority. <i>openSUSE</i> offers a number \n" +"of different desktop environments. Below you see a list of the 2 major ones \n" "<b>GNOME</b> and <b>KDE</b>.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>Ĉe Linukso <b>elektado</b> estas unuaranga prioritato. <i>openSUSE</i> " -"proponas plurajn \n" +"<p>Ĉe Linukso <b>elektado</b> estas unuaranga prioritato. <i>openSUSE</i> proponas plurajn \n" "malsamajn labortablajn mediojn. Malsupre vi vidas liston de la du ĉefaj \n" "<b>GNOME</b> kaj <b>KDE</b>.</p>" #. TRANSLATORS: help text, part 3 #: src/clients/inst_new_desktop.rb:63 msgid "" -"<p>You may select alternative desktop environments (or one of minimal " -"installation patterns)\n" -"that could fit your needs better using the <b>Other</b> option . Later in " -"the software \n" -"selection or after installation, you can change your selection or add " -"additional desktop \n" +"<p>You may select alternative desktop environments (or one of minimal installation patterns)\n" +"that could fit your needs better using the <b>Other</b> option . Later in the software \n" +"selection or after installation, you can change your selection or add additional desktop \n" "environments. This screen allows you to set the default.</p>" msgstr "" -"<p>Vi povas elekti instalon kun pluraj alternativoj de labortabla medio (aŭ " -"minimuman ŝabloninstalon)\n" -"kiu plej bone adaptiĝu al viaj bezonoj per la elekteblo <b>Alia</b>. Poste " -"en la selektado \n" -"de programaro aŭ post la instalo, vi povas ŝanĝi vian elekton aŭ aldoni " -"kroman labortablan \n" -"medio. Ĉi tiu ekrano permesas al vi agordi la aprioran labortablan medion." +"<p>Vi povas elekti instalon kun pluraj alternativoj de labortabla medio (aŭ minimuman ŝabloninstalon)\n" +"kiu plej bone adaptiĝu al viaj bezonoj per la elekteblo <b>Alia</b>. Poste en la selektado \n" +"de programaro aŭ post la instalo, vi povas ŝanĝi vian elekton aŭ aldoni kroman labortablan \n" +"medio. Ĉi tiu ekrano permesas al vi agordi la aprioran labortablan medion.</p>" #. TRANSLATORS: dialog caption #: src/clients/inst_new_desktop.rb:121 @@ -1052,7 +960,6 @@ #. force_reset #: src/clients/inst_proposal.rb:220 -#| msgid "Automatic Configuration" msgid "Location of Stored Configuration" msgstr "Loko de la enmemorigita agordo" @@ -1140,7 +1047,6 @@ #. menu button #: src/clients/inst_proposal.rb:998 src/clients/inst_proposal.rb:1171 -#| msgid "&Skip Configuration" msgid "&Export Configuration" msgstr "&Elporti agordojn" @@ -1148,8 +1054,7 @@ #. May contain newlines, but don't make it very much longer than the original. #: src/clients/inst_proposal.rb:1069 msgid "Click a headline to make changes or use the \"Change...\" menu below." -msgstr "" -"Alklaku titolon por fari ŝanĝojn aŭ uzu la menueron \"Ŝanĝi...\" malsupre." +msgstr "Alklaku titolon por fari ŝanĝojn aŭ uzu la menueron \"Ŝanĝi...\" malsupre." #: src/clients/inst_proposal.rb:1073 msgid "Click a headline to make changes." @@ -1178,13 +1083,11 @@ #: src/clients/inst_proposal.rb:1217 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Select <b>Install</b> to perform a new installation with the values " -"displayed.\n" +"Select <b>Install</b> to perform a new installation with the values displayed.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Elektu <b>Instali</b> por efektivigi novan instaladon kun la videblaj " -"valoroj.\n" +"Elektu <b>Instali</b> por efektivigi novan instaladon kun la videblaj valoroj.\n" "</p>\n" #. kicking out, bug #203811 @@ -1215,8 +1118,7 @@ "</p>\n" msgstr "" "<p>\n" -"Via fiksita disko ankoraŭ ne estas modifita. Vi povas ankoraŭ sendanĝere " -"halti.\n" +"Via fiksita disko ankoraŭ ne estas modifita. Vi povas ankoraŭ sendanĝere halti.\n" "</p>\n" #. Help text for update proposal @@ -1303,8 +1205,7 @@ msgstr "" "<p>Eble kelkaj proponoj estas\n" "blokitaj de la administranto de la sistemo kaj ne eblas ŝanĝi ilin. Se vi \n" -"bezonas ŝanĝi unu el la blokitaj proponoj, kontaktu la sistemadministranton." -"</p>\n" +"bezonas ŝanĝi unu el la blokitaj proponoj, kontaktu la sistemadministranton.</p>\n" #. FATE #120373 #: src/clients/inst_proposal.rb:1369 @@ -1461,12 +1362,10 @@ #: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:241 msgid "" "\n" -"Check 'drivers.suse.com' if you need specific hardware drivers for " -"installation." +"Check 'drivers.suse.com' if you need specific hardware drivers for installation." msgstr "" "\n" -"Kontrolu 'drivers.suse.com' se vi bezonas specifajn aparatarpelilojn por la " -"instalo." +"Kontrolu 'drivers.suse.com' se vi bezonas specifajn aparatarpelilojn por la instalo." #. pop-up error report #: src/clients/inst_system_analysis.rb:255 @@ -1567,12 +1466,10 @@ #: src/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:245 msgid "" "<p>Here you see all software repositories found\n" -"on the system you are upgrading. Enable the ones you want to include in the " -"upgrade process.</p>" +"on the system you are upgrading. Enable the ones you want to include in the upgrade process.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>Ĉi tie vi povas vidi ĉiujn programardeponejojn trovitajn\n" -"en la sistemo kiun vi promocias. Ŝaltu tiujn kiujn vi volas inkluzivigi en " -"la promocian procezon.</p>" +"en la sistemo kiun vi promocias. Ŝaltu tiujn kiujn vi volas inkluzivigi en la promocian procezon.</p>" #. TRANSLATORS: help text 2/3 #: src/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:249 @@ -1581,8 +1478,7 @@ "<b>Toggle Status</b> button or double-click on the respective table item.</p>" msgstr "" "<p>Por ŝalti, forigi aŭ malŝalti URL, klaku sur\n" -"la butono <b>Ŝanĝi staton</b> aŭ duoble alklaku la kocernan elementon de la " -"tabelo.</p>" +"la butono <b>Ŝanĝi staton</b> aŭ duoble alklaku la kocernan elementon de la tabelo.</p>" #. TRANSLATORS: help text 3/3 #: src/clients/inst_upgrade_urls.rb:253 @@ -2059,8 +1955,7 @@ #. Text for confirmation popup before the update really starts 1/3 #: src/include/installation/misc.rb:246 msgid "<p>Information required to perform an update is now complete.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>La postulata informo por efektivigi ĝisdatigon estas nun kompleta.</p>" +msgstr "<p>La postulata informo por efektivigi ĝisdatigon estas nun kompleta.</p>" #. Text for confirmation popup before the update really starts 2/3 #: src/include/installation/misc.rb:248 @@ -2091,29 +1986,22 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: Installation overview #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: src/lib/installation/cio_ignore.rb:63 -#| msgid "Installation from images is enabled (disable</a>)." msgid "Blacklist devices enabled (disable</a>)." msgstr "Nigra listo de disponaĵoj ŝaltita (malŝalti</a>)." #. TRANSLATORS: Installation overview #. IMPORTANT: Please, do not change the HTML link <a href="...">...</a>, only visible text #: src/lib/installation/cio_ignore.rb:69 -#| msgid "Installation from images is disabled (enable</a>)." msgid "Blacklist devices disabled (enable</a>)." msgstr "Nigra listo de disponaĵoj malŝaltita (ŝalti</a>)." #. TRANSLATORS: help text #: src/lib/installation/cio_ignore.rb:78 -msgid "" -"<p>Use <b>Blacklist devices</b> if you want to create blacklist channels to " -"such devices which will reduce kernel memory footprint.</p>" -msgstr "" -"<p>Uzu elekteblon <b>Nigra listo de disponaĵoj</b> se vi volas krei liston " -"de disponaĵoj blokotaj por malpligrandigi la memoron uzotan de la kerno.</p>" +msgid "<p>Use <b>Blacklist devices</b> if you want to create blacklist channels to such devices which will reduce kernel memory footprint.</p>" +msgstr "<p>Uzu elekteblon <b>Nigra listo de disponaĵoj</b> se vi volas krei liston de disponaĵoj blokotaj por malpligrandigi la memoron uzotan de la kerno.</p>" #. progress step title #: src/lib/installation/cio_ignore.rb:135 -#| msgid "Starting service %1..." msgid "Blacklisting Devices..." msgstr "Listigado je nigra listo de disponaĵoj..." @@ -2126,7 +2014,6 @@ #. #. @return String #: src/lib/installation/remote_finish_client.rb:68 -#| msgid "Finishing the installation..." msgid "Enabling remote administration..." msgstr "Ŝaltado de fora administrado..." @@ -2154,7 +2041,6 @@ #. #. @return [Boolean] if successful #: src/modules/ImageInstallation.rb:1348 -#| msgid "Storing user preferences..." msgid "Restoring user preferences..." msgstr "Restaŭrado de la uzantpreferoj..." @@ -2215,8 +2101,7 @@ #~ msgid "Hardware Information of the Selected Network Card" #~ msgstr "Aparatinformoj de la Elektita Retkarto" -#~ msgid "" -#~ "<p>Here you can configure your network cards to be used immediately.</p>" +#~ msgid "<p>Here you can configure your network cards to be used immediately.</p>" #~ msgstr "<p>Ĉi tie vi povas agordi viajn retkartojn kaj tuj uzi ilin.</p>" #~ msgid "IP address cannot be empty." @@ -2369,8 +2254,7 @@ #~ "Please, attach all YaST logs stored in the '%2' directory.\n" #~ msgstr "" #~ "Indas raporti ĉi tio eraro ĉe %1.\n" -#~ "Bonvole, kunmetu ĉiujn konservitajn YaST-protokolojn je la dosierujo " -#~ "'%2'.\n" +#~ "Bonvole, kunmetu ĉiujn konservitajn YaST-protokolojn je la dosierujo '%2'.\n" #~ msgid "Checking free space" #~ msgstr "Kontrolante liberan lokon" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/instserver.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/instserver.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/instserver.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -333,16 +333,14 @@ #: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:39 msgid "" "<p>If you need to restrict access to the exported directories to certain \n" -"hosts, add a more restrictive wild card mask. For example, use " -"<em>192.168.1.0/24</em>\n" +"hosts, add a more restrictive wild card mask. For example, use <em>192.168.1.0/24</em>\n" "to restrict access to the <em>192.168.1.0</em> subnet.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:45 msgid "" -"<p>Additionally, set the export options. For more details about the " -"available\n" +"<p>Additionally, set the export options. For more details about the available\n" "options, see the manual page for <em>exports</em> (man exports(5))\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -376,8 +374,7 @@ #: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:66 msgid "" -"<p>The installation server will be available to clients using the following " -"URL:\n" +"<p>The installation server will be available to clients using the following URL:\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -403,8 +400,7 @@ #: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:78 msgid "" "<p>Select a short and easy to remember alias. For example, if you select\n" -"<em>SUSE</em> as the alias, the repositories will be available as shown " -"below:</p>\n" +"<em>SUSE</em> as the alias, the repositories will be available as shown below:</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:81 @@ -421,8 +417,7 @@ #: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:85 msgid "" -"<p>The repository name is used to create a directory under which all " -"product\n" +"<p>The repository name is used to create a directory under which all product\n" "CDs are copied and managed. The repository is accessed using the\n" "configured protocol (NFS, FTP, or HTTP).</p> \n" msgstr "" @@ -433,24 +428,20 @@ #: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:91 msgid "" -"<p>SLP (Service Location Protocol) facilitates finding an installation " -"server. \n" +"<p>SLP (Service Location Protocol) facilitates finding an installation server. \n" "If checked, the repository will be announced on the network using SLP.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:95 msgid "" -"<p>Select a source drive from the list, insert the first medium of a base " -"product, and press\n" +"<p>Select a source drive from the list, insert the first medium of a base product, and press\n" "<b>Next</b> to copy the content into the local repository.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:98 msgid "" -"<p>When the base media are copied to the local repository, you can add " -"additional\n" -"CDs to the repository (for example, Service Pack CDs or any add-on CDs).\n" +"<p>When the base media are copied to the local repository, you can add additional\n" +"CDs to the repository (for example, Service Pack CDs or any add-on CDs).</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:101 @@ -459,8 +450,7 @@ #: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:102 msgid "" -"<p>ISO images can be used instead of CD or DVD media. If you press <b>Next, you can\n" +"<p>ISO images can be used instead of CD or DVD media. If you press <b>Next</b>, you can\n" "select ISO image files.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -505,11 +495,9 @@ #: src/include/instserver/helps.rb:129 msgid "" "<p><b>Adding a Repository:</b><br>\n" -"Unconfigured directories are detected in the repository directory and then " -"made \n" +"Unconfigured directories are detected in the repository directory and then made \n" "available for configuration.\n" -"To add a repository, select it from the list of unconfigured repositories " -"and press <b>Configure</b>.</p>\n" +"To add a repository, select it from the list of unconfigured repositories and press <b>Configure</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Summary dialog help 3/3 @@ -546,8 +534,7 @@ #. Read service data using _auto #: src/modules/Instserver.rb:306 msgid "" -"The FTP installation server requires an FTP server package. The vsftpd " -"package\n" +"The FTP installation server requires an FTP server package. The vsftpd package\n" "will now be installed.\n" msgstr "" @@ -560,8 +547,7 @@ #: src/modules/Instserver.rb:458 msgid "" -"The HTTP installation server requires an HTTP server package. The apache2 " -"package\n" +"The HTTP installation server requires an HTTP server package. The apache2 package\n" "will now be installed." msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/iplb.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/iplb.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/iplb.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -178,151 +178,88 @@ "</p><p>Default: 10 seconds\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>check timeout</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" -"</p><p>Timeout in seconds for connect, external and ping checks. If the " -"timeout is exceeded then the real server is declared dead.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" -"</p><p>If undefined then the value of negotiatetimeout is used. " -"negotiatetimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-" -"virtual setting.\n" -"</p><p>If both checktimeout and negotiatetimeout are unset, the default is " -"used.\n" +"</p><p>Timeout in seconds for connect, external and ping checks. If the timeout is exceeded then the real server is declared dead.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If undefined then the value of negotiatetimeout is used. negotiatetimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" +"</p><p>If both checktimeout and negotiatetimeout are unset, the default is used.\n" "</p><p>Default: 5 seconds\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>failure count</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" -"</p><p>The number of consecutive times a failure will have to be reported by " -"a check before the realserver is considered to have failed. A value of 1 " -"will have the realserver considered failed on the first failure. A " -"successful check will reset the failure counter to 0.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>The number of consecutive times a failure will have to be reported by a check before the realserver is considered to have failed. A value of 1 will have the realserver considered failed on the first failure. A successful check will reset the failure counter to 0.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "</p><p>Default: 1\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>negotiate timeout</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" "</p><p>Timeout in seconds for negotiate checks.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" -"</p><p>If undefined then the value of connecttimeout is used. connecttimeout " -"is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" -"</p><p>If both negotiatetimeout and connecttimeout are unset, the default is " -"used.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If undefined then the value of connecttimeout is used. connecttimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" +"</p><p>If both negotiatetimeout and connecttimeout are unset, the default is used.\n" "</p><p>Default: 30 seconds\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>fallback</big> =</b> <i>ip_address|hostname[:portnumber|" -"sercvicename]</i> [<b>gate</b>|<b>masq</b>|<b>ipip</b>]\n" -"</p><p>the server onto which a webservice is redirected if all real servers " -"are down. Typically this would be 127.0.0.1 with an emergency page.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p><b><big>fallback</big> =</b> <i>ip_address|hostname[:portnumber|sercvicename]</i> [<b>gate</b>|<b>masq</b>|<b>ipip</b>]\n" +"</p><p>the server onto which a webservice is redirected if all real servers are down. Typically this would be 127.0.0.1 with an emergency page.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>log file</big> = \"</b><i>/path/to/logfile</i><b>\"</b>|" -"syslog_facility\n" -"</p><p>An alternative logfile might be specified with this directive. If the " -"logfile does not have a leading '/', it is assumed to be a <b>syslog</a></b>(3) facility name.\n" +"</p><p><b><big>log file</big> = \"</b><i>/path/to/logfile</i><b>\"</b>|syslog_facility\n" +"</p><p>An alternative logfile might be specified with this directive. If the logfile does not have a leading '/', it is assumed to be a <b>syslog</a></b>(3) facility name.\n" "</p><p>Default: log directly to the file <i>/var/log/ldirectord.log</i>.\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>email alert</big> = \"</b><i>emailaddress</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"</p><p>A valid email address for sending alerts about the changed connection " -"status to any real server defined in the virtual service. This option " -"requires perl\n" -"module MailTools to be installed. Automatically tries to send email using " -"any of the built-in methods. See perldoc Mail::Mailer for more info on " -"methods.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>A valid email address for sending alerts about the changed connection status to any real server defined in the virtual service. This option requires perl\n" +"module MailTools to be installed. Automatically tries to send email using any of the built-in methods. See perldoc Mail::Mailer for more info on methods.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>email alert freq</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" -"</p><p>Delay in seconds between repeating email alerts while any given real " -"server in the virtual service remains inaccessible. A setting of zero " -"seconds will\n" -"inhibit the repeating alerts. The email timing accuracy of this setting is " -"dependent on the number of seconds defined in the checkinterval " -"configuration\n" +"</p><p>Delay in seconds between repeating email alerts while any given real server in the virtual service remains inaccessible. A setting of zero seconds will\n" +"inhibit the repeating alerts. The email timing accuracy of this setting is dependent on the number of seconds defined in the checkinterval configuration\n" "option.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "</p><p>Default: 0\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>email alert status</big> = all</b>|<b>none</b>|<b>starting|<b>running</b>|<b>stopping</b>|<b>reloading</b>,...\n" -"</p><p>Comma delimited list of server states in which email alerts should be " -"sent. <b>all</b> is a short-hand for\n" -"\"<b>starting</b>,<b>running</b>,<b>stopping</b>,<b>reloading</b>\". If " -"<b>none</b> is specified, no other option may be specified, otherwise " -"options are ORed\n" +"</p><p><b><big>email alert status</big> = all</b>|<b>none</b>|<b>starting</b>|<b>running</b>|<b>stopping</b>|<b>reloading</b>,...\n" +"</p><p>Comma delimited list of server states in which email alerts should be sent. <b>all</b> is a short-hand for\n" +"\"<b>starting</b>,<b>running</b>,<b>stopping</b>,<b>reloading</b>\". If <b>none</b> is specified, no other option may be specified, otherwise options are ORed\n" "with each other.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "</p><p>Default: all\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>callback</big> = \"</b><i>/path/to/callback</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"</p><p>If this directive is defined, <b>ldirectord</b> automatically calls " -"the executable <i>/path/to/callback</i> after the configuration file has " -"changed on\n" -"disk. This is useful to update the configuration file through <b>scp</b> on " -"the other heartbeated host. The first argument to the callback is the name " -"of the\n" +"</p><p>If this directive is defined, <b>ldirectord</b> automatically calls the executable <i>/path/to/callback</i> after the configuration file has changed on\n" +"disk. This is useful to update the configuration file through <b>scp</b> on the other heartbeated host. The first argument to the callback is the name of the\n" "configuration.\n" -"</p><p>This directive might also be used to restart <b>ldirectord</b> " -"automatically after the configuration file changed on disk. However, if " -"<b>autoreload</b> is\n" +"</p><p>This directive might also be used to restart <b>ldirectord</b> automatically after the configuration file changed on disk. However, if <b>autoreload</b> is\n" "set to yes, the configuration is reloaded anyway.\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>execute</big> = \"</b><i>configuration</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"</p><p>Use this directive to start an instance of ldirectord for the named " -"<i>configuration</i>.\n" +"</p><p>Use this directive to start an instance of ldirectord for the named <i>configuration</i>.\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>auto reload</big> = yes</b>|<b>no</b>\n" -"</p><p>Defines if <ldirectord> should continuously check the " -"configuration file for modification. If this is set to 'yes' and the " -"configuration file changed\n" -"on disk and its modification time (mtime) is newer than the previous " -"version, the configuration is automatically reloaded.\n" +"</p><p>Defines if <ldirectord> should continuously check the configuration file for modification. If this is set to 'yes' and the configuration file changed\n" +"on disk and its modification time (mtime) is newer than the previous version, the configuration is automatically reloaded.\n" "</p><p>Default: no\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>quiescent</big> = yes</b>|<b>no</b>\n" -"</p><p>If <i>yes</i>, then when real or failback servers are determined to " -"be down, they are not actually removed from the kernel's <small>LVS</small> " -"table.\n" -"Rather, their weight is set to zero which means that no new connections will " -"be accepted.\n" -"</p><p>This has the side effect, that if the real server has persistent " -"connections, new connections from any existing clients will continue to be " -"routed to the\n" -"real server, until the persistant timeout can expire. See ipvsadm for more " -"information on persistant connections.\n" +"</p><p>If <i>yes</i>, then when real or failback servers are determined to be down, they are not actually removed from the kernel's <small>LVS</small> table.\n" +"Rather, their weight is set to zero which means that no new connections will be accepted.\n" +"</p><p>This has the side effect, that if the real server has persistent connections, new connections from any existing clients will continue to be routed to the\n" +"real server, until the persistant timeout can expire. See ipvsadm for more information on persistant connections.\n" "</p><p>This side-effect can be avoided by running the following:\n" "</p><p>echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/vs/expire_quiescent_template\n" -"</p><p>If the proc file isn't present this probably means that the kernel " -"doesn't have lvs support, <small>LVS</small> support isn't loaded, or the " -"kernel is too\n" -"old to have the proc file. Running ipvsadm as root should load <small>LVS into the kernel if it is possible.\n" -"</p><p>If <i>no</i>, then the real or failback servers will be removed from " -"the kernel's <small>LVS</small> table. The default is <i>yes</i>.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If the proc file isn't present this probably means that the kernel doesn't have lvs support, <small>LVS</small> support isn't loaded, or the kernel is too\n" +"old to have the proc file. Running ipvsadm as root should load <small>LVS</small> into the kernel if it is possible.\n" +"</p><p>If <i>no</i>, then the real or failback servers will be removed from the kernel's <small>LVS</small> table. The default is <i>yes</i>.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "</p><p>Default: <i>yes</i>\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>fork</big> = yes</b>|<b>no</b>\n" -"</p><p>If <i>yes</i>, then ldirectord will spawn a child proccess for every " -"virtual server, and run checks against the real servers from them. This will " -"increase\n" -"response times to changes in real server status in configurations with many " -"virtual servers. This may also use less memory then running many seperate " -"instances\n" +"</p><p>If <i>yes</i>, then ldirectord will spawn a child proccess for every virtual server, and run checks against the real servers from them. This will increase\n" +"response times to changes in real server status in configurations with many virtual servers. This may also use less memory then running many seperate instances\n" "of ldirectord. Child processes will be automaticly restarted if they die.\n" "</p><p>Default: <i>no</i>\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>supervised</big> = yes</b>|<b>no</b>\n" -"</p><p>If <i>yes</i>, then ldirectord does not go into background mode. All " -"log-messages are redirected to stdout instead of a logfile. This is useful " -"to run\n" -"<b>ldirectord</b> supervised from daemontools. See http://untroubled.org/rpms/daemontools/ or http://cr.yp.to/daemontools.html\">http://cr.yp.to/" -"daemontools.html</a> for details.\n" +"</p><p>If <i>yes</i>, then ldirectord does not go into background mode. All log-messages are redirected to stdout instead of a logfile. This is useful to run\n" +"<b>ldirectord</b> supervised from daemontools. See http://untroubled.org/rpms/daemontools/\">http://untroubled.org/rpms/daemontools/</a> or http://cr.yp.to/daemontools.html\">http://cr.yp.to/daemontools.html</a> for details.\n" "</p><p>Default: <i>no</i>\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -330,87 +267,42 @@ #: src/include/iplb/helps.rb:127 msgid "" "\n" -"<p><b><big>virtual server</big> =</b> <i>(ip_address|hostname:portnumber|" -"servicename)|firewall-mark</i>\n" -"</p><p>Defines a virtual service by IP-address (or hostname) and port (or " -"servicename) or firewall-mark. A firewall-mark is an integer greater than " -"zero. The\n" -"configuration of marking packets is controled using the <tt>\"-m\"</tt> " -"option to <b>ipchains</b>(8). All real services and flags for a virtual " -"service\n" +"<p><b><big>virtual server</big> =</b> <i>(ip_address|hostname:portnumber|servicename)|firewall-mark</i>\n" +"</p><p>Defines a virtual service by IP-address (or hostname) and port (or servicename) or firewall-mark. A firewall-mark is an integer greater than zero. The\n" +"configuration of marking packets is controled using the <tt>\"-m\"</tt> option to <b>ipchains</b>(8). All real services and flags for a virtual service\n" "must follow this line immediately and be indented.\n" "\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>real servers</big> =</b> <i>ip_address|hostname[->" -"ip_address|hostname][:portnumber|servicename</i>]\n" -"<b>gate</b>|<b>masq</b>|<b>ipip</b> [<i>weight</i>] [<b>\"</b><i>request<b>\", \"</b><i>receive</i><b>\"</b>]\n" -"</p><p>Defines a real service by IP-address (or hostname) and port (or " -"servicename). If the port is omitted then a 0 will be used, this is intended " -"primarily for\n" -"fwmark services where the port for real servers is ignored. Optionally a " -"range of <small>IP</small> addresses (or two hostnames) may be given, in " -"which case\n" -"each <small>IP</small> address in the range will be treated as a real server " -"using the given port. The second argument defines the forwarding method, " -"must be\n" -"<b>gate</b>, <b>ipip</b> or <b>masq</b>. The thrid argument is optional and " -"defines the weight for that real server. If omitted then a weight of 1 will " -"be\n" -"used. The last two arguments are also optional. They define a request-" -"receive pair to be used to check if a server is alive. They override the " -"request-receive\n" -"pair in the virtual server section. These two strings must be quoted. If the " -"request string starts with http://... the IP-address and port of the real\n" -"server is overridden, otherwise the IP-address and port of the real server " -"is used.\n" -"</p><p>For <small>TCP</small> and <small>UDP</small> (non fwmark) virtual " -"services, unless the forwarding method is masq and the <small>IP</small> " -"address of a\n" -"real server is non-local (not present on a interface on the host running " -"ldirectord) then the port of the real server will be set to that of its " -"virtual\n" -"service. That is, port-mapping is only available to if the real server is " -"another machine and the forwarding method is masq. This is due to the way " -"that the\n" +"</p><p><b><big>real servers</big> =</b> <i>ip_address|hostname[->ip_address|hostname][:portnumber|servicename</i>]\n" +"<b>gate</b>|<b>masq</b>|<b>ipip</b> [<i>weight</i>] [<b>\"</b><i>request</i><b>\", \"</b><i>receive</i><b>\"</b>]\n" +"</p><p>Defines a real service by IP-address (or hostname) and port (or servicename). If the port is omitted then a 0 will be used, this is intended primarily for\n" +"fwmark services where the port for real servers is ignored. Optionally a range of <small>IP</small> addresses (or two hostnames) may be given, in which case\n" +"each <small>IP</small> address in the range will be treated as a real server using the given port. The second argument defines the forwarding method, must be\n" +"<b>gate</b>, <b>ipip</b> or <b>masq</b>. The thrid argument is optional and defines the weight for that real server. If omitted then a weight of 1 will be\n" +"used. The last two arguments are also optional. They define a request-receive pair to be used to check if a server is alive. They override the request-receive\n" +"pair in the virtual server section. These two strings must be quoted. If the request string starts with http://... the IP-address and port of the real\n" +"server is overridden, otherwise the IP-address and port of the real server is used.\n" +"</p><p>For <small>TCP</small> and <small>UDP</small> (non fwmark) virtual services, unless the forwarding method is masq and the <small>IP</small> address of a\n" +"real server is non-local (not present on a interface on the host running ldirectord) then the port of the real server will be set to that of its virtual\n" +"service. That is, port-mapping is only available to if the real server is another machine and the forwarding method is masq. This is due to the way that the\n" "underlying <small>LVS</small> code in the kernel functions.\n" -"</p><p>More than one of these entries may be inside a virtual section. The " -"checktimeout, negotiatetimeout, failurecount, fallback, emailalert, " -"emailalertfreq and\n" -"quiescent options listed above may also appear inside a virtual section, in " -"which case the global setting is overridden.\n" +"</p><p>More than one of these entries may be inside a virtual section. The checktimeout, negotiatetimeout, failurecount, fallback, emailalert, emailalertfreq and\n" +"quiescent options listed above may also appear inside a virtual section, in which case the global setting is overridden.\n" "\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>check type</big> = connect</b>|<b>external</b>|<b>negotiate|<b>off</b>|<b>on</b>|<b>ping</b>|<b>checktimeout</b><i>N</i>\n" -"</p><p>Type of check to perform. Negotiate sends a request and matches a " -"receive string. Connect only attemts to make a <small>TCP/IP</small> " -"connection, thus the\n" -"request and receive strings may be omitted. If checktype is a number then " -"negotiate and connect is combined so that after each N connect attempts one " -"negotiate\n" -"attempt is performed. This is useful to check often if a service answers and " -"in much longer intervalls a negotiating check is done. Ping means that\n" -"<small>ICMP</small> ping will be used to test the availability of real " -"servers. Ping is also used as the connect check for <small>UDP</small> " -"services. Off\n" -"means no checking will take place and no real or fallback servers will be " -"activated. On means no checking will take place and real servers will always " -"be\n" +"</p><p><b><big>check type</big> = connect</b>|<b>external</b>|<b>negotiate</b>|<b>off</b>|<b>on</b>|<b>ping</b>|<b>checktimeout</b><i>N</i>\n" +"</p><p>Type of check to perform. Negotiate sends a request and matches a receive string. Connect only attemts to make a <small>TCP/IP</small> connection, thus the\n" +"request and receive strings may be omitted. If checktype is a number then negotiate and connect is combined so that after each N connect attempts one negotiate\n" +"attempt is performed. This is useful to check often if a service answers and in much longer intervalls a negotiating check is done. Ping means that\n" +"<small>ICMP</small> ping will be used to test the availability of real servers. Ping is also used as the connect check for <small>UDP</small> services. Off\n" +"means no checking will take place and no real or fallback servers will be activated. On means no checking will take place and real servers will always be\n" "activated. Default is <i>negotiate</i>.\n" "\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>service</big> = dns</b>|<b>ftp</b>|<b>http</b>|<b>https</b>|" -"<b>imap</b>|<b>imaps</b>|<b>ldap</b>|<b>mysql</b>|<b>nntp</b>|<b>none</b>|" -"<b>oracle</b>|<b>pgsql</b>|<b>pop</b>|<b>pops</b>|<b>radius</b>|" -"<b>simpletcp</b>|<b>sip</b>|<b>smtp</b>\n" -"</p><p>The type of service to monitor when using checktype=negotiate. None " -"denotes a service that will not be monitored.\n" -"</p><p>simpletcp sends the <b>request</b> string to the server and tests it " -"against the <b>receive</b> regexp. The other types of checks connect to the " -"server\n" -"using the specified protocol. Please see the <b>request</b> and <b>receive sections for protocol specific information.\n" +"</p><p><b><big>service</big> = dns</b>|<b>ftp</b>|<b>http</b>|<b>https</b>|<b>imap</b>|<b>imaps</b>|<b>ldap</b>|<b>mysql</b>|<b>nntp</b>|<b>none</b>|<b>oracle</b>|<b>pgsql</b>|<b>pop</b>|<b>pops</b>|<b>radius</b>|<b>simpletcp</b>|<b>sip</b>|<b>smtp</b>\n" +"</p><p>The type of service to monitor when using checktype=negotiate. None denotes a service that will not be monitored.\n" +"</p><p>simpletcp sends the <b>request</b> string to the server and tests it against the <b>receive</b> regexp. The other types of checks connect to the server\n" +"using the specified protocol. Please see the <b>request</b> and <b>receive</b> sections for protocol specific information.\n" "</p><p>Default:\n" "</p>

\n" "<dt>* Virtual server port is 21: ftp\n" @@ -433,9 +325,7 @@ "\n" "\n" "</dt><dt><b><big>check command</big> = \"</b><i>path to script</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"<p>This setting is used if checktype is external and is the command to be " -"run to check the status of a real server. It should exit with status 0 if " -"everything\n" +"<p>This setting is used if checktype is external and is the command to be run to check the status of a real server. It should exit with status 0 if everything\n" "is ok, or non-zero otherwise.\n" "</p><p>Four parameters are passed to the script:\n" "</p></dt><dt>* virtual server ip/firewall mark\n" @@ -446,105 +336,68 @@ "\n" "\n" "<p><b><big>check port</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" -"</p><p>Number of port to monitor. Sometimes check port differs from service " -"port.\n" +"</p><p>Number of port to monitor. Sometimes check port differs from service port.\n" "</p><p>Default: port specified for each real server\n" "\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>request</big> = \"</b><i>uri to requested object</i><b>\"\n" -"</p><p>This object will be requested each checkinterval seconds on each real " -"server. The string must be inside quotes. Note that this string may be " -"overridden by\n" +"</p><p><b><big>request</big> = \"</b><i>uri to requested object</i><b>\"</b>\n" +"</p><p>This object will be requested each checkinterval seconds on each real server. The string must be inside quotes. Note that this string may be overridden by\n" "an optional per real-server based request-string.\n" -"</p><p>For a <small>DNS</small> check this should the name of an A record, " -"or the address of a <small>PTR</small> record to look up.\n" -"</p><p>For a MySQL, Oracle or PostgeSQL check, this should be an <small>SQL query. The data returned is not checked, only that the answer is one " -"or more\n" +"</p><p>For a <small>DNS</small> check this should the name of an A record, or the address of a <small>PTR</small> record to look up.\n" +"</p><p>For a MySQL, Oracle or PostgeSQL check, this should be an <small>SQL</small> query. The data returned is not checked, only that the answer is one or more\n" "rows. This is a required setting.\n" -"</p><p>For a simpletcp check, this string is sent verbatim except any " -"occurances of \n" +"</p><p>For a simpletcp check, this string is sent verbatim except any occurances of \n" " are replaced with a new line character.\n" "\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>receive</big> = \"</b><i>regexp to compare</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"</p><p>If the requested result contains this <i>regexp to compare</i>, the " -"real server is declared alive. The regexp must be inside quotes. Keep in " -"mind that\n" -"regexps are not plain strings and that you need to escape the special " -"characters if they should as literals. Note that this regexp may be " -"overridden by an\n" +"</p><p>If the requested result contains this <i>regexp to compare</i>, the real server is declared alive. The regexp must be inside quotes. Keep in mind that\n" +"regexps are not plain strings and that you need to escape the special characters if they should as literals. Note that this regexp may be overridden by an\n" "optional per real-server based receive regexp.\n" -"</p><p>For a <small>DNS</small> check this should be any one the A record's " -"addresses or any one of the <small>PTR</small> record's names.\n" +"</p><p>For a <small>DNS</small> check this should be any one the A record's addresses or any one of the <small>PTR</small> record's names.\n" "</p><p>For a MySQL check, the receive setting is not used.\n" "\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>http method</big> = <small>GET</small></b> | <b><small>HEAD</b>\n" -"</p><p>Sets the <small>HTTP</small> method which should be used to fetch the " -"<small>URI</small> specified in the request-string. <small>GET</small> is " -"the\n" -"method used by default if the parameter is not set. If <small>HEAD</small> " -"is used, the receive-string should be unset.\n" +"</p><p><b><big>http method</big> = <small>GET</small></b> | <b><small>HEAD</small></b>\n" +"</p><p>Sets the <small>HTTP</small> method which should be used to fetch the <small>URI</small> specified in the request-string. <small>GET</small> is the\n" +"method used by default if the parameter is not set. If <small>HEAD</small> is used, the receive-string should be unset.\n" "</p><p>Default: <small>GET</small>\n" "\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>virtual host</big> = \"</b><i>hostname</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"</p><p>Used when using a negotiate check with <small>HTTP</small> or " -"<small>HTTPS</small> . Sets the host header used in the <small>HTTP</small> " -"request. In the\n" -"case of <small>HTTPS</small> this generally needs to match the common name " -"of the <small>SSL</small> certificate. If not set then the host header will " -"be\n" -"derived from the request url for the real server if present. As a last " -"resort the <small>IP</small> address of the real server will be used.\n" +"</p><p>Used when using a negotiate check with <small>HTTP</small> or <small>HTTPS</small> . Sets the host header used in the <small>HTTP</small> request. In the\n" +"case of <small>HTTPS</small> this generally needs to match the common name of the <small>SSL</small> certificate. If not set then the host header will be\n" +"derived from the request url for the real server if present. As a last resort the <small>IP</small> address of the real server will be used.\n" "\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>login</big> = \"</b><i>username</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"</p><p>For <small>FTP</small> , <small>IMAP</small> , <small>LDAP</small> , " -"MySQL, Oracle, <small>POP</small> and PostgreSQL, the username used to log " -"in.\n" +"</p><p>For <small>FTP</small> , <small>IMAP</small> , <small>LDAP</small> , MySQL, Oracle, <small>POP</small> and PostgreSQL, the username used to log in.\n" "</p><p>For Radius the passwd is used for the attribute User-Name.\n" -"</p><p>For <small>SIP</small> , the username is used as both the to and from " -"address for an <small>OPTIONS</small> query.\n" +"</p><p>For <small>SIP</small> , the username is used as both the to and from address for an <small>OPTIONS</small> query.\n" "</p><p>Default:\n" "</p></dt><dt>* <small>FTP:</small> Anonymous\n" -"</dt><dt>* MySQL Oracle, and PostgreSQL: Must be specified in the " -"configuration\n" -"</dt><dt>* <small>SIP:</small> ldirectord@<hostname>, hostname is " -"derived as per the passwd option below.\n" -"</dt><dt>* Otherwise: empty string, which denotes that case authentication " -"will not be attempted.\n" +"</dt><dt>* MySQL Oracle, and PostgreSQL: Must be specified in the configuration\n" +"</dt><dt>* <small>SIP:</small> ldirectord@<hostname>, hostname is derived as per the passwd option below.\n" +"</dt><dt>* Otherwise: empty string, which denotes that case authentication will not be attempted.\n" "\n" "\n" "</dt><dt><b><big>password</big> = \"</b><i>password</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"<p>Password to use to login to <small>FTP</small> , <small>IMAP</small> , " -"<small>LDAP</small> , MySQL, Oracle, <small>POP</small> , PostgreSQL and\n" +"<p>Password to use to login to <small>FTP</small> , <small>IMAP</small> , <small>LDAP</small> , MySQL, Oracle, <small>POP</small> , PostgreSQL and\n" "<small>SIP</small> servers.\n" "</p><p>For Radius the passwd is used for the attribute User-Password.\n" "</p><p>Default:\n" -"</p></dt><dt>* <small>FTP:</small> ldirectord@<hostname>, where " -"hostname is the environment variable <small>HOSTNAME</small> evaluated at " -"run time, or sourced\n" +"</p></dt><dt>* <small>FTP:</small> ldirectord@<hostname>, where hostname is the environment variable <small>HOSTNAME</small> evaluated at run time, or sourced\n" "from uname if unset.\n" -"</dt><dt>* Otherwise: empty string. In the case of <small>LDAP</small> , " -"MySQL, Oracle, and PostgreSQL this means that authentication will not be " -"performed.\n" +"</dt><dt>* Otherwise: empty string. In the case of <small>LDAP</small> , MySQL, Oracle, and PostgreSQL this means that authentication will not be performed.\n" "\n" "\n" "</dt><dt><b><big>database name</big> = \"</b><i>databasename</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"<p>Database to use for MySQL, Oracle and PostgreSQL servers, this is the " -"database that the query (set by <b>receive</b> above) will be performed " -"against. This\n" +"<p>Database to use for MySQL, Oracle and PostgreSQL servers, this is the database that the query (set by <b>receive</b> above) will be performed against. This\n" "is a required setting.\n" "\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>radius secret</big> = \"</b><i>radiussecret</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"</p><p>Secret to use for Radius servers, this is the secret used to perform " -"an Access-Request with the username (set by <b>login</b> above) and passwd " -"(set by\n" +"</p><p>Secret to use for Radius servers, this is the secret used to perform an Access-Request with the username (set by <b>login</b> above) and passwd (set by\n" "<b>passwd</b> above).\n" "</p><p>Default: empty string\n" "\n" @@ -558,120 +411,73 @@ "\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>scheduler</big> =</b> <i>scheduler_name</i>\n" -"</p><p>Scheduler to be used by <small>LVS</small> for loadbalancing. For an " -"information on the available sehedulers please see the <b>ipvsadm</a></b>(8) man page.\n" +"</p><p>Scheduler to be used by <small>LVS</small> for loadbalancing. For an information on the available sehedulers please see the <b>ipvsadm</a></b>(8) man page.\n" "</p><p>Default: \"wrr\"\n" "\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>protocol</big> = tcp</b>|<b>udp</b>|<b>fwm</b>\n" -"</p><p>Protocol to be used. If the virtual is specified as an <small>IP address and port then it must be one of tcp or udp. If a firewall " -"mark then the\n" +"</p><p>Protocol to be used. If the virtual is specified as an <small>IP</small> address and port then it must be one of tcp or udp. If a firewall mark then the\n" "protocol must be fwm.\n" "</p><p>Default:\n" -"</p></dt><dt>* Virtual is an <small>IP</small> address and port, and the " -"port is not 53: tcp\n" -"</dt><dt>* Virtual is an <small>IP</small> address and port, and the port is " -"53: udp\n" +"</p></dt><dt>* Virtual is an <small>IP</small> address and port, and the port is not 53: tcp\n" +"</dt><dt>* Virtual is an <small>IP</small> address and port, and the port is 53: udp\n" "</dt><dt>* Virtual is a firewall mark: fwm\n" "</dt></dl>\n" "\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>check timeout</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" -"</p><p>Timeout in seconds for connect, external and ping checks. If the " -"timeout is exceeded then the real server is declared dead.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" -"</p><p>If undefined then the value of negotiatetimeout is used. " -"negotiatetimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-" -"virtual setting.\n" -"</p><p>If both checktimeout and negotiatetimeout are unset, the default is " -"used.\n" +"</p><p>Timeout in seconds for connect, external and ping checks. If the timeout is exceeded then the real server is declared dead.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If undefined then the value of negotiatetimeout is used. negotiatetimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" +"</p><p>If both checktimeout and negotiatetimeout are unset, the default is used.\n" "</p><p>Default: 5 seconds\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>negotiate timeout</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" "</p><p>Timeout in seconds for negotiate checks.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" -"</p><p>If undefined then the value of connecttimeout is used. connecttimeout " -"is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" -"</p><p>If both negotiatetimeout and connecttimeout are unset, the default is " -"used.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If undefined then the value of connecttimeout is used. connecttimeout is also a global value that may be overriden by a per-virtual setting.\n" +"</p><p>If both negotiatetimeout and connecttimeout are unset, the default is used.\n" "</p><p>Default: 30 seconds\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>failure count</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" -"</p><p>The number of consecutive times a failure will have to be reported by " -"a check before the realserver is considered to have failed. A value of 1 " -"will have the realserver considered failed on the first failure. A " -"successful check will reset the failure counter to 0.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>The number of consecutive times a failure will have to be reported by a check before the realserver is considered to have failed. A value of 1 will have the realserver considered failed on the first failure. A successful check will reset the failure counter to 0.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "</p><p>Default: 1\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>email alert</big> = \"</b><i>emailaddress</i><b>\"</b>\n" -"</p><p>A valid email address for sending alerts about the changed connection " -"status to any real server defined in the virtual service. This option " -"requires perl\n" -"module MailTools to be installed. Automatically tries to send email using " -"any of the built-in methods. See perldoc Mail::Mailer for more info on " -"methods.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>A valid email address for sending alerts about the changed connection status to any real server defined in the virtual service. This option requires perl\n" +"module MailTools to be installed. Automatically tries to send email using any of the built-in methods. See perldoc Mail::Mailer for more info on methods.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>email alert freq</big> =</b> <i>n</i>\n" -"</p><p>Delay in seconds between repeating email alerts while any given real " -"server in the virtual service remains inaccessible. A setting of zero " -"seconds will\n" -"inhibit the repeating alerts. The email timing accuracy of this setting is " -"dependent on the number of seconds defined in the checkinterval " -"configuration\n" +"</p><p>Delay in seconds between repeating email alerts while any given real server in the virtual service remains inaccessible. A setting of zero seconds will\n" +"inhibit the repeating alerts. The email timing accuracy of this setting is dependent on the number of seconds defined in the checkinterval configuration\n" "option.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "</p><p>Default: 0\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>email alert status</big> = all</b>|<b>none</b>|<b>starting|<b>running</b>|<b>stopping</b>|<b>reloading</b>,...\n" -"</p><p>Comma delimited list of server states in which email alerts should be " -"sent. <b>all</b> is a short-hand for\n" -"\"<b>starting</b>,<b>running</b>,<b>stopping</b>,<b>reloading</b>\". If " -"<b>none</b> is specified, no other option may be specified, otherwise " -"options are ORed\n" +"</p><p><b><big>email alert status</big> = all</b>|<b>none</b>|<b>starting</b>|<b>running</b>|<b>stopping</b>|<b>reloading</b>,...\n" +"</p><p>Comma delimited list of server states in which email alerts should be sent. <b>all</b> is a short-hand for\n" +"\"<b>starting</b>,<b>running</b>,<b>stopping</b>,<b>reloading</b>\". If <b>none</b> is specified, no other option may be specified, otherwise options are ORed\n" "with each other.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "</p><p>Default: all\n" "\n" -"</p><p><b><big>fallback</big> =</b> <i>ip_address|hostname[:portnumber|" -"sercvicename]</i> [<b>gate</b>|<b>masq</b>|<b>ipip</b>]\n" -"</p><p>the server onto which a webservice is redirected if all real servers " -"are down. Typically this would be 127.0.0.1 with an emergency page.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p><b><big>fallback</big> =</b> <i>ip_address|hostname[:portnumber|sercvicename]</i> [<b>gate</b>|<b>masq</b>|<b>ipip</b>]\n" +"</p><p>the server onto which a webservice is redirected if all real servers are down. Typically this would be 127.0.0.1 with an emergency page.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "\n" "</p><p><b><big>quiescent</big> = yes</b>|<b>no</b>\n" -"</p><p>If <i>yes</i>, then when real or failback servers are determined to " -"be down, they are not actually removed from the kernel's <small>LVS</small> " -"table.\n" -"Rather, their weight is set to zero which means that no new connections will " -"be accepted.\n" -"</p><p>This has the side effect, that if the real server has persistent " -"connections, new connections from any existing clients will continue to be " -"routed to the\n" -"real server, until the persistant timeout can expire. See ipvsadm for more " -"information on persistant connections.\n" +"</p><p>If <i>yes</i>, then when real or failback servers are determined to be down, they are not actually removed from the kernel's <small>LVS</small> table.\n" +"Rather, their weight is set to zero which means that no new connections will be accepted.\n" +"</p><p>This has the side effect, that if the real server has persistent connections, new connections from any existing clients will continue to be routed to the\n" +"real server, until the persistant timeout can expire. See ipvsadm for more information on persistant connections.\n" "</p><p>This side-effect can be avoided by running the following:\n" "</p><p>echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/vs/expire_quiescent_template\n" -"</p><p>If the proc file isn't present this probably means that the kernel " -"doesn't have lvs support, <small>LVS</small> support isn't loaded, or the " -"kernel is too\n" -"old to have the proc file. Running ipvsadm as root should load <small>LVS into the kernel if it is possible.\n" -"</p><p>If <i>no</i>, then the real or failback servers will be removed from " -"the kernel's <small>LVS</small> table. The default is <i>yes</i>.\n" -"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is " -"overridden.\n" +"</p><p>If the proc file isn't present this probably means that the kernel doesn't have lvs support, <small>LVS</small> support isn't loaded, or the kernel is too\n" +"old to have the proc file. Running ipvsadm as root should load <small>LVS</small> into the kernel if it is possible.\n" +"</p><p>If <i>no</i>, then the real or failback servers will be removed from the kernel's <small>LVS</small> table. The default is <i>yes</i>.\n" +"</p><p>If defined in a virtual server section then the global value is overridden.\n" "</p><p>Default: <i>yes</i>\n" "\n" "\n" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/iscsi-client.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/iscsi-client.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/iscsi-client.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -302,8 +302,7 @@ #. table of connected targets #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:90 msgid "" -"List of current sessions. To add a new target, select it and press <b>Add.\n" +"List of current sessions. To add a new target, select it and press <b>Add</b>.\n" "To remove it, press <b>Log Out</b>.\n" "To change the start-up status, press <b>Toggle</b>.\n" msgstr "" @@ -315,46 +314,34 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:97 src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:115 -msgid "" -"<p>When accessing an iSCSI device <b>READ</b>/<b>WRITE</b>, make sure that " -"this access is exclusive. Otherwise there is a potential risk of data " -"corruption.</p>\n" +msgid "<p>When accessing an iSCSI device <b>READ</b>/<b>WRITE</b>, make sure that this access is exclusive. Otherwise there is a potential risk of data corruption.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:100 msgid "" -"<p><b>InitiatorName</b> is a value from <tt>/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi. \n" -"In case you have iBFT, this value will be added from there and you are only " -"able to change it in the BIOS setup.</p>" +"<p><b>InitiatorName</b> is a value from <tt>/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi</tt>. \n" +"In case you have iBFT, this value will be added from there and you are only able to change it in the BIOS setup.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:103 msgid "" -"If you want to use <b>iSNS</b> (Internet Storage Name Service) for " -"discovering targets instead of the default SendTargets method,\n" -"fill in the IP address of the iSNS server and port. The default port should " -"be 3205.\n" +"If you want to use <b>iSNS</b> (Internet Storage Name Service) for discovering targets instead of the default SendTargets method,\n" +"fill in the IP address of the iSNS server and port. The default port should be 3205.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:108 msgid "" "Enter the <b>IP Address</b> of the discovered server.\n" -"Only change <b>Port</b> if needed. For authentication, use <b>Username</b> " -"and <b>Password</b>. If you do not need authentication,\n" +"Only change <b>Port</b> if needed. For authentication, use <b>Username</b> and <b>Password</b>. If you do not need authentication,\n" "select <b>No Authentication</b>.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:122 -msgid "" -"List of nodes offered by the iSCSI target. Select one item and click " -"<b>Connect</b>. " +msgid "List of nodes offered by the iSCSI target. Select one item and click <b>Connect</b>. " msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:129 -msgid "" -"Select the type of authentication and enter the <b>Username</b> and " -"<b>Password</b>." +msgid "Select the type of authentication and enter the <b>Username</b> and <b>Password</b>." msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:132 @@ -365,19 +352,15 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>manual</b> is for iSCSI targets which are not to be connected by\n" "default, the user needs to connect them manually</p>\n" -"<p><b>onboot</b> is for iSCSI targets to be connected during boot, i.e. " -"when\n" +"<p><b>onboot</b> is for iSCSI targets to be connected during boot, i.e. when\n" "root is on iSCSI. As such it will be evaluated by the initrd.</p>\n" -"<p><b>automatic</b> is for iSCSI targets to be connected when the iSCSI " -"service\n" +"<p><b>automatic</b> is for iSCSI targets to be connected when the iSCSI service\n" "starts up.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. list of discovered targets #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:142 -msgid "" -"List of discovered targets. Start a new <b>Discovery</b> or <b>Connect</b> " -"to any target." +msgid "List of discovered targets. Start a new <b>Discovery</b> or <b>Connect</b> to any target." msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-client/helps.rb:145 @@ -471,9 +454,7 @@ #. check if not already connected #: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:771 #: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:891 -msgid "" -"The target with this TargetName is already connected. Make sure that " -"multipathing is enabled to prevent data corruption." +msgid "The target with this TargetName is already connected. Make sure that multipathing is enabled to prevent data corruption." msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-client/widgets.rb:774 @@ -504,9 +485,7 @@ #. don't check interactively for packages (bnc#367300) #. skip it during second stage or when create AY profile #: src/modules/IscsiClient.rb:96 -msgid "" -"<p>To configure the iSCSI initiator, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed." -"</p>" +msgid "<p>To configure the iSCSI initiator, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/modules/IscsiClient.rb:99 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/iscsi-lio-server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/iscsi-lio-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/iscsi-lio-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -357,44 +357,27 @@ #. discovery authentication #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:119 -msgid "" -"Select the type of authentication. Use <b>No Authentication</b> or one of " -"<b>Incoming</b> and <b>Outgoing</b> (can be both together). Then insert " -"<b>User</b> and <b>Password</b>." +msgid "Select the type of authentication. Use <b>No Authentication</b> or one of <b>Incoming</b> and <b>Outgoing</b> (can be both together). Then insert <b>User</b> and <b>Password</b>." msgstr "" #. target client setup. #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:124 -msgid "" -"<p>Use <b>Add</b> to give a client access for a LUN imported from target " -"portal group. Specify which client is allowed to access it (client name is " -"<i>InitiatorName</i> in '/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi' on iscsi " -"initiator). <b>Delete</b> will remove the client access to the LUN.</p>" +msgid "<p>Use <b>Add</b> to give a client access for a LUN imported from target portal group. Specify which client is allowed to access it (client name is <i>InitiatorName</i> in '/etc/iscsi/initiatorname.iscsi' on iscsi initiator). <b>Delete</b> will remove the client access to the LUN.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:130 -msgid "" -"<p>With <b>Edit LUN</b> one can modify the LUN mapping. Please note that LUN " -"target number must be unique.<br>After pressing <b>Edit Auth</b>, select the " -"type of authentication. Use <b>Incoming</b>, <b>Outgoing</b> or both " -"together. Then insert <b>User</b> and <b>Password</b>. If <b>Use " -"Authentication</b> is disabled in previous dialog, <b>Edit Auth</b> is " -"disabled here.</p>" +msgid "<p>With <b>Edit LUN</b> one can modify the LUN mapping. Please note that LUN target number must be unique.<br>After pressing <b>Edit Auth</b>, select the type of authentication. Use <b>Incoming</b>, <b>Outgoing</b> or both together. Then insert <b>User</b> and <b>Password</b>. If <b>Use Authentication</b> is disabled in previous dialog, <b>Edit Auth</b> is disabled here.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:136 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Copy</b> offers the possibility to give an additional client access to " -"the LUN.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Copy</b> offers the possibility to give an additional client access to the LUN.</p>" msgstr "" #. target dialog #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:138 msgid "" -"List of offered targets and target portal groups. Create a new target by " -"clicking <b>Add</b>.\n" -"To delete or modify an item, select it and press <b>Edit</b> or <b>Delete." +"List of offered targets and target portal groups. Create a new target by clicking <b>Add</b>.\n" +"To delete or modify an item, select it and press <b>Edit</b> or <b>Delete</b>." msgstr "" #. edit target @@ -406,11 +389,9 @@ #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:146 msgid "" -"It is possible to make arbitary block devices or files available under a " -"<b>LUN</b>.\n" +"It is possible to make arbitary block devices or files available under a <b>LUN</b>.\n" "You have to provide <b>path</b> to either block devices or file. \n" -"The <b>LUN name</b> is an arbitrary name to uniquely identify the <b>LUN. \n" +"The <b>LUN name</b> is an arbitrary name to uniquely identify the <b>LUN</b>. \n" "The name needs to be unique within the target portal group. If the user\n" "does not provide a name for LUN, it is generated automatically." msgstr "" @@ -418,8 +399,7 @@ #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:153 #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:172 msgid "" -"<p>Under <b>Ip Address</b> and <b>Port Number</b> you specify under which " -"address\n" +"<p>Under <b>Ip Address</b> and <b>Port Number</b> you specify under which address\n" "and port the service will be available. Default for port number is 3260.\n" "Only ip addresses assigned to one of the network cards are possible." msgstr "" @@ -430,27 +410,21 @@ #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:165 msgid "" -"It is possible to make arbitary block devices or files available under a " -"lun.\n" +"It is possible to make arbitary block devices or files available under a lun.\n" "You have to provide <b>path</b> to either block devices or file. \n" -"The <b>LUN name</b> is an arbitrary name to uniquely identify the <b>LUN. \n" +"The <b>LUN name</b> is an arbitrary name to uniquely identify the <b>LUN</b>. \n" "The name needs to be unique within the target portal group. If the user\n" "does not provide a name for LUN, it is generated automatically." msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:179 -msgid "" -"It is possible to <b>add</b>, <b>edit</b> or <b>delete</b> all additional " -"configuration options." +msgid "It is possible to <b>add</b>, <b>edit</b> or <b>delete</b> all additional configuration options." msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-lio-server/helps.rb:184 msgid "" -"Edit <b>LUN</b> number if needed, set <b>Type</b> (nullio is for testing " -"purposes).\n" -"If Type=fileio set <b>Path</b> to disk device or file.<b>SCSI ID</b> and " -"<b>Sectors</b> are optional." +"Edit <b>LUN</b> number if needed, set <b>Type</b> (nullio is for testing purposes).\n" +"If Type=fileio set <b>Path</b> to disk device or file.<b>SCSI ID</b> and <b>Sectors</b> are optional." msgstr "" #. save discovery authentication or authentication for given target Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/iscsi-server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/iscsi-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/iscsi-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -297,25 +297,19 @@ #. discovery authentication #: src/include/iscsi-server/helps.rb:117 msgid "" -"Select the type of authentication. Use <b>No Authentication</b> or one of " -"<b>Incoming</b> and <b>Outgoing</b> (can be both together). Then insert " -"<b>User</b> and <b>Password</b>.\n" -"For incoming authentication, it is possible to <b>Add</b> more pairs or " -"<b>Edit</b> or <b>Delete</b> them." +"Select the type of authentication. Use <b>No Authentication</b> or one of <b>Incoming</b> and <b>Outgoing</b> (can be both together). Then insert <b>User</b> and <b>Password</b>.\n" +"For incoming authentication, it is possible to <b>Add</b> more pairs or <b>Edit</b> or <b>Delete</b> them." msgstr "" #. target dialog #: src/include/iscsi-server/helps.rb:121 msgid "" "List of offered targets. Create a new target by clicking <b>Add</b>. \n" -"To delete or modify an item, select it and press <b>Modify</b> or <b>Delete." +"To delete or modify an item, select it and press <b>Modify</b> or <b>Delete</b>." msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-server/helps.rb:126 -msgid "" -"It is possible to change the <b>Path</b> to block devices, regular files, " -"LVM, or RAID.\n" +msgid "It is possible to change the <b>Path</b> to block devices, regular files, LVM, or RAID.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-server/helps.rb:131 @@ -332,17 +326,13 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-server/helps.rb:141 -msgid "" -"It is possible to <b>add</b>, <b>edit</b> or <b>delete</b> all additional " -"configuration options." +msgid "It is possible to <b>add</b>, <b>edit</b> or <b>delete</b> all additional configuration options." msgstr "" #: src/include/iscsi-server/helps.rb:146 msgid "" -"Edit <b>LUN</b> number if needed, set <b>Type</b> (nullio is for testing " -"purposes). \n" -"If Type=fileio set <b>Path</b> to disk device or file.<b>SCSI ID</b> and " -"<b>Sectors</b> are optional." +"Edit <b>LUN</b> number if needed, set <b>Type</b> (nullio is for testing purposes). \n" +"If Type=fileio set <b>Path</b> to disk device or file.<b>SCSI ID</b> and <b>Sectors</b> are optional." msgstr "" #. extract ScsiId Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/isns.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/isns.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/isns.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -155,49 +155,25 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:39 -msgid "" -"<p>The list of all available iSCSI nodes registered with the iSNS service " -"are displayed.</p> <p>Nodes are registered by iSCSI initiators and iSCSI " -"targets.</p> <p> It is only possible to <b>delete</b> them. Deleting a node " -"removes it from the iSNS database.</p>" +msgid "<p>The list of all available iSCSI nodes registered with the iSNS service are displayed.</p> <p>Nodes are registered by iSCSI initiators and iSCSI targets.</p> <p> It is only possible to <b>delete</b> them. Deleting a node removes it from the iSNS database.</p>" msgstr "" #. discovery domains #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:43 -msgid "" -"A list of all discovery domains is displayed. It is possible to <b>Create a discovery domain or <b>Delete</b> one. <p>Deleting a domain removes the " -"members from the domain but does not delete the iSCSI node members.</p>" +msgid "A list of all discovery domains is displayed. It is possible to <b>Create</b> a discovery domain or <b>Delete</b> one. <p>Deleting a domain removes the members from the domain but does not delete the iSCSI node members.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:46 -msgid "" -"A list of all iSCSI nodes are displayed by discovery domain. Selecting " -"another discovery domain refreshes the list with members from that discovery " -"domain. It is possible to <b>Add</b> an iSCSI node to a discovery domain or " -"<b>Delete</b> the node. <p>Deleting a node removes it from the domain but " -"does not delete the iSCSI node</p> <p>Creating an iSCSI node allows a not " -"yet registered node to be added as a member of the discovery domain. When " -"the initiator or target registers this node then it becomes part of this " -"domain</p> <p>When an iSCSI initiator does a discovery request, the iSNS " -"service returns all iSCSI node targets that are members of the same " -"Discovery Domains.</p> " +msgid "A list of all iSCSI nodes are displayed by discovery domain. Selecting another discovery domain refreshes the list with members from that discovery domain. It is possible to <b>Add</b> an iSCSI node to a discovery domain or <b>Delete</b> the node. <p>Deleting a node removes it from the domain but does not delete the iSCSI node</p> <p>Creating an iSCSI node allows a not yet registered node to be added as a member of the discovery domain. When the initiator or target registers this node then it becomes part of this domain</p> <p>When an iSCSI initiator does a discovery request, the iSNS service returns all iSCSI node targets that are members of the same Discovery Domains.</p> " msgstr "" #. dds table dialog #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:50 -msgid "" -"At the top a list of all Discovery Domain Sets are displayed. Discovery " -"Domains belong to Discovery Domain Sets. <p>A Discovery Domain must be a " -"member of a Discovery Domain Set in order to be active. </p><p>In an iSNS " -"database, a Discovery Domain Set contains Discovery Domains and Discovery " -"Domains contain iSCSI Node members.</p>" +msgid "At the top a list of all Discovery Domain Sets are displayed. Discovery Domains belong to Discovery Domain Sets. <p>A Discovery Domain must be a member of a Discovery Domain Set in order to be active. </p><p>In an iSNS database, a Discovery Domain Set contains Discovery Domains and Discovery Domains contain iSCSI Node members.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/isns/helps.rb:53 -msgid "" -"<p>The discovery domain set members list is refreshed whenever a different " -"discovery domain set is selected.</p>" +msgid "<p>The discovery domain set members list is refreshed whenever a different discovery domain set is selected.</p>" msgstr "" #. **************** global funcions and variables ***** @@ -255,9 +231,7 @@ #. test if required package ("open-isns") is installed #: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:149 -msgid "" -"<p>To configure the isns service, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed." +msgid "<p>To configure the isns service, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/modules/IsnsServer.rb:152 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/kdump.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/kdump.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/kdump.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -48,23 +48,17 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:116 -msgid "" -"The naming scheme is:/boot/vmlinu[zx]-[.gz] Please enter only " -"\"kernel_string\"." +msgid "The naming scheme is:/boot/vmlinu[zx]-[.gz] Please enter only \"kernel_string\"." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:127 -msgid "" -"The kdump commandline is the command line that needs to be passed off to the " -"kdump kernel." +msgid "The kdump commandline is the command line that needs to be passed off to the kdump kernel." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:138 -msgid "" -"Set this variable if you only want to _append_ values to the default command " -"line string." +msgid "Set this variable if you only want to _append_ values to the default command line string." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -94,9 +88,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:189 -msgid "" -"SMTP password for sending notification messages. Path of file which includes " -"password (plain text file)." +msgid "SMTP password for sending notification messages. Path of file which includes password (plain text file)." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -141,9 +133,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:254 -msgid "" -"Dump target includes type of target from: file (local filesystem), ftp, ssh, " -"nfs, cifs" +msgid "Dump target includes type of target from: file (local filesystem), ftp, ssh, nfs, cifs" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -183,9 +173,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:302 -msgid "" -"The naming scheme is: /boot/vmlinu[zx]-[.gz] kernel means " -"only \"kernel_string\"." +msgid "The naming scheme is: /boot/vmlinu[zx]-[.gz] kernel means only \"kernel_string\"." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -195,9 +183,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:316 -msgid "" -"Option means runlevel to boot the kdump kernel. Only values such as 1,2,3,5 " -"or s are allowed" +msgid "Option means runlevel to boot the kdump kernel. Only values such as 1,2,3,5 or s are allowed" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine help @@ -422,8 +408,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine printed text help #: src/clients/kdump.rb:809 -msgid "" -"Option can include only \"none\", \"ELF\", \"compressed\" or \"lzo\" value." +msgid "Option can include only \"none\", \"ELF\", \"compressed\" or \"lzo\" value." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: CommandLine error message @@ -735,8 +720,7 @@ #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:36 msgid "" "<p><b>Enable/Disable Kdump</b><br>\n" -" Enable or disable kdump. The boot option crashkernel parameter is added/" -"removed. \n" +" Enable or disable kdump. The boot option crashkernel parameter is added/removed. \n" " To apply changes, a reboot is necessary.<br></p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -752,12 +736,7 @@ #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:46 msgid "" "<p><b>Firmware-Assisted Dump</b><br>\n" -" Dumps are not generated before the partition is reinitialized but take " -"place when the partition is restarting. When performing a firmware-" -"assisted dump, system memory is frozen and the partition rebooted, which " -"allows a new instance of the operating system to dump data from the " -"previous kernel crash. This feature is suitable only when the system has " -"more than 1.5 GB of memory.</p>" +" Dumps are not generated before the partition is reinitialized but take place when the partition is restarting. When performing a firmware-assisted dump, system memory is frozen and the partition rebooted, which allows a new instance of the operating system to dump data from the previous kernel crash. This feature is suitable only when the system has more than 1.5 GB of memory.</p>" msgstr "" #. Kdump Memor&y [MB] - IntField 1/1 @@ -775,10 +754,8 @@ "<p><b>Dump Format</b><br>\n" " <i>No Dump</i> - Only save the kernel log.<br>\n" " <i>ELF Format</i> - Create dump file in the ELF format.<br>\n" -" <i>Compressed Format</i> - Compress dump data by each page with gzip." -"<br>\n" -" <i>LZO Compressed Format</i> - Slightly bigger files but much faster." -"<br>\n" +" <i>Compressed Format</i> - Compress dump data by each page with gzip.<br>\n" +" <i>LZO Compressed Format</i> - Slightly bigger files but much faster.<br>\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -786,8 +763,7 @@ #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:72 msgid "" "<p><b>Saving Target for Kdump Image</b><br>\n" -" The target for saving kdump images. Select type of target for saving " -"dumps.<br></p>" +" The target for saving kdump images. Select type of target for saving dumps.<br></p>" msgstr "" #. Dump Format - RadioButtons 2/6 @@ -795,8 +771,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Local Filestem</b> - Save kdump image in the local filesystem.\n" " <i>Directory for Saving Dumps</i> - The path for saving kdump images.\n" -" Selecting directory for saving kdump images via dialog by pressing " -"<i>Browse</i>\n" +" Selecting directory for saving kdump images via dialog by pressing <i>Browse</i>\n" " <br></p>" msgstr "" @@ -808,8 +783,7 @@ " <i>Port</i> - The port number for connection.\n" " <i>Directory on Server</i> - The path for saving kdump images.\n" " <i>Enable Anonymous FTP</i> enables anonymous connection to server.\n" -" <i>User Name</i> for ftp connection. <i>Password</i> for ftp connection." -"<br></p>" +" <i>User Name</i> for ftp connection. <i>Password</i> for ftp connection.<br></p>" msgstr "" #. Dump Format - RadioButtons 4/6 @@ -878,8 +852,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Enable Delete Old Dump Images</b> - \n" " Enable Delete Old Dump Images. If the number of dump files in \n" -" <i>Number of Old Dumps</i> exceeds this number, older dumps are removed." -"<br></p>" +" <i>Number of Old Dumps</i> exceeds this number, older dumps are removed.<br></p>" msgstr "" #. Enable Copy Ke&rnel into the Dump Directory - CheckBox 1/1 @@ -894,48 +867,39 @@ #. SMTP Server #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:151 -msgid "" -"<p><b>SMTP Server</b> used for sending a notification email after a dump.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>SMTP Server</b> used for sending a notification email after a dump.</p>" msgstr "" #. SMTP User Name #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:155 msgid "" "<p><b>User Name</b> for SMTP authetication when <i>SMTP Server</i> is\n" -" set. This is optional. If you do not specifiy a username and password, " -"plain SMTP will be used.</p>\n" +" set. This is optional. If you do not specifiy a username and password, plain SMTP will be used.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. SMTP Password #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:159 msgid "" -"<p><b>Password</b> for SMTP authetication when <i>SMTP Server</i> is set. " -"This\n" -" is optional. If you do not specify a username and password, plain SMTP " -"will be used.</p>\n" +"<p><b>Password</b> for SMTP authetication when <i>SMTP Server</i> is set. This\n" +" is optional. If you do not specify a username and password, plain SMTP will be used.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Notification To (email addresses) #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:163 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Notification To</b> Specify the email address to which a notification " -"email will be sent when a dump has been saved.</p>\n" +msgid "<p><b>Notification To</b> Specify the email address to which a notification email will be sent when a dump has been saved.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Notification CC (email addresses) #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:167 msgid "" -"<p><b>Notification CC</b> Specify a list of space-separated email addresses " -"to\n" -" which a notification email will be sent via cc if a dump has been saved.\n" +"<p><b>Notification CC</b> Specify a list of space-separated email addresses to\n" +" which a notification email will be sent via cc if a dump has been saved.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Number of Old Dumps (number) #: src/include/kdump/helps.rb:171 msgid "" -"<p><b>Number of Old Dumps</b> specifies how many old dumps are kept. If the " -"number of dump files \n" +"<p><b>Number of Old Dumps</b> specifies how many old dumps are kept. If the number of dump files \n" "exceeds this number, older dumps are removed.</p>" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/kerberos-server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/kerberos-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/kerberos-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -520,16 +520,13 @@ #. Help text: ask for database backend 2/4 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:59 -msgid "" -"<p><big>Local Database</big> will create a local database for storing the " -"credentials.</p>" +msgid "<p><big>Local Database</big> will create a local database for storing the credentials.</p>" msgstr "" #. Help text: ask for database backend 3/4 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:63 msgid "" -"<p><big>Set Up New LDAP Server as Database Back-End</big> will set up a new " -"LDAP server\n" +"<p><big>Set Up New LDAP Server as Database Back-End</big> will set up a new LDAP server\n" "on this machine and use it as database back-end.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -542,16 +539,12 @@ #. Help text: basic settings 1/2 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:71 -msgid "" -"<p>Specify the <big>Realm</big> and the <big>Master Password</big> for your " -"Kerberos server.</p>" +msgid "<p>Specify the <big>Realm</big> and the <big>Master Password</big> for your Kerberos server.</p>" msgstr "" #. Help text: basic settings 2/2 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:75 -msgid "" -"<p>Although your Kerberos realm can be any ASCII string, the convention is " -"to use upper-case letters as in your domain name.</p>\n" +msgid "<p>Although your Kerberos realm can be any ASCII string, the convention is to use upper-case letters as in your domain name.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Help text: Use existing LDAP server 1/6 @@ -570,32 +563,27 @@ #. Help text: New LDAP server 2/6 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:87 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:107 -msgid "" -"<p>With <big>LDAP Base DN</big> you can change the base DN of the LDAP " -"server.</p>" +msgid "<p>With <big>LDAP Base DN</big> you can change the base DN of the LDAP server.</p>" msgstr "" #. Help text: Use existing LDAP server 4/6 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:91 msgid "" -"<p>The <big>Kerberos Container DN</big> specifies the container where the " -"Kerberos server should create \n" +"<p>The <big>Kerberos Container DN</big> specifies the container where the Kerberos server should create \n" "the principals and other informational data by default.</p>" msgstr "" #. Help text: Use existing LDAP server 5/6 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:95 msgid "" -"<p><big>KDC Bind DN</big> is the DN that KDC uses to authenticate to the " -"LDAP server.\n" +"<p><big>KDC Bind DN</big> is the DN that KDC uses to authenticate to the LDAP server.\n" "Only read access is required for this account.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Help text: Use existing LDAP server 6/6 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:99 msgid "" -"<p><big>Kadmin Bind DN</big> is the DN that Kadmind uses to authenticate to " -"the LDAP server.\n" +"<p><big>Kadmin Bind DN</big> is the DN that Kadmind uses to authenticate to the LDAP server.\n" "This account also needs write access.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -607,8 +595,7 @@ #. Help text: New LDAP server 3/6 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:111 msgid "" -"<p>The <big>Kerberos Container DN</big> specifies the container where the " -"Kerberos server should create \n" +"<p>The <big>Kerberos Container DN</big> specifies the container where the Kerberos server should create \n" "the principals and other informational data by default.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -620,22 +607,18 @@ #. Help text: New LDAP server 5/6 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:117 msgid "" -"<p>If you select the checkbox <big>Use Previously Entered Password</big>, " -"the password you entered\n" +"<p>If you select the checkbox <big>Use Previously Entered Password</big>, the password you entered\n" "as the KDC Master password is also used for the LDAP administrator. \n" msgstr "" #. Help text: New LDAP server 6/6 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:121 -msgid "" -"When the checkbox is not set, you can enter a different password for the " -"LDAP administrator.</p>" +msgid "When the checkbox is not set, you can enter a different password for the LDAP administrator.</p>" msgstr "" #. Help text: Summary 1/3 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:125 -msgid "" -"<p>This is a short summary about your Kerberos server configuration.</p>" +msgid "<p>This is a short summary about your Kerberos server configuration.</p>" msgstr "" #. Help text: Summary 2/3 @@ -645,46 +628,33 @@ #. Help text: Summary 3/3 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:133 -msgid "" -"<p>You can change some values of your configuration by clicking the <b>Edit button.</p>" +msgid "<p>You can change some values of your configuration by clicking the <b>Edit</b> button.</p>" msgstr "" #. ============================================================================== #. advanced item help: database_name #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:139 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the location of the Kerberos database for this " -"realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This string specifies the location of the Kerberos database for this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help: acl_file #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:143 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the location of the access control list (ACL) file " -"that kadmin uses to determine the principals' permissions on the database." +msgid "<p>This string specifies the location of the access control list (ACL) file that kadmin uses to determine the principals' permissions on the database.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help: admin_keytab #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:147 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the location of the keytab file that kadmin uses to " -"authenticate to the database.</p>" +msgid "<p>This string specifies the location of the keytab file that kadmin uses to authenticate to the database.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help: default_principal_expiration #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:151 -msgid "" -"<p>This absolute time specifies the default expiration date of principals " -"created in this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This absolute time specifies the default expiration date of principals created in this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help principal_flags 1/13 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:155 -msgid "" -"<p>These flags specify the default attributes of the principal created in " -"this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>These flags specify the default attributes of the principal created in this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:158 @@ -729,9 +699,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 6/13 :Enable user-to-user authentication #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:178 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain a session key for another " -"user, permitting user-to-user authentication for this principal." +msgid "Enabling this flag allows the principal to obtain a session key for another user, permitting user-to-user authentication for this principal." msgstr "" #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:181 @@ -740,12 +708,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 7/13 :Requires preauth #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:183 -msgid "" -"If this flag is enabled on a client principal, that principal is required to " -"preauthenticate to the KDC before receiving any tickets. If you enable this " -"flag on a service principal, the service tickets for this principal will " -"only be issued to clients with a TGT that has the preauthenticated ticket " -"set." +msgid "If this flag is enabled on a client principal, that principal is required to preauthenticate to the KDC before receiving any tickets. If you enable this flag on a service principal, the service tickets for this principal will only be issued to clients with a TGT that has the preauthenticated ticket set." msgstr "" #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:186 @@ -754,9 +717,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 8/13 :Requires hwauth #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:188 -msgid "" -"If this flag is enabled, the principal is required to preauthenticate using " -"a hardware device before receiving any tickets." +msgid "If this flag is enabled, the principal is required to preauthenticate using a hardware device before receiving any tickets." msgstr "" #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:191 @@ -765,9 +726,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 9/13 :Allow service #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:193 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag allows the KDC to issue service tickets for this " -"principal." +msgid "Enabling this flag allows the KDC to issue service tickets for this principal." msgstr "" #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:196 @@ -776,10 +735,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 10/13 :Allow tgs request #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:198 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag allows a principal to obtain tickets based on a ticket-" -"granting-ticket, rather than repeating the authentication process that was " -"used to obtain the TGT." +msgid "Enabling this flag allows a principal to obtain tickets based on a ticket-granting-ticket, rather than repeating the authentication process that was used to obtain the TGT." msgstr "" #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:201 @@ -788,10 +744,7 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 11/13 :Allow tickets #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:203 -msgid "" -"Enabling this flag means that the KDC will issue tickets for this " -"principal. Disabling this flag essentially deactivates the principal within " -"this realm." +msgid "Enabling this flag means that the KDC will issue tickets for this principal. Disabling this flag essentially deactivates the principal within this realm." msgstr "" #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:206 @@ -809,50 +762,34 @@ #. advanced item help principal_flags 13/13 :Password changing service #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:211 -msgid "" -"If this flag is enabled, it marks this principal as a password change " -"service. This should only be used in special cases, for example, if a " -"user's password has expired, the user has to get tickets for that " -"principal to be able to change it without going through the normal password " -"authentication." +msgid "If this flag is enabled, it marks this principal as a password change service. This should only be used in special cases, for example, if a user's password has expired, the user has to get tickets for that principal to be able to change it without going through the normal password authentication." msgstr "" #. advanced item help : dict_file #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:215 -msgid "" -"<p>The string location of the dictionary file containing strings that are " -"not allowed as passwords. If this tag is not set or if there is no policy " -"assigned to the principal, no check will be done.</p>" +msgid "<p>The string location of the dictionary file containing strings that are not allowed as passwords. If this tag is not set or if there is no policy assigned to the principal, no check will be done.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kadmind_port #. advanced item help : kpasswd_port #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:219 #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:223 -msgid "" -"<p>This port number specifies the port on which the kadmind daemon listens " -"for this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This port number specifies the port on which the kadmind daemon listens for this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : key_stash_file #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:227 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the location where the master key has been stored " -"with kdb5_stash.</p>" +msgid "<p>This string specifies the location where the master key has been stored with kdb5_stash.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdc_ports #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:231 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the list of ports that the KDC listens to for this " -"realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This string specifies the list of ports that the KDC listens to for this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : master_key_name #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:235 -msgid "" -"<p>This string specifies the name of the principal associated with the " -"master key. The default value is K/M.</p>" +msgid "<p>This string specifies the name of the principal associated with the master key. The default value is K/M.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : master_key_type @@ -862,69 +799,47 @@ #. advanced item help : max_life #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:243 -msgid "" -"<p>This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be " -"valid for in this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be valid for in this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : max_renew_life #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:247 -msgid "" -"<p>This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be " -"renewed for in this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>This delta time specifies the maximum time period that a ticket may be renewed for in this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : supported_enctypes #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:251 -msgid "" -"<p>A list of key/salt strings that specifies the default key/salt " -"combinations of principals for this realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>A list of key/salt strings that specifies the default key/salt combinations of principals for this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdc_supported_enctypes #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:255 -msgid "" -"<p>Specifies the permitted key/salt combinations of principals for this " -"realm.</p>" +msgid "<p>Specifies the permitted key/salt combinations of principals for this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : reject_bad_transit #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:259 -msgid "" -"<p>Specifies whether or not the list of transited realms for cross-realm " -"tickets should be checked against the transit path computed from the realm " -"names and the [capaths] section of its krb5.conf file</p>" +msgid "<p>Specifies whether or not the list of transited realms for cross-realm tickets should be checked against the transit path computed from the realm names and the [capaths] section of its krb5.conf file</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : ldap_conns_per_server #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:263 -msgid "" -"<p>This LDAP specific tag indicates the number of connections to be " -"maintained via the LDAP server.</p>" +msgid "<p>This LDAP specific tag indicates the number of connections to be maintained via the LDAP server.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : ldap_service_password_file #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:267 -msgid "" -"<p>This LDAP-specific tag indicates the file containing the stashed " -"passwords for the objects used for starting the Kerberos servers.</p>" +msgid "<p>This LDAP-specific tag indicates the file containing the stashed passwords for the objects used for starting the Kerberos servers.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdb_subtrees #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:271 -msgid "" -"<p>Specifies the list of subtrees containing the principals of a realm. The " -"list contains the DNs of the subtree objects separated by colon(:).<p>The search scope specifies the scope for searching the principals under " -"the subtree.</p>" +msgid "<p>Specifies the list of subtrees containing the principals of a realm. The list contains the DNs of the subtree objects separated by colon(:).</p><p>The search scope specifies the scope for searching the principals under the subtree.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdb_containerref #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:275 -msgid "" -"<p>Specifies the DN of the container object in which the principals of a " -"realm will be created. If the container reference is not configured for a " -"realm, the principals will be created in the realm container.</p>" +msgid "<p>Specifies the DN of the container object in which the principals of a realm will be created. If the container reference is not configured for a realm, the principals will be created in the realm container.</p>" msgstr "" #. advanced item help : kdb_maxtktlife @@ -934,9 +849,7 @@ #. advanced item help : kdb_maxrenewlife #: src/include/kerberos-server/helps.rb:283 -msgid "" -"<p>Specifies maximum renewable life of tickets for principals in this realm." -"</p>" +msgid "<p>Specifies maximum renewable life of tickets for principals in this realm.</p>" msgstr "" #. Initialization dialog contents @@ -1123,52 +1036,52 @@ msgid "Configuration of the Kerberos Server" msgstr "" -#. summary text +#. summary text #: src/modules/KerberosServer.pm:2514 msgid "Database Backend: " msgstr "" -#. summary text +#. summary text #: src/modules/KerberosServer.pm:2518 msgid "Database Name:" msgstr "" -#. summary text +#. summary text #: src/modules/KerberosServer.pm:2522 msgid "Realm: " msgstr "" -#. summary text +#. summary text #: src/modules/KerberosServer.pm:2527 msgid "KDC Ports:" msgstr "" -#. summary text +#. summary text #: src/modules/KerberosServer.pm:2532 msgid "kadmind Port:" msgstr "" -#. summary text +#. summary text #: src/modules/KerberosServer.pm:2537 msgid "kpasswd Port:" msgstr "" -#. summary text +#. summary text #: src/modules/KerberosServer.pm:2543 msgid "LDAP Server URI:" msgstr "" -#. summary text +#. summary text #: src/modules/KerberosServer.pm:2546 msgid "Kerberos Container DN:" msgstr "" -#. summary text +#. summary text #: src/modules/KerberosServer.pm:2549 msgid "KDC bind DN:" msgstr "" -#. summary text +#. summary text #: src/modules/KerberosServer.pm:2552 msgid "Kadmin bind DN:" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/kerberos.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/kerberos.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/kerberos.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -184,12 +184,7 @@ #. help text (do not transl. values "m","h", "d") #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:61 -msgid "" -"<p>By default, the time unit of <b>Default Lifetime</b>, <b>Default " -"Renewable Lifetime</b>, and <b>Clock Skew</b> is set to seconds. " -"Alternatively, specify the time unit (<tt>m</tt> for minutes, <tt>h</tt> for " -"hours, or <tt>d</tt> for days) and use it as a value suffix, as in <tt>1d or <tt>24h</tt> for one day.</p>" +msgid "<p>By default, the time unit of <b>Default Lifetime</b>, <b>Default Renewable Lifetime</b>, and <b>Clock Skew</b> is set to seconds. Alternatively, specify the time unit (<tt>m</tt> for minutes, <tt>h</tt> for hours, or <tt>d</tt> for days) and use it as a value suffix, as in <tt>1d</tt> or <tt>24h</tt> for one day.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -204,11 +199,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:115 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Forwardable</b> lets you transfer your complete identity (TGT) to " -"another machine. <b>Proxiable</b> only lets you transfer particular tickets. " -"Select wheter the options should be applied to all PAM services, none of " -"them or enter a list of services separated by spaces.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Forwardable</b> lets you transfer your complete identity (TGT) to another machine. <b>Proxiable</b> only lets you transfer particular tickets. Select wheter the options should be applied to all PAM services, none of them or enter a list of services separated by spaces.</p>" msgstr "" #. checkbox label @@ -223,24 +214,17 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:144 -msgid "" -"<p>If <b>Retained</b> is enabled, a PAM module keeps the tickets after " -"closing the session.</p>" +msgid "<p>If <b>Retained</b> is enabled, a PAM module keeps the tickets after closing the session.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:159 -msgid "" -"<p>To enable Kerberos support for your OpenSSH client, select <b>Kerberos " -"Support for OpenSSH Client</b>. In this case, Kerberos tickets are used for " -"user authentication on the SSH server.</p>" +msgid "<p>To enable Kerberos support for your OpenSSH client, select <b>Kerberos Support for OpenSSH Client</b>. In this case, Kerberos tickets are used for user authentication on the SSH server.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:174 -msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Ignore Unknown Users</b> to have Kerberos ignore authentication " -"attempts by users it does not know.</p>" +msgid "<p>Check <b>Ignore Unknown Users</b> to have Kerberos ignore authentication attempts by users it does not know.</p>" msgstr "" #. intfield label @@ -250,10 +234,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:190 -msgid "" -"<p>When the <b>Minimum UID</b> is greater than 0, authentication attempts by " -"users with UIDs below the specified number are ignored. This is useful for " -"disabling Kerberos authentication for the system administrator root.</p>" +msgid "<p>When the <b>Minimum UID</b> is greater than 0, authentication attempts by users with UIDs below the specified number are ignored. This is useful for disabling Kerberos authentication for the system administrator root.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -263,9 +244,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:205 -msgid "" -"<p>The <b>Clock Skew</b> is the tolerance for time stamps not exactly " -"matching the host's system clock. The value is in seconds.</p>" +msgid "<p>The <b>Clock Skew</b> is the tolerance for time stamps not exactly matching the host's system clock. The value is in seconds.</p>" msgstr "" #. push button label @@ -288,9 +267,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:247 -msgid "" -"<p>To configure the source of user accounts, select the appropriate " -"configuration module in <b>Configure User Data</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>To configure the source of user accounts, select the appropriate configuration module in <b>Configure User Data</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. menu item @@ -310,9 +287,7 @@ #. help text for "Credential Cac&he Directory" #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:267 -msgid "" -"<p>Specify the directory where to place credential cache files as " -"<b>Credential Cache Directory</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Specify the directory where to place credential cache files as <b>Credential Cache Directory</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. push button label @@ -327,9 +302,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:292 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Credential Cache Template</b> specifies the location in which to place " -"the user's session-specific credential cache.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Credential Cache Template</b> specifies the location in which to place the user's session-specific credential cache.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -339,9 +312,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:308 -msgid "" -"<p>Specify the location of the file with the keys of principals in <b>Keytab " -"File Location</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Specify the location of the file with the keys of principals in <b>Keytab File Location</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. push button label @@ -356,9 +327,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:333 -msgid "" -"<p>With <b>Mappings</b>, specify how the PAM module should derive the " -"principal's name from the system user name.</p>" +msgid "<p>With <b>Mappings</b>, specify how the PAM module should derive the principal's name from the system user name.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -368,16 +337,12 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:348 -msgid "" -"<p>The value of <b>Banner</b> is a text that should be shown before a " -"password questions.</p>" +msgid "<p>The value of <b>Banner</b> is a text that should be shown before a password questions.</p>" msgstr "" #. generic help for Services tab #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:362 -msgid "" -"<p>All settings in this dialog can be applied for all PAM services, no " -"service or a specific list of services separated by commas.</p>" +msgid "<p>All settings in this dialog can be applied for all PAM services, no service or a specific list of services separated by commas.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -387,9 +352,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:372 -msgid "" -"<p>When <b>Addressless Initial Tickets</b> is set, initial tickets (TGT) " -"with no address information are requested.</p>" +msgid "<p>When <b>Addressless Initial Tickets</b> is set, initial tickets (TGT) with no address information are requested.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -399,9 +362,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:388 -msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Debug</b> to turn on debugging for selected services via syslog." -"</p>" +msgid "<p>Check <b>Debug</b> to turn on debugging for selected services via syslog.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -411,9 +372,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:404 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Sensitive Debug</b> turns on debugging of sensitive information." +msgid "<p><b>Sensitive Debug</b> turns on debugging of sensitive information.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -423,10 +382,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:420 -msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Accept Existing Ticket</b> to tell PAM module to accept the " -"presence of pre-existing Kerberos credentials as sufficient to authenticate " -"the user.</p>" +msgid "<p>Check <b>Accept Existing Ticket</b> to tell PAM module to accept the presence of pre-existing Kerberos credentials as sufficient to authenticate the user.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -436,9 +392,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:437 -msgid "" -"<p>List the services allowed to provide credentials in <b>External " -"Credentials</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>List the services allowed to provide credentials in <b>External Credentials</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -448,9 +402,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:454 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Use Shared Memory</b> describes the services for which the shared " -"memory is used during authentication.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Use Shared Memory</b> describes the services for which the shared memory is used during authentication.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -460,9 +412,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:471 -msgid "" -"<p>Select the services for which TGT should be validated by changing the " -"value of <b>Validate Initial Ticket</b>." +msgid "<p>Select the services for which TGT should be validated by changing the value of <b>Validate Initial Ticket</b>." msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -472,9 +422,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:488 -msgid "" -"<p>With <b>Initial Prompt</b> checked, the PAM module asks for a password " -"before the authentication attempt.</p>" +msgid "<p>With <b>Initial Prompt</b> checked, the PAM module asks for a password before the authentication attempt.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -484,10 +432,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:504 -msgid "" -"<p>If <b>Subsequent Prompt</b> is enabled, the PAM module may ask the user " -"for a password, in case the previously-entered password was somehow " -"insufficient for authentication.</p>" +msgid "<p>If <b>Subsequent Prompt</b> is enabled, the PAM module may ask the user for a password, in case the previously-entered password was somehow insufficient for authentication.</p>" msgstr "" #. directory location popup label @@ -526,9 +471,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "<b><big>Authentication with Kerberos</big></b><br>\n" -"The Kerberos client configuration updates your PAM settings to enable " -"Kerberos authentication. Your system needs access to a Kerberos server in " -"the network for this to work.\n" +"The Kerberos client configuration updates your PAM settings to enable Kerberos authentication. Your system needs access to a Kerberos server in the network for this to work.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -537,27 +480,19 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "<b>Basic Client Settings</b>:\n" -"Enter your <b>Default Domain</b>, <b>Default Realm</b>, and the hostname or " -"address of your Key Distribution Center (<b>KDC Server Address</b>). To " -"specify more values for KDC, separate them by spaces.</p>" +"Enter your <b>Default Domain</b>, <b>Default Realm</b>, and the hostname or address of your Key Distribution Center (<b>KDC Server Address</b>). To specify more values for KDC, separate them by spaces.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 3/5 #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:719 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"It is common practice to use the domain name in uppercase as your default " -"realm name, but you can select freely. If the realm is not available on the " -"server, you cannot log in. Ask your server administrator if you need more " -"information.</p>\n" +"It is common practice to use the domain name in uppercase as your default realm name, but you can select freely. If the realm is not available on the server, you cannot log in. Ask your server administrator if you need more information.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. help text for Use DNS to acquire the configuration data at runtime #: src/include/kerberos-client/dialogs.rb:723 -msgid "" -"Check <b>Use DNS to Acquire the Configuration Data at Runtime</b> to let " -"your client use the Kerberos authentication data provided by DNS. This " -"option cannot be selected if the DNS server does not provide such data.</p>" +msgid "Check <b>Use DNS to Acquire the Configuration Data at Runtime</b> to let your client use the Kerberos authentication data provided by DNS. This option cannot be selected if the DNS server does not provide such data.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 5/5 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/ldap-client.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/ldap-client.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/ldap-client.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -226,91 +226,66 @@ #. help text 2/9 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:535 -msgid "" -"<p>To authenticate your users with an OpenLDAP server, select <b>Use LDAP. NSS and PAM will be configured accordingly.</p>" +msgid "<p>To authenticate your users with an OpenLDAP server, select <b>Use LDAP</b>. NSS and PAM will be configured accordingly.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 3/9 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:539 msgid "" "<p>To deactivate LDAP services, click <b>Do Not Use LDAP</b>.\n" -"If you deactivate LDAP, the current LDAP entry for passwd in /etc/nsswitch." -"conf\n" +"If you deactivate LDAP, the current LDAP entry for passwd in /etc/nsswitch.conf\n" "will be removed. The PAM configuration will be modified and the LDAP entry\n" "removed.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 3.5/9 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:546 -msgid "" -"<p>To activate LDAP but forbid users from logging in to this machine, select " -"<b>Enable LDAP Users but Disable Logins</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>To activate LDAP but forbid users from logging in to this machine, select <b>Enable LDAP Users but Disable Logins</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:550 -msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Use System Security Services Daemon</b> if you want the system " -"to use SSSD instead of nss_ldap.</p>" +msgid "<p>Check <b>Use System Security Services Daemon</b> if you want the system to use SSSD instead of nss_ldap.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 4/9 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:554 msgid "" -"<p>Enter the LDAP server's address (such as ldap.example.com or 10.20.0.2) " -"in <b>Addresses</b> and the distinguished name of the search base (<b>Base " -"DN</b>, such as dc=example,dc=com). Specify multiple servers\n" -"by separating their addresses with spaces. It must be possible to resolve " -"the\n" -"addresses without using LDAP. You can also specify the port on which the " -"server is running using the syntax \"server:port\", for example, <tt>ldap." -"example.com:379</tt>.\n" +"<p>Enter the LDAP server's address (such as ldap.example.com or 10.20.0.2) in <b>Addresses</b> and the distinguished name of the search base (<b>Base DN</b>, such as dc=example,dc=com). Specify multiple servers\n" +"by separating their addresses with spaces. It must be possible to resolve the\n" +"addresses without using LDAP. You can also specify the port on which the server is running using the syntax \"server:port\", for example, <tt>ldap.example.com:379</tt>.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" #. help text 5/9 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:561 -msgid "" -"<p>With <b>Find</b>, select the LDAP server from the list provided by the " -"service location protocol (SLP). Using <b>Fetch DN</b>, read the base DN " -"from server.</p>" +msgid "<p>With <b>Find</b>, select the LDAP server from the list provided by the service location protocol (SLP). Using <b>Fetch DN</b>, read the base DN from server.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 6/9 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:565 msgid "" "<p>Some LDAP servers support StartTLS (RFC2830).\n" -"If your server supports it and it is configured, activate <b>LDAP TLS/SSL\n" +"If your server supports it and it is configured, activate <b>LDAP TLS/SSL</b>\n" "to encrypt your communication with the LDAP server. You may download a CA\n" "certificate file in PEM format from a given URL.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:571 msgid "" -"<p>A TLS session may require special client configuration. One of the " -"config\n" -" options is TLS_REQCERT which specifies what checks to perform on " -"server certificates.\n" -" The value is the <b>level</b> that can be specified with keywords " -"<i>never</i>, <i>allow</i>,\n" -" <i>try</i> and <i>demand</i>. In the <b>SSL/TLS Configuration</b> " -"dialog there is\n" -" the option <b>Request server certificate</b> which will set the " -"TLS_REQCERT\n" -" configuration option to <i>demand</i> if it's enabled or to " -"<i>allow</i> if it's disabled.</p>\n" +"<p>A TLS session may require special client configuration. One of the config\n" +" options is TLS_REQCERT which specifies what checks to perform on server certificates.\n" +" The value is the <b>level</b> that can be specified with keywords <i>never</i>, <i>allow</i>,\n" +" <i>try</i> and <i>demand</i>. In the <b>SSL/TLS Configuration</b> dialog there is\n" +" the option <b>Request server certificate</b> which will set the TLS_REQCERT\n" +" configuration option to <i>demand</i> if it's enabled or to <i>allow</i> if it's disabled.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:579 msgid "" -"<p>In addition to LDAP URLs and TLS/SSL encryption, LDAP supports LDAPS " -"URLs.\n" -" LDAPS URLs use SSL connections instead of plain connections. They " -"have a syntax\n" -" similar to LDAP URLs except the schemes are different and the " -"default port for LDAPS URLs\n" +"<p>In addition to LDAP URLs and TLS/SSL encryption, LDAP supports LDAPS URLs.\n" +" LDAPS URLs use SSL connections instead of plain connections. They have a syntax\n" +" similar to LDAP URLs except the schemes are different and the default port for LDAPS URLs\n" " is 636 instead of 389.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -326,8 +301,7 @@ #. help text 9/9 (additional) #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:591 msgid "" -"<p><b>Automounter</b> is a daemon that automatically mounts directories, " -"such\n" +"<p><b>Automounter</b> is a daemon that automatically mounts directories, such\n" "as users' home directories. Its configuration files (auto.*) should already\n" "exist locally or over LDAP. If the automounter is not installed yet but you\n" "want to use it, it will be installed automatically.</p>\n" @@ -461,8 +435,7 @@ #. yes/no question #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:970 msgid "" -"The security connection is enabled, but server certificate verification is " -"disabled.\n" +"The security connection is enabled, but server certificate verification is disabled.\n" "Enable certificate checks now?" msgstr "" @@ -474,21 +447,16 @@ #. help text 1/3 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:1017 msgid "" -"<p>If Kerberos authentication should be used, specify the <b>realm</b> and " -"<b>KDC Address</b>.\n" -"Determine if user credentials should be cached locally by checking <b>SSSD " -"Offline Authentication</b>.\n" -"For more info about SSSD settings, check the man page of <tt>sssd.conf</tt>." -"</p>\n" +"<p>If Kerberos authentication should be used, specify the <b>realm</b> and <b>KDC Address</b>.\n" +"Determine if user credentials should be cached locally by checking <b>SSSD Offline Authentication</b>.\n" +"For more info about SSSD settings, check the man page of <tt>sssd.conf</tt>.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:1023 msgid "" -"<p><b>Password Change Protocol</b> refers to the pam_password attribute of " -"the\n" -"<tt>/etc/ldap.conf</tt> file. See <tt>man pam_ldap</tt> for an explanation " -"of its values.</p>" +"<p><b>Password Change Protocol</b> refers to the pam_password attribute of the\n" +"<tt>/etc/ldap.conf</tt> file. See <tt>man pam_ldap</tt> for an explanation of its values.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 3/3, %1 is attribute name @@ -501,8 +469,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:1034 msgid "" "<p>If secure connection requires certificate checking, specify where your\n" -"certificate file is located. Enter either a directory containing " -"certificates\n" +"certificate file is located. Enter either a directory containing certificates\n" "or the explicit path to one certificate file.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -524,36 +491,30 @@ msgid "" "<p>To access the data stored on the server, enter the\n" "<b>Administrator DN</b>.\n" -"You can enter the full DN (for example, cn=Administrator,dc=mydomain,dc=com) " -"or \n" -"the relative DN (for example, cn=Administrator). The LDAP base DN is " -"appended automatically if the appropriate option is checked.</p>\n" +"You can enter the full DN (for example, cn=Administrator,dc=mydomain,dc=com) or \n" +"the relative DN (for example, cn=Administrator). The LDAP base DN is appended automatically if the appropriate option is checked.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. help text 3/4 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:1057 msgid "" "<p>To create the default configuration objects for LDAP users and groups,\n" -"check <b>Create Default Configuration Objects</b>. The objects are only " -"created when they do not already exist.</p>\n" +"check <b>Create Default Configuration Objects</b>. The objects are only created when they do not already exist.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. help text 4/4 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:1061 msgid "" "<p>Press <b>Configure</b> to configure settings stored on the\n" -"LDAP server. You will be asked for the password if you are not connected yet " -"or\n" +"LDAP server. You will be asked for the password if you are not connected yet or\n" "have changed your configuration.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. help text 1/1 #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:1068 msgid "" -"<p>Specify the search bases to use for specific maps (users or groups) if " -"they are different from the base DN. These values are\n" -"set to the ldap_user_search_base, ldap_group_search_base and " -"ldap_autofs_search_base attributes in /etc/sssd/sssd.conf file.</p>\n" +"<p>Specify the search bases to use for specific maps (users or groups) if they are different from the base DN. These values are\n" +"set to the ldap_user_search_base, ldap_group_search_base and ldap_autofs_search_base attributes in /etc/sssd/sssd.conf file.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. tab label @@ -781,8 +742,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap/ui.rb:1897 msgid "" "<p>Edit the values of attributes in the table with <b>Edit</b>.\n" -"Some values have special meanings, for example, changing the <b>cn</b> value " -"renames the\n" +"Some values have special meanings, for example, changing the <b>cn</b> value renames the\n" "current module.</p>\n" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/ldap-server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/ldap-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/ldap-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -97,9 +97,7 @@ #. error popup #: src/clients/ldap-server_proposal.rb:58 #: src/clients/ldap-server_proposal.rb:228 -msgid "" -"The LDAP database has already been created. You can change the settings " -"later in the installed system." +msgid "The LDAP database has already been created. You can change the settings later in the installed system." msgstr "" #. y2error( "sysconfig var is '%1'", SCR::Read( .sysconfig.openldap.OPENLDAP_REGISTER_SLP ) ); @@ -112,9 +110,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/ldap-server_proposal.rb:106 -msgid "" -"Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set an LDAP server password to " -"continue." +msgid "Unable to retrieve the system root password. Set an LDAP server password to continue." msgstr "" #: src/clients/ldap-server_proposal.rb:112 @@ -204,9 +200,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/ldap-server_proposal.rb:309 -msgid "" -"OpenLDAP Replication Setup failed. Reconfigure after the installation has " -"finished." +msgid "OpenLDAP Replication Setup failed. Reconfigure after the installation has finished." msgstr "" #: src/clients/ldap-server_proposal.rb:344 @@ -227,10 +221,8 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/complex.rb:105 msgid "" -"You have an existing configuration, but the LDAP server is currently not " -"running.\n" -"Do you want to start the server now and re-read its configuration data or do " -"you \n" +"You have an existing configuration, but the LDAP server is currently not running.\n" +"Do you want to start the server now and re-read its configuration data or do you \n" "want to create a new configuration from scratch?" msgstr "" @@ -307,9 +299,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:198 -msgid "" -"Do you want to start it now to re-read its configuration data or do you want " -"to create a new configuration from scratch?" +msgid "Do you want to start it now to re-read its configuration data or do you want to create a new configuration from scratch?" msgstr "" #. get helps page @@ -468,9 +458,7 @@ #. Doing these checks during installation will #. most probably fail #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:972 -msgid "" -"Failed to open connection to the \"cn=config\" database on the provider " -"server.\n" +msgid "Failed to open connection to the \"cn=config\" database on the provider server.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:975 @@ -508,15 +496,12 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:1078 -msgid "" -"Setting up cascaded replication of the cn=config is currently not supported." +msgid "Setting up cascaded replication of the cn=config is currently not supported." msgstr "" #. 2. Verify that the binddn/credential combination acutally works #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:1105 -msgid "" -"Checking the authentication credentials defined in the replication " -"configuration on the provider server failed.\n" +msgid "Checking the authentication credentials defined in the replication configuration on the provider server failed.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:1108 src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1971 @@ -543,8 +528,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/dialogs.rb:1220 msgid "" "\n" -"(Remote access to the Configuration database will be restricted to " -"encrypted\n" +"(Remote access to the Configuration database will be restricted to encrypted\n" "LDAP Connections.)\n" msgstr "" @@ -575,10 +559,8 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:21 msgid "" "<p>Select <b>Yes</b> if the LDAP server should be started automatically as \n" -"part of the boot process. Select <b>No</b> if the LDAP server should not be " -"started. Note:\n" -"After selecting <b>No</b>, you cannot change the OpenLDAP configuration.\n" +"part of the boot process. Select <b>No</b> if the LDAP server should not be started. Note:\n" +"After selecting <b>No</b>, you cannot change the OpenLDAP configuration.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:26 @@ -591,18 +573,14 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:30 msgid "" -"<p><b>LDAP</b> is the standard LDAP interface on Port 389. TLS/SSL secured " -"communication\n" -"is possible with the StartTLS operation when you have a server certificate " -"configured.</p>" +"<p><b>LDAP</b> is the standard LDAP interface on Port 389. TLS/SSL secured communication\n" +"is possible with the StartTLS operation when you have a server certificate configured.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:33 msgid "" -"<p><b>LDAPS</b> enables the \"LDAP over SSL (ldaps)\" interface for SSL " -"protected\n" -"connections on port 636. This only works if you have a server certificate " -"configured (see \"Global Settings\"/\"TLS Settings\").\n" +"<p><b>LDAPS</b> enables the \"LDAP over SSL (ldaps)\" interface for SSL protected\n" +"connections on port 636. This only works if you have a server certificate configured (see \"Global Settings\"/\"TLS Settings\").\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:36 @@ -629,10 +607,8 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:49 msgid "" -"<p>Choose the <b>Database</b> from <b>hdb</b> and <b>bdb</b>. <b>Hdb</b> is " -"a\n" -"variant of the <b>bdb</b> backend that uses a hierarchical database layout " -"and\n" +"<p>Choose the <b>Database</b> from <b>hdb</b> and <b>bdb</b>. <b>Hdb</b> is a\n" +"variant of the <b>bdb</b> backend that uses a hierarchical database layout and\n" "supports subtree renames. Otherwise it is identical to <b>bdb</b>. A\n" "<b>hdb</b>-Database needs a larger <b>idlcachesize</b> than a\n" "<b>bdb</b>-Database for a good search performance.</p>\n" @@ -646,24 +622,18 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:59 msgid "" -"<p>The <b>Administrator DN</b> along with a <b>LDAP Administrator Password \n" -"specifies a superuser identity for the database, surpassing all ACLs and " -"other \n" -"administrative limit restrictions. Checking <b>Append Base DN</b> appends " -"the \n" -"<b>Base DN</b> entered above, for example, a base DN of <tt>dc=example," -"dc=com</tt>\n" -"and Administrator DN of <tt>c=Admin</tt> would combine to an effective " -"Administrator DN\n" +"<p>The <b>Administrator DN</b> along with a <b>LDAP Administrator Password</b> \n" +"specifies a superuser identity for the database, surpassing all ACLs and other \n" +"administrative limit restrictions. Checking <b>Append Base DN</b> appends the \n" +"<b>Base DN</b> entered above, for example, a base DN of <tt>dc=example,dc=com</tt>\n" +"and Administrator DN of <tt>c=Admin</tt> would combine to an effective Administrator DN\n" "of <tt>c=Admin,dc=example,dc=com</tt>.</p> " msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:67 msgid "" "<p>If this wizard was started during installation, the \n" -"<b>LDAP Administrator Password</b> is initially set to the system's root " -"password\n" +"<b>LDAP Administrator Password</b> is initially set to the system's root password\n" "entered earlier in the installation process.</p> " msgstr "" @@ -697,8 +667,7 @@ "click <b>Change Password</b>. \n" "A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the \n" "<b>Password Encryption</b>. \n" -"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already " -"been \n" +"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been \n" "set in the configuration.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -712,35 +681,25 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:99 msgid "" -"<p>Enter the complete DN or only the first part and append the base DN " -"automatically\n" +"<p>Enter the complete DN or only the first part and append the base DN automatically\n" "with <b>Append Base DN</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:102 msgid "" -"<p>To change the password for the administrator account, click <b>Change " -"Password</b>.\n" -"A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the <b>Password " -"Encryption</b>.\n" -"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been " -"set in the configuration.</p>\n" +"<p>To change the password for the administrator account, click <b>Change Password</b>.\n" +"A Popup will prompt you to enter the new password and select the <b>Password Encryption</b>.\n" +"The password fields are initially empty even if a password has already been set in the configuration.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:107 msgid "" -"<p>With the <b>Entry Cache</b> and <b>Index Cache (IDL cache)</b> you can " -"adjust\n" -"the sizes of OpenLDAP's internal caches. The <b>Entry Cache</b> defines the " -"number of entries\n" -"that are kept in OpenLDAP's in-memory entry cache. If it is possible (enough " -"RAM) this number\n" -"should be large enough to keep the whole database in memory. The <b>Index " -"Cache (IDL cache)</b> \n" -"is used to speed up searches on indexed attributes. In general especially " -"HDB-Databases require a\n" -"large IDL cache for good search performance (three times the size of the " -"entry cache as a rule of\n" +"<p>With the <b>Entry Cache</b> and <b>Index Cache (IDL cache)</b> you can adjust\n" +"the sizes of OpenLDAP's internal caches. The <b>Entry Cache</b> defines the number of entries\n" +"that are kept in OpenLDAP's in-memory entry cache. If it is possible (enough RAM) this number\n" +"should be large enough to keep the whole database in memory. The <b>Index Cache (IDL cache)</b> \n" +"is used to speed up searches on indexed attributes. In general especially HDB-Databases require a\n" +"large IDL cache for good search performance (three times the size of the entry cache as a rule of\n" "thumbs).</p>" msgstr "" @@ -756,14 +715,10 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:120 msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Hash Clear Text Passwords</b> to specify that the OpenLDAP " -"server\n" -"should encrypt clear text passwords present in add and modify requests " -"before storing them\n" -"in the database. Note that this violates the X.500/LDAP information model, " -"but may be\n" -"needed to compensate for LDAP clients that do not use the password modify " -"extended operation \n" +"<p>Check <b>Hash Clear Text Passwords</b> to specify that the OpenLDAP server\n" +"should encrypt clear text passwords present in add and modify requests before storing them\n" +"in the database. Note that this violates the X.500/LDAP information model, but may be\n" +"needed to compensate for LDAP clients that do not use the password modify extended operation \n" "to manage passwords.</p> " msgstr "" @@ -777,15 +732,12 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:134 -msgid "" -"<p>Enter the name of the default policy object in <b>Default Policy Object " -"DN</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Enter the name of the default policy object in <b>Default Policy Object DN</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:137 msgid "" -"<p>Create or change the default policy by clicking <b>Edit Policy</b>. You " -"may\n" +"<p>Create or change the default policy by clicking <b>Edit Policy</b>. You may\n" "be asked to enter the LDAP administrator password afterwards to allow the\n" "Policy Object being read from the server.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -799,33 +751,28 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:144 -msgid "" -"<p>The table displays a list of attributes which currently have an index " -"defined.</p>" +msgid "<p>The table displays a list of attributes which currently have an index defined.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:147 msgid "" "<p>Indexes are used by OpenLDAP to improve search performance on specific\n" "types of searches. Indexes should be configured corresponding to the most\n" -"common searches on a database. YaST allows you to setup three different " -"types\n" +"common searches on a database. YaST allows you to setup three different types\n" "of indexes.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:153 msgid "" "<p><b>Presence</b>: This index is used for searches with presence filters\n" -"(i.e. <tt>(attributeType=*)</tt>). Presence indexes should only be " -"configured\n" +"(i.e. <tt>(attributeType=*)</tt>). Presence indexes should only be configured\n" "for attributes that occur rarely in the database.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:158 msgid "" "<p><b>Equality</b>: This index is used for searches with equality filters \n" -"(i.e.(<tt>(attributeType=<exact values>)</tt>). An <b>Equality</b> " -"index\n" +"(i.e.(<tt>(attributeType=<exact values>)</tt>). An <b>Equality</b> index\n" "should always be configured with the <tt>objectclass</tt> attribute.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -844,11 +791,9 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:171 msgid "" -"<p>Note: Depending on the database size it can take a while until newly " -"added\n" +"<p>Note: Depending on the database size it can take a while until newly added\n" "indexes will get active on a database. After the configuration has been\n" -"written to the server, a background task will start to generate the " -"indexing\n" +"written to the server, a background task will start to generate the indexing\n" "information for the database.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -864,8 +809,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:183 msgid "" -"<p>For each rule, you can see which target objects it matches. To see a " -"more\n" +"<p>For each rule, you can see which target objects it matches. To see a more\n" "detailed view of a rule or to change one, select the rule in the table and\n" "click <b>Edit</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -878,11 +822,9 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:191 msgid "" -"<p>OpenLDAP's access control evaluation stops at the first rule whose " -"target\n" +"<p>OpenLDAP's access control evaluation stops at the first rule whose target\n" "definition (DN, filter and attributes) matches the entry being\n" -"accessed. Therefore you should order the rules according to your needs, " -"using\n" +"accessed. Therefore you should order the rules according to your needs, using\n" "the <b>Up</b> and <b>Down</b> buttons.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -892,8 +834,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:200 msgid "" -"<p>Select the \"<b>Enable ldapsync provider for this database</b>\" " -"checkbox, if you want to \n" +"<p>Select the \"<b>Enable ldapsync provider for this database</b>\" checkbox, if you want to \n" "be able to replicate the currently selected database to another server.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -903,16 +844,11 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:204 msgid "" -"<p>Here you can specify how often the synchronization state indicator " -"(stored\n" -"in the \"<i>contextCSN</i>\"-Attribute) is written to the database. It is " -"synced\n" -"to the database after the number of write \"<i>Operations</i>\" you specify " -"or\n" -"after more than the specified \"<i>Minutes</i>\" have passed since the " -"indicator\n" -"has last been written. By default (both values are '0') the state indicator " -"is\n" +"<p>Here you can specify how often the synchronization state indicator (stored\n" +"in the \"<i>contextCSN</i>\"-Attribute) is written to the database. It is synced\n" +"to the database after the number of write \"<i>Operations</i>\" you specify or\n" +"after more than the specified \"<i>Minutes</i>\" have passed since the indicator\n" +"has last been written. By default (both values are '0') the state indicator is\n" "only written after a clean shutdown. Writing it more often can result in\n" "a faster startup time after an unclean shutdown but might result in a small\n" "performance hit in environments with many LDAP write operations.</p>\n" @@ -924,14 +860,10 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:215 msgid "" -"<p>Configures an in-memory session log for recording information about write " -"operations\n" -"made on the database. Specify how many write operation should be recorded in " -"the session log. \n" -"Configuring a session log is only useful for \"<i>refreshOnly</i>\" " -"replication. In \n" -"such a case it can speed up replication and reduce the load on the master " -"server.</p>" +"<p>Configures an in-memory session log for recording information about write operations\n" +"made on the database. Specify how many write operation should be recorded in the session log. \n" +"Configuring a session log is only useful for \"<i>refreshOnly</i>\" replication. In \n" +"such a case it can speed up replication and reduce the load on the master server.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:221 @@ -940,8 +872,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:224 msgid "" -"<p>Select \"<b>This database is a Replication Consumer</b>\" if you want " -"the\n" +"<p>Select \"<b>This database is a Replication Consumer</b>\" if you want the\n" "database to be a replica of a database on another server.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -955,8 +886,7 @@ "server here. Select the protocol to use (<b>ldap</b> or <b>ldaps</b>) and\n" "enter the fully qualified hostname of the master server. It is important to\n" "use the fully qualified hostname to verify the master server's TLS/SSL\n" -"certificate. Adjust the port number if the master server is using non-" -"standard\n" +"certificate. Adjust the port number if the master server is using non-standard\n" "ldap ports.\n" msgstr "" @@ -989,10 +919,8 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:250 msgid "" -"<p>Specify a DN and password which the slave server should use to " -"authenticate against the master.\n" -"The specified DN needs to have read access to all entries in the replicated " -"database on the master.</p>\n" +"<p>Specify a DN and password which the slave server should use to authenticate against the master.\n" +"The specified DN needs to have read access to all entries in the replicated database on the master.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:253 @@ -1003,10 +931,8 @@ msgid "" "<p>As the slave database is readonly, the slave server will answer write\n" "operations with an LDAP referral. \n" -"By default, this referral points the client to the master server. You can " -"configure a different update referral here.\n" -"This is e.g. useful in a cascaded replication setup where the provider for " -"the\n" +"By default, this referral points the client to the master server. You can configure a different update referral here.\n" +"This is e.g. useful in a cascaded replication setup where the provider for the\n" "slave server is as slave server too. </p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1047,15 +973,11 @@ #. Configuration Wizard Step 1 #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:287 -msgid "" -"<p>With <b>Start LDAP Server Yes or No</b>, start or stop the LDAP server. " +msgid "<p>With <b>Start LDAP Server Yes or No</b>, start or stop the LDAP server.</p> " msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:290 -msgid "" -"<p>If you select <b>Yes</b>, click <b>Next</b> to start the configuration " -"wizard.</p>" +msgid "<p>If you select <b>Yes</b>, click <b>Next</b> to start the configuration wizard.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:293 @@ -1066,15 +988,12 @@ #. Configuration Wizard Step 2 #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:297 -msgid "" -"<p>Select the type of LDAP server you want to setup. The following scenarios " -"are available:</p>" +msgid "<p>Select the type of LDAP server you want to setup. The following scenarios are available:</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:300 msgid "" -"<p><b>Stand-alone server</b>: Setup a single stand-alone OpenLDAP server " -"with\n" +"<p><b>Stand-alone server</b>: Setup a single stand-alone OpenLDAP server with\n" "no preparations for replication.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1086,8 +1005,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:306 msgid "" -"<p><b>Replica slave server</b>: Setup an OpenLDAP slave server that " -"replicates all its data,\n" +"<p><b>Replica slave server</b>: Setup an OpenLDAP slave server that replicates all its data,\n" "including configuration, from a master server.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -1109,18 +1027,15 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:319 msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Enable LDAP over SSL (ldaps) interface</b>, to enable the " -"server\n" +"<p>Check <b>Enable LDAP over SSL (ldaps) interface</b>, to enable the server\n" "to accept LDAPS connections on port 636. If not checked, OpenLDAP will only\n" -"support TLS encrypted connections through the StartTLS extended operation.\n" +"support TLS encrypted connections through the StartTLS extended operation.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:324 msgid "" "<p>If you already have a common server certificate installed using the\n" -"corresponding YaST Module, check <b>Use common Server Certificate</b> so " -"that\n" +"corresponding YaST Module, check <b>Use common Server Certificate</b> so that\n" "the OpenLDAP server uses this certificate.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1131,10 +1046,8 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:330 msgid "" "<p>If you have no common server certificate or you want OpenLDAP to use a\n" -"different certificate, enter the file names of the <b>CA Certificate File,\n" -"<b>Certificate File</b> and <b>Certificate Key File</b> into the " -"corresponding\n" +"different certificate, enter the file names of the <b>CA Certificate File</b>,\n" +"<b>Certificate File</b> and <b>Certificate Key File</b> into the corresponding\n" "textfields.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1152,26 +1065,21 @@ #. Tree Item Dialog "schema" 1/ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:344 msgid "" -"<p>Add schema files in this dialog. Press <b>Add</b> to open a file dialog " -"in which to choose\n" -"a new schema. Note: OpenLDAP (when used with back-config) does currently not " -"support the removal of \n" +"<p>Add schema files in this dialog. Press <b>Add</b> to open a file dialog in which to choose\n" +"a new schema. Note: OpenLDAP (when used with back-config) does currently not support the removal of \n" "Schema Data</p>" msgstr "" #. Tree Item Dialog "loglevel" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:350 msgid "" -"<p>Select the subsystems that should log debugging statements and " -"statistics\n" +"<p>Select the subsystems that should log debugging statements and statistics\n" "to syslog.</p>" msgstr "" #. Tree Item Dialog "allow" 1/1 #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:354 -msgid "" -"<p>Select which special features the OpenLDAP Server should allow or " -"disallow:</p>" +msgid "<p>Select which special features the OpenLDAP Server should allow or disallow:</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:357 @@ -1180,17 +1088,14 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:358 msgid "" -"<p><b>LDAPv2 Bind Requests</b>: To let the server accept LDAPv2 bind " -"requests.\n" +"<p><b>LDAPv2 Bind Requests</b>: To let the server accept LDAPv2 bind requests.\n" "Note that OpenLDAP does not truly implement LDAPv2.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:361 msgid "" -"<p><b>Anonymous Bind when credentials not empty</b>: To allow anonymous bind " -"when \n" -"credentials are not empty (i.e. password is present but bind DN is not " -"present) </p>" +"<p><b>Anonymous Bind when credentials not empty</b>: To allow anonymous bind when \n" +"credentials are not empty (i.e. password is present but bind DN is not present) </p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:364 @@ -1201,8 +1106,7 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:367 msgid "" -"<p><b>Unauthenticated Update Operations to process</b>: To allow " -"unauthenticated\n" +"<p><b>Unauthenticated Update Operations to process</b>: To allow unauthenticated\n" "(anonymous) update operations to be processed. They are still subject to\n" "access controls and other administrative limits.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1220,16 +1124,14 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:378 msgid "" -"<p><b>Disable Simple Bind authentication</b>: Completely disable Simple " -"Bind\n" +"<p><b>Disable Simple Bind authentication</b>: Completely disable Simple Bind\n" "authentication</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:381 msgid "" "<p><b>Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation\n" -"receipt</b>: The server will no longer force an authenticated connection " -"back\n" +"receipt</b>: The server will no longer force an authenticated connection back\n" "to the anonymous state when receiving the StartTLS operation.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1244,12 +1146,9 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:392 msgid "" "<p>This lists shows all configured databases. The databases with the type\n" -"\"frontend\" and \"config\" represent special internal databases. The " -"\"Frontend\"\n" -"database is use to configure global access control restrictions and " -"overlays\n" -"that apply to all databases. The \"Config\" database holds the configuration " -"of\n" +"\"frontend\" and \"config\" represent special internal databases. The \"Frontend\"\n" +"database is use to configure global access control restrictions and overlays\n" +"that apply to all databases. The \"Config\" database holds the configuration of\n" "the LDAP server itself.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1260,32 +1159,26 @@ #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:401 msgid "" -"<p>To delete a database, select a database from the list and press <b>Delete " -"Database...</b>.\n" +"<p>To delete a database, select a database from the list and press <b>Delete Database...</b>.\n" "You cannot delete the \"config\" and \"frontend\" databases.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:404 msgid "" -"<p>Enter a password for the configuration database (\"<i>cn=config</i>\") " -"here. This is required to make\n" +"<p>Enter a password for the configuration database (\"<i>cn=config</i>\") here. This is required to make\n" "the configuration database accessible remotely.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:407 msgid "" -"<p>If the server is supposed to participate in a MirrorMode setup, select " -"the \"<b>Prepare for MirrorMode replication</b>\"\n" -"checkbox. This will ensure that the serverId attribute is generated as " -"needed for MirrorMode replication.</p>\n" +"<p>If the server is supposed to participate in a MirrorMode setup, select the \"<b>Prepare for MirrorMode replication</b>\"\n" +"checkbox. This will ensure that the serverId attribute is generated as needed for MirrorMode replication.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/helps.rb:410 msgid "" -"<p>To setup a slave server some details need to be queried from the master " -"server. Please enter the master\n" -"server's hostname, adjust the protocol (either \"<i>ldap</i>\" or " -"\"<i>ldaps</i>\") and port number as needed and enter the password\n" +"<p>To setup a slave server some details need to be queried from the master server. Please enter the master\n" +"server's hostname, adjust the protocol (either \"<i>ldap</i>\" or \"<i>ldaps</i>\") and port number as needed and enter the password\n" "for the master's configuration database (\"<i>cn=config</i>\").</p>" msgstr "" @@ -1310,9 +1203,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:50 -msgid "" -"This server is not setup as a MirrorMode Node. Click \"Next\" to launch the " -"standard OpenLDAP configuration wizard." +msgid "This server is not setup as a MirrorMode Node. Click \"Next\" to launch the standard OpenLDAP configuration wizard." msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:85 @@ -1320,8 +1211,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:127 -msgid "" -"Deleting the host on which you started this YaST Module is not possible.\n" +msgid "Deleting the host on which you started this YaST Module is not possible.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/mirrormode-wizard.rb:130 @@ -1630,9 +1520,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/widgets.rb:175 -msgid "" -"Disable acceptance of anonymous Bind Requests (does not prohibit anonymous " -"directory access)" +msgid "Disable acceptance of anonymous Bind Requests (does not prohibit anonymous directory access)" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/widgets.rb:179 @@ -1640,8 +1528,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/widgets.rb:182 -msgid "" -"Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation receipt" +msgid "Disable forcing session to anonymous status upon StartTLS operation receipt" msgstr "" #: src/include/ldap-server/widgets.rb:188 @@ -2152,8 +2039,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:1995 -msgid "" -"Please verify that the target server is enabled to be a LDAPsync provider" +msgid "Please verify that the target server is enabled to be a LDAPsync provider" msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapDatabase.rb:2094 @@ -2299,9 +2185,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:883 -msgid "" -"Waiting for OpenLDAP background indexing tasks to complete (this might take " -"some minutes)" +msgid "Waiting for OpenLDAP background indexing tasks to complete (this might take some minutes)" msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:884 @@ -2321,9 +2205,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:1006 -msgid "" -"An error occurred while waiting for the OpenLDAP database indexer to " -"finish.\n" +msgid "An error occurred while waiting for the OpenLDAP database indexer to finish.\n" msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:1007 @@ -2429,9 +2311,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:1874 -msgid "" -"A master server for replication cannot work correctly without knowing its " -"own fully qualified hostname." +msgid "A master server for replication cannot work correctly without knowing its own fully qualified hostname." msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:2510 src/modules/LdapServer.pm:2520 @@ -2448,9 +2328,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:2565 -msgid "" -"The value of the \"c\" attribute must contain a valid ISO-3166 country 2-" -"letter code." +msgid "The value of the \"c\" attribute must contain a valid ISO-3166 country 2-letter code." msgstr "" #. parameter check failed @@ -2492,8 +2370,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:3414 -msgid "" -"Error while trying to verify the server certificate of the provider server.\n" +msgid "Error while trying to verify the server certificate of the provider server.\n" msgstr "" #: src/modules/LdapServer.pm:3415 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/ldap.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/ldap.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/ldap.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -27,8 +27,7 @@ #: src/Ldap.rb:256 msgid "" "Failed to establish TLS encryption.\n" -"Verify that the correct CA Certificate is installed and the Server " -"Certificate is valid." +"Verify that the correct CA Certificate is installed and the Server Certificate is valid." msgstr "" #. hint to error message @@ -282,8 +281,7 @@ #: src/LdapPopup.rb:555 msgid "" "<p>Here, set the values of attributes belonging\n" -"to an object using the current template. Such values are used as defaults " -"when\n" +"to an object using the current template. Such values are used as defaults when\n" "the new object is created.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -296,8 +294,7 @@ #: src/LdapPopup.rb:567 msgid "" "<p>You can use special syntax to create attribute\n" -"values from existing ones. The expression <i>%attr_name</i> will be " -"replaced\n" +"values from existing ones. The expression <i>%attr_name</i> will be replaced\n" "with the value of attribute \"attr_name\" (for example, use \"/home/%uid\"\n" "as a value of \"homeDirectory\").</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -319,10 +316,7 @@ #. help text for LDAP browser #: src/ldap_browser.rb:64 -msgid "" -"<p>Once the LDAP object is selected in the tree, the table shows the object " -"data. Use <b>Edit</b> to change the value of the selected attribute. Use " -"<b>Save</b> to save your changes to LDAP.</p>" +msgid "<p>Once the LDAP object is selected in the tree, the table shows the object data. Use <b>Edit</b> to change the value of the selected attribute. Use <b>Save</b> to save your changes to LDAP.</p>" msgstr "" #. popup question (Continue/Cancel follows) Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/linux-user-mgmt.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/linux-user-mgmt.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/linux-user-mgmt.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -26,9 +26,7 @@ #: src/EdirUtilsLUM.ycp:477 #, ycp-format -msgid "" -"%1 is an invalid fully distinguished name. The name must be typeful (e.g. " -"cn=admin,o=acme or o=acme)" +msgid "%1 is an invalid fully distinguished name. The name must be typeful (e.g. cn=admin,o=acme or o=acme)" msgstr "" #. LinuxUserMgmt read dialog caption @@ -275,9 +273,7 @@ #: src/NovellLDAPLUM.ycp:477 #, ycp-format -msgid "" -"%1 is an invalid LDAP syntax. The name must use commas for separators (e.g. " -"cn=admin,o=acme)" +msgid "%1 is an invalid LDAP syntax. The name must use commas for separators (e.g. cn=admin,o=acme)" msgstr "" #: src/NovellLDAPLUM.ycp:521 @@ -285,8 +281,7 @@ "The attempt to perform a secure LDAP bind did not respond in 2 minutes\n" "This may indicate a problem with LDAP on the target server.\n" "If you are confident that your credentials are correct you may continue,\n" -"otherwise please determine if LDAP is running correctly on the target " -"system\n" +"otherwise please determine if LDAP is running correctly on the target system\n" "Do you want to continue?" msgstr "" @@ -335,8 +330,7 @@ #. TODO - fix this message #: src/NovellUtilsLUM.ycp:847 -msgid "" -"Unable to add the tree self-signed certificate to the root certificate store" +msgid "Unable to add the tree self-signed certificate to the root certificate store" msgstr "" #: src/NovellUtilsLUM.ycp:873 @@ -344,9 +338,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/NovellUtilsLUM.ycp:879 -msgid "" -"Unable to change the group permissions on the root certificate store for " -"write access by www" +msgid "Unable to change the group permissions on the root certificate store for write access by www" msgstr "" #: src/NovellValidatorsLUM.ycp:39 @@ -363,9 +355,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/NovellValidatorsLUM.ycp:55 -msgid "" -"Tree names may only contain the following characters [A-Z], [a-z], [0-9] and " -"\"-\" or \"_\"" +msgid "Tree names may only contain the following characters [A-Z], [a-z], [0-9] and \"-\" or \"_\"" msgstr "" #: src/NovellValidatorsLUM.ycp:107 @@ -384,9 +374,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/NovellValidatorsLUM.ycp:141 -msgid "" -"The container 'o=security' is reserved and cannot be used in a fully " -"distinguished name" +msgid "The container 'o=security' is reserved and cannot be used in a fully distinguished name" msgstr "" #: src/NovellValidatorsLUM.ycp:171 @@ -477,16 +465,12 @@ #: src/dialogs.ycp:129 src/dialogs.ycp:148 #, ycp-format -msgid "" -"%1 is an invalid LDAP syntax. The name must use commas for separators (e.g. " -"ou=xyz,o=acme)" +msgid "%1 is an invalid LDAP syntax. The name must use commas for separators (e.g. ou=xyz,o=acme)" msgstr "" #: src/dialogs.ycp:168 #, ycp-format -msgid "" -"%1 is an invalid LDAP syntax. The name must use commas for separators (e.g. " -"cn=proxyuser,o=acme)" +msgid "%1 is an invalid LDAP syntax. The name must use commas for separators (e.g. cn=proxyuser,o=acme)" msgstr "" #: src/dialogs.ycp:300 @@ -615,8 +599,7 @@ #: src/helps.ycp:57 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Proxy user name with context (Optional)</big></b><br>\n" -"A user (existing or created here) with rights to search the LDAP tree for " -"LUM\n" +"A user (existing or created here) with rights to search the LDAP tree for LUM\n" "objects.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -632,38 +615,31 @@ #: src/helps.ycp:68 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Local or Remote Directory Server</big></b><br>\n" -"Select either Local system or Remote system, depending on the server you are " -"configuring.</p>\n" +"Select either Local system or Remote system, depending on the server you are configuring.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/helps.ycp:72 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Directory server address</big></b><br>\n" -"This field is only active if you select Remote system. Enter the IP address " -"of the remote server you want to configure.</p>\n" +"This field is only active if you select Remote system. Enter the IP address of the remote server you want to configure.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/helps.ycp:76 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Admin name with context</big></b><br>\n" -"Enter the LDAP Admin name and context. This is the fully distinguished name " -"of a User object with administrative rights to LDAP. For example: cn=admin," -"o=acme</p>\n" +"Enter the LDAP Admin name and context. This is the fully distinguished name of a User object with administrative rights to LDAP. For example: cn=admin,o=acme</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/helps.ycp:80 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Admin password</big></b><br>\n" -"Enter the LDAP Admin password. This is the password of the user specified as " -"the LDAP Admin.</p>\n" +"Enter the LDAP Admin password. This is the password of the user specified as the LDAP Admin.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/helps.ycp:84 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Port Details</big></b><br>\n" -"Click Port Details to view or modify the LDAP port or the secure LDAP port " -"number this server uses to communicate with other servers. The default LDAP " -"port is 389. The default secure LDAP port is 636.</p>\n" +"Click Port Details to view or modify the LDAP port or the secure LDAP port number this server uses to communicate with other servers. The default LDAP port is 389. The default secure LDAP port is 636.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Command line help text for the Xlinux-user-mgmt module Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/live-installer.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/live-installer.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/live-installer.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -134,8 +134,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_live_simple_proposal.rb:192 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Use <b>Accept</b> to perform a new installation with the values displayed." +"Use <b>Accept</b> to perform a new installation with the values displayed.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/3 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/lxc.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/lxc.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/lxc.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -241,20 +241,15 @@ #: src/include/lxc/helps.rb:40 msgid "" "<p><b><big>LXC Overview</big></b><br>\n" -"Here, see the list of configured Linux Containers (LXC) with their current " -"status.\n" -"<p>Use <b>Create</b> to create new container. Delete existing one with " -"<b>Destroy</b>.\n" +"Here, see the list of configured Linux Containers (LXC) with their current status.\n" +"<p>Use <b>Create</b> to create new container. Delete existing one with <b>Destroy</b>.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" #. Overview dialog help, part 2 #: src/include/lxc/helps.rb:47 msgid "" -"<p>You can start selected container with <b>Start</b>. The container is " -"started in background. You can connect to it using <b>Connect</b> button or " -"manually using <tt>lxc-console</tt> command. Once in console, you can close " -"it from within or using the <b>Disconnect</b> button.</p>\n" +"<p>You can start selected container with <b>Start</b>. The container is started in background. You can connect to it using <b>Connect</b> button or manually using <tt>lxc-console</tt> command. Once in console, you can close it from within or using the <b>Disconnect</b> button.</p>\n" "<p>Note that <b>Connect</b> option is not available in text mode.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -265,25 +260,17 @@ #. Create dialog help, part 2 #: src/include/lxc/helps.rb:55 -msgid "" -"<p>Choose a <b>Name</b> for your container, select a base <b>Template</b>, " -"and enter desired network settings.</p>" +msgid "<p>Choose a <b>Name</b> for your container, select a base <b>Template</b>, and enter desired network settings.</p>" msgstr "" #. Create dialog help, part 3 #: src/include/lxc/helps.rb:59 -msgid "" -"<p>Use the value <tt>0.0.0.0</tt> as <b>IP Address</b> to have dynamic " -"address assigned by DHCP. If there's no bridge device configured yet, use " -"the <b>Configure Network</b> button and create one.</p>" +msgid "<p>Use the value <tt>0.0.0.0</tt> as <b>IP Address</b> to have dynamic address assigned by DHCP. If there's no bridge device configured yet, use the <b>Configure Network</b> button and create one.</p>" msgstr "" #. Create dialog help, part 4 #: src/include/lxc/helps.rb:63 -msgid "" -"<p>Select a password to use for a system administrator ('root') in the " -"container. If no password is entered, the default value <tt>root</tt> will " -"be used.</p>" +msgid "<p>Select a password to use for a system administrator ('root') in the container. If no password is entered, the default value <tt>root</tt> will be used.</p>" msgstr "" #. Create dialog help, part 5 @@ -293,9 +280,7 @@ #. info label (try to keep the text short) #: src/modules/Lxc.rb:226 -msgid "" -"Some problems with LXC configuration were found. Check the documentation for " -"details." +msgid "Some problems with LXC configuration were found. Check the documentation for details." msgstr "" #. output follows in widget below Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/mail.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/mail.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/mail.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -82,8 +82,7 @@ #: src/include/mail/helps.rb:79 msgid "" "<p>If choosing <b>No Connection</b>, the mail server will be started.\n" -"However, only local mail transport is possible. The MTA listens to the " -"localhost.</p>\n" +"However, only local mail transport is possible. The MTA listens to the localhost.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Translators: masquerading dialog help, part 1 of 1 @@ -98,8 +97,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<p>Some servers require authentication for sending mails. Here you can\n" -"enter information for this option. If you do not want to use " -"authentication,\n" +"enter information for this option. If you do not want to use authentication,\n" "simply leave these fields empty.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -108,16 +106,14 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<p>The outgoing mail server is generally intended for dial-up connections.\n" -"Enter the Internet service provider's SMTP server, such as <b>smtp.provider." -"com</b>.</p>\n" +"Enter the Internet service provider's SMTP server, such as <b>smtp.provider.com</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Translators: authentication dialog help 3/4 #: src/include/mail/helps.rb:109 msgid "" "\n" -"<p>In the <b>User Name</b> field, enter the user name assigned by from your " -"provider.</p>\n" +"<p>In the <b>User Name</b> field, enter the user name assigned by from your provider.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Translators: authentication dialog help 4/4 @@ -150,8 +146,7 @@ "\n" "<p>This table redirects mail delivered locally.\n" "Redirect it to another local user (useful for system accounts,\n" -"especially for <b>root</b>), to a remote address, or to a list of addresses." -"</p>\n" +"especially for <b>root</b>), to a remote address, or to a list of addresses.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Translators: aliases dialog help, part 2 of 2 @@ -603,8 +598,7 @@ #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:162 msgid "" "\n" -"<p><b>Enabling virus scanning (AMaViS)</b> checks incoming and outgoing " -"mail\n" +"<p><b>Enabling virus scanning (AMaViS)</b> checks incoming and outgoing mail\n" "with AMaViS.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -642,13 +636,10 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<p>Enabling DKIM for outgoing emails requires additional actions. A SSL key\n" -"will be generated for the 'mydomain' value defined in Postfix. A new " -"service\n" -"'submission' will be configured in Postfix. After this is set up you can " -"send\n" +"will be generated for the 'mydomain' value defined in Postfix. A new service\n" +"'submission' will be configured in Postfix. After this is set up you can send\n" "email with this service 'submission' from 'mynetworks' with enabled SASL\n" -"authentication. Only the emails sent by this new service will be signed " -"with\n" +"authentication. Only the emails sent by this new service will be signed with\n" "the domain key.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -660,16 +651,14 @@ "Service. The public key will be saved as a DNS TXT record\n" "in <b>/var/db/dkim/[mydomain].public.txt</b> and needs to be deployed to an\n" "according Domain Name Service. If there is a name service\n" -"running on this server, which is the authoritative server for that domain, " -"the\n" +"running on this server, which is the authoritative server for that domain, the\n" "public key will be added as a TXT record to that domain zone\n" "automatically.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. help text #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:215 -msgid "" -"If you enable DKIM support, the virus scanning (AMaViS) will be enabled too." +msgid "If you enable DKIM support, the virus scanning (AMaViS) will be enabled too." msgstr "" #. Translators: text entry label @@ -712,9 +701,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/mail/widgets.rb:306 -msgid "" -"<p>The <b>delivery mode</b> is usually <b>Directly</b>, unless you do not " -"forward root's mail or want to access the mail via IMAP.</p>" +msgid "<p>The <b>delivery mode</b> is usually <b>Directly</b>, unless you do not forward root's mail or want to access the mail via IMAP.</p>" msgstr "" #. LogView label. take a string from users? Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/multipath.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/multipath.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/multipath.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -221,42 +221,29 @@ "\t\t\tStart or stop multipathd, check the multipath information.<br><br>\n" "\n" "\t\t\t<b><big>Stop/Start Multipathd</big></b><br>\n" -"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Use Multipath\"</b> to start multipathd. Click <b>\"Do not " -"use Multipath\"</b> to stop multipathd.<br>\n" -"\t\t\tMultipath status information can still be displayed when multipathd " -"stopped.<br><br>\n" +"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Use Multipath\"</b> to start multipathd. Click <b>\"Do not use Multipath\"</b> to stop multipathd.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tMultipath status information can still be displayed when multipathd stopped.<br><br>\n" "\n" "\t\t\t<b><big>Configure Multipath</big></b><br>\n" -"\t\t\tClick <b>Configure</b> Tab to make the multipath configurations.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tClick <b>Configure</b> Tab to make the multipath configurations.<br></p>\n" msgstr "" #. dialog help for Configure tab #: src/include/multipath/helps.rb:56 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Configuration</big></b><br>\n" -"\t\t\tAll the content of /etc/multipath.conf can be configured here. There " -"are four sections in the configuration file:\n" -"\t\t\t<b>multipaths</b>, <b>defaults</b>, <b>blacklist</b>, " -"<b>blacklist_exception</b>, <b>devices.</b><br><br>\n" +"\t\t\tAll the content of /etc/multipath.conf can be configured here. There are four sections in the configuration file:\n" +"\t\t\t<b>multipaths</b>, <b>defaults</b>, <b>blacklist</b>, <b>blacklist_exception</b>, <b>devices.</b><br><br>\n" "\t\t\t<b>Multipaths:</b> list of multipaths finest-grained settings.<br>\n" "\t\t\t<b>Defaults:</b> multipath-tools default settings.<br>\n" -"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Configure Defaults\"</b> button to configure defaults " -"settings.<br>\n" -"\t\t\t<b>Blacklist:</b> list of device names to be discard as not multipath " -"candidates.<br>\n" -"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Configure Blacklist\"</b> button to configure blacklist " -"settings.<br>\n" -"\t\t\t<b>Blacklist Exceptions:</b> list of device names to be excluded from " -"blacklist.<br>\n" -"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Configure Blacklist Exceptions\"</b> button to configure " -"blacklist_exceptions settings.<br>\n" -"\t\t\t<b>Devices:</b> list of per storage controller settings. Overrides " -"default settings, overridden by per multipath settings.<br>\n" -"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Configure devices\"</b> button to configure devices " -"settings.<br><br>\n" -"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Finish\"</b> button to save and update the configurations." -"<br><br></p>\n" +"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Configure Defaults\"</b> button to configure defaults settings.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>Blacklist:</b> list of device names to be discard as not multipath candidates.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Configure Blacklist\"</b> button to configure blacklist settings.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>Blacklist Exceptions:</b> list of device names to be excluded from blacklist.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Configure Blacklist Exceptions\"</b> button to configure blacklist_exceptions settings.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>Devices:</b> list of per storage controller settings. Overrides default settings, overridden by per multipath settings.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Configure devices\"</b> button to configure devices settings.<br><br>\n" +"\t\t\tClick <b>\"Finish\"</b> button to save and update the configurations.<br><br></p>\n" msgstr "" #. dialog help for defaults section configure tab 1/3 @@ -264,27 +251,19 @@ msgid "" "<p><b><big>Defaults Configuration</big></b><br>\n" "\t\t\tGlobal default settings can be configured and cleared here.<br>\n" -"\t\t\tAny default setting here will take effect in all multipath " -"configurations, unless a corresponding local setting overwrites it.<br>\n" -"\t\t\tIf a default setting here is cleared, multipath will take its own " -"value as default setting.<br></p>\n" +"\t\t\tAny default setting here will take effect in all multipath configurations, unless a corresponding local setting overwrites it.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tIf a default setting here is cleared, multipath will take its own value as default setting.<br></p>\n" msgstr "" #. dialog help for blacklist section configure tab 1/3 #: src/include/multipath/helps.rb:79 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Blacklist Configuration</big></b><br>\n" -"\t\t\tDevice names listed here can be discarded as not multipath candidates." -"<br>\n" -"\t\t\tThere are three methods to identify a device name: <b>wwid</b>, " -"<b>devnode</b>, <b>device</b>.<br><br>\n" -"\t\t\t<b>wwid</b>: The world wide ID identifying the device in blacklist." -"<br>\n" -"\t\t\t<b>devnode</b>: Regular expression can be used here to identify device " -"names in udev_dir (default in directory /dev). Common device names are " -"cciss, fd, hd, md, dm, sr, scd, st, ram, raw, loop.<br>\n" -"\t\t\t<b>device</b>: Used to identify a specific storage controller in " -"blacklist. A device can be specified by vendor and product name.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tDevice names listed here can be discarded as not multipath candidates.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tThere are three methods to identify a device name: <b>wwid</b>, <b>devnode</b>, <b>device</b>.<br><br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>wwid</b>: The world wide ID identifying the device in blacklist.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>devnode</b>: Regular expression can be used here to identify device names in udev_dir (default in directory /dev). Common device names are cciss, fd, hd, md, dm, sr, scd, st, ram, raw, loop.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>device</b>: Used to identify a specific storage controller in blacklist. A device can be specified by vendor and product name.<br>\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -293,15 +272,10 @@ msgid "" "<p><b><big>Blacklist Exceptions Configuration</big></b><br>\n" "\t\t\tDevice names listed here are excluded from blacklist.<br>\n" -"\t\t\tThere are three methods to identify a device name: <b>wwid</b>, " -"<b>devnode</b>, <b>device</b>.<br><br>\n" -"\t\t\t<b>wwid</b>: The world wide ID identifying the device excepted from " -"blacklist.<br>\n" -"\t\t\t<b>devnode</b>: Regular expression can be used here to identify device " -"names in udev_dir (default in directory /dev). Common device names are " -"cciss, fd, hd, md, dm, sr, scd, st, ram, raw, loop.<br>\n" -"\t\t\t<b>device</b>: Used to identify a specific storage controller excepted " -"from blacklist. A device can be specified by vendor and product name.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tThere are three methods to identify a device name: <b>wwid</b>, <b>devnode</b>, <b>device</b>.<br><br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>wwid</b>: The world wide ID identifying the device excepted from blacklist.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>devnode</b>: Regular expression can be used here to identify device names in udev_dir (default in directory /dev). Common device names are cciss, fd, hd, md, dm, sr, scd, st, ram, raw, loop.<br>\n" +"\t\t\t<b>device</b>: Used to identify a specific storage controller excepted from blacklist. A device can be specified by vendor and product name.<br>\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -309,10 +283,8 @@ #: src/include/multipath/helps.rb:99 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Devices Configuration</big></b><br>\n" -"\t\t\tPer storage controller settings are listed here, they override the " -"default settings and are overridden by per multipath settings.<br>\n" -"\t\t\tEach device is identified by <b>vendor</b> and <b>product</b> name." -"<br></p>\n" +"\t\t\tPer storage controller settings are listed here, they override the default settings and are overridden by per multipath settings.<br>\n" +"\t\t\tEach device is identified by <b>vendor</b> and <b>product</b> name.<br></p>\n" msgstr "" #. add quotes to configuration value, no matter how many words. Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/ncurses-pkg.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/ncurses-pkg.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/ncurses-pkg.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -50,8 +50,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/NCPackageSelector.cc:1297 -msgid "" -"You can choose to install anyway, but you risk getting a corrupted system." +msgid "You can choose to install anyway, but you risk getting a corrupted system." msgstr "" #: src/NCPackageSelector.cc:1298 @@ -115,29 +114,19 @@ msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgFilterClassification.cc:203 -msgid "" -"This is a list of useful packages. They will be additionally installed if " -"recommeded by a newly installed package. To get packages recommeded by " -"already installed packages the option <b>Install Recommended Packages for " -"Already Installed Packages</b> from <b>Dependencies</b> menu has to be set." +msgid "This is a list of useful packages. They will be additionally installed if recommeded by a newly installed package. To get packages recommeded by already installed packages the option <b>Install Recommended Packages for Already Installed Packages</b> from <b>Dependencies</b> menu has to be set." msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgFilterClassification.cc:207 -msgid "" -"It's suggested to install these packages because they fit to already " -"installed packages. The decision to install it is by the user." +msgid "It's suggested to install these packages because they fit to already installed packages. The decision to install it is by the user." msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgFilterClassification.cc:211 -msgid "" -"The solver has detected that these packages are without a repository, i.e. " -"updates aren't possible." +msgid "The solver has detected that these packages are without a repository, i.e. updates aren't possible." msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgFilterClassification.cc:215 -msgid "" -"These packages might be unneeded because former dependencies don't apply any " -"longer." +msgid "These packages might be unneeded because former dependencies don't apply any longer." msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgFilterInstSummary.cc:65 @@ -171,9 +160,7 @@ #. Translators: %s is a locale code, e.g. en_GB #: src/NCPkgFilterLocale.cc:178 #, c-format -msgid "" -"Translations, dictionaries and other language-related files for <b>%s</b> " -"locale" +msgid "Translations, dictionaries and other language-related files for <b>%s</b> locale" msgstr "" #. the label of the selections @@ -655,62 +642,32 @@ #. part1 of help text package installation #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:121 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Welcome to the package selector</b></p><p>This tool will help you to " -"manage the software on your system. You can install, update or remove single " -"packages, as well as patterns (sets of packages serving certain purpose) or " -"languages. Usually, you do not need to care about package dependencies when " -"installing or removing anything, the solver will do it for you. The package " -"selector consists of three main parts: <b>filters</b>, <b>package table</b> " -"and <b>menu</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Welcome to the package selector</b></p><p>This tool will help you to manage the software on your system. You can install, update or remove single packages, as well as patterns (sets of packages serving certain purpose) or languages. Usually, you do not need to care about package dependencies when installing or removing anything, the solver will do it for you. The package selector consists of three main parts: <b>filters</b>, <b>package table</b> and <b>menu</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. part of help text package installation #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:129 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Filter</b> on left panel is designed for easy orientation in a large " -"amount of packages. Use filters to display only packages from a certain " -"repository or in a selected pattern (for example, Games or C/C++ " -"Development) or to search for particular keywords. More information on " -"filters can be found in <i>How to use filters</i>.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Filter</b> on left panel is designed for easy orientation in a large amount of packages. Use filters to display only packages from a certain repository or in a selected pattern (for example, Games or C/C++ Development) or to search for particular keywords. More information on filters can be found in <i>How to use filters</i>.</p>" msgstr "" #. additional help text for post installation #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:136 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Package table</b> is the main component of the package selector. You " -"will see a list of packages matching the current filter (for example, the " -"selected RPM group or search result). Each line of the package table has " -"several columns:</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Package table</b> is the main component of the package selector. You will see a list of packages matching the current filter (for example, the selected RPM group or search result). Each line of the package table has several columns:</p>" msgstr "" #. part2 of help text package installation #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:143 -msgid "" -"<ol><li>Package status (for more information see <i>Package Status and " -"Symbols</i>)</li> <li>Package name</li><li>Package summary</li><li>Available " -"version (in some of the configured repositories)</li> <li>Installed " -"version(empty for not yet installed packages)</li> <li>Package size</li></ol>" +msgid "<ol><li>Package status (for more information see <i>Package Status and Symbols</i>)</li> <li>Package name</li><li>Package summary</li><li>Available version (in some of the configured repositories)</li> <li>Installed version(empty for not yet installed packages)</li> <li>Package size</li></ol>" msgstr "" #. part3 of help text package installation #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:151 -msgid "" -"<p>The <b>Actions</b> menu below the table allows you to change the status " -"of a selected package (or all packages in the list), for example, to delete " -"a package or select an additional package for installation. The status " -"change can also be done directly by pressing the key specified in the menu " -"item (for detailed information about the package status, see <i>Package " -"Status and Symbols</i>).</p>" +msgid "<p>The <b>Actions</b> menu below the table allows you to change the status of a selected package (or all packages in the list), for example, to delete a package or select an additional package for installation. The status change can also be done directly by pressing the key specified in the menu item (for detailed information about the package status, see <i>Package Status and Symbols</i>).</p>" msgstr "" #. part4 of help text package installation #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:158 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Menu</b> provides functions related to the handling of package " -"dependencies. Display relevant information on packages or perform actions " -"like opening the repository editor. For more information, see <i>Useful " -"Functions in Menu</i>.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Menu</b> provides functions related to the handling of package dependencies. Display relevant information on packages or perform actions like opening the repository editor. For more information, see <i>Useful Functions in Menu</i>.</p>" msgstr "" #. the headline of the help window @@ -720,20 +677,12 @@ #. part 1 of help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:172 -msgid "" -"<p>The package status can be changed using the <i>Actions</i> menu or the " -"keys specified in the menu items. For example, use '+' to install an " -"additional package.</p><p>The \"Taboo\" status means the package should " -"never be installed. On the contrary, the \"Locked\" status means that the " -"installed version of a package should always be kept.</p>" +msgid "<p>The package status can be changed using the <i>Actions</i> menu or the keys specified in the menu items. For example, use '+' to install an additional package.</p><p>The \"Taboo\" status means the package should never be installed. On the contrary, the \"Locked\" status means that the installed version of a package should always be kept.</p>" msgstr "" #. part 2 of help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:179 -msgid "" -"<p>You can also use <b>RET</b> or <b>SPACE</b> to toggle the package status. " -"The <i>Actions</i> menu also allows you to change the status for all " -"packages in the list (select 'All Listed Packages').</p>" +msgid "<p>You can also use <b>RET</b> or <b>SPACE</b> to toggle the package status. The <i>Actions</i> menu also allows you to change the status for all packages in the list (select 'All Listed Packages').</p>" msgstr "" #. part 3 of help text package status @@ -743,20 +692,12 @@ #. help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:192 -msgid "" -"<p><b> + </b>: package will be installed</p><p><b>a+ </b>: package will be " -"installed automatically</p><p><b> > </b>: package will be updated<p><b>a> </b>: package will be automatically updated</p><p><b> i </b>: " -"package is installed</p><p><b> - </b>: package will be deleted</p><p><b>---" -"</b>: never install this package (taboo)</p>" +msgid "<p><b> + </b>: package will be installed</p><p><b>a+ </b>: package will be installed automatically</p><p><b> > </b>: package will be updated</p><p><b>a> </b>: package will be automatically updated</p><p><b> i </b>: package is installed</p><p><b> - </b>: package will be deleted</p><p><b>---</b>: never install this package (taboo)</p>" msgstr "" #. help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:199 -msgid "" -"<p><b>-i-</b>: keep the installed version and never update or delete it " -"( package locked )</p><p>Status information for pattern and languages:<p><b> i </b>: All requirements of this pattern/language are satisfied</p>" +msgid "<p><b>-i-</b>: keep the installed version and never update or delete it ( package locked )</p><p>Status information for pattern and languages:</p><p><b> i </b>: All requirements of this pattern/language are satisfied</p>" msgstr "" #. label for an error popup @@ -766,55 +707,27 @@ #. help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:213 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Filter</b> allow you to filter all available packages according to the " -"selected criteria. Package filters are based on package properties " -"(repository, RPM group), package \"containers\" (patterns, languages), " -"package classification or search results. Select the desired filter from the " -"drop-down menu. Specific filters are described below.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Filter</b> allow you to filter all available packages according to the selected criteria. Package filters are based on package properties (repository, RPM group), package \"containers\" (patterns, languages), package classification or search results. Select the desired filter from the drop-down menu. Specific filters are described below.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:220 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Patterns</b> describe the features and functions a system should have " -"(for example, X server or Console tools). Each pattern contains a set of " -"packages it requires (must have), recommends (should have) and suggests (may " -"have). If you select a pattern for installation, update, or deletion, the " -"solver will run and change the status of subordinate packages accordingly." +msgid "<p><b>Patterns</b> describe the features and functions a system should have (for example, X server or Console tools). Each pattern contains a set of packages it requires (must have), recommends (should have) and suggests (may have). If you select a pattern for installation, update, or deletion, the solver will run and change the status of subordinate packages accordingly.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:227 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Languages</b> are package containers very much like patterns. They " -"contain packages with translations, dictionaries and other language-specific " -"files for a selected language. <b>RPM Groups</b> are not package containers " -"that can be installed. Instead, membership in a certain RPM group is a " -"property of the package itself. They have a hierarchical (tree) structure. " -"The <b>Repositories</b> filter displays packages available from a specific " -"repository. </p>" +msgid "<p><b>Languages</b> are package containers very much like patterns. They contain packages with translations, dictionaries and other language-specific files for a selected language. <b>RPM Groups</b> are not package containers that can be installed. Instead, membership in a certain RPM group is a property of the package itself. They have a hierarchical (tree) structure. The <b>Repositories</b> filter displays packages available from a specific repository. </p>" msgstr "" #. help text package search #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:234 -msgid "" -"<p>To use the <b>Search</b> filter, enter a keyword (or part of keyword) for " -"the package search. For example, search for all 3D packages using the " -"expression \"3d\". You can also search in package descriptions, RPM provides " -"or requires. Select the appropriate check box and click the 'Search' button." -"</p>" +msgid "<p>To use the <b>Search</b> filter, enter a keyword (or part of keyword) for the package search. For example, search for all 3D packages using the expression \"3d\". You can also search in package descriptions, RPM provides or requires. Select the appropriate check box and click the 'Search' button.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:241 -msgid "" -"<p>The <b>Installation summary</b> presents an overview of packages whose " -"status has changed during this session (e.g. marked for installation or " -"removal), either by the user or automatically by the solver. The filter " -"<b>Package Classification</b> provides information about <i>Recommended</i>, " -"<i>Suggested</i>, <i>Orphaned</i> and <i>Unneeded</i> packages.</p>" +msgid "<p>The <b>Installation summary</b> presents an overview of packages whose status has changed during this session (e.g. marked for installation or removal), either by the user or automatically by the solver. The filter <b>Package Classification</b> provides information about <i>Recommended</i>, <i>Suggested</i>, <i>Orphaned</i> and <i>Unneeded</i> packages.</p>" msgstr "" #. label for an error popup @@ -823,79 +736,31 @@ msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:254 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Dependencies:</b><br> This menu offers various actions related to the " -"handling of package dependencies. By default, package dependencies are " -"checked with every status change. You will be informed about package " -"conflicts in a dialog proposing possible conflict resolutions. To resolve " -"the conflict, select one of the offered solutions and press 'OK -- Try " -"Again'.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Dependencies:</b><br> This menu offers various actions related to the handling of package dependencies. By default, package dependencies are checked with every status change. You will be informed about package conflicts in a dialog proposing possible conflict resolutions. To resolve the conflict, select one of the offered solutions and press 'OK -- Try Again'.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:260 -msgid "" -"<p>To disable dependency checking on every status change, toggle " -"<i>Automatic Dependency Check</i> OFF. You can check dependencies manually " -"by selecting <i>Check Dependencies Now</i>. The <i>Verify system</i> entry " -"will check the dependencies of already installed packages and resolve " -"conflicts non-interactively, marking missing packages for automatic " -"installation if necessary. For debugging purposes, use <i>Generate " -"Dependency Solver Testcase</i>. It will dump package dependencies data into " -"the directory <tt>/var/log/YaST2/solverTestcase</tt>. This is usually what " -"you need when asked for a \"solver testcase\" in Bugzilla.</p>" +msgid "<p>To disable dependency checking on every status change, toggle <i>Automatic Dependency Check</i> OFF. You can check dependencies manually by selecting <i>Check Dependencies Now</i>. The <i>Verify system</i> entry will check the dependencies of already installed packages and resolve conflicts non-interactively, marking missing packages for automatic installation if necessary. For debugging purposes, use <i>Generate Dependency Solver Testcase</i>. It will dump package dependencies data into the directory <tt>/var/log/YaST2/solverTestcase</tt>. This is usually what you need when asked for a \"solver testcase\" in Bugzilla.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:266 -msgid "" -"<p>Available options for dependency checking are:<br><i>Automatic Dependency " -"Check</i> (see above), <i>Install Recommended for Already Installed " -"Packages</i>: if ON, also recommended packages of already installed package " -"will be installed, <i>System Verification Mode</i>: repair dependencies of " -"installed packages and solve immediately. Please note: after checking the " -"system with <i>Verify System Now</i> the option <i>System Verification Mode is ON (uncheck the option, if desired). These options are saved in the " -"YaST configuration file <tt>/etc/sysconfig/yast2</tt>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Available options for dependency checking are:<br><i>Automatic Dependency Check</i> (see above), <i>Install Recommended for Already Installed Packages</i>: if ON, also recommended packages of already installed package will be installed, <i>System Verification Mode</i>: repair dependencies of installed packages and solve immediately. Please note: after checking the system with <i>Verify System Now</i> the option <i>System Verification Mode</i> is ON (uncheck the option, if desired). These options are saved in the YaST configuration file <tt>/etc/sysconfig/yast2</tt>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:272 -msgid "" -"<p>Advanced options:<br> <i>Cleanup when deleting packages</i>: remove " -"dependent unused packages. <i>Allow vendor change</i>: package vendor may " -"differ from vendor of installed package. These options will not be saved, " -"they can only be set in the configuration file of the package library <tt>/" -"etc/zypp/zypp.conf</tt>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Advanced options:<br> <i>Cleanup when deleting packages</i>: remove dependent unused packages. <i>Allow vendor change</i>: package vendor may differ from vendor of installed package. These options will not be saved, they can only be set in the configuration file of the package library <tt>/etc/zypp/zypp.conf</tt>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:278 -msgid "" -"<p><b>View:</b><br>Choose which information about the selected package will " -"be displayed in the window below the package table. Available options are: " -"package description, technical data (version, size, license etc.) package " -"versions (all available), file list (all files included in the package) and " -"dependencies (provides, requires etc.).</p>" +msgid "<p><b>View:</b><br>Choose which information about the selected package will be displayed in the window below the package table. Available options are: package description, technical data (version, size, license etc.) package versions (all available), file list (all files included in the package) and dependencies (provides, requires etc.).</p>" msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:284 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Configuration:</b><br>This menu integrates package selector with the " -"rest of package management utils. From here, you can <b>Launch Repository " -"Manager</b> and edit configured repositories or register to update " -"repository and configure periodic download of available updates (<b>Launch " -"Online Update Configuration</b>). Also, you can pick one of the three " -"possible behaviours of package selector at exit - in <b>Action after Package " -"Installation</b> menu.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Configuration:</b><br>This menu integrates package selector with the rest of package management utils. From here, you can <b>Launch Repository Manager</b> and edit configured repositories or register to update repository and configure periodic download of available updates (<b>Launch Online Update Configuration</b>). Also, you can pick one of the three possible behaviours of package selector at exit - in <b>Action after Package Installation</b> menu.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:289 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Extras:</b><br>Miscellaneous functions reside here. <i>Export Package " -"List to File</i> will dump data on installed packages, patterns and " -"languages into specified XML file. This file can be later read by <i>Import " -"Package List from File</i> option e.g. on different computer. It will bring " -"the set of packages on the target computer into the same state as described " -"in provided XML file. <i>Show Available Disk Space</i> will show a popup " -"table displaying disk usage and free disk space on currently mounted " -"partition.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Extras:</b><br>Miscellaneous functions reside here. <i>Export Package List to File</i> will dump data on installed packages, patterns and languages into specified XML file. This file can be later read by <i>Import Package List from File</i> option e.g. on different computer. It will bring the set of packages on the target computer into the same state as described in provided XML file. <i>Show Available Disk Space</i> will show a popup table displaying disk usage and free disk space on currently mounted partition.</p>" msgstr "" #. label of a frame with search settings @@ -1093,57 +958,27 @@ #. help text online udpate #. Do NOT translate 'recommended' and 'security'! because the patch kind is always shown as english text. #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:611 -msgid "" -"<p>General information about patches:</p><p>The patches of kind <b>security are solving security issues and we highly recommend to install it. You " -"should also install <b>recommended</b> patches, they usually contain " -"important bug-fixes. Install <b>feature</b> patches if you are interested in " -"the feature.</p>" +msgid "<p>General information about patches:</p><p>The patches of kind <b>security</b> are solving security issues and we highly recommend to install it. You should also install <b>recommended</b> patches, they usually contain important bug-fixes. Install <b>feature</b> patches if you are interested in the feature.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text online udpate continue #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:618 -msgid "" -"<p>Patches for \"libzypp\" (Package, Patch, Pattern and Product Management) " -"will always get installed first. Other patches must be installed on a second " -"run.</p>" +msgid "<p>Patches for \"libzypp\" (Package, Patch, Pattern and Product Management) will always get installed first. Other patches must be installed on a second run.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text online udpate continue #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:625 -msgid "" -"<p>Meaning of the status flags:</p><p><b>a+ </b>: Patches concerning your " -"installation are preselected. They will be downloaded and installed on your " -"system. If you do not want a certain patch, deselect it with '-'.</p><p><b> " -"i </b>: All requirements of this patch are satisfied.</p><p><b> + </b>: You " -"have selected this patch for installation.</p>" +msgid "<p>Meaning of the status flags:</p><p><b>a+ </b>: Patches concerning your installation are preselected. They will be downloaded and installed on your system. If you do not want a certain patch, deselect it with '-'.</p><p><b> i </b>: All requirements of this patch are satisfied.</p><p><b> + </b>: You have selected this patch for installation.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text online udpate continue #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:632 -msgid "" -"<p>More details about the status:<br>If there are several patches for a " -"package (or a set of packages) which aren't yet applied to the system all " -"got preselected and have status <b>a+</b>. If one of these patches is " -"deselected with '-' it might show the status <b>i</b> afterwards. This is " -"because any of the other patches concerning the same package(s) is still " -"selected. The newer version(s) of the package(s) will be installed and with " -"it this patch is satisfied. Deselecting of all patches is required if the " -"patches are not wanted.</p>" +msgid "<p>More details about the status:<br>If there are several patches for a package (or a set of packages) which aren't yet applied to the system all got preselected and have status <b>a+</b>. If one of these patches is deselected with '-' it might show the status <b>i</b> afterwards. This is because any of the other patches concerning the same package(s) is still selected. The newer version(s) of the package(s) will be installed and with it this patch is satisfied. Deselecting of all patches is required if the patches are not wanted.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text online udpate continue #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:639 -msgid "" -"<p>The menus:</p><p>The <b>Filter</b> menu allows to filter the patches, e." -"g. show the 'Installed' ones or list 'Security' patches. It also provides to " -"search for patches.<br>Use the <b>Actions</b> menu to change the status of a " -"patch.<br>The <b>View</b> menu offers the possibility to see which packages " -"are concerned by the patch. Please note: If the filter is 'All Patches' the " -"package list for some patches might be empty. This means no packages are " -"concerned because none of the patch packages is installed on the system." -"<br>The <b>Dependencies</b> menu contains dependencies checks and the " -"'Generate Solver Testcase' entry.</p>" +msgid "<p>The menus:</p><p>The <b>Filter</b> menu allows to filter the patches, e.g. show the 'Installed' ones or list 'Security' patches. It also provides to search for patches.<br>Use the <b>Actions</b> menu to change the status of a patch.<br>The <b>View</b> menu offers the possibility to see which packages are concerned by the patch. Please note: If the filter is 'All Patches' the package list for some patches might be empty. This means no packages are concerned because none of the patch packages is installed on the system.<br>The <b>Dependencies</b> menu contains dependencies checks and the 'Generate Solver Testcase' entry.</p>" msgstr "" #. label for a warning popup @@ -1184,9 +1019,7 @@ #. text for a Notify popup #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:714 -msgid "" -"<p>All changes in the package, patch or pattern selection will be lost." -"<br>Really exit?</p>" +msgid "<p>All changes in the package, patch or pattern selection will be lost.<br>Really exit?</p>" msgstr "" #. the label of language table @@ -1235,13 +1068,7 @@ #. help text package status #: src/NCPkgStrings.cc:783 -msgid "" -"<b>Update Problem List</b><br><p>The packages in the list cannot be updated " -"automatically.</p><p>Possible reasons:</p><p>They are obsoleted by other " -"packages.</p><p>There is no newer version to which to update on any " -"installation media.</p><p>They are third-party packages</p><p>Manually " -"select what to do with them. The safest course of action is to delete them." +msgid "<b>Update Problem List</b><br><p>The packages in the list cannot be updated automatically.</p><p>Possible reasons:</p><p>They are obsoleted by other packages.</p><p>There is no newer version to which to update on any installation media.</p><p>They are third-party packages</p><p>Manually select what to do with them. The safest course of action is to delete them.</p>" msgstr "" #. column header source RPM installation (keep it short!) Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/network.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/network.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/network.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -120,26 +120,21 @@ #: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:191 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Firewall and SSH</big></b><br>\n" -"Firewall is a defensive mechanism that protects your computer from network " -"attacks.\n" -"SSH is a service that allows logging into this computer remotely via " -"dedicated\n" +"Firewall is a defensive mechanism that protects your computer from network attacks.\n" +"SSH is a service that allows logging into this computer remotely via dedicated\n" "SSH client</p>" msgstr "" #: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:197 msgid "" -"<p>Here you can choose whether the firewall will be enabled or disabled " -"after\n" +"<p>Here you can choose whether the firewall will be enabled or disabled after\n" "the installation. It is recommended to keep it enabled.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/clients/firewall_stage1_proposal.rb:200 msgid "" -"<p>With enabled firewall, you can decide whether to open firewall port for " -"SSH\n" -"service and allow remote SSH logins. Independently you can also enable SSH " -"service (i.e. it\n" +"<p>With enabled firewall, you can decide whether to open firewall port for SSH\n" +"service and allow remote SSH logins. Independently you can also enable SSH service (i.e. it\n" "will be started on computer boot).</p>" msgstr "" @@ -335,8 +330,7 @@ #. Fallback for situation that mustn't exist #: src/clients/inst_do_net_test.rb:892 -msgid "" -"No URL for the release notes defined. Internet test cannot be performed." +msgid "No URL for the release notes defined. Internet test cannot be performed." msgstr "" #. popup informing user about the failure to retrieve release notes @@ -346,10 +340,8 @@ "Download of latest release notes failed due to server-side error. \n" "This does not necessarily imply a faulty network configuration.\n" "\n" -"Click 'Continue' to proceed to the next installation step. To skip any " -"steps\n" -"requiring an internet connection or to get back to your network " -"configuration,\n" +"Click 'Continue' to proceed to the next installation step. To skip any steps\n" +"requiring an internet connection or to get back to your network configuration,\n" "click 'Cancel'.\n" msgstr "" @@ -708,9 +700,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/routing.rb:354 -msgid "" -"At least one of the following parameters (gateway, netmask, device, options) " -"must be specified" +msgid "At least one of the following parameters (gateway, netmask, device, options) must be specified" msgstr "" #: src/clients/routing.rb:376 @@ -1322,12 +1312,9 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/address.rb:1414 msgid "" "<p><b><big>IFPLUGD PRIORITY</big></b></p> \n" -"<p> All interfaces configured with <b>On Cable Connection</b> and with " -"IFPLUGD_PRIORITY != 0 will be\n" -" used mutually exclusive. If more then one of these interfaces is <b>On " -"Cable Connection</b>\n" -" then we need a way to decide which interface to take up. Therefore we have " -"to\n" +"<p> All interfaces configured with <b>On Cable Connection</b> and with IFPLUGD_PRIORITY != 0 will be\n" +" used mutually exclusive. If more then one of these interfaces is <b>On Cable Connection</b>\n" +" then we need a way to decide which interface to take up. Therefore we have to\n" " set the priority of each interface. </p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1524,9 +1511,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/cmdline.rb:101 -msgid "" -"Value of \"id\" is out of range. Use \"list\" option to check max. value of " -"\"id\"." +msgid "Value of \"id\" is out of range. Use \"list\" option to check max. value of \"id\"." msgstr "" #. Handler for action "add" @@ -1633,9 +1618,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/complex.rb:234 -msgid "" -"For successful firmware installation, the 'install_bcm43xx_firmware' script " -"needs to be executed. Execute it now?" +msgid "For successful firmware installation, the 'install_bcm43xx_firmware' script needs to be executed. Execute it now?" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/complex.rb:248 @@ -1711,17 +1694,14 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:100 msgid "" "<p><b>Udev Rules</b> are rules for the kernel device manager that allow\n" -"associating the MAC address or BusID of the network device with its name " -"(for\n" +"associating the MAC address or BusID of the network device with its name (for\n" "example, eth1, wlan0 ) and assures a persistent device name upon reboot.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:106 msgid "" -"<p><b>Show visible port identification</b> allows you to physically identify " -"now configured NIC. \n" -"Set appropriate time, click <b>Blink</b> and LED diodes on you NIC will " -"start blinking for selected time.\n" +"<p><b>Show visible port identification</b> allows you to physically identify now configured NIC. \n" +"Set appropriate time, click <b>Blink</b> and LED diodes on you NIC will start blinking for selected time.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -1729,26 +1709,20 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:119 msgid "" "<p><b>Kernel Module</b>. Enter the kernel module (driver) name \n" -"for your network device here. If the device is already configured, see if " -"there is more than one driver available for\n" -"your device in the drop-down list. If necessary, choose a driver from the " -"list, but usually the default value works.</p>\n" +"for your network device here. If the device is already configured, see if there is more than one driver available for\n" +"your device in the drop-down list. If necessary, choose a driver from the list, but usually the default value works.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Manual networ card setup help 3/4 #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:126 msgid "" "<p>Additionally, specify <b>Options</b> for the kernel module. Use this\n" -"format: <i>option</i>=<i>value</i>. Each entry should be space-separated, " -"for example: <i>io=0x300 irq=5</i>. <b>Note:</b> If two cards are \n" -"configured with the same module name, the options will be merged while " -"saving.</p>\n" +"format: <i>option</i>=<i>value</i>. Each entry should be space-separated, for example: <i>io=0x300 irq=5</i>. <b>Note:</b> If two cards are \n" +"configured with the same module name, the options will be merged while saving.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:132 -msgid "" -"<p>If you specify options via <b>Ethtool options</b>, ifup will call ethtool " -"with these options.</p>\n" +msgid "<p>If you specify options via <b>Ethtool options</b>, ifup will call ethtool with these options.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Manual dialog help 4/4 @@ -1932,27 +1906,19 @@ #. S/390 dialog help: QETH Options #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:972 -msgid "" -"<p>Enter any additional <b>Options</b> for this interface (separated by " -"spaces).</p>" +msgid "<p>Enter any additional <b>Options</b> for this interface (separated by spaces).</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:975 -msgid "" -"<p>Select <b>Enable IPA Takeover</b> if IP address takeover should be " -"enabled for this interface.</p>" +msgid "<p>Select <b>Enable IPA Takeover</b> if IP address takeover should be enabled for this interface.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:978 -msgid "" -"<p>Select <b>Enable Layer 2 Support</b> if this card has been configured " -"with layer 2 support.</p>" +msgid "<p>Select <b>Enable Layer 2 Support</b> if this card has been configured with layer 2 support.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/hardware.rb:981 -msgid "" -"<p>Enter the <b>Layer 2 MAC Address</b> if this card has been configured " -"with layer 2 support.</p>" +msgid "<p>Enter the <b>Layer 2 MAC Address</b> if this card has been configured with layer 2 support.</p>" msgstr "" #. TextEntry label @@ -2102,8 +2068,7 @@ "<p>Check <b>Enable IPv6</b> to enable the ipv6 module in the kernel.\n" "It is possible to use IPv6 together with IPv4. This is the default option.\n" "To disable IPv6, uncheck this option. This will blacklist the kernel \n" -"module for ipv6. If the IPv6 protocol is not used on your network, the " -"response \n" +"module for ipv6. If the IPv6 protocol is not used on your network, the response \n" "time can be faster.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2125,8 +2090,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>For each route, enter destination network IP address, gateway address,\n" "and netmask. To omit any of these values, use a dash sign \"-\". Select\n" -"the device through which the traffic to the defined network will be routed." -"\"-\" is an alias for any interface.</p>\n" +"the device through which the traffic to the defined network will be routed.\"-\" is an alias for any interface.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Routing dialog help 2/2 @@ -2146,8 +2110,7 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:112 msgid "" -"<p><b>Important:</b> if the firewall is enabled, allowing forwarding alone " -"is not enough. \n" +"<p><b>Important:</b> if the firewall is enabled, allowing forwarding alone is not enough. \n" "You should enable masquerading and/or set at least one redirect rule in the\n" "firewall configuration. Use the YaST firewall module.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2155,24 +2118,18 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:117 msgid "" "<p>If you are using DHCP to get an IP address, check whether you get\n" -"also a hostname via DHCP. The hostname will be set automatically by the " -"DHCP client.\n" -"However, changing the hostname at runtime may confuse the graphical " -"desktop. \n" -"Therefore, disable this option if you connect to different networks that " -"assign \n" +"also a hostname via DHCP. The hostname will be set automatically by the DHCP client.\n" +"However, changing the hostname at runtime may confuse the graphical desktop. \n" +"Therefore, disable this option if you connect to different networks that assign \n" "different hostnames.</p> " msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:124 msgid "" "<p><b>Assign Hostname to Loopback IP</b> associates your hostname with \n" -"the IP address <tt>127.0.0.2</tt> (loopback) in <tt>/etc/hosts</tt>. This is " -"a \n" -"useful option if you want to have the hostname resolvable at all times, " -"even \n" -"without an active network. In all other cases, use it carefully, " -"especially \n" +"the IP address <tt>127.0.0.2</tt> (loopback) in <tt>/etc/hosts</tt>. This is a \n" +"useful option if you want to have the hostname resolvable at all times, even \n" +"without an active network. In all other cases, use it carefully, especially \n" "if this computer provides some network services.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2195,31 +2152,25 @@ msgid "" "<p>Search domain is the domain name where hostname searching starts.\n" "The primary search domain is usually the same as the domain name of\n" -"your computer (for example, suse.de). There may be additional search " -"domains\n" +"your computer (for example, suse.de). There may be additional search domains\n" "(such as suse.com). Separate the domains with commas or white space.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:147 msgid "" -"<p>Enter the short name for this computer (e.g. <i>mymachine</i>) and the " -"DNS domain\n" -"(e.g. <i>example.com</i>) that it belongs to. The domain is especially " -"important if this \n" -"computer is a mail server. You can view the hostname of you computer using " -"the <i>hostname</i> \n" +"<p>Enter the short name for this computer (e.g. <i>mymachine</i>) and the DNS domain\n" +"(e.g. <i>example.com</i>) that it belongs to. The domain is especially important if this \n" +"computer is a mail server. You can view the hostname of you computer using the <i>hostname</i> \n" "command.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:153 msgid "" "<p>Select the way how the DNS configuration will be modified (name servers,\n" -"search list, the content of <i>/etc/resolv.conf</i>). Normally, it is " -"handled\n" +"search list, the content of <i>/etc/resolv.conf</i>). Normally, it is handled\n" "by the <i>netconfig</i> script, which merges statically defined data with\n" "dynamically obtained data (e.g. from the DHCP client, NetworkManager,\n" -"etc.). This is the default. <b>Use Default Policy</b> is sufficient for " -"most\n" +"etc.). This is the default. <b>Use Default Policy</b> is sufficient for most\n" "configurations.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2240,15 +2191,12 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:174 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Address Setup</big></b></p>\n" -"<p>Select <b>No Address Setup</b> if you do not want to assign an IP address " -"to this device.\n" +"<p>Select <b>No Address Setup</b> if you do not want to assign an IP address to this device.\n" "This is particularly useful for bonding ethernet devices.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:179 -msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>iBFT</b> if you want to keep the network configured in your BIOS." -"</p>\n" +msgid "<p>Check <b>iBFT</b> if you want to keep the network configured in your BIOS.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Address dialog help 2/8 @@ -2270,17 +2218,14 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:193 msgid "" "<p>To search for an IP address and assign it statically, select \n" -"<b>Zeroconf</b>. To use DHCP and fall back to zeroconf, select <b>DHCP + " -"Zeroconf\n" -"</b>. Otherwise, the network addresses must be assigned <b>Statically</b>.\n" +"<b>Zeroconf</b>. To use DHCP and fall back to zeroconf, select <b>DHCP + Zeroconf\n" +"</b>. Otherwise, the network addresses must be assigned <b>Statically</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Address dialog help 5/8 #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:199 msgid "" -"<p>Enter the <b>IP Address</b> (for example: <tt>192.168.100.99</tt>) for " -"your computer, and the \n" +"<p>Enter the <b>IP Address</b> (for example: <tt>192.168.100.99</tt>) for your computer, and the \n" " <b>Remote IP Address</b> (for example: <tt>192.168.100.254</tt>)\n" "for your peer.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2288,12 +2233,9 @@ #. Address dialog help 6/8 #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:205 msgid "" -"<p>For <b>Static Address Setup</b> enter the static IP address for your " -"computer (for example: <tt>192.168.100.99</tt>) and\n" -"the network mask (usually <tt>255.255.255.0</tt> or just length of prefix " -"<tt>/24</tt>).Optionally, you can enter\n" -"a fully qualified hostname for this IP address. The hostname will be written " -"to <tt>/etc/hosts</tt>.</p>\n" +"<p>For <b>Static Address Setup</b> enter the static IP address for your computer (for example: <tt>192.168.100.99</tt>) and\n" +"the network mask (usually <tt>255.255.255.0</tt> or just length of prefix <tt>/24</tt>).Optionally, you can enter\n" +"a fully qualified hostname for this IP address. The hostname will be written to <tt>/etc/hosts</tt>.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Address dialog help 8/8 @@ -2321,9 +2263,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:226 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Mandatory Interface</b> specifies whether the network service reports " -"failure if the interface fails to start at boot time.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Mandatory Interface</b> specifies whether the network service reports failure if the interface fails to start at boot time.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:229 @@ -2332,16 +2272,14 @@ "<p>Maximum transfer unit (<b>MTU</b>) is the maximum size of the packet,\n" "transferred over the network in one frame. Usually, you do not need to\n" "set a MTU, but using lower MTU values may improve the network performance,\n" -"especially on slow dial-up connections. Either select one of the " -"recommended\n" +"especially on slow dial-up connections. Either select one of the recommended\n" "values or define another one.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:237 msgid "" "<p>Select the slave devices for the bond device.\n" -"Only devices with the device activation set to <b>Never</b> and with <b>No " -"Address Setup</b> are available.</p>" +"Only devices with the device activation set to <b>Never</b> and with <b>No Address Setup</b> are available.</p>" msgstr "" #. DHCP dialog help 1/7 @@ -2353,8 +2291,7 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:244 msgid "" "<p>The <b>DHCP Client Identifier</b>, if left empty, defaults to\n" -"the hardware address of the network interface. It must be different for " -"each\n" +"the hardware address of the network interface. It must be different for each\n" "DHCP client on a single network. Therefore, specify a unique free-form\n" "identifier here if you have several (virtual) machines using the same\n" "network interface and thus the same hardware address.</p>" @@ -2364,15 +2301,12 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:252 msgid "" "<p>The <b>Hostname to Send</b> specifies a string used for the\n" -"hostname option field when the DHCP client sends messages to the DHCP " -"server. Some \n" +"hostname option field when the DHCP client sends messages to the DHCP server. Some \n" "DHCP servers update name server zones (forward and reverse records) \n" "according to this hostname (dynamic DNS).</p>\n" "Some DHCP servers require the <b>Hostname to Send</b> option field to\n" -"contain a specific string in the DHCP messages from clients. Leave <b>AUTO\n" -"to send the current hostname (for example, the one defined in <tt>/etc/" -"HOSTNAME</tt>). \n" +"contain a specific string in the DHCP messages from clients. Leave <b>AUTO</b>\n" +"to send the current hostname (for example, the one defined in <tt>/etc/HOSTNAME</tt>). \n" "If you do not want to send a hostname, leave the field empty.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2393,19 +2327,14 @@ #. Aliases dialog help 3/4 #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:272 msgid "" -"<p><b>IPv4 Address Label</b>, formerly known as Alias Name, is optional and " -"legacy. The total\n" -" length of interface name (inclusive of the colon and label) " -"is\n" -" limited to 15 characters and the obsolete ifconfig utility " -"truncates it after 9 characters.</p>" +"<p><b>IPv4 Address Label</b>, formerly known as Alias Name, is optional and legacy. The total\n" +" length of interface name (inclusive of the colon and label) is\n" +" limited to 15 characters and the obsolete ifconfig utility truncates it after 9 characters.</p>" msgstr "" #. Aliases dialog help 3/4, #83766 #: src/include/network/lan/help.rb:278 -msgid "" -"<p>Do not include the interface name in the alias name. For example, enter " -"<b>foo</b> instead of <b>eth0:foo</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Do not include the interface name in the alias name. For example, enter <b>foo</b> instead of <b>eth0:foo</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. shared between WirelessDialog and WirelessKeyPopup @@ -2450,8 +2379,7 @@ "<p>Set the <b>Network Name (ESSID)</b> used to identify\n" "cells that are part of the same virtual network. All stations in a\n" "wireless LAN need the same ESSID to communicate with each other. If\n" -"you choose the operation mode <b>Managed</b> and no <b>WPA</b> " -"authentication mode,\n" +"you choose the operation mode <b>Managed</b> and no <b>WPA</b> authentication mode,\n" "you can leave this field empty or set it to <tt>any</tt>. In this\n" "case, your WLAN card associates with the access point with the best\n" "signal strength.</p>\n" @@ -2471,8 +2399,7 @@ "NOTE: Shared key authentication makes it easier for a\n" "potential attacker to break into your network. Unless you have\n" "specific needs for shared key authentication, use the <b>Open</b>\n" -"mode. Because WEP has been proven insecure, <b>WPA</b> (Wi-Fi Protected " -"Access)\n" +"mode. Because WEP has been proven insecure, <b>WPA</b> (Wi-Fi Protected Access)\n" "was defined to close its security holes, but not all hardware supports\n" "WPA. If you want to use WPA, select <b>WPA-PSK</b> or <b>WPA-EAP</b> as the\n" "authentication mode. This is only possible in the operation mode\n" @@ -2512,8 +2439,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>These values will be written to the interface configuration file\n" "'ifcfg-*' in '/etc/sysconfig/network'. If you need additional settings,\n" -"add them manually. Refer to the file 'wireless' in the same directory for " -"all\n" +"add them manually. Refer to the file 'wireless' in the same directory for all\n" "available options.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -2603,8 +2529,7 @@ "<p>For TTLS and PEAP, enter your <b>Identity</b>\n" "and <b>Password</b> as configured on the server.\n" "If you have special requirements to set the username used as\n" -"<b>Anonymous Identity</b>, you may set it here. This is usually not needed.\n" +"<b>Anonymous Identity</b>, you may set it here. This is usually not needed.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. text entry label @@ -2626,8 +2551,7 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:128 msgid "" "<p>TLS uses a <b>Client Certificate</b> instead of a username and\n" -"password combination for authentication. It uses a public and private key " -"pair\n" +"password combination for authentication. It uses a public and private key pair\n" "to encrypt negotiation communication, therefore you will additionally need\n" "a <b>Client Key</b> file that contains your private key and\n" "the appropriate <b>Client Key Password</b> for that file.</p>\n" @@ -2844,8 +2768,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>To use your wireless LAN card in master or ad-hoc mode,\n" "set the <b>Channel</b> the card should use here. This is not needed\n" -"for managed mode--the card will hop through the channels searching for " -"access\n" +"for managed mode--the card will hop through the channels searching for access\n" "points in that case.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2940,8 +2863,7 @@ #: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:1001 msgid "" "<p>In this dialog, define your WEP keys used\n" -"to encrypt your data before it is transmitted. You can have up to four " -"keys,\n" +"to encrypt your data before it is transmitted. You can have up to four keys,\n" "although only one key is used to encrypt the data. This is the default key.\n" "The other keys can be used to decrypt data. Usually you have only\n" "one key.</p>" @@ -2996,8 +2918,7 @@ #. validated in ValidateWpaEap #: src/include/network/lan/wireless.rb:1281 msgid "" -"Not using a Certificate Authority (CA) certificate can result in " -"connections\n" +"Not using a Certificate Authority (CA) certificate can result in connections\n" "to insecure, rogue wireless networks. Continue without CA ?" msgstr "" @@ -3080,8 +3001,7 @@ "<p>If this feature is enabled, you can\n" "administer this machine remotely from another machine. Use a VNC\n" "client, such as krdc (connect to <tt><hostname>:%1</tt>), or\n" -"a Java-capable Web browser (connect to <tt>http://<hostname>:%2/).\n" +"a Java-capable Web browser (connect to <tt>http://<hostname>:%2/</tt>).\n" "This form of remote administration is less secure than using SSH.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -3315,9 +3235,7 @@ #. @param [Hash] event the event being handled #. @return whether valid #: src/include/network/services/dns.rb:502 -msgid "" -"It's not recommended to use .local as domainname due to Multicast DNS. Use " -"it at your own risk?" +msgid "It's not recommended to use .local as domainname due to Multicast DNS. Use it at your own risk?" msgstr "" #. Popup::Error text @@ -3491,8 +3409,7 @@ #: src/include/network/widgets.rb:58 msgid "" "<p>When <b>Dial Prefix Regular Expression</b> is set, users can\n" -"change the dial prefix in KInternet provided that it matches the " -"expression.\n" +"change the dial prefix in KInternet provided that it matches the expression.\n" "A recommended value is <tt>[09]?</tt>, allowing <tt>0</tt>, <tt>9</tt>,\n" "and the empty prefix. If the expression is empty, users are not allowed\n" "to change the prefix.</p>\n" @@ -3590,18 +3507,15 @@ #. help text for Device Activation #: src/include/network/widgets.rb:152 msgid "" -"Using <b>On NFSroot</b> is similar to <tt>auto</tt>. Interfaces with this " -"startmode will never\n" -"be shut down via <tt>rcnetwork stop</tt>. <tt>ifdown <iface></tt> is still " -"available.\n" +"Using <b>On NFSroot</b> is similar to <tt>auto</tt>. Interfaces with this startmode will never\n" +"be shut down via <tt>rcnetwork stop</tt>. <tt>ifdown <iface></tt> is still available.\n" "Use this if you have an NFS or iSCSI root filesystem.\n" msgstr "" #. help text for Device Activation #: src/include/network/widgets.rb:162 msgid "" -"Using <b>On NFSroot</b> is nearly like 'auto'. But interfaces with this " -"startmode will never\n" +"Using <b>On NFSroot</b> is nearly like 'auto'. But interfaces with this startmode will never\n" "be shut down via 'rcnetwork stop'. 'ifdown <iface>' still works.\n" "Use this when you have a nfs or iscsi root filesystem.\n" msgstr "" @@ -3616,8 +3530,7 @@ #: src/include/network/widgets.rb:201 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Device Activation</big></b></p> \n" -"<p>Choose when to bring up the network interface. <b>At Boot Time</b> " -"activates it during system boot, \n" +"<p>Choose when to bring up the network interface. <b>At Boot Time</b> activates it during system boot, \n" "<b>Never</b> does not start the device.\n" "%1</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -3743,9 +3656,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/lib/network/confirm_virt_proposal.rb:26 -msgid "" -"Because of the bridged network, YaST2 needs to restart the network to apply " -"the settings." +msgid "Because of the bridged network, YaST2 needs to restart the network to apply the settings." msgstr "" #. Opens dialog for editing NIC name @@ -4069,9 +3980,7 @@ #. @param [Hash] settings settings to be imported #. @return true on success #: src/modules/Lan.rb:706 -msgid "" -"AutoYaST setting networking/managed: NetworkManager is not available, Wicked " -"will be used." +msgid "AutoYaST setting networking/managed: NetworkManager is not available, Wicked will be used." msgstr "" #. Create a textual summary for the general network settings @@ -4199,10 +4108,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1416 -msgid "" -"Unable to configure the network card because the kernel device (eth0, wlan0) " -"is not present. This is mostly caused by missing firmware (for wlan " -"devices). See dmesg output for details." +msgid "Unable to configure the network card because the kernel device (eth0, wlan0) is not present. This is mostly caused by missing firmware (for wlan devices). See dmesg output for details." msgstr "" #: src/modules/LanItems.rb:1422 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/nfs.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/nfs.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/nfs.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -153,16 +153,14 @@ msgid "" "<p>Each NFS share is identified by remote NFS server address and\n" "exported directory, local directory where the remote directory is mounted, \n" -"NFS type (either plain nfs or nfsv4) and mount options. For further " -"information \n" +"NFS type (either plain nfs or nfsv4) and mount options. For further information \n" "about mounting NFS and mount options, refer to <tt>man nfs.</tt></p>" msgstr "" #. Help, part 3 of 3 #: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:68 msgid "" -"<p>To mount a new NFS share, click <B>Add</B>. To change the configuration " -"of\n" +"<p>To mount a new NFS share, click <B>Add</B>. To change the configuration of\n" "a currently mounted share, click <B>Edit</B>. Remove and unmount a selected\n" "share with <B>Delete</B>.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -170,10 +168,8 @@ #: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:76 msgid "" "<p>If you need to access NFSv4 shares (NFSv4 is a newer version of the NFS\n" -"protocol), check the <b>Enable NFSv4</b> option. In that case, you might " -"need\n" -"to supply specific a <b>NFSv4 Domain Name</b> required for the correct " -"setting\n" +"protocol), check the <b>Enable NFSv4</b> option. In that case, you might need\n" +"to supply specific a <b>NFSv4 Domain Name</b> required for the correct setting\n" "of file/directory access rights.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -291,8 +287,7 @@ #: src/include/nfs/ui.rb:455 msgid "" "<p>\t\t\n" -"For <b>Mount Point</b>, enter the path in the local file system where the " -"directory should be mounted. With\n" +"For <b>Mount Point</b>, enter the path in the local file system where the directory should be mounted. With\n" "<b>Browse</b>, select your mount point\n" "interactively.</p>" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/nfs_server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/nfs_server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/nfs_server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -60,9 +60,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:113 -msgid "" -"Domain specification for NFSv4 ID mapping, such as 'localdomain' or 'abc." -"com' etc." +msgid "Domain specification for NFSv4 ID mapping, such as 'localdomain' or 'abc.com' etc." msgstr "" #: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:119 @@ -104,14 +102,11 @@ #. @param [Hash] options command options #. @return whether successful #: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:319 -msgid "" -"Domain cannot be set without enabling NFSv4. Use the 'set enablev4' command." +msgid "Domain cannot be set without enabling NFSv4. Use the 'set enablev4' command." msgstr "" #: src/clients/nfs_server.rb:330 -msgid "" -"Command 'set' must be used in the form 'set option=value'. Use 'set help' to " -"get information about available options." +msgid "Command 'set' must be used in the form 'set option=value'. Use 'set help' to get information about available options." msgstr "" #. Then no need to check for conflict. @@ -218,9 +213,7 @@ #. Opening NFS server dialog #. @return `back, `abort, `next `or finish #: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:272 -msgid "" -"Unable to read the /etc/idmapd.conf file. Setting the default setting for " -"the domain to 'localdomain'." +msgid "Unable to read the /etc/idmapd.conf file. Setting the default setting for the domain to 'localdomain'." msgstr "" #. Help, part 1 of 2 @@ -240,18 +233,15 @@ #: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:311 msgid "" "<P>If the server needs to handle NFSv4 clients, check <B>Enable NFSv4</B>\n" -"and fill in the NFSv4 domain name you want the ID mapping daemon to use. " -"Leave\n" -"it as localdomain or refer to the man page for idmapd and idmapd.conf if you " -"are not sure.</P>\n" +"and fill in the NFSv4 domain name you want the ID mapping daemon to use. Leave\n" +"it as localdomain or refer to the man page for idmapd and idmapd.conf if you are not sure.</P>\n" msgstr "" #. FIXME: use %1 as nfs-utils.src.rpm produces nfs-kernel-server.rpm #: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:321 msgid "" "<P>If the server and client must authenticate using GSS library, check the\n" -"<B>Enable GSS Security</B> box. To use GSS API, you currently need to have " -"Kerberos and gssapi (nfs-utils > 1.0.7) on your system.</P>\n" +"<B>Enable GSS Security</B> box. To use GSS API, you currently need to have Kerberos and gssapi (nfs-utils > 1.0.7) on your system.</P>\n" msgstr "" #. frame label @@ -302,16 +292,14 @@ #. Help, part 2 of 4 #: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:495 msgid "" -"<P><b>Host Wild Card</b> sets which hosts can access the selected " -"directory.\n" +"<P><b>Host Wild Card</b> sets which hosts can access the selected directory.\n" "It can be a single host, groups, wild cards, or\n" "IP networks.</P>\n" msgstr "" #. Help, part 3 of 4 #: src/include/nfs_server/ui.rb:503 -msgid "" -"<p>Enter an asterisk (<tt>*</tt>) instead of a name to specify all hosts.</p>" +msgid "<p>Enter an asterisk (<tt>*</tt>) instead of a name to specify all hosts.</p>" msgstr "" #. Help, part 4 of 4 @@ -421,9 +409,7 @@ #. FIXME svcgssd is gone! (only nfsserver is left) #: src/modules/NfsServer.rb:266 -msgid "" -"Unable to start svcgssd. Ensure your kerberos and gssapi (nfs-utils) setup " -"is correct." +msgid "Unable to start svcgssd. Ensure your kerberos and gssapi (nfs-utils) setup is correct." msgstr "" #: src/modules/NfsServer.rb:275 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/nis.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/nis.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/nis.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -132,8 +132,7 @@ "<p><b>Firewall Settings</b><br>\n" "To open the firewall to allow accessing the 'ypbind' service\n" "from remote computers, set <b>Open Port in Firewall</b>.\n" -"To select interfaces on which to open the port, click <b>Firewall Details.\n" +"To select interfaces on which to open the port, click <b>Firewall Details</b>.\n" "This option is only available if the firewall is enabled.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -147,19 +146,15 @@ #. help text for netconfig part #: src/include/nis/ui.rb:244 msgid "" -"<p>Select the way how the NIS configuration will be modified. Normally, it " -"is\n" -"handled by the netconfig script, which merges the data statically defined " -"here\n" +"<p>Select the way how the NIS configuration will be modified. Normally, it is\n" +"handled by the netconfig script, which merges the data statically defined here\n" "with dynamically obtained data (e.g. from DHCP client, NetworkManager\n" "etc.). This is the Default Policy and sufficient for most configurations. \n" -"By choosing Only Manual Changes, netconfig will no longer be allowed to " -"modify\n" +"By choosing Only Manual Changes, netconfig will no longer be allowed to modify\n" "the configuration. You can, however, edit the file manually. By choosing\n" "Custom Policy, you can specify a custom policy string, which consists of a\n" "space-separated list of interface names, including wildcards, with\n" -"STATIC/STATIC_FALLBACK as predefined special values. For more information, " -"see\n" +"STATIC/STATIC_FALLBACK as predefined special values. For more information, see\n" "the netconfig manual page.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -181,10 +176,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/nis/ui.rb:279 -msgid "" -"<p>NFS Settings which affects how the automounter operates could be set in " -"NFS Client, which can be configured using <b>NFS Configuration</b> button." +msgid "<p>NFS Settings which affects how the automounter operates could be set in NFS Client, which can be configured using <b>NFS Configuration</b> button.</p>" msgstr "" #. radio button label @@ -309,19 +301,13 @@ #. help text 1/4 #: src/include/nis/ui.rb:674 -msgid "" -"<p>Normally, it is possible for any host to query which server a client is " -"using. Disabling <b>Answer Remote Hosts</b> restricts this only to the local " -"host.</p>" +msgid "<p>Normally, it is possible for any host to query which server a client is using. Disabling <b>Answer Remote Hosts</b> restricts this only to the local host.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/4 #. Check, ie. turn on a check box #: src/include/nis/ui.rb:682 -msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Broken server</b> if answers from servers running on an " -"unprivileged port should be accepted. It is a security risk and it is better " -"to replace such a server.</p>" +msgid "<p>Check <b>Broken server</b> if answers from servers running on an unprivileged port should be accepted. It is a security risk and it is better to replace such a server.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 3/4 @@ -401,9 +387,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/nis/ui.rb:985 -msgid "" -"<p>The Service Location Protocol (<b>SLP</b>) can be used to find NIS server." -"</p>" +msgid "<p>The Service Location Protocol (<b>SLP</b>) can be used to find NIS server.</p>" msgstr "" #. dialog label Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/nis_server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/nis_server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/nis_server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -156,8 +156,7 @@ #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/nis_server/details.rb:73 msgid "" -"<p>Select if your <i>passwd</i> file should be merged with the <i>shadow\n" +"<p>Select if your <i>passwd</i> file should be merged with the <i>shadow</i>\n" "file (only possible if the <i>shadow</i> file exists).</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -212,8 +211,7 @@ #. help text 1/3 #: src/include/nis_server/master.rb:71 msgid "" -"<p>Enter a NIS <b>domain</b>. If this host is also a NIS client using this " -"machine as a server, check\n" +"<p>Enter a NIS <b>domain</b>. If this host is also a NIS client using this machine as a server, check\n" "the corresponding option.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -300,8 +298,7 @@ "<p><b>Firewall Settings</b><br>\n" "To open the firewall to allow accessing the NIS server\n" "from remote computers, set <b>Open Port in Firewall</b>.\n" -"To select interfaces on which to open the port, click <b>Firewall Details.\n" +"To select interfaces on which to open the port, click <b>Firewall Details</b>.\n" "This option is only available if the firewall is enabled.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -373,16 +370,12 @@ #. help text 1/2 #: src/include/nis_server/slave.rb:62 -msgid "" -"<p>Enter the NIS <b>domain</b> and the IP <b>address</b> or host name of the " -"master NIS server.</p>" +msgid "<p>Enter the NIS <b>domain</b> and the IP <b>address</b> or host name of the master NIS server.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text 2/2 #: src/include/nis_server/slave.rb:69 -msgid "" -"<p>If this host is also a NIS client using this machine as a server, check " -"the corresponding option.</p>" +msgid "<p>If this host is also a NIS client using this machine as a server, check the corresponding option.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -422,10 +415,7 @@ #. help text 1/1 #: src/include/nis_server/slaves.rb:175 -msgid "" -"<p>Here, enter the names of hosts to configure as NIS server slaves. Use " -"<i>Add</i> to add a new one, <i>Edit</i> to change an existing entry, and " -"<i>Delete</i> to remove an entry.</p>" +msgid "<p>Here, enter the names of hosts to configure as NIS server slaves. Use <i>Add</i> to add a new one, <i>Edit</i> to change an existing entry, and <i>Delete</i> to remove an entry.</p>" msgstr "" #. To translators: selection box label Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/ntp-client.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/ntp-client.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/ntp-client.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -23,32 +23,21 @@ #. help text #: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:92 -msgid "" -"<p>Press <b>Synchronize Now</b>, to get your system time set correctly using " -"the selected NTP server. If you want to make use of NTP permanently, enable " -"the <b>Save NTP Configuration</b> option</p>" +msgid "<p>Press <b>Synchronize Now</b>, to get your system time set correctly using the selected NTP server. If you want to make use of NTP permanently, enable the <b>Save NTP Configuration</b> option</p>" msgstr "" #: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:98 -msgid "" -"<p>Enabling <b>Run NTP as daemon</b> option, the NTP service will be started " -"as daemon. Otherwise the system time will be synchronized periodically. The " -"default interval is 15 min. You can change it after installation with the " -"<b>yast2 ntp-client module</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Enabling <b>Run NTP as daemon</b> option, the NTP service will be started as daemon. Otherwise the system time will be synchronized periodically. The default interval is 15 min. You can change it after installation with the <b>yast2 ntp-client module</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text, cont. #: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:107 -msgid "" -"<p>Using the <b>Configure</b> button, open the advanced NTP configuration." +msgid "<p>Using the <b>Configure</b> button, open the advanced NTP configuration.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text, cont. #: src/clients/ntp-client_proposal.rb:116 -msgid "" -"<p>Synchronization with the NTP server can be done only when the network is " -"configured.</p>" +msgid "<p>Synchronization with the NTP server can be done only when the network is configured.</p>" msgstr "" #. translators: error popup @@ -607,10 +596,8 @@ "Select whether to start the NTP daemon now and on every system boot. \n" "The NTP daemon resolves host names when initializing. Your\n" "network connection must be started before the NTP daemon starts.</p>\n" -"Selecting <b>Synchronize without Daemon</b> the ntp daemon will not be " -"activated. \n" -"The system time will be set periodically. The interval is configurable. It " -"is 15 minutes by default.\n" +"Selecting <b>Synchronize without Daemon</b> the ntp daemon will not be activated. \n" +"The system time will be set periodically. The interval is configurable. It is 15 minutes by default.\n" " You can change this when the system was set up." msgstr "" @@ -626,12 +613,9 @@ #: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:51 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Secure NTP Configuration</big></b><br>\n" -"By selecting <b>Restrict NTP Service to Configured Servers Only</b>, remote " -"hosts will not be able to view and modify NTP settings on your \n" -"computer. The NTP service is restricted to servers in the <tt>/etc/ntp.conf file and to localhost.<br> \n" -"Access control flags can be fine-tuded in the servers overview table. This " -"option is not available if NTP is configured via DHCP.</p>\n" +"By selecting <b>Restrict NTP Service to Configured Servers Only</b>, remote hosts will not be able to view and modify NTP settings on your \n" +"computer. The NTP service is restricted to servers in the <tt>/etc/ntp.conf</tt> file and to localhost.<br> \n" +"Access control flags can be fine-tuded in the servers overview table. This option is not available if NTP is configured via DHCP.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. help text 3/5 @@ -649,8 +633,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b><big>Configured Servers</big></b><br>\n" "To adjust NTP servers, peers, local clocks, and NTP broadcasting,\n" -"select the appropriate line and click <b>Edit</b>. To add a new " -"synchronization\n" +"select the appropriate line and click <b>Edit</b>. To add a new synchronization\n" "peer, click <b>Add</b>. To delete an existing synchronization peer,\n" "select it and click <b>Delete</b>.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -666,8 +649,7 @@ #: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:78 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Advanced configuration</big></b><br>\n" -"To configure this host to synchronize against multiple remote hosts or " -"against\n" +"To configure this host to synchronize against multiple remote hosts or against\n" "a locally connected clock, use <b>Advanced Configuration</b>." msgstr "" @@ -690,8 +672,7 @@ #: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:94 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Device</big></b><br>\n" -"To make the clock work, it may be necessary to create a special symbolic " -"link to \n" +"To make the clock work, it may be necessary to create a special symbolic link to \n" "the device to which the clock is connected. To do this, check\n" "<b>Create Symlink</b> and set the <b>Device</b>. To browse for the device,\n" "click <b>Browse</b>.\n" @@ -761,8 +742,7 @@ #: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:148 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Options</big></b><br>\n" -"To fine-tune the synchronization source, enter the respective options in " -"the\n" +"To fine-tune the synchronization source, enter the respective options in the\n" "<b>Options</b> text field. For details, see\n" "<i>/usr/share/doc/packages/ntp-doc/confopt.htm</i>.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -771,8 +751,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b><big>Access Control Options</big></b><br>\n" "Define the access control flags (<b><tt>restrict</tt></b> directive in\n" -"<i>/etc/ntp.conf</i>) for this server, indicating which types of actions the " -"remote\n" +"<i>/etc/ntp.conf</i>) for this server, indicating which types of actions the remote\n" "host can perform on your NTP daemon. By default, it is set to <i>notrap\n" "nomodify noquery</i>. This option is only available if you have checked the\n" "<b>Restrict NTP Service to Configured Servers Only</b> option in\n" @@ -843,8 +822,7 @@ #: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:202 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Selecting a Public NTP Server</b></big><br>\n" -"Select the NTP server to use from the <b>Public NTP Servers</b> list. To " -"display\n" +"Select the NTP server to use from the <b>Public NTP Servers</b> list. To display\n" "NTP servers only for a particular country, select it in <b>Country</b>.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -874,10 +852,8 @@ msgid "" "<p><big><b>Use Random Servers</b></big><br>\n" "This service is offered by pool.ntp.org. If you select this option,\n" -"three different servers are added to the configuration. The server names " -"are\n" -"permanent, but they change their DNS records (IPs) every hour. This means " -"that\n" +"three different servers are added to the configuration. The server names are\n" +"permanent, but they change their DNS records (IPs) every hour. This means that\n" "your NTP client is synchronized with different servers every hour.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -885,10 +861,8 @@ #: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:238 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Clock Driver Calibration</b></big><br>\n" -"The clock driver may need to be calibrated. In this dialog, various " -"calibration\n" -"options can be set. The meaning of particular options depends on the " -"particular\n" +"The clock driver may need to be calibrated. In this dialog, various calibration\n" +"options can be set. The meaning of particular options depends on the particular\n" "driver. Some drivers do not use all the options.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -896,8 +870,7 @@ #: src/include/ntp-client/helps.rb:245 msgid "" "To learn more about available options, install the package\n" -"<i>ntp-doc</i> and see <i>/usr/share/doc/packages/ntp-doc/html/refclock.htm.</p>\n" +"<i>ntp-doc</i> and see <i>/usr/share/doc/packages/ntp-doc/html/refclock.htm</i>.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. yes-no popup Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/oneclickinstall.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/oneclickinstall.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/oneclickinstall.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -35,9 +35,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/OneClickInstallCLI.rb:44 -msgid "" -"File containing internal representation of <b>One Click Install</b> " -"instructions" +msgid "File containing internal representation of <b>One Click Install</b> instructions" msgstr "" #: src/clients/OneClickInstallCLI.rb:65 @@ -120,8 +118,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/OneClickInstallUI.rb:47 -msgid "" -"See <tt>http://en.opensuse.org/One_Click_Install</tt> for more information." +msgid "See <tt>http://en.opensuse.org/One_Click_Install</tt> for more information." msgstr "" #. <region name="Define the UI components"> * @@ -195,38 +192,27 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/OneClickInstallWorker.rb:56 -msgid "" -"An error occurred while attempting to subscribe to the required " -"repositories. Review the yast2 logs for more information." +msgid "An error occurred while attempting to subscribe to the required repositories. Review the yast2 logs for more information." msgstr "" #. Remove any removals #: src/clients/OneClickInstallWorker.rb:96 -msgid "" -"An error occurred while attempting to remove the specified packages. Review " -"the yast2 logs for more information." +msgid "An error occurred while attempting to remove the specified packages. Review the yast2 logs for more information." msgstr "" #. if that was successful now try and install the patterns #: src/clients/OneClickInstallWorker.rb:113 -msgid "" -"An error occurred while attempting to install the specified patterns. Review " -"the yast2 logs for more information." +msgid "An error occurred while attempting to install the specified patterns. Review the yast2 logs for more information." msgstr "" #. if that was successful now try and install the packages #: src/clients/OneClickInstallWorker.rb:129 -msgid "" -"An error occurred while attempting to install the specified packages. Review " -"the yast2 logs for more information." +msgid "An error occurred while attempting to install the specified packages. Review the yast2 logs for more information." msgstr "" #. If we don't want to remain subscribed, remove the repositories that were added for installation. #: src/clients/OneClickInstallWorker.rb:148 -msgid "" -"An error occurred while attempting to unsubscribe from the repositories that " -"were used to perform the installation. You can remove them manually in YaST " -"> Software Repositories. Review the yast2 logs for more information." +msgid "An error occurred while attempting to unsubscribe from the repositories that were used to perform the installation. You can remove them manually in YaST > Software Repositories. Review the yast2 logs for more information." msgstr "" #: src/clients/OneClickInstallWorker.rb:159 @@ -263,8 +249,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:71 -msgid "" -"The install link or file you opened does not contain instructions for %s." +msgid "The install link or file you opened does not contain instructions for %s." msgstr "" #: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:81 @@ -292,9 +277,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:348 -msgid "" -"These repositories will only be added during installation. You will not " -"remain subscribed." +msgid "These repositories will only be added during installation. You will not remain subscribed." msgstr "" #: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:352 @@ -343,9 +326,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:507 -msgid "" -"The installation has failed. For more information, see the log file at <tt>/" -"var/log/YaST2/y2log</tt>. Failure stage was: " +msgid "The installation has failed. For more information, see the log file at <tt>/var/log/YaST2/y2log</tt>. Failure stage was: " msgstr "" #: src/modules/OneClickInstallWidgets.rb:515 @@ -413,7 +394,5 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/OneClickInstallWorkerResponse.rb:13 -msgid "" -"Root privileges are required. Either they were not supplied, or an unknown " -"error occurred." +msgid "Root privileges are required. Either they were not supplied, or an unknown error occurred." msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/online-update-configuration.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/online-update-configuration.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/online-update-configuration.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -146,22 +146,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:97 -msgid "" -"<p>Select an update interval and specify if interactive patches should be " -"ignored and if licenses should be automatically agreed with.</p>" +msgid "<p>Select an update interval and specify if interactive patches should be ignored and if licenses should be automatically agreed with.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:102 -msgid "" -"<p>All packages that are recommended by an updated package will be installed " -"when <b>%1</b> is enabled.</p>" +msgid "<p>All packages that are recommended by an updated package will be installed when <b>%1</b> is enabled.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/online-update-configuration/OUCDialogs.rb:108 -msgid "" -"<p>Category filter for patches can be configured in the section <b>%1</b>. " -"Only patches of the listed categories will be installed. Others will be " -"skipped.</p>" +msgid "<p>Category filter for patches can be configured in the section <b>%1</b>. Only patches of the listed categories will be installed. Others will be skipped.</p>" msgstr "" #. cache the base product details Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/online-update.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/online-update.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/online-update.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -60,10 +60,7 @@ #. help text for online-update initialization #: src/clients/online_update.rb:130 -msgid "" -"<p>The system is initializing the installation and update repositories. " -"Software repositories can be altered in the <b>Installation Source</b> " -"module.</p>" +msgid "<p>The system is initializing the installation and update repositories. Software repositories can be altered in the <b>Installation Source</b> module.</p>" msgstr "" #. progress stage label @@ -150,9 +147,7 @@ #. help text for online update #: src/clients/online_update_install.rb:73 -msgid "" -"<p>If special messages associated with patches are available, they will be " -"shown in an extra dialog when the patch is installed.</p>\n" +msgid "<p>If special messages associated with patches are available, they will be shown in an extra dialog when the patch is installed.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. using SetContents (define in online_update.ycp) @@ -252,8 +247,7 @@ #. continue/cancel popup text #: src/modules/OnlineUpdate.rb:76 msgid "" -"There are patches for package management available that require a restart of " -"YaST.\n" +"There are patches for package management available that require a restart of YaST.\n" "They should be installed first and all other patches after the restart.\n" "\n" "You selected some other patches to be installed now.\n" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/packager.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/packager.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/packager.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -339,16 +339,12 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: dialog help 2/3 (version for installation) #: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1266 -msgid "" -"<p>Select the online repositories you want to use then click <b>Next</b>.\n" +msgid "<p>Select the online repositories you want to use then click <b>Next</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: dialog help 2/3 (version for running system) #: src/clients/inst_productsources.rb:1270 -msgid "" -"<p>Select the online repositories you want to use then click <b>Finish</b>.\n" +msgid "<p>Select the online repositories you want to use then click <b>Finish</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: dialog help 3/3 @@ -450,9 +446,7 @@ #. Solve dependencies #: src/clients/inst_rpmcopy.rb:368 -msgid "" -"The package resolver run failed. Check your software section in the AutoYaST " -"profile." +msgid "The package resolver run failed. Check your software section in the AutoYaST profile." msgstr "" #. error message - displayed in a scrollable text area @@ -511,9 +505,7 @@ #. Command line help text for the repository module, %1 is "zypper" #: src/clients/repositories.rb:72 -msgid "" -"Installation Repositories - This module does not support the command line " -"interface, use '%1' instead." +msgid "Installation Repositories - This module does not support the command line interface, use '%1' instead." msgstr "" #. pad to 3 characters @@ -678,21 +670,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/repositories.rb:880 -msgid "" -"<P>A <B>service</B> or <B>Repository Index Service (RIS) </B> is a protocol " -"for package repository management. A service can offer one or more software " -"repositories which can be dynamically changed by the service administrator." +msgid "<P>A <B>service</B> or <B>Repository Index Service (RIS) </B> is a protocol for package repository management. A service can offer one or more software repositories which can be dynamically changed by the service administrator.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/clients/repositories.rb:887 msgid "" "<p>\n" "<b>Adding a new Repository or a Service</b><br>\n" -"To add a new repository, use <b>Add</b> and specify the software repository " -"or service.\n" -"YaST will automatically detect whether a service or a repository is " -"available at the entered location.\n" +"To add a new repository, use <b>Add</b> and specify the software repository or service.\n" +"YaST will automatically detect whether a service or a repository is available at the entered location.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -723,11 +709,8 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "<b>Modifying Status of a Repository or a Service</b><br>\n" -"To change a repository location, use <b>Edit</b>. To remove a repository, " -"use\n" -"<b>Delete</b>. To enable or disable the repository or to change the refresh " -"status at initialization time, select the repository in the table and use " -"the check boxes below.\n" +"To change a repository location, use <b>Edit</b>. To remove a repository, use\n" +"<b>Delete</b>. To enable or disable the repository or to change the refresh status at initialization time, select the repository in the table and use the check boxes below.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -735,17 +718,12 @@ #: src/clients/repositories.rb:938 msgid "" "<P><B>Priority of a Repository</B><BR>\n" -"Priority of a repository is an integer value between 0 (the highest " -"priority) and 200 (the lowest priority). Default is 99. If a package is " -"available in more repositories, the repository with the highest priority is " -"used.</P>\n" +"Priority of a repository is an integer value between 0 (the highest priority) and 200 (the lowest priority). Default is 99. If a package is available in more repositories, the repository with the highest priority is used.</P>\n" msgstr "" #. help text, continued #: src/clients/repositories.rb:946 -msgid "" -"<P>Select the appropriate option on top of the window for navigation in " -"repositories and services.</P>" +msgid "<P>Select the appropriate option on top of the window for navigation in repositories and services.</P>" msgstr "" #. help text, continued @@ -753,14 +731,11 @@ msgid "" "<P><B>Keep Downloaded Packages</B><BR>Check this option to keep downloaded\n" "packages in a local cache so they can be reused later when the packages are\n" -"reinstalled. If not checked, the downloaded packages are deleted after " -"installation.</P>" +"reinstalled. If not checked, the downloaded packages are deleted after installation.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/clients/repositories.rb:960 -msgid "" -"<P>The default local cache is located in directory <B>/var/cache/zypp/" -"packages</B>. Change the location in <B>/etc/zypp/zypp.conf</B> file.</P>" +msgid "<P>The default local cache is located in directory <B>/var/cache/zypp/packages</B>. Change the location in <B>/etc/zypp/zypp.conf</B> file.</P>" msgstr "" #. popup message part 1 @@ -876,8 +851,7 @@ #. warning text #: src/clients/software_proposal.rb:103 #: src/clients/software_simple_proposal.rb:58 -msgid "" -"Cannot solve dependencies automatically. Manual intervention is required." +msgid "Cannot solve dependencies automatically. Manual intervention is required." msgstr "" #. this is a heading @@ -892,9 +866,7 @@ #. Command line help text for the software management module, %1 is "zypper" #: src/clients/sw_single.rb:64 -msgid "" -"Software Installation - This module does not support the command line " -"interface, use '%1' instead." +msgid "Software Installation - This module does not support the command line interface, use '%1' instead." msgstr "" #. error message (%1 is a package file name) @@ -1020,8 +992,7 @@ #. wrong MD5 #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:126 -msgid "" -"<B>Error</B> -- MD5 sum does not match<BR>This medium should not be used." +msgid "<B>Error</B> -- MD5 sum does not match<BR>This medium should not be used." msgstr "" #. the correct MD5 is unknown @@ -1048,16 +1019,14 @@ #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:304 msgid "" "<P>When you have a problem with\n" -"the installation and you are using a CD or DVD installation medium, you " -"should check\n" +"the installation and you are using a CD or DVD installation medium, you should check\n" "whether the medium is broken.</P>\n" msgstr "" #. help text - media check 3/8 #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:310 msgid "" -"<P>Select a drive, insert a medium into the drive and press <B>Start Check\n" +"<P>Select a drive, insert a medium into the drive and press <B>Start Check</B>\n" "or use <B>Check ISO File</B> and select an ISO file.\n" "The check can take several minutes depending on speed of the\n" "drive and size of the medium. The check verifies the MD5 checksum.</P> " @@ -1066,10 +1035,8 @@ #. help text - media check 4/8 #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:317 msgid "" -"<P>If the check of the medium fails, you should not continue the " -"installation.\n" -"It may fail or you may lose your data. Better replace the broken medium.\n" +"<P>If the check of the medium fails, you should not continue the installation.\n" +"It may fail or you may lose your data. Better replace the broken medium.</P>\n" msgstr "" #. help text - media check 5/8 @@ -1081,25 +1048,19 @@ #. help text - media check 6/8 #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:325 -msgid "" -"<P><B>Note:</B> You cannot change the medium while it is used by the system." -"</P>" +msgid "<P><B>Note:</B> You cannot change the medium while it is used by the system.</P>" msgstr "" #. help text - media check 7/8 #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:329 -msgid "" -"<P>To check media before the installation, use the media check item in the " -"boot menu.</P>" +msgid "<P>To check media before the installation, use the media check item in the boot menu.</P>" msgstr "" #. help text - media check 8/8 #: src/include/checkmedia/ui.rb:333 msgid "" -"<P>If you burn the media yourself, use the <B>pad</B> option in your " -"recording\n" -"software. It avoids read errors at the end of the media during the check.\n" +"<P>If you burn the media yourself, use the <B>pad</B> option in your recording\n" +"software. It avoids read errors at the end of the media during the check.</P>\n" msgstr "" #. advice check of the media @@ -1406,8 +1367,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: additional dialog information #: src/modules/AddOnProduct.rb:1356 msgid "" -"The installation repository also contains the listed additional " -"repositories.\n" +"The installation repository also contains the listed additional repositories.\n" "Select the ones you want to use.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1568,35 +1528,25 @@ #. warning text #: src/modules/Packages.rb:309 -msgid "" -"Your computer is a 64-bit x86-64 system, but you are trying to install a 32-" -"bit distribution." +msgid "Your computer is a 64-bit x86-64 system, but you are trying to install a 32-bit distribution." msgstr "" #. help text for software proposal #: src/modules/Packages.rb:325 -msgid "" -"<P>The pattern list states which functionality will be available after " -"installing the system.</P>" +msgid "<P>The pattern list states which functionality will be available after installing the system.</P>" msgstr "" #. (see bnc#178357 why these numbers) #. translators: help text for software proposal #: src/modules/Packages.rb:337 -msgid "" -"<P>The proposal reports the total size of files which will be installed to " -"the system. However, the system will contain some other files (temporary and " -"working files) so the used space will be slightly larger than the proposed " -"value. Therefore it is a good idea to have at least 25% (or about 300MB) " -"free space before starting the installation.</P>" +msgid "<P>The proposal reports the total size of files which will be installed to the system. However, the system will contain some other files (temporary and working files) so the used space will be slightly larger than the proposed value. Therefore it is a good idea to have at least 25% (or about 300MB) free space before starting the installation.</P>" msgstr "" #. help text for software proposal #: src/modules/Packages.rb:342 msgid "" "<P>The total 'size to download' is the size of the packages which will be\n" -"downloaded from remote (network) repositories. This value is important if " -"the connection is slow or if there is a data limit for downloading.</P>\n" +"downloaded from remote (network) repositories. This value is important if the connection is slow or if there is a data limit for downloading.</P>\n" msgstr "" #. help text for software proposal - header @@ -1636,23 +1586,17 @@ #. Warning message when some add-ons are marked to be removed automatically #: src/modules/Packages.rb:502 -msgid "" -"Contact the vendors of these add-ons to provide you with new installation " -"media." +msgid "Contact the vendors of these add-ons to provide you with new installation media." msgstr "" #. Warning message when some add-ons are marked to be removed automatically #: src/modules/Packages.rb:506 -msgid "" -"Contact the vendor of the add-on to provide you with a new installation " -"media." +msgid "Contact the vendor of the add-on to provide you with a new installation media." msgstr "" #. error message: %1: e.g. "/usr", %2: "/dev/sda2" #: src/modules/Packages.rb:547 -msgid "" -"Error: Cannot check free space in basic directory %1 (device %2), cannot " -"start installation." +msgid "Error: Cannot check free space in basic directory %1 (device %2), cannot start installation." msgstr "" #. error message: %1: e.g. "/local", %2: "/dev/sda2" @@ -1710,10 +1654,8 @@ msgid "" "<ul><li><b>Some products are marked for automatic removal.</b></li>\n" "<ul><li>Contact the vendor of the removed add-on to provide you with a new\n" -"installation media</li><li>Or select the appropriate online extension or " -"module\n" -"in the registration step</li><li>Or to continue with product upgrade go to " -"the\n" +"installation media</li><li>Or select the appropriate online extension or module\n" +"in the registration step</li><li>Or to continue with product upgrade go to the\n" "software selection and mark the product (the -release package) for removal.\n" "</li></ul></li></ul>" msgstr "" @@ -1726,8 +1668,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: beginning of the rich text with the release notes #: src/modules/Packages.rb:1612 msgid "" -"<p><b>The release notes for the initial release are part of the " -"installation\n" +"<p><b>The release notes for the initial release are part of the installation\n" "media. If an Internet connection is available during configuration, you can\n" "download updated release notes from the SUSE Linux Web server.</b></p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1790,9 +1731,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/ProductLicense.rb:151 -msgid "" -"To show the product license properly, put the license.tar.gz file to the " -"root of the live media when building the image." +msgid "To show the product license properly, put the license.tar.gz file to the root of the live media when building the image." msgstr "" #. combo box @@ -2125,9 +2064,7 @@ #: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:468 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Repository Name</b></big><br>\n" -"Use <b>Repository Name</b> to specify the name of the repository. If it is " -"empty, YaST will use the product name (if available) or the URL as the name." -"</p>\n" +"Use <b>Repository Name</b> to specify the name of the repository. If it is empty, YaST will use the product name (if available) or the URL as the name.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. text entry @@ -2139,8 +2076,7 @@ #: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:490 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Service Name</b></big><br>\n" -"Use <b>Service Name</b> to specify the name of the service. If it is empty, " -"YaST will use part of the service URL as the name.</p>\n" +"Use <b>Service Name</b> to specify the name of the service. If it is empty, YaST will use part of the service URL as the name.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. popup message @@ -2184,8 +2120,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><big><b>Mount Options</b></big><br>\n" "You can specify extra options used for mounting the NFS volume.\n" -"This is an expert option, keeping the default value is recommened. See " -"<b>man 5 nfs</b>\n" +"This is an expert option, keeping the default value is recommened. See <b>man 5 nfs</b>\n" "for details and the list of supported options." msgstr "" @@ -2388,8 +2323,7 @@ "To enable authentication, uncheck <b>Anonymous</b> and specify the\n" "<b>User Name</b> and the <b>Password</b>.</p>\n" "<p>\n" -"For the SMB/CIFS repository, specify <b>Share</b> name and <b>Path to " -"Directory\n" +"For the SMB/CIFS repository, specify <b>Share</b> name and <b>Path to Directory\n" "or ISO Image</b>. \n" "If the location is a file holding an ISO image\n" "of the media, set <b>ISO Image</b>.</p>\n" @@ -2398,8 +2332,7 @@ #. help text - server dialog, there is a "Port" widget #: src/modules/SourceDialogs.rb:1896 msgid "" -"<p>It is possible to set the <b>Port</b> number for a HTTP/HTTPS " -"repository.\n" +"<p>It is possible to set the <b>Port</b> number for a HTTP/HTTPS repository.\n" "Leave it empty to use the default port.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2468,8 +2401,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Download Files</b><br>\n" "Each repository has description files which describe the content of the\n" -"repository. Check <b>Download repository description files</b> to download " -"the\n" +"repository. Check <b>Download repository description files</b> to download the\n" "files when closing this YaST module. If the option is unchecked, YaST will\n" "automatically download the files when it needs them later. </p>\n" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/pkg-bindings.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/pkg-bindings.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/pkg-bindings.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -22,37 +22,25 @@ #. help text #: src/HelpTexts.h:36 -msgid "" -"<P><BIG><B>Loading Available Packages</B></BIG></P><P>Loading available " -"objects from the configured repositories is in progress. This may take a " -"while...</P>" +msgid "<P><BIG><B>Loading Available Packages</B></BIG></P><P>Loading available objects from the configured repositories is in progress. This may take a while...</P>" msgstr "" #. help text #: src/HelpTexts.h:42 -msgid "" -"<P><BIG><B>Loading Installed Packages</B></BIG></P><P>The package manager is " -"reading installed packages...</P>" +msgid "<P><BIG><B>Loading Installed Packages</B></BIG></P><P>The package manager is reading installed packages...</P>" msgstr "" #. help text #: src/HelpTexts.h:47 -msgid "" -"<P><BIG><B>Registering a New Repository</B></BIG></P><P>A new repository is " -"being registered. The package manager is reading the list of available " -"packages in the repository...</P>" +msgid "<P><BIG><B>Registering a New Repository</B></BIG></P><P>A new repository is being registered. The package manager is reading the list of available packages in the repository...</P>" msgstr "" #: src/HelpTexts.h:52 -msgid "" -"<P><BIG><B>Saving Repositories</B></BIG></P><P>The package manager is " -"updating configured repositories...</P>" +msgid "<P><BIG><B>Saving Repositories</B></BIG></P><P>The package manager is updating configured repositories...</P>" msgstr "" #: src/HelpTexts.h:55 -msgid "" -"<P><BIG><B>Refreshing the Repository</B></BIG></P><P>The package manager is " -"updating the repository content...</P>" +msgid "<P><BIG><B>Refreshing the Repository</B></BIG></P><P>The package manager is updating the repository content...</P>" msgstr "" #. error message Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/printer.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/printer.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/printer.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -65,19 +65,16 @@ #. If cups is missing, there can be no local running cupsd which is #. mandatory to set up local print queues. #: src/clients/printer_proposal.rb:92 -msgid "" -"Cannot configure printing (required package cups-client is not installed)." +msgid "Cannot configure printing (required package cups-client is not installed)." msgstr "" #: src/clients/printer_proposal.rb:102 -msgid "" -"Cannot configure local printers (required package cups is not installed)." +msgid "Cannot configure local printers (required package cups is not installed)." msgstr "" #. Skip automated queue setup when it is a client-only config: #: src/clients/printer_proposal.rb:117 -msgid "" -"No local printer accessible (using remote CUPS server '%1' for printing)." +msgid "No local printer accessible (using remote CUPS server '%1' for printing)." msgstr "" #. Wait half a minute for a new started cupsd: @@ -177,17 +174,14 @@ #. Header for a dialog section where the user can #. specify if USB printers are configured automatically: #: src/include/printer/autoconfig.rb:61 -msgid "" -"Specify if automatic USB printer configuration should happen when plug in" +msgid "Specify if automatic USB printer configuration should happen when plug in" msgstr "" #. CheckBox for automatic configuration of USB printers #. by installing or removing the RPM package udev-configure-printer. #. Do not change or translate "udev-configure-printer", it is a RPM package name. #: src/include/printer/autoconfig.rb:75 -msgid "" -"&Use the package udev-configure-printer for automatic USB printer " -"configuration" +msgid "&Use the package udev-configure-printer for automatic USB printer configuration" msgstr "" #. where %1 will be replaced by the server name: @@ -205,9 +199,7 @@ #. PopupYesNoHeadline headline #. PopupYesNoHeadline body: #: src/include/printer/autoconfig.rb:101 -msgid "" -"A remote CUPS server setting conflicts with automatic configuration of " -"printers for the local system." +msgid "A remote CUPS server setting conflicts with automatic configuration of printers for the local system." msgstr "" #. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system @@ -494,9 +486,7 @@ #. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when a wrong queue name was entered: #: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:379 -msgid "" -"Only letters (a-z and A-Z), numbers (0-9), and the underscore '_' are " -"allowed for the queue name." +msgid "Only letters (a-z and A-Z), numbers (0-9), and the underscore '_' are allowed for the queue name." msgstr "" #. when a queue name is changed to be valid: @@ -519,9 +509,7 @@ #. The 'next dialog' is the overview dialog where the printer configurations are shown #. which has a 'Refresh List' button to update the shown printer configurations: #: src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:430 src/include/printer/basicadd.rb:821 -msgid "" -"If the next dialog does not show the new printer configuration as expected, " -"wait some time and use the 'Refresh List' button." +msgid "If the next dialog does not show the new printer configuration as expected, wait some time and use the 'Refresh List' button." msgstr "" #. Only a simple message because before the RunHpsetup function was called @@ -568,9 +556,7 @@ #. Do not change or translate "raw", it is a technical term when no driver is used. #. Do not change or translate "System V style interface script", it is a technical term. #: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:315 -msgid "" -"No driver is used (it is a 'raw' queue or a 'System V style interface " -"script' is used)" +msgid "No driver is used (it is a 'raw' queue or a 'System V style interface script' is used)" msgstr "" #: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:323 @@ -622,9 +608,7 @@ #. The 'next dialog' is the overview dialog where the printer configurations are shown #. which has a 'Refresh List' button to update the shown printer configurations: #: src/include/printer/basicmodify.rb:823 -msgid "" -"If the next dialog does not show the expected modifications, wait some time " -"and use the 'Refresh List' button." +msgid "If the next dialog does not show the expected modifications, wait some time and use the 'Refresh List' button." msgstr "" #. Exit this dialog in any case: @@ -650,8 +634,7 @@ #. Do not change or translate "raw", it is a technical term #. when no driver is used for a print queue. #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:432 -msgid "" -"Keep the model or select a &manufacturer if no 'raw queue' should be set up" +msgid "Keep the model or select a &manufacturer if no 'raw queue' should be set up" msgstr "" #. Header for a ComboBox to select the printer manufacturer: @@ -768,8 +751,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1076 -msgid "" -"To access a bluetooth printer, the RPM package bluez-cups must be installed." +msgid "To access a bluetooth printer, the RPM package bluez-cups must be installed." msgstr "" #. The user can also decide during the actual installation not to install it @@ -847,9 +829,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:1402 -msgid "" -"To access a SMB printer share, the RPM package samba-client must be " -"installed." +msgid "To access a SMB printer share, the RPM package samba-client must be installed." msgstr "" #. The user can also decide during the actual installation not to install it @@ -1161,8 +1141,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2481 -msgid "" -"The 'mark' parity checking is only supported with 7 data bits and 1 stop bit." +msgid "The 'mark' parity checking is only supported with 7 data bits and 1 stop bit." msgstr "" #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:2523 @@ -1321,9 +1300,7 @@ #. Without a link name /usr/lib[64]/cups/backend/smb (which is provided by samba-client) #. the rest makes no sense (in particular the ln commands would create nonsense links in $PWD): #: src/include/printer/connectionwizard.rb:3245 -msgid "" -"To support Active Directory (R), the RPM package samba-krb-printing must be " -"installed." +msgid "To support Active Directory (R), the RPM package samba-krb-printing must be installed." msgstr "" #. Show a user notification before it gets disabled: @@ -1514,8 +1491,7 @@ #. Simply exit this dialog because it does not make sense to proceed here #. and there is nothing else to be done after this: #: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:679 -msgid "" -"The printer description file is not in compliance with the specification." +msgid "The printer description file is not in compliance with the specification." msgstr "" #. when a PPD file is not in compliance: @@ -1526,8 +1502,7 @@ #. Body of a Popup::ContinueCancelHeadline #. when PPD file is not in compliance: #: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:699 -msgid "" -"A non-compliant printer description file can lead to arbitrary failures." +msgid "A non-compliant printer description file can lead to arbitrary failures." msgstr "" #: src/include/printer/driveradd.rb:716 @@ -1570,14 +1545,12 @@ "<b><big>Print Queue Overview</big></b><br>\n" "A printer device is not used directly but via a print queue.<br>\n" "When various applications submit print jobs simultaneously,\n" -"these jobs are put in a queue and are sent one after the other to the " -"printer\n" +"these jobs are put in a queue and are sent one after the other to the printer\n" "device.<br>\n" "It is possible to have several different print queues for the same printer\n" "device.\n" "For example a second queue with a monochrome-only driver for a color device\n" -"or a PostScript queue and a queue with a PCL driver for a PostScript+PCL " -"printer.\n" +"or a PostScript queue and a queue with a PCL driver for a PostScript+PCL printer.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1662,19 +1635,14 @@ "<b><big>Set Up a New Queue for a Printer Device</big></b><br>\n" "A printer device is not used directly but via a print queue.<br>\n" "When various application programs submit print jobs simultaneously,\n" -"the jobs queue up and are sent one after the other to the printer device." -"<br>\n" -"It is possible to have several different print queues for the same printer " -"device.\n" -"Usually several print queues are needed when several different printer " -"drivers\n" +"the jobs queue up and are sent one after the other to the printer device.<br>\n" +"It is possible to have several different print queues for the same printer device.\n" +"Usually several print queues are needed when several different printer drivers\n" "should be used for the same printer device.\n" "For example a second queue with a monochrome-only driver\n" "to enforce black-only printout on a color device\n" -"or a PostScript queue and a queue with a PCL driver for a PostScript+PCL " -"printer\n" -"because printing via the PCL driver is usually faster (but with less " -"quality).\n" +"or a PostScript queue and a queue with a PCL driver for a PostScript+PCL printer\n" +"because printing via the PCL driver is usually faster (but with less quality).\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -1693,8 +1661,7 @@ #: src/include/printer/helps.rb:152 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"The <b>connection</b> determines which way data is sent to the printer " -"device.<br>\n" +"The <b>connection</b> determines which way data is sent to the printer device.<br>\n" "If a wrong connection is selected, no data can be sent to the device\n" "so that there cannot be any printout.<br>\n" "If a printer device is accessible via more than one connection type,\n" @@ -1702,10 +1669,8 @@ "In particular HP devices are often accessible both via the 'usb:/...'\n" "and the 'hp:/...' connection.\n" "The latter is provided by the HP driver package 'hplip'.\n" -"For plain printing, both kinds of connections should work, but for anything " -"else\n" -"(e.g. device status via 'hp-toolbox' or scanning with a HP all-in-one " -"device)\n" +"For plain printing, both kinds of connections should work, but for anything else\n" +"(e.g. device status via 'hp-toolbox' or scanning with a HP all-in-one device)\n" "the 'hp:/...' connection must be used.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1717,8 +1682,7 @@ "The <b>driver</b> determines that the right data is produced for the\n" "specific printer model.<br>\n" "If a wrong driver is assigned, wrong data is sent to the printer\n" -"which results bad looking printout, chaotic printout, or no printout at all." -"<br>\n" +"which results bad looking printout, chaotic printout, or no printout at all.<br>\n" "Initially the input field for the driver search string is preset\n" "with the autodetected model name of the currently selected connection\n" "and those drivers where the driver description matches to the model name\n" @@ -1743,8 +1707,7 @@ "and feel free to play around and modify the settings\n" "to what you know what works best for your printer.<br>\n" "If no driver description matches to the autodetected model name,\n" -"it does not necessarily mean that there is no driver available for the " -"model.\n" +"it does not necessarily mean that there is no driver available for the model.\n" "Often only the model name in the driver descriptions\n" "is different from the autodetected model name.\n" "Therefore you can enter whatever you like as driver search string\n" @@ -1825,8 +1788,7 @@ #: src/include/printer/helps.rb:268 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"The <b>connection</b> determines how data is sent to the printer device." -"<br>\n" +"The <b>connection</b> determines how data is sent to the printer device.<br>\n" "If a wrong connection is selected, no data can be sent to the device\n" "so that there cannot be any printout.<br>\n" "If a printer device is accessible via more than one connection type,\n" @@ -1834,10 +1796,8 @@ "In particular HP devices are often accessible both via the 'usb:/...'\n" "and the 'hp:/...' connection.\n" "The latter is provided by the HP driver package 'hplip'.\n" -"For plain printing, both kinds of connections should work, but for anything " -"else\n" -"(e.g. device status via 'hp-toolbox' or scanning with a HP all-in-one " -"device)\n" +"For plain printing, both kinds of connections should work, but for anything else\n" +"(e.g. device status via 'hp-toolbox' or scanning with a HP all-in-one device)\n" "the 'hp:/...' connection must be used.<br>\n" "When you exchange the currently used connection with another one,\n" "the input field for the driver search string is preset\n" @@ -1874,12 +1834,9 @@ "The <b>driver</b> determines that the right data is produced for the\n" "specific printer model.<br>\n" "If a wrong driver is assigned, wrong data is sent to the printer\n" -"which results bad looking printout, chaotic printout, or no printout at all." -"<br>\n" -"You can either select another driver and modify its driver option settings " -"later\n" -"or keep the currently used driver and modify its driver option settings now." -"<br>\n" +"which results bad looking printout, chaotic printout, or no printout at all.<br>\n" +"You can either select another driver and modify its driver option settings later\n" +"or keep the currently used driver and modify its driver option settings now.<br>\n" "Some driver option settings must match to your particular printer.\n" "For example the default paper size setting of the driver\n" "must match to the paper which is actually loaded in your printer.<br>\n" @@ -1888,8 +1845,7 @@ "should work for the particular driver.\n" "Nevertheless it may happen that your particular printer fails to print\n" "with high resolution. For example when you have a laser printer\n" -"which has insufficient built-in memory to process high resolution pages." -"<br>\n" +"which has insufficient built-in memory to process high resolution pages.<br>\n" "When you exchange the currently used driver by another one,\n" "you must first apply this change to the print queue\n" "so that the new driver is used for the queue\n" @@ -1897,8 +1853,7 @@ "and then in a second step you can adjust all driver options\n" "by using this dialog again.<br>\n" "Initially the input field for the driver search string is preset\n" -"with the description of the currently used driver when the connection was " -"not changed.\n" +"with the description of the currently used driver when the connection was not changed.\n" "This results usually only one single driver which matches\n" "so that you would have to enter a less specific driver search string\n" "to get also other drivers or you use the 'Find More' button.\n" @@ -1913,10 +1868,8 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "In contrast to connection and driver where you must select the right one,\n" -"you are free to enter arbitrary strings for <b>description</b> and " -"<b>location</b>.\n" -"Application programs often show description and location in the print " -"dialog.\n" +"you are free to enter arbitrary strings for <b>description</b> and <b>location</b>.\n" +"Application programs often show description and location in the print dialog.\n" "To make sure that those strings look correct in any language\n" "which a particular user of a particular application program may use,\n" "it is safe when you use only plain ASCII text without\n" @@ -2022,8 +1975,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "<b><big>Specify the Connection</big></b><br>\n" -"The <b>connection</b> determines how data is sent to the printer device." -"<br>\n" +"The <b>connection</b> determines how data is sent to the printer device.<br>\n" "If a wrong connection is used, no data can be sent to the device\n" "so that there cannot be any printout.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -2035,24 +1987,19 @@ "<p>\n" "<b><big>Printer Device URI</big></b><br>\n" "A connection is specified as so called <b>device URI</b>.<br>\n" -"Its first word (the so called URI scheme) specifies the kind of data-" -"transfer,\n" +"Its first word (the so called URI scheme) specifies the kind of data-transfer,\n" "for example 'parallel', 'usb', 'socket', 'lpd', or 'ipp'.<br>\n" "After the scheme there are more or less additional components\n" "which specify the details for this kind of data-transfer.<br>\n" "Space characters are not allowed in an URI.\n" "Therefore a space character in a value of an URI component\n" -"is encoded as '%20' (20 is the hexadecimal value of the space character)." -"<br>\n" +"is encoded as '%20' (20 is the hexadecimal value of the space character).<br>\n" "The components of an URI are separated by special reserved characters like\n" -"colon ':', slash '/', question mark '?', ampersand '&', or equals sign " -"'='.<br>\n" -"Finally there could be optional parameters (separated by a question mark " -"'?')\n" +"colon ':', slash '/', question mark '?', ampersand '&', or equals sign '='.<br>\n" +"Finally there could be optional parameters (separated by a question mark '?')\n" "of the form 'option1=value1&option2=value2&option3=value3' so that\n" "a full device URI could be for example:<br>\n" -"ipp://server.domain:631/printers/queuename?waitjob=false&" -"waitprinter=false<br>\n" +"ipp://server.domain:631/printers/queuename?waitjob=false&waitprinter=false<br>\n" "Some examples:<br>\n" "A USB printer model 'Fun Printer 1000+' made by 'ACME'\n" "with serial number 'A1B2C3' may have a device URI like:<br>\n" @@ -2170,10 +2117,8 @@ "Example device URIs:<br>\n" "serial:/dev/ttyS9?baud=9600+bits=8+parity=none+flow=soft+stop=1<br>\n" "bluetooth://1A2B3C4D5E6F<br>\n" -"To access a device via bluetooth, the RPM package bluez-cups must be " -"installed.\n" -"The package provides the CUPS backend 'bluetooth' which actually sends the " -"data\n" +"To access a device via bluetooth, the RPM package bluez-cups must be installed.\n" +"The package provides the CUPS backend 'bluetooth' which actually sends the data\n" "to a bluetooth printer.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -2182,8 +2127,7 @@ #: src/include/printer/helps.rb:586 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"<b><big>Device URIs to Access a Network Printer or a Printserver Box</big><br>\n" +"<b><big>Device URIs to Access a Network Printer or a Printserver Box</big></b><br>\n" "A printserver box is a small device with a network connection\n" "and a USB or parallel port connection to connect the actual printer.\n" "A network printer has such a device built-in.\n" @@ -2231,8 +2175,7 @@ "Ask your network administrator what which print server machine\n" "provides in your particular network:<br>\n" "<b>Windows (R) or Samba (SMB/CIFS)</b><br>\n" -"To access a SMB printer share, the RPM package samba-client must be " -"installed.\n" +"To access a SMB printer share, the RPM package samba-client must be installed.\n" "The package provides the CUPS backend 'smb' which is a link to\n" "the <tt>/usr/bin/smbspool</tt> program which actually sends the data\n" "to a SMB printer share.<br>\n" @@ -2275,8 +2218,7 @@ "the following device URI to access a 'Fun Printer 1000+' share:<br>\n" "smb://John%20Doe:%40home%21@MYGROUP/homeserver/Fun%20Printer%201000%2B<br>\n" "For <b>more information</b> have a look at <tt>man smbspool</tt> and<br>\n" -"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:" -"Printing_via_SMB_(Samba)_Share_or_Windows_Share<br>\n" +"http://en.opensuse.org/SDB:Printing_via_SMB_(Samba)_Share_or_Windows_Share<br>\n" "'Windows' and 'Active Directory' are registered trademarks\n" "of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.<br>\n" "<b>Traditional UNIX Server (LPR)</b><br>\n" @@ -2344,12 +2286,10 @@ "The last parameter is the original URI, which the queue had before.<br>\n" "Example:<br>\n" "beh:/1/3/5/socket://ip-address:port-number<br>\n" -"The beh backend tries to access a network printer 3 times with 5 second " -"delay\n" +"The beh backend tries to access a network printer 3 times with 5 second delay\n" "between the attempts. If access still fails, the queue is not disabled\n" "and the print job is lost.<br>\n" -"For <b>more information</b> have a look at <tt>/usr/lib[64]/cups/backend/" -"beh</tt> and<br>\n" +"For <b>more information</b> have a look at <tt>/usr/lib[64]/cups/backend/beh</tt> and<br>\n" "http://www.linuxfoundation.org/en/OpenPrinting/Database/BackendErrorHandler\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -2359,8 +2299,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "<b><big>Printing Via Network</big></b><br>\n" -"Usually CUPS (Common Unix Printing System) is used to print via network." -"<br>\n" +"Usually CUPS (Common Unix Printing System) is used to print via network.<br>\n" "By default CUPS uses its so called 'Browsing' mode\n" "to make printers available via network.<br>\n" "In this case remote CUPS servers must publish their printers via network\n" @@ -2416,10 +2355,8 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "If you print only via network and if you use only one single CUPS server,\n" -"there is no need to use CUPS Browsing and have a CUPS daemon running on your " -"host.\n" -"Instead it is simpler to specify the CUPS server and access it directly." -"<br>\n" +"there is no need to use CUPS Browsing and have a CUPS daemon running on your host.\n" +"Instead it is simpler to specify the CUPS server and access it directly.<br>\n" "A possible drawback is that application programs may be delayed\n" "for some time (until a timeout happens) when they try\n" "to access the CUPS server but it is actually not available\n" @@ -2452,8 +2389,7 @@ "Usually CUPS (Common Unix Printing System) should be set up to use\n" "its so called 'Browsing' mode to make printers available via network.<br>\n" "In this case CUPS servers publish their local print queues via network\n" -"and accordingly on CUPS client systems the CUPS daemon process (cupsd) must " -"run\n" +"and accordingly on CUPS client systems the CUPS daemon process (cupsd) must run\n" "which is listening for incoming information about published printers.<br>\n" "CUPS Browsing information is received via UDP port 631.\n" "</p>" @@ -2464,17 +2400,14 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "First of all CUPS client systems must be allowed to access the CUPS server.\n" -"Then specify whether or not printers should be published to the clients." -"<br>\n" +"Then specify whether or not printers should be published to the clients.<br>\n" "In a local network the usual way to set up CUPS Browsing is\n" "to allow remote access for all hosts in the local network\n" "and to publish printers to all those hosts.<br>\n" "It is not required to publish printers in any case.<br>\n" -"If you have only one single CUPS server, there is no need to use CUPS " -"Browsing.\n" +"If you have only one single CUPS server, there is no need to use CUPS Browsing.\n" "Instead it is simpler to specify the CUPS server on the client systems\n" -"(via 'Printing Via Network') so that the clients access the server " -"directly.\n" +"(via 'Printing Via Network') so that the clients access the server directly.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -2567,8 +2500,7 @@ "<br>\n" "The following error policies exist:<br>\n" "Stop the printer and keep the job for future printing.<br>\n" -"Re-send the job from the beginning after waiting some time (30 seconds by " -"default).<br>\n" +"Re-send the job from the beginning after waiting some time (30 seconds by default).<br>\n" "Abort and delete the job and proceed with the next job.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -2700,8 +2632,7 @@ #. to have him informed what goes on here and what he can do on his own. #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:128 msgid "" -"A locally running CUPS daemon is required, but it seems to be not " -"accessible.\n" +"A locally running CUPS daemon is required, but it seems to be not accessible.\n" "Check with 'lpstat -h localhost -r' whether a local cupsd is accessible.\n" "A non-accessible cupsd leads to an endless sequence of further failures.\n" msgstr "" @@ -2748,8 +2679,7 @@ #. so that it is now no longer a real client-only config and #. therefore the Printerlib::client_* values must be determined anew: #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:226 src/include/printer/overview.rb:237 -msgid "" -"A non-accessible server leads to an endless sequence of delays and failures." +msgid "A non-accessible server leads to an endless sequence of delays and failures." msgstr "" #. where %1 will be replaced by the CUPS server name. @@ -2777,8 +2707,7 @@ #. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when a remote queue was selected to be deleted: #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:610 -msgid "" -"This is a remote configuration. Only local configurations can be deleted." +msgid "This is a remote configuration. Only local configurations can be deleted." msgstr "" #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:617 @@ -2787,9 +2716,7 @@ #. Body of a confirmation popup before a queue will be deleted: #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:619 -msgid "" -"The selected configuration would be deleted immediately and cannot be " -"restored." +msgid "The selected configuration would be deleted immediately and cannot be restored." msgstr "" #. 'Yes' button label of a confirmation popup before a queue will be deleted: @@ -2845,9 +2772,7 @@ #. When this command fails for whatever reason, it is a safe fallback #. to assume that there are no pending jobs in the queue: #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:731 -msgid "" -"There are pending print jobs which might be deleted before the testpage is " -"printed." +msgid "There are pending print jobs which might be deleted before the testpage is printed." msgstr "" #. where %1 will be replaced by the queue name. @@ -2980,8 +2905,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:1051 -msgid "" -"CUPS log information while processing the testpage for %1 (English only)" +msgid "CUPS log information while processing the testpage for %1 (English only)" msgstr "" #. but the test_print_cups_error_log was effectively empty, @@ -2992,9 +2916,7 @@ #. show a very generic info to the user to show at least something: #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:1078 -msgid "" -"When printing via a remote system fails, you may ask an admin of the remote " -"system." +msgid "When printing via a remote system fails, you may ask an admin of the remote system." msgstr "" #. PopupYesNoHeadline body: @@ -3008,8 +2930,7 @@ #. Body of a Popup::AnyMessage when a remote queue was selected to be modified: #: src/include/printer/overview.rb:1164 -msgid "" -"This is a remote configuration. Only local configurations can be modified." +msgid "This is a remote configuration. Only local configurations can be modified." msgstr "" #. An entry for a ComboBox from which the user can select that the CUPS error policy @@ -3065,9 +2986,7 @@ #. PopupYesNoHeadline headline #. PopupYesNoHeadline body: #: src/include/printer/policies.rb:139 -msgid "" -"A remote CUPS server setting conflicts with setting policies for the local " -"system." +msgid "A remote CUPS server setting conflicts with setting policies for the local system." msgstr "" #. where %1 will be replaced by the print queue name. @@ -3305,8 +3224,7 @@ #. they are at least informend why there may be still remote queues: #: src/include/printer/printingvianetwork.rb:727 msgid "" -"When switching from 'accept printer announcements' to 'not accept " -"announcements'\n" +"When switching from 'accept printer announcements' to 'not accept announcements'\n" "or after 'request printer information from CUPS servers' was disabled\n" "it takes usually 5 minutes until already received information faded away..." msgstr "" @@ -3386,16 +3304,13 @@ #. TextEntry to allow remote access to local print queues #. for hosts and/or networks: #: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:180 -msgid "" -"Allow access from those IP addresses or &network/netmask (separated by space)" +msgid "Allow access from those IP addresses or &network/netmask (separated by space)" msgstr "" #. TextEntry to publish local print queues #. to IP addresses and/or network broadcast addresses: #: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:192 -msgid "" -"Publish to these IP addresses or network &broadcast addresses (separated by " -"space)" +msgid "Publish to these IP addresses or network &broadcast addresses (separated by space)" msgstr "" #. A CheckBox label to publish local print queues by default @@ -3451,9 +3366,7 @@ #. PopupYesNoHeadline headline #. PopupYesNoHeadline body: #: src/include/printer/sharing.rb:643 -msgid "" -"A remote CUPS server setting conflicts with sharing local printer " -"configurations." +msgid "A remote CUPS server setting conflicts with sharing local printer configurations." msgstr "" #. Only "Printing via Network" configuration of printer. @@ -3850,8 +3763,7 @@ #: src/modules/Printer.rb:2691 msgid "" "Launched hp-setup.\n" -"You must finish hp-setup before you can proceed with the printer " -"configuration.\n" +"You must finish hp-setup before you can proceed with the printer configuration.\n" msgstr "" #. from the BasicAdd dialog but the RPM package hplip is not installed: @@ -3867,15 +3779,12 @@ #. Is the package available to be installed? #. Package::Available returns nil if no package source is available. #: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:179 -msgid "" -"Required package %1 is not installed and there is no package repository " -"available." +msgid "Required package %1 is not installed and there is no package repository available." msgstr "" #. Message of a Popup::Error where %1 will be replaced by the package name: #: src/modules/Printerlib.rb:194 -msgid "" -"Required package %1 is not installed and not available in the repository." +msgid "Required package %1 is not installed and not available in the repository." msgstr "" #. Only a simple message because: Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/product-creator.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/product-creator.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/product-creator.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -510,16 +510,12 @@ #. help text #: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:787 -msgid "" -"<p>Use <b>Edit</b> to change selected image configuration or create the " -"image.</p>" +msgid "<p>Use <b>Edit</b> to change selected image configuration or create the image.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text #: src/include/product-creator/complex.rb:791 -msgid "" -"<p>Delete the directory with the selected configuration by selecting " -"<b>Delete</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Delete the directory with the selected configuration by selecting <b>Delete</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text, %1 is directory @@ -807,8 +803,7 @@ #: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1512 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Select one of the following <b>base</b> selections and click <i>Detailed<i> " -"to add\n" +"Select one of the following <b>base</b> selections and click <i>Detailed<i> to add\n" "more <b>add-on</b> selections and packages.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -838,8 +833,7 @@ #: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1830 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Sign</b></big><br>\n" -"To make it possible for users to verify your product, sign it with a GPG " -"key. \n" +"To make it possible for users to verify your product, sign it with a GPG key. \n" "This key is checked when the product is added as a repository.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -847,11 +841,8 @@ #. (if the page exists in that language, you have to check that!) #: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1837 msgid "" -"<P>If the product is not signed, Yast automatically adds the option " -"'Insecure:\n" -"1' to the linuxrc configuration file, otherwise linuxrc would deny loading " -"an unsigned installation system at boot. See http://en.opensuse.org/Linuxrc " -"for more information.</P>" +"<P>If the product is not signed, Yast automatically adds the option 'Insecure:\n" +"1' to the linuxrc configuration file, otherwise linuxrc would deny loading an unsigned installation system at boot. See http://en.opensuse.org/Linuxrc for more information.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/product-creator/dialogs.rb:1846 @@ -912,8 +903,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>For example, \n" "configure the CD for automatic installations and specify the installation\n" -"source location. If you are not sure, leave the file untouched and the " -"original is used.</p>\n" +"source location. If you are not sure, leave the file untouched and the original is used.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Read dialog help 1/2 @@ -975,10 +965,8 @@ #. overview dialog help part 5 #: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:85 msgid "" -"<p>Press <b>Create Image with KIWI</b> for additional configuration of " -"various\n" -"types of images, such as Live media or Xen images, with the KIWI image " -"system.</p>" +"<p>Press <b>Create Image with KIWI</b> for additional configuration of various\n" +"types of images, such as Live media or Xen images, with the KIWI image system.</p>" msgstr "" #. Configure1 dialog help 1/4 @@ -1019,14 +1007,11 @@ #: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:114 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Target Architecture</big></b><br>\n" -"It is possible to create a product for a different architecture than that " -"of\n" +"It is possible to create a product for a different architecture than that of\n" "the machine you are currently working on.\n" "All selected repositories must support the target architecture.<br>\n" -"<b>Note:</b> KIWI does not support different architectures yet, do not " -"change\n" -"the architecture if you intend to create a KIWI image from the current " -"configuration.</p>\n" +"<b>Note:</b> KIWI does not support different architectures yet, do not change\n" +"the architecture if you intend to create a KIWI image from the current configuration.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Configure2 dialog help 1/2 @@ -1063,25 +1048,20 @@ #. help text - the base selection dialog 2/4 #: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:147 msgid "" -"<p>One of the used repositories must be marked as the base product. The " -"base\n" -"product repository should be bootable to ensure the newly created product is " -"also\n" +"<p>One of the used repositories must be marked as the base product. The base\n" +"product repository should be bootable to ensure the newly created product is also\n" "bootable.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. help text - the base selection dialog 3/4 #: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:153 -msgid "" -"<p>The other repositories will be used as add-ons for the base repository." +msgid "<p>The other repositories will be used as add-ons for the base repository.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text - the base selection dialog 4/4 #: src/include/product-creator/helps.rb:157 msgid "" -"<p>The product creator solves dependencies of the selected products and " -"proposes\n" +"<p>The product creator solves dependencies of the selected products and proposes\n" "the base product. If the proposed value is wrong, select the right base\n" "repository from the list.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1254,16 +1234,12 @@ #. popup text #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:1513 msgid "" -"<p>Packages from section '%1' are not available with selected repositories:\n" +"<p>Packages from section '%1' are not available with selected repositories:</p>\n" "<p>%2.</p>\n" "<p>\n" -"Either remove the packages from the section, check the detailed package " -"selection or ignore the situation.</p>\n" +"Either remove the packages from the section, check the detailed package selection or ignore the situation.</p>\n" "<p>\n" -"Going to detailed package selection and accepting the view without any " -"further changes results in removal of problematic packages from the " -"section.\n" +"Going to detailed package selection and accepting the view without any further changes results in removal of problematic packages from the section.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1378,9 +1354,7 @@ #. informative label #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2277 -msgid "" -"Editing of following files is disabled for configurations imported from " -"Studio." +msgid "Editing of following files is disabled for configurations imported from Studio." msgstr "" #. tab header @@ -1397,8 +1371,7 @@ #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2367 msgid "" "<p>Select the value for image <b>Compression</b>. This will modify the\n" -"<i>flags</i> value of the image type. Check the kiwi manual for an " -"explanation of available values.</p>" +"<i>flags</i> value of the image type. Check the kiwi manual for an explanation of available values.</p>" msgstr "" #. combo box label @@ -1417,9 +1390,7 @@ #. help text for "&Ignored software" #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2424 -msgid "" -"<p>For <b>ignored software</b>, enter each entry (like 'smtp_daemon') on a " -"new line.</p>" +msgid "<p>For <b>ignored software</b>, enter each entry (like 'smtp_daemon') on a new line.</p>" msgstr "" #. label @@ -1429,9 +1400,7 @@ #. help text for "&Ignored software" #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2436 -msgid "" -"<p>Each entry of <b>Packages to Delete</b> is one package name to be " -"uninstalled from the target image.</p>" +msgid "<p>Each entry of <b>Packages to Delete</b> is one package name to be uninstalled from the target image.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -1452,8 +1421,7 @@ #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2461 msgid "" "<p>Set the image <b>Size</b> in the specified <b>Unit</b>.\n" -"If <b>Additive</b> is checked, the meaning of <b>Size</b> is different: it " -"is the minimal free space available on the image.</p>" +"If <b>Additive</b> is checked, the meaning of <b>Size</b> is different: it is the minimal free space available on the image.</p>" msgstr "" #. combo box label (MB/GB values) @@ -1473,9 +1441,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2489 -msgid "" -"<p>To create an encrypted file system, check <b>Encrypt Image with LUKS</b> " -"and enter the password.</p>" +msgid "<p>To create an encrypted file system, check <b>Encrypt Image with LUKS</b> and enter the password.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -1500,10 +1466,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2531 -msgid "" -"<p>Define the path to the <b>Directory with System Configuration</b> (the " -"<tt>root</tt> directory). The entire directory is copied into the root of " -"the image tree using <tt>cp -a</tt>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Define the path to the <b>Directory with System Configuration</b> (the <tt>root</tt> directory). The entire directory is copied into the root of the image tree using <tt>cp -a</tt>.</p>" msgstr "" #. label (above table) @@ -1518,10 +1481,7 @@ #. help for table with users #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2561 -msgid "" -"<p>Configure the <b>Directory with System Configuration</b> (the <tt>root directory). The entire directory is copied into the root of the image " -"tree using <tt>cp -a</tt>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Configure the <b>Directory with System Configuration</b> (the <tt>root</tt> directory). The entire directory is copied into the root of the image tree using <tt>cp -a</tt>.</p>" msgstr "" #. label (above table) @@ -1536,10 +1496,7 @@ #. help for table with users #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2598 -msgid "" -"<p>Configure the <b>Directory with Scripts</b> (the <tt>config</tt> " -"directory). It contains scripts that are run after the installation of all " -"the image packages.</p>" +msgid "<p>Configure the <b>Directory with Scripts</b> (the <tt>config</tt> directory). It contains scripts that are run after the installation of all the image packages.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -1560,10 +1517,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2646 -msgid "" -"<p>Edit your <b>Image Configuration Script</b>, called <tt>config.sh</tt>. " -"This script is run at the end of the installation but before the package " -"scripts have run.</p>" +msgid "<p>Edit your <b>Image Configuration Script</b>, called <tt>config.sh</tt>. This script is run at the end of the installation but before the package scripts have run.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -1572,10 +1526,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2667 -msgid "" -"<p>The optional <b>Directory with Scripts</b> (<tt>config</tt> directory) " -"contains scripts that are run after the installation of all the image " -"packages.</p>" +msgid "<p>The optional <b>Directory with Scripts</b> (<tt>config</tt> directory) contains scripts that are run after the installation of all the image packages.</p>" msgstr "" #. push button label @@ -1589,9 +1540,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2688 -msgid "" -"<p>Edit your <b>Cleanup Script</b> (<tt>images.sh</tt>). This script is run " -"at the beginning of the image creation process.</p>" +msgid "<p>Edit your <b>Cleanup Script</b> (<tt>images.sh</tt>). This script is run at the beginning of the image creation process.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -1606,9 +1555,7 @@ #. help text for Author, Contact and Specification widgets #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2711 -msgid "" -"<p>Set the values for <b>Author</b> of the image, <b>Contact Information, and the image <b>Specification</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Set the values for <b>Author</b> of the image, <b>Contact Information</b>, and the image <b>Specification</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -1633,9 +1580,7 @@ #. help text for locale #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2762 -msgid "" -"<p>The value of <b>Locale</b> (e.g. <tt>en_US</tt>) defines the contents of " -"the RC_LANG variable in <t>/etc/sysconfig/language</tt>.</p>" +msgid "<p>The value of <b>Locale</b> (e.g. <tt>en_US</tt>) defines the contents of the RC_LANG variable in <t>/etc/sysconfig/language</tt>.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -1645,9 +1590,7 @@ #. help text for keytable #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2778 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Keyboard Layout</b> specifies the name of the console keymap to use. " -"The value corresponds to a map file in <tt>/usr/share/kbd/keymaps</tt>.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Keyboard Layout</b> specifies the name of the console keymap to use. The value corresponds to a map file in <tt>/usr/share/kbd/keymaps</tt>.</p>" msgstr "" #. textentry label @@ -1657,9 +1600,7 @@ #. help text for timezone #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2795 -msgid "" -"<p>It is possible to set a specific <b>Time zone</b>. Available time zones " -"are located in the <tt>/usr/share/zoneinfo</tt> directory.</p>" +msgid "<p>It is possible to set a specific <b>Time zone</b>. Available time zones are located in the <tt>/usr/share/zoneinfo</tt> directory.</p>" msgstr "" #. general help for users tab @@ -1700,8 +1641,7 @@ #. help for table with users #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2828 msgid "" -"<p>For each user, specify the <b>Name</b>, <b>Password</b>, <b>Home " -"Directory</b> and group\n" +"<p>For each user, specify the <b>Name</b>, <b>Password</b>, <b>Home Directory</b> and group\n" "to which the users belongs.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1732,16 +1672,12 @@ #. help text for kiwi UI preparation #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2973 -msgid "" -"<p>Enter the name of your image configuration. Base new configuration on " -"template from the list or on the directory with the existing configuration." +msgid "<p>Enter the name of your image configuration. Base new configuration on template from the list or on the directory with the existing configuration.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for kiwi UI preparation #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2980 -msgid "" -"<p>Place custom configuration templates under <tt>%1</tt> directory.</p>" +msgid "<p>Place custom configuration templates under <tt>%1</tt> directory.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for kiwi UI preparation, cont. @@ -1756,10 +1692,7 @@ #. help text for kiwi UI preparation, cont. #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:2994 -msgid "" -"<p>Modify the list of <b>Package Repositories</b> that will be used for " -"creating the image. Use <b>Add From System</b> to add one of the current " -"system repositories.</p>" +msgid "<p>Modify the list of <b>Package Repositories</b> that will be used for creating the image. Use <b>Add From System</b> to add one of the current system repositories.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for kiwi UI preparation, cont. @@ -1779,9 +1712,7 @@ #. error popup #: src/include/product-creator/kiwi_dialogs.rb:3123 -msgid "" -"Selected directory does not contain valid description of system " -"configuration." +msgid "Selected directory does not contain valid description of system configuration." msgstr "" #. busy popup Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/proxy.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/proxy.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/proxy.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -178,10 +178,8 @@ #: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:405 msgid "" "<p>Configure your Internet proxy (caching) settings here.</p>\n" -"<p><b>Note:</b> It is generally recommended to relogin for the settings to " -"take effect, \n" -"however in some cases the application may pick up new settings immediately. " -"Please check \n" +"<p><b>Note:</b> It is generally recommended to relogin for the settings to take effect, \n" +"however in some cases the application may pick up new settings immediately. Please check \n" "what your application (web browser, ftp client,...) supports. </p>" msgstr "" @@ -195,8 +193,7 @@ #. Proxy dialog help 3/8 #: src/include/proxy/dialogs.rb:416 msgid "" -"<p><b>HTTPS Proxy URL</b> is the name of the proxy server for your secured " -"access\n" +"<p><b>HTTPS Proxy URL</b> is the name of the proxy server for your secured access\n" "to the World Wide Web (WWW).</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -233,8 +230,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>If you are using a proxy server with authorization, enter\n" "the <b>Proxy User Name</b> and <b>Proxy Password</b>. A valid username\n" -"consists of printable ASCII characters only (except for quotation marks).\n" +"consists of printable ASCII characters only (except for quotation marks).</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Proxy dialog help 8/8 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/qt-pkg.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/qt-pkg.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/qt-pkg.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -301,15 +301,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1455 -msgid "" -"<p><small>Cancel switching</a> system " -"packages to versions in repository %2</small></p>" +msgid "<p><small>Cancel switching</a> system packages to versions in repository %2</small></p>" msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1474 -msgid "" -"<p>Switch system packages</a> to the " -"versions in this repository (%2)</p>" +msgid "<p>Switch system packages</a> to the versions in this repository (%2)</p>" msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelector.cc:1697 @@ -340,11 +336,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:186 -msgid "" -"<p>You can choose to install anyway if you know what you are doing, but you " -"risk getting a corrupted system that requires manual repairs. If you are not " -"absolutely sure how to handle such a case, press <b>Cancel</b> now and " -"deselect some packages.</p>" +msgid "<p>You can choose to install anyway if you know what you are doing, but you risk getting a corrupted system that requires manual repairs. If you are not absolutely sure how to handle such a case, press <b>Cancel</b> now and deselect some packages.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:194 @@ -369,9 +361,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:301 -msgid "" -"In addition to your manual selections, the following packages have been " -"changed to resolve dependencies:" +msgid "In addition to your manual selections, the following packages have been changed to resolve dependencies:" msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:305 src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:326 @@ -385,9 +375,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:322 -msgid "" -"Please realize that the following selected software is either unsupported or " -"requires an additional customer contract for support." +msgid "Please realize that the following selected software is either unsupported or requires an additional customer contract for support." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorBase.cc:421 @@ -401,9 +389,7 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:65 -msgid "" -"<b>Note:</b> This is a just a short overview. Refer to the manual for " -"details." +msgid "<b>Note:</b> This is a just a short overview. Refer to the manual for details." msgstr "" #. Help specific to online update mode @@ -412,143 +398,91 @@ msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:73 -msgid "" -"The list on the left side contains available patches along with the " -"respective patch kind (security, recommended, or optional) and the " -"(estimated) download size." +msgid "The list on the left side contains available patches along with the respective patch kind (security, recommended, or optional) and the (estimated) download size." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:76 -msgid "" -"This list normally contains only those patches that are not installed on " -"your system yet. You can change that with the <b>Include Installed Patches check box below the list." +msgid "This list normally contains only those patches that are not installed on your system yet. You can change that with the <b>Include Installed Patches</b> check box below the list." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:78 -msgid "" -"The <b>Patch Description</b> field contains a longer explanation of the " -"currently selected patch. Click a patch in the list to view its description " -"here." +msgid "The <b>Patch Description</b> field contains a longer explanation of the currently selected patch. Click a patch in the list to view its description here." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:80 -msgid "" -"The package list on the right side shows the contents of the currently " -"selected patch, i.e., the packages it contains. You cannot install or delete " -"individual packages from a patch, only the patch as a whole. This is " -"intentional to avoid system inconsistencies." +msgid "The package list on the right side shows the contents of the currently selected patch, i.e., the packages it contains. You cannot install or delete individual packages from a patch, only the patch as a whole. This is intentional to avoid system inconsistencies." msgstr "" #. Translators: Please keep the reference to "filter views" to distinguish between "filter views" that #. affect the amount of visible packages in the package list and "details views" ( below the package list ) #. that show details about the ( one ) currently selected package in the package list. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:88 -msgid "" -"In addition to <b>Patches</b>, you can also select one of the other filter " -"views from <b>Filter</b> at the upper left:" +msgid "In addition to <b>Patches</b>, you can also select one of the other filter views from <b>Filter</b> at the upper left:" msgstr "" #. Help specific to normal (non-online-update) mode #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:96 -msgid "" -"In this dialog, select which packages to install, update, or delete. You can " -"select individual packages or entire package \"selections\"." +msgid "In this dialog, select which packages to install, update, or delete. You can select individual packages or entire package \"selections\"." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:98 -msgid "" -"Click the status icon for a package or selection to change the status or " -"right-click it to open a context menu." +msgid "Click the status icon for a package or selection to change the status or right-click it to open a context menu." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:100 -msgid "" -"Use the <b>Check Dependencies</b> button to resolve package dependencies. " -"Some packages require other packages to be installed. Some packages can only " -"be installed if certain other packages are not installed, too. This check " -"will automatically mark required packages for installation and it will warn " -"you if there are dependency conflicts." +msgid "Use the <b>Check Dependencies</b> button to resolve package dependencies. Some packages require other packages to be installed. Some packages can only be installed if certain other packages are not installed, too. This check will automatically mark required packages for installation and it will warn you if there are dependency conflicts." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:105 -msgid "" -"When you leave this dialog with <b>Accept</b>, this check will automatically " -"be performed." +msgid "When you leave this dialog with <b>Accept</b>, this check will automatically be performed." msgstr "" #. Translators: Please keep the reference to "filter views" to distinguish between "filter views" that #. affect the amount of visible packages in the package list and "details views" (below the package list) #. that show details about the (one) currently selected package in the package list. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:111 -msgid "" -"Select one of the available filter views with the <b>Filter</b> combo-box at " -"the upper left:" +msgid "Select one of the available filter views with the <b>Filter</b> combo-box at the upper left:" msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:115 -msgid "" -"<b>Selections</b> shows some predefined sets of packages that logically " -"belong together." +msgid "<b>Selections</b> shows some predefined sets of packages that logically belong together." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:116 -msgid "" -"Use the check box next to the selection to select it as a whole. You can " -"also select or deselect individual packages in the package list at the right." +msgid "Use the check box next to the selection to select it as a whole. You can also select or deselect individual packages in the package list at the right." msgstr "" #. Help common to all modes: Description of the various filter views #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:124 -msgid "" -"<b>Package Groups</b> shows packages by category. You can expand and " -"collapse tree items to refine or generalize categories. Click any category " -"to display the packages in that category in the package list on the right " -"side." +msgid "<b>Package Groups</b> shows packages by category. You can expand and collapse tree items to refine or generalize categories. Click any category to display the packages in that category in the package list on the right side." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:127 -msgid "" -" <b>Hint:</b> There is a \"zzz All\" entry at the very end of the list that " -"will show all packages. This may take a few seconds on slow machines." +msgid " <b>Hint:</b> There is a \"zzz All\" entry at the very end of the list that will show all packages. This may take a few seconds on slow machines." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:130 -msgid "" -"<b>Search</b> allows you to search for packages that meet various criteria. " -"This is usually the easiest way to find a package if you know its name." +msgid "<b>Search</b> allows you to search for packages that meet various criteria. This is usually the easiest way to find a package if you know its name." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:132 -msgid "" -"<b>Hint:</b> You can also use this to find out what package contains a " -"certain library. Search in the <b>Provides</b> RPM field." +msgid "<b>Hint:</b> You can also use this to find out what package contains a certain library. Search in the <b>Provides</b> RPM field." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:135 -msgid "" -"<b>Installation Summary</b> by default shows the changes to your system -- " -"what packages will be installed, deleted, or updated." +msgid "<b>Installation Summary</b> by default shows the changes to your system -- what packages will be installed, deleted, or updated." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:137 -msgid "" -"It is generally a good idea to use <b>Check Dependencies</b> then switch to " -"<b>Installation Summary</b> before clicking <b>Accept</b>. This way you can " -"see all changes that will be made to your system." +msgid "It is generally a good idea to use <b>Check Dependencies</b> then switch to <b>Installation Summary</b> before clicking <b>Accept</b>. This way you can see all changes that will be made to your system." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:140 -msgid "" -"You can also explicitly select what packages with what status to see here; " -"use the check boxes at the left side." +msgid "You can also explicitly select what packages with what status to see here; use the check boxes at the left side." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:142 -msgid "" -"<b>Hint:</b> You can also reverse the effect of this filter. You can see " -"what packages remain the same on your system. Simply check <b>Keep</b> and " -"uncheck everything else." +msgid "<b>Hint:</b> You can also reverse the effect of this filter. You can see what packages remain the same on your system. Simply check <b>Keep</b> and uncheck everything else." msgstr "" #. Make sure all images used here are specified in @@ -599,9 +533,7 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:186 -msgid "" -"This package is already installed. Update it or reinstall it (if the " -"versions are the same)." +msgid "This package is already installed. Update it or reinstall it (if the versions are the same)." msgstr "" #. Translators: Package status short (!) description @@ -624,16 +556,11 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:199 -msgid "" -"This package is not installed and should not be installed under any " -"circumstances, especially not because of unresolved dependencies that other " -"packages might have or get." +msgid "This package is not installed and should not be installed under any circumstances, especially not because of unresolved dependencies that other packages might have or get." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:203 src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:316 -msgid "" -"Packages set to \"taboo\" are treated as if they did not exist on any " -"installation media." +msgid "Packages set to \"taboo\" are treated as if they did not exist on any installation media." msgstr "" #. Translators: Package status short (!) description @@ -643,15 +570,11 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:209 -msgid "" -"This package is installed and should not be modified, especially not " -"because of unresolved dependencies that other packages might have or get." +msgid "This package is installed and should not be modified, especially not because of unresolved dependencies that other packages might have or get." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:213 -msgid "" -"Use this status for third-party packages that should not be overwritten by " -"newer versions that may come with the distribution." +msgid "Use this status for third-party packages that should not be overwritten by newer versions that may come with the distribution." msgstr "" #. Translators: Package status short (!) description @@ -662,14 +585,11 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:220 -msgid "" -"This package will be installed automatically because some other package " -"needs it." +msgid "This package will be installed automatically because some other package needs it." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:222 -msgid "" -"<b>Hint:</b> You may have to use \"taboo\" to get rid of such a package." +msgid "<b>Hint:</b> You may have to use \"taboo\" to get rid of such a package." msgstr "" #. Translators: Package status short (!) description @@ -680,9 +600,7 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:228 -msgid "" -"This package is already installed, but some other package needs a newer " -"version, so it will automatically be updated." +msgid "This package is already installed, but some other package needs a newer version, so it will automatically be updated." msgstr "" #. Translators: Package status short (!) description @@ -693,9 +611,7 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:235 -msgid "" -"This package is already installed, but package dependencies require that it " -"is deleted." +msgid "This package is already installed, but package dependencies require that it is deleted." msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:236 @@ -720,9 +636,7 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:278 -msgid "" -"Get this package. Install it if it is not installed yet. Update it to the " -"latest version if it is installed and there is a newer version." +msgid "Get this package. Install it if it is not installed yet. Update it to the latest version if it is installed and there is a newer version." msgstr "" #. Translators: Keyboard action short (!) description @@ -732,16 +646,12 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:287 -msgid "" -"Get rid of this package. Mark it as \"do not install\" if it is not " -"installed yet. Delete it if it is installed." +msgid "Get rid of this package. Mark it as \"do not install\" if it is not installed yet. Delete it if it is installed." msgstr "" #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:295 -msgid "" -"Update this package if it is installed and there is a newer version. Ignore " -"packages that are not installed." +msgid "Update this package if it is installed and there is a newer version. Ignore packages that are not installed." msgstr "" #. Translators: Keyboard action short (!) description @@ -751,17 +661,12 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:304 -msgid "" -"Undo the effect of \">\" above: Set package to \"keep\" if it is currently " -"set to \"update\". Ignore all other packages." +msgid "Undo the effect of \">\" above: Set package to \"keep\" if it is currently set to \"update\". Ignore all other packages." msgstr "" #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:312 -msgid "" -"Set this package to \"taboo\" if it is not installed: make sure this package " -"does not get installed, especially not because of unresolved dependencies " -"that other packages might have or get. " +msgid "Set this package to \"taboo\" if it is not installed: make sure this package does not get installed, especially not because of unresolved dependencies that other packages might have or get. " msgstr "" #. Translators: Keyboard action short (!) description @@ -771,16 +676,11 @@ #. Translators: Automatic word-wrapping. #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:324 -msgid "" -"Set this package to \"protected\" if it is installed: make sure this package " -"will not be modified, especially not because of unresolved dependencies that " -"other packages might have or get. " +msgid "Set this package to \"protected\" if it is installed: make sure this package will not be modified, especially not because of unresolved dependencies that other packages might have or get. " msgstr "" #: src/YQPackageSelectorHelp.cc:328 -msgid "" -"Use this for third-party packages that should not be overwritten by newer " -"versions that may come with the distribution." +msgid "Use this for third-party packages that should not be overwritten by newer versions that may come with the distribution." msgstr "" #: src/YQPatternSelector.cc:180 src/YQPatternSelector.cc:248 @@ -841,9 +741,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:391 -msgid "" -"<p>Use this to generate extensive logs to help tracking down bugs in the " -"dependency resolver. The logs will be stored in directory <br><tt>%1</tt></p>" +msgid "<p>Use this to generate extensive logs to help tracking down bugs in the dependency resolver. The logs will be stored in directory <br><tt>%1</tt></p>" msgstr "" #. parent @@ -852,9 +750,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:410 -msgid "" -"<p>Dependency resolver test case written to <br><tt>%1</tt></p><p>Prepare " -"<tt>y2logs.tgz tar</tt> archive to attach to Bugzilla?</p>" +msgid "<p>Dependency resolver test case written to <br><tt>%1</tt></p><p>Prepare <tt>y2logs.tgz tar</tt> archive to attach to Bugzilla?</p>" msgstr "" #. parent @@ -864,9 +760,7 @@ #. caption #: src/YQPkgConflictDialog.cc:426 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Error</b> creating dependency resolver test case</p><p>Please check " -"disk space and permissions for <tt>%1</tt></p>" +msgid "<p><b>Error</b> creating dependency resolver test case</p><p>Please check disk space and permissions for <tt>%1</tt></p>" msgstr "" #. startsWith Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/rear.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/rear.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/rear.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -40,9 +40,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:90 -msgid "" -"Do NOT expect the created backup to be useful for system recovery if you " -"ignore this warning." +msgid "Do NOT expect the created backup to be useful for system recovery if you ignore this warning." msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:104 @@ -117,56 +115,35 @@ #. help text for Rear #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:419 -msgid "" -"<p>Configure Rear Relax and Recover (<b>ReaR</b>) backup for your computer." +msgid "<p>Configure Rear Relax and Recover (<b>ReaR</b>) backup for your computer.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:422 -msgid "" -"<p>Decide how to start your <b>Recovery System</b>. Choose USB if you want " -"to boot from an USB stick, or ISO for CD-ROM respectively.</p>" +msgid "<p>Decide how to start your <b>Recovery System</b>. Choose USB if you want to boot from an USB stick, or ISO for CD-ROM respectively.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:425 -msgid "" -"<p>Choose where the <b>Backup</b> should be stored. Select NFS if you have " -"to use a server that offers Network File System. Please specify the location " -"as follows: <tt>nfs://hostname/directory</tt>. You can also choose USB to " -"store your backup on an USB stick or USB disk.</p>" +msgid "<p>Choose where the <b>Backup</b> should be stored. Select NFS if you have to use a server that offers Network File System. Please specify the location as follows: <tt>nfs://hostname/directory</tt>. You can also choose USB to store your backup on an USB stick or USB disk.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:428 -msgid "" -"<p>If no USB devices are shown, attach an USB stick or an USB disk and click " -"<b>Rescan USB Devices</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>If no USB devices are shown, attach an USB stick or an USB disk and click <b>Rescan USB Devices</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:431 -msgid "" -"<p>Select <b>Keep old backup</b> if you don't want the previous backup copy " -"to be overwritten.</p>" +msgid "<p>Select <b>Keep old backup</b> if you don't want the previous backup copy to be overwritten.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:434 -msgid "" -"<p>The <b>Advanced</b> menu offers to add <b>additional directories to the " -"backup</b> and <b>additional kernel modules to the rescue system</b>. That's " -"only useful if your backup doesn't contain all the needed directories or the " -"rescue system doesn't boot due to missing kernel modules.</p>" +msgid "<p>The <b>Advanced</b> menu offers to add <b>additional directories to the backup</b> and <b>additional kernel modules to the rescue system</b>. That's only useful if your backup doesn't contain all the needed directories or the rescue system doesn't boot due to missing kernel modules.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:437 -msgid "" -"<p>The <b>Save and run rear now</b> button runs rear and shows rear's " -"output. <strong>Make sure to test if the created backup works as expected on " -"your system!</strong></p>" +msgid "<p>The <b>Save and run rear now</b> button runs rear and shows rear's output. <strong>Make sure to test if the created backup works as expected on your system!</strong></p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:440 -msgid "" -"<p><b>OK</b> saves the configuration and quits while <b>Cancel</b> closes " -"the configuration dialog without saving.<p>" +msgid "<p><b>OK</b> saves the configuration and quits while <b>Cancel</b> closes the configuration dialog without saving.<p>" msgstr "" #. prepare advanced menu @@ -233,9 +210,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:590 -msgid "" -"Your rear configuration file contains options this YaST2 module cannot " -"configure.\n" +msgid "Your rear configuration file contains options this YaST2 module cannot configure.\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/rear/ui.rb:595 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/registration.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/registration.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/registration.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -121,9 +121,7 @@ #. help text #: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:301 -msgid "" -"Enter SUSE Customer Center credentials here to register the system to get " -"updates and extensions." +msgid "Enter SUSE Customer Center credentials here to register the system to get updates and extensions." msgstr "" #. not set yet? @@ -181,15 +179,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:471 -msgid "" -"<p>You can re-register it again or you can register additional extension or " -"modules to enhance the functionality of the system.</p>" +msgid "<p>You can re-register it again or you can register additional extension or modules to enhance the functionality of the system.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/clients/inst_scc.rb:473 -msgid "" -"<p>If you want to deregister your system you need to log into the SUSE " -"Customer Center and remove the system manually there.</p>" +msgid "<p>If you want to deregister your system you need to log into the SUSE Customer Center and remove the system manually there.</p>" msgstr "" #. error message @@ -572,9 +566,7 @@ #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_reg_codes_dialog.rb:41 msgid "" "<p>Enter registration codes for the requested extensions or modules.</p>\n" -"<p>Registration codes are required for successfull registration.If you " -"cannot provide a registration code then go back and deselect the respective " -"extension or module.</p>" +"<p>Registration codes are required for successfull registration.If you cannot provide a registration code then go back and deselect the respective extension or module.</p>" msgstr "" #. round the half up (more items in the first column for odd number of items) @@ -597,22 +589,17 @@ #. help text (1/3) #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:47 -msgid "" -"<p>Here you can select available extensions and modules for yoursystem.</p>" +msgid "<p>Here you can select available extensions and modules for yoursystem.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text (2/3) #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:50 -msgid "" -"<p>Please note, that some extensions or modules might need specific " -"registration code.</p>" +msgid "<p>Please note, that some extensions or modules might need specific registration code.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text (3/3) #: src/lib/registration/ui/addon_selection_dialog.rb:53 -msgid "" -"<p>If you want to remove any extension or module you need to loginto the " -"SUSE Customer Center and remove them manually there.</p>" +msgid "<p>If you want to remove any extension or module you need to loginto the SUSE Customer Center and remove them manually there.</p>" msgstr "" #. always enable Back/Next, the dialog cannot be the first in workflow @@ -641,9 +628,7 @@ #. help text #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:33 -msgid "" -"<p>Here you can select which extensions or moduleswill be registered " -"together with the base product.</p>" +msgid "<p>Here you can select which extensions or moduleswill be registered together with the base product.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_addon_dialog.rb:36 @@ -699,19 +684,15 @@ #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:51 msgid "" -"<p>Product registration includes your product in SUSE Customer Center " -"database,\n" +"<p>Product registration includes your product in SUSE Customer Center database,\n" "enabling you to get online updates and technical support.\n" -"To register while installing automatically, select <b>Run Product " -"Registration</b>.</p>" +"To register while installing automatically, select <b>Run Product Registration</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/lib/registration/ui/autoyast_config_dialog.rb:56 msgid "" -"<p>If your network deploys a custom registration server, set the correct URL " -"of the server\n" -"and the location of the SMT certificate in <b>SMT Server Settings</b>. " -"Refer\n" +"<p>If your network deploys a custom registration server, set the correct URL of the server\n" +"and the location of the SMT certificate in <b>SMT Server Settings</b>. Refer\n" "to your SMT manual for further assistance.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -783,38 +764,27 @@ #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (1/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:119 -msgid "" -"<p>Secure connection (HTTPS) uses SSL certificates for verifying the " -"authenticity of the server and for encrypting the transferred data.</p>" +msgid "<p>Secure connection (HTTPS) uses SSL certificates for verifying the authenticity of the server and for encrypting the transferred data.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (2/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:123 -msgid "" -"<p>You can choose to import the certificate it into the list of known " -"certificate autohorities (CA), meaning that you trust the subject and the " -"issuer of the unknown certificate.</p>" +msgid "<p>You can choose to import the certificate it into the list of known certificate autohorities (CA), meaning that you trust the subject and the issuer of the unknown certificate.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (3/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:128 -msgid "" -"<p>Importing a certificate will allow to use for example a self-signed " -"certificate.</p>" +msgid "<p>Importing a certificate will allow to use for example a self-signed certificate.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (4/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:132 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Important:</b> You should verify the fingerprint of the certificate to " -"be sure you import the genuine certificate from the requested server.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Important:</b> You should verify the fingerprint of the certificate to be sure you import the genuine certificate from the requested server.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text (RichText) for importing a SSL certificate (5/5) #: src/lib/registration/ui/import_certificate_dialog.rb:137 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Importing an unknown certificate without verification is a big " -"security risk.</b></p>" +msgid "<p><b>Importing an unknown certificate without verification is a big security risk.</b></p>" msgstr "" #. error message, the entered URL is not valid Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/reipl.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/reipl.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/reipl.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -172,10 +172,8 @@ #. Configure dialog help 2 #: src/include/reipl/helps.rb:59 msgid "" -"<p>Choose one of the methods for rebooting your machine with the radio " -"buttons\n" -"listed inside <b>reipl methods</b>. Depending on what your machine " -"supports,\n" +"<p>Choose one of the methods for rebooting your machine with the radio buttons\n" +"listed inside <b>reipl methods</b>. Depending on what your machine supports,\n" "choose between CCW (channel command word) devices and SCSI devices,\n" "which are attached through zFCP (fibre channel protocol). Then fill out the\n" "necessary parameter entry fields for the respective method.</p>\n" @@ -185,10 +183,8 @@ #: src/include/reipl/helps.rb:67 msgid "" "<p>The <b>device</b> must be a valid device bus ID with lower case letters\n" -"in a sysfs compatible format 0.<i><subchannel set ID></i>.<i><" -"device ID></i>,\n" -"such as 0.0.5c51. Depending on the chosen method, this can either refer to a " -"DASD or to\n" +"in a sysfs compatible format 0.<i><subchannel set ID></i>.<i><device ID></i>,\n" +"such as 0.0.5c51. Depending on the chosen method, this can either refer to a DASD or to\n" "an FCP adapter.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -210,10 +206,8 @@ #. Configure dialog help 6 #: src/include/reipl/helps.rb:84 msgid "" -"<p>The <b>logical unit number</b> (LUN) must be entered with lowercase " -"letters\n" -"as a 16-digit hex value with all trailing zeros, such as 0x52ca000000000000." -"</p>" +"<p>The <b>logical unit number</b> (LUN) must be entered with lowercase letters\n" +"as a 16-digit hex value with all trailing zeros, such as 0x52ca000000000000.</p>" msgstr "" #. Configure dialog help 7 @@ -234,8 +228,7 @@ #. Configure dialog help 9 #: src/include/reipl/helps.rb:98 msgid "" -"<p>After confirmation of this dialog, you may trigger a reboot, e.g. by " -"shutdown,\n" +"<p>After confirmation of this dialog, you may trigger a reboot, e.g. by shutdown,\n" "and the system will automatically restart from your specified device.</p>" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/relocation-server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/relocation-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/relocation-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -215,11 +215,7 @@ "<p><b>Relocation Address</b><br>\n" "Address xend should listen on for relocation-socket connections</p>\n" "<p><b>Allowed Hosts</b><br>\n" -"The hosts allowed to talk to the relocation port. If this is empty, then all " -"connections are allowed. Otherwise, this should be a space-separated " -"sequence of regular expressions. Any host with a fully-qualified domain name " -"or an IP address that matches one of these regular expressions will be " -"accepted.</p>\n" +"The hosts allowed to talk to the relocation port. If this is empty, then all connections are allowed. Otherwise, this should be a space-separated sequence of regular expressions. Any host with a fully-qualified domain name or an IP address that matches one of these regular expressions will be accepted.</p>\n" "<p><b>SSL Key File/SSL Cert File</b><br>\n" "SSL key and certificate to use for the ssl relocation interface</p>" msgstr "" @@ -227,13 +223,9 @@ #: src/include/relocation-server/helps.rb:62 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Tunneled migration</big></b><br>\n" -"The source host libvirtd opens a direct connection to the destination host " -"libvirtd for sending migration data. This allows the option of encrypting " -"the data stream.</p>\n" +"The source host libvirtd opens a direct connection to the destination host libvirtd for sending migration data. This allows the option of encrypting the data stream.</p>\n" "<p><b><big>Plain migration</big></b><br>\n" -"The source host VM opens a direct unencrypted TCP connection to the " -"destination host for sending the migration data. Unless a port is manually " -"specified, libvirt will choose a migration port in the default range.</p>" +"The source host VM opens a direct unencrypted TCP connection to the destination host for sending the migration data. Unless a port is manually specified, libvirt will choose a migration port in the default range.</p>" msgstr "" #. Main workflow of the relocation-server configuration Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/s390.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/s390.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/s390.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -382,8 +382,7 @@ #. Disk selection dialog help 3/4 #: src/include/s390/dasd/helps.rb:76 msgid "" -"<p>To perform actions on multiple disks at once, mark these disks. To select " -"all displayed disk (possibly after applying a filter), click\n" +"<p>To perform actions on multiple disks at once, mark these disks. To select all displayed disk (possibly after applying a filter), click\n" "<b>Select All</b> or <b>Deselect All</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -434,30 +433,24 @@ #. Dump dialog help 2/8 #: src/include/s390/dump/ui.rb:54 -msgid "" -"<p>Supported devices are ECKD DASD and ZFCP disks, while multi-volumes are " -"limited to DASD.<br>" +msgid "<p>Supported devices are ECKD DASD and ZFCP disks, while multi-volumes are limited to DASD.<br>" msgstr "" #. Dump dialog help 3/8 #: src/include/s390/dump/ui.rb:58 msgid "" "Only whole disks can be used, no partitions. If the device is incompatibly\n" -"formatted or partitioned, activate the checkbox <b>Force overwrite of disk.</p>" +"formatted or partitioned, activate the checkbox <b>Force overwrite of disk</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. Dump dialog help 4/8 #: src/include/s390/dump/ui.rb:62 -msgid "" -"<p>To use DASD and ZFCP devices activate them in the respective YaST DASD or " -"ZFCP dialog.<br>" +msgid "<p>To use DASD and ZFCP devices activate them in the respective YaST DASD or ZFCP dialog.<br>" msgstr "" #. Dump dialog help 5/8 #: src/include/s390/dump/ui.rb:66 -msgid "" -"Devices which are in use or have mounted partitions will not be shown.</p>" +msgid "Devices which are in use or have mounted partitions will not be shown.</p>" msgstr "" #. Dump dialog help 6/8 @@ -493,9 +486,7 @@ #. warn only in case of force #: src/include/s390/dump/ui.rb:193 -msgid "" -"The disk %1 will be formatted as a dump device. All data on this device will " -"be lost! Continue?" +msgid "The disk %1 will be formatted as a dump device. All data on this device will be lost! Continue?" msgstr "" #. don't quit in case of failures, error messages are reported by FormatDisk() @@ -520,17 +511,12 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:46 -msgid "" -"<p>TS-Shell allows to specify <b>Authorization</b> for every TS-Shell user " -"and group. The rights of a group are inherited by its members.</p>" +msgid "<p>TS-Shell allows to specify <b>Authorization</b> for every TS-Shell user and group. The rights of a group are inherited by its members.</p>" msgstr "" #. TS-Shell dialog help 2/5 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:50 -msgid "" -"<p>Each allowed z/VM ID can be selected manually under <b>Selection</b>, " -"defined by a <b>Regex</b> or loaded from a <b>File</b> which contains all " -"allowed z/VM IDs separated by line breaks.</p>" +msgid "<p>Each allowed z/VM ID can be selected manually under <b>Selection</b>, defined by a <b>Regex</b> or loaded from a <b>File</b> which contains all allowed z/VM IDs separated by line breaks.</p>" msgstr "" #. TS-Shell dialog help 3/5 @@ -543,16 +529,13 @@ #. TS-Shell dialog help 4/5 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:58 msgid "" -"<p>To add or remove groups from the TS-Shell authorization table or to " -"change\n" +"<p>To add or remove groups from the TS-Shell authorization table or to change\n" "the membership of users, go to <b>Manage Groups</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. TS-Shell dialog help 5/5 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:62 -msgid "" -"<p>With <b>Audited IDs</b> specify the z/VM IDs from which transcripts " -"should be gathered.</p>" +msgid "<p>With <b>Audited IDs</b> specify the z/VM IDs from which transcripts should be gathered.</p>" msgstr "" #. TS-Shell User creation dialog help 1/3 @@ -562,17 +545,13 @@ #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:69 msgid "" -"<p>To create new TS-Shell user the <b>Username</b>, <b>Home Directory</b> " -"and <b>Password</b> has to be provided.\n" -"\t<br>It is also possible to specify <b>Additional Groups</b> by selecting " -"them on the right.</p>" +"<p>To create new TS-Shell user the <b>Username</b>, <b>Home Directory</b> and <b>Password</b> has to be provided.\n" +"\t<br>It is also possible to specify <b>Additional Groups</b> by selecting them on the right.</p>" msgstr "" #. TS-Shell User creation dialog help 2/3 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:73 -msgid "" -"<p>To ensure that the user changes his password after the first login, " -"activate <b>Force Password Change</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>To ensure that the user changes his password after the first login, activate <b>Force Password Change</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. TS-Shell User creation dialog help 3/3 @@ -597,8 +576,7 @@ #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:88 msgid "" "<p>Existing groups can be added to or removed from the TS-Shell\n" -"authorization. Select the groups in the table and click on <b>Select or " -"Deselect</b>. The current status is shown in the column <b>TS-Auth</b>.</p>" +"authorization. Select the groups in the table and click on <b>Select or Deselect</b>. The current status is shown in the column <b>TS-Auth</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. TS-Shell Managing Groups dialog help 3/5 @@ -611,10 +589,8 @@ #. TS-Shell Managing Groups dialog help 4/5 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:96 msgid "" -"<p>New groups could be created by entering the name in the <b>New Group</b> " -"input field and confirming with <b>Create</b>.\n" -"\t<br>To delete previously created groups the <b>YaST users</b> dialog has " -"to be used.</p>" +"<p>New groups could be created by entering the name in the <b>New Group</b> input field and confirming with <b>Create</b>.\n" +"\t<br>To delete previously created groups the <b>YaST users</b> dialog has to be used.</p>" msgstr "" #. TS-Shell Managing Groups dialog help 5/5 @@ -628,17 +604,12 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:107 -msgid "" -"<p>IUCVConn on Login needs one user for every z/VM ID. To create these users " -"a <b>password</b> and <b>home directory</b> has to be provided." +msgid "<p>IUCVConn on Login needs one user for every z/VM ID. To create these users a <b>password</b> and <b>home directory</b> has to be provided." msgstr "" #. IUCVConn on Login dialog help 2/2 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/helps.rb:111 -msgid "" -"<p>It is possible to sync the users manually by clicking on <b>Sync</b> or " -"just confirming the changes with <b>Ok</b> while <b>IUCVConn on Login</b> is " -"enabled. </p>" +msgid "<p>It is possible to sync the users manually by clicking on <b>Sync</b> or just confirming the changes with <b>Ok</b> while <b>IUCVConn on Login</b> is enabled. </p>" msgstr "" #. Text approval @@ -876,13 +847,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/ui.rb:1032 -msgid "" -"Wrong z/VM ID \"%1\" in line %2, numbers at the beginning are not allowed." +msgid "Wrong z/VM ID \"%1\" in line %2, numbers at the beginning are not allowed." msgstr "" #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal-server/ui.rb:1044 -msgid "" -"Wrong z/VM ID \"%1\" in line %2, more than eight characters are not allowed." +msgid "Wrong z/VM ID \"%1\" in line %2, more than eight characters are not allowed." msgstr "" #. only the last entry is allowed to be empty @@ -915,9 +884,7 @@ #. Check the "Allowed Terminal Server list" field for validity. #. @return true for valid inputs #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:55 -msgid "" -"Wrong input, only lower case letters, numbers and for separation commas are " -"allowed." +msgid "Wrong input, only lower case letters, numbers and for separation commas are allowed." msgstr "" #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:60 @@ -949,19 +916,12 @@ #. IUCVTerminal dialog help 3/11 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:125 -msgid "" -"<p>Several <b>IUCVtty instances</b> can run to provide multiple terminal " -"devices. The instances are distinguished by a terminal ID, which is a " -"combination of the <b>Terminal ID Prefix</b> and the number of the instance." -"<br>" +msgid "<p>Several <b>IUCVtty instances</b> can run to provide multiple terminal devices. The instances are distinguished by a terminal ID, which is a combination of the <b>Terminal ID Prefix</b> and the number of the instance.<br>" msgstr "" #. IUCVTerminal dialog help 4/11 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:129 -msgid "" -"For example, if you define ten instances with the prefix "<i>lxterm", the terminal IDs from <i>lxterm0</i> to <i>lxterm9</i> are " -"available.</p>" +msgid "For example, if you define ten instances with the prefix "<i>lxterm</i>", the terminal IDs from <i>lxterm0</i> to <i>lxterm9</i> are available.</p>" msgstr "" #. IUCVTerminal dialog help 5/11 @@ -971,47 +931,34 @@ #. IUCVTerminal dialog help 6/11 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:135 -msgid "" -"<p>The z/VM IUCV HVC device driver is a kernel module and uses device nodes " -"to enable up to eight HVC terminal devices to communicate with getty and " -"login programs.</p>" +msgid "<p>The z/VM IUCV HVC device driver is a kernel module and uses device nodes to enable up to eight HVC terminal devices to communicate with getty and login programs.</p>" msgstr "" #. IUCVTerminal dialog help 7/11 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:139 -msgid "" -"<p>With <b>restrict access</b>, allow only connections from certain " -"<b>terminal servers</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>With <b>restrict access</b>, allow only connections from certain <b>terminal servers</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. IUCVTerminal dialog help 8/11 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:143 -msgid "" -"<p>Define the emulation for all instances at once or for each one separately." -"</p>" +msgid "<p>Define the emulation for all instances at once or for each one separately.</p>" msgstr "" #. IUCVTerminal dialog help 9/11 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:147 msgid "" -"<p>Activate <b>route kernel messages to hvc0</b> to route kernel messages " -"to\n" +"<p>Activate <b>route kernel messages to hvc0</b> to route kernel messages to\n" "the hvc0 device instead of ttyS0.<br>" msgstr "" #. IUCVTerminal dialog help 10/11 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:151 -msgid "" -"Should kernel messages still be shown on ttyS0, manually add " -"<b>console=ttyS0</b> to the current boot selection kernel parameter in the " -"<b>YaST bootloader module</b>.</p>" +msgid "Should kernel messages still be shown on ttyS0, manually add <b>console=ttyS0</b> to the current boot selection kernel parameter in the <b>YaST bootloader module</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. IUCVTerminal dialog help 11/11 #: src/include/s390/iucvterminal/ui.rb:155 -msgid "" -"<h3>Warning: HVC Terminals stay logged on without a manual logout through " -"the shortcut: ctrl _ d</h3>" +msgid "<h3>Warning: HVC Terminals stay logged on without a manual logout through the shortcut: ctrl _ d</h3>" msgstr "" #. Dialog content @@ -1079,15 +1026,12 @@ #. OnPanic dialog help 1/11 #: src/include/s390/onpanic/ui.rb:112 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Configure the actions to be taken if a kernel panic occurs</b></p>" +msgid "<p><b>Configure the actions to be taken if a kernel panic occurs</b></p>" msgstr "" #. OnPanic dialog help 2/11 #: src/include/s390/onpanic/ui.rb:116 -msgid "" -"<p>The <b>Dumpconf</b> daemon needs to be enabled to influence the behavior " -"during kernel panics.</p>" +msgid "<p>The <b>Dumpconf</b> daemon needs to be enabled to influence the behavior during kernel panics.</p>" msgstr "" #. OnPanic dialog help 3/11 @@ -1113,8 +1057,7 @@ #. OnPanic dialog help 7/11 #: src/include/s390/onpanic/ui.rb:128 msgid "" -"<b>dump_reipl</b> Dump Linux and reboot system. This option is only " -"available\n" +"<b>dump_reipl</b> Dump Linux and reboot system. This option is only available\n" "on LPAR with z9(r) machines and later and on z/VMversion 5.3 and later.<br>" msgstr "" @@ -1125,26 +1068,17 @@ #. OnPanic dialog help 9/11 #: src/include/s390/onpanic/ui.rb:134 -msgid "" -"<p>The time defined in <b>Delay Minutes</b> defers activating the specified " -"panic action for a newly started system to prevent loops. If the system " -"crashes before the time has elapsed the default action (stop) is performed." +msgid "<p>The time defined in <b>Delay Minutes</b> defers activating the specified panic action for a newly started system to prevent loops. If the system crashes before the time has elapsed the default action (stop) is performed.</p>" msgstr "" #. OnPanic dialog help 10/11 #: src/include/s390/onpanic/ui.rb:138 -msgid "" -"<p>The device for dumping the memory can be set with <b>Dump Device</b>. If " -"no device is shown you have to create one with the <b>YaST Dump Devices</b> " -"dialog.</p>" +msgid "<p>The device for dumping the memory can be set with <b>Dump Device</b>. If no device is shown you have to create one with the <b>YaST Dump Devices</b> dialog.</p>" msgstr "" #. OnPanic dialog help 11/11 #: src/include/s390/onpanic/ui.rb:143 -msgid "" -"<p>With <b>VMCMD</b> specify CP commands to be executed before the Linux " -"system is stopped. Only %1 lines and a total of %2 chars are allowed.</p>" +msgid "<p>With <b>VMCMD</b> specify CP commands to be executed before the Linux system is stopped. Only %1 lines and a total of %2 chars are allowed.</p>" msgstr "" #. radio button label @@ -1304,14 +1238,11 @@ #. Disk add help 2/2, This is HTML, so finally "<devno>" is displayed as "<devno>" #: src/include/s390/zfcp/helps.rb:78 msgid "" -"<p>The <b>Channel ID</b> must be entered with lowercase letters in a sysfs " -"conforming\n" +"<p>The <b>Channel ID</b> must be entered with lowercase letters in a sysfs conforming\n" "format 0.0.<devno>, such as <tt>0.0.5c51</tt>.</p>\n" -"<p>The WWPN must be entered with lowercase letters as a 16-digit hex value, " -"such as\n" +"<p>The WWPN must be entered with lowercase letters as a 16-digit hex value, such as\n" "<tt>0x5005076300c40e5a</tt>.</p>\n" -"<p>The LUN must be entered with lowercase letters as a 16-digit hex value " -"with\n" +"<p>The LUN must be entered with lowercase letters as a 16-digit hex value with\n" "all trailing zeros, such as <tt>0x52ca000000000000</tt>.</p>" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/samba-client.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/samba-client.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/samba-client.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -156,9 +156,7 @@ #. help text, do not translate 'winbind uid', 'winbind gid' #: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:174 -msgid "" -"<p>Specify the <b>Range</b> for Samba user and group IDs (<tt>winbind uid and <tt>winbind gid</tt> values).</p>" +msgid "<p>Specify the <b>Range</b> for Samba user and group IDs (<tt>winbind uid</tt> and <tt>winbind gid</tt> values).</p>" msgstr "" #. frame label @@ -383,8 +381,7 @@ #. continue/cancel popup #: src/include/samba-client/dialogs.rb:808 msgid "" -"Configuring this system as a client for Active Directory resets the " -"following\n" +"Configuring this system as a client for Active Directory resets the following\n" "settings in smb.conf to the default values:\n" "%1" msgstr "" @@ -465,8 +462,7 @@ #. translators: Samba workgroup dialog help 1/3 #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:59 msgid "" -"<p>A Linux client can be a member of a workgroup, NT domain, or Active " -"Directory domain.\n" +"<p>A Linux client can be a member of a workgroup, NT domain, or Active Directory domain.\n" "Specify the name of the membership.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -474,15 +470,13 @@ #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:63 msgid "" "<p><b>Use SMB Information for Linux Authentication</b> allows \n" -"verification of passwords with the NT server or the Kerberos server if " -"joining an AD domain.</p>\n" +"verification of passwords with the NT server or the Kerberos server if joining an AD domain.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Samba role dialog help 2.5/3 #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:67 msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Change primary DNS suffix</b> to add your AD server into the " -"list of name servers.\n" +"<p>Check <b>Change primary DNS suffix</b> to add your AD server into the list of name servers.\n" "This option is only available for static network setups.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -490,8 +484,7 @@ #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:71 msgid "" "<p>When you press <b>OK</b>, the system verifies the membership and,\n" -"if it is a NT or Active Directory domain, allows this host to join the " -"domain.</p>\n" +"if it is a NT or Active Directory domain, allows this host to join the domain.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. translators: Samba membership dialog help 1/2 (installation) @@ -508,28 +501,17 @@ #. Samba membership dialog help (common part 1/4) #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:85 -msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Create Home Directory on Login</b> to have local home " -"directories created on the first login.</p>" +msgid "<p>Check <b>Create Home Directory on Login</b> to have local home directories created on the first login.</p>" msgstr "" #. Samba membership dialog help (common part 2/4) #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:89 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Offline Authentication</b> enables the user to log in even if there is " -"no connection to the domain controller. For this option to work, you must " -"log in to your domain at least once. The user's credentials are then stored " -"encrypted on your computer and are reused for a domain login when no " -"connection to the domain controller can be established. This is especially " -"useful for mobile users." +msgid "<p><b>Offline Authentication</b> enables the user to log in even if there is no connection to the domain controller. For this option to work, you must log in to your domain at least once. The user's credentials are then stored encrypted on your computer and are reused for a domain login when no connection to the domain controller can be established. This is especially useful for mobile users." msgstr "" #. Samba membership dialog help (common part) #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:93 -msgid "" -"<p>Click <b>Expert Settings</b> to enable advanced features such as WINS " -"options or mounting server home directories from Active Directory domains." +msgid "<p>Click <b>Expert Settings</b> to enable advanced features such as WINS options or mounting server home directories from Active Directory domains.</p>" msgstr "" #. Samba membership dialog - additional help for autoyast config @@ -540,18 +522,13 @@ #. Samba membership dialog - additional help for autoyast config #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:101 msgid "" -"<p>Set the <b>Username</b> and <b>Password</b> that should be used for " -"joining\n" -"the selected domain during autoinstallation. Note that the password will be " -"saved to the profile in cleartext (unencrypted) form.</p>" +"<p>Set the <b>Username</b> and <b>Password</b> that should be used for joining\n" +"the selected domain during autoinstallation. Note that the password will be saved to the profile in cleartext (unencrypted) form.</p>" msgstr "" #. Samba membership dialog - additional help for autoyast config #: src/include/samba-client/helps.rb:105 -msgid "" -"<p>Specify the <b>Active Directory Server</b> to use for joining an Active " -"Directory domain. This is also used as the value for KDC in the Kerberos " -"configuration.</p>" +msgid "<p>Specify the <b>Active Directory Server</b> to use for joining an Active Directory domain. This is also used as the value for KDC in the Kerberos configuration.</p>" msgstr "" #. Samba membership dialog - additional help for possible NTP configuration @@ -670,9 +647,7 @@ #. help text for "Use WINS for Hostname Resolution" check box label #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:395 -msgid "" -"<p>If you want to use Microsoft Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) for " -"name resolution, check <b>Use WINS for Hostname Resolution</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>If you want to use Microsoft Windows Internet Name Service (WINS) for name resolution, check <b>Use WINS for Hostname Resolution</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. check box label @@ -682,9 +657,7 @@ #. help text ("Retrieve WINS server via DHCP" is a checkbox label) #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:412 -msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Retrieve WINS server via DHCP</b> to use a WINS server provided " -"by DHCP.</p>" +msgid "<p>Check <b>Retrieve WINS server via DHCP</b> to use a WINS server provided by DHCP.</p>" msgstr "" #. frame label @@ -719,55 +692,36 @@ #. membership dialog help (common part 3/4), %1 is separator (e.g. '\') #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:505 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Allow Users to Share Their Directories</b> enables members of the " -"group in <b>Permitted Group</b> to share directories they own with other " -"users. For example, <tt>users</tt> for a local scope or <tt>DOMAIN%1Users for a domain scope. The user also must make sure that the file system " -"permissions allow access.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Allow Users to Share Their Directories</b> enables members of the group in <b>Permitted Group</b> to share directories they own with other users. For example, <tt>users</tt> for a local scope or <tt>DOMAIN%1Users</tt> for a domain scope. The user also must make sure that the file system permissions allow access.</p>" msgstr "" #. membership dialog help (common part 3/4) #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:511 -msgid "" -"<p>With <b>Maximum Number of Shares</b>, limit the total amount of shares " -"that may be created.</p>" +msgid "<p>With <b>Maximum Number of Shares</b>, limit the total amount of shares that may be created.</p>" msgstr "" #. membership dialog help common part #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:516 -msgid "" -"<p>To permit access to user shares without authentication, enable <b>Allow " -"Guest Access</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>To permit access to user shares without authentication, enable <b>Allow Guest Access</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for PAM Mount table #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:525 msgid "" "<p>In the table <b>Mount Server Directories</b>, you can specify server\n" -"directories (such as home directory) which should be locally mounted when " -"the\n" +"directories (such as home directory) which should be locally mounted when the\n" "user is logged in. If mounting should be user-specific, specify <b>User\n" -"Name</b> for the selected rule. Otherwise, the directory is mounted for each " -"user. For more information, see pam_mount.conf manual page.</p>" +"Name</b> for the selected rule. Otherwise, the directory is mounted for each user. For more information, see pam_mount.conf manual page.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for PAM Mount table: example #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:532 -msgid "" -"<p>For example, you may use <tt>/home/%(DOMAIN_USER)</tt> value for " -"<b>Remote Path</b>, <tt>~/</tt> value for <b>Local Mount Point</b> to mount " -"the home directory, together with a value <tt>user=%(DOMAIN_USER)</tt> as a " -"part of <b>Options</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>For example, you may use <tt>/home/%(DOMAIN_USER)</tt> value for <b>Remote Path</b>, <tt>~/</tt> value for <b>Local Mount Point</b> to mount the home directory, together with a value <tt>user=%(DOMAIN_USER)</tt> as a part of <b>Options</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for kerberos method option #: src/include/samba-client/routines.rb:540 -msgid "" -"<p>The value of <b>Kerberos Method</b> defines how kerberos tickets are " -"verified. When <b>Single Sing-on for SSH</b> is used, the default Kerberos " -"Method set by YaST is <tt>secrets and keytab</tt>. See smb.conf manual page " -"for details.</p>" +msgid "<p>The value of <b>Kerberos Method</b> defines how kerberos tickets are verified. When <b>Single Sing-on for SSH</b> is used, the default Kerberos Method set by YaST is <tt>secrets and keytab</tt>. See smb.conf manual page for details.</p>" msgstr "" #. translators: initialization dialog caption Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/samba-server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/samba-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/samba-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -178,15 +178,12 @@ #. translators: command line help text for ldap_suffix option #: src/clients/samba-server.rb:298 -msgid "" -"The LDAP suffix DN for manipulating the user information on the LDAP server" +msgid "The LDAP suffix DN for manipulating the user information on the LDAP server" msgstr "" #. translators: command line help text for ldap_admin_dn option #: src/clients/samba-server.rb:305 -msgid "" -"The LDAP DN for modifying contents of the LDAP server (for example, changing " -"passwords)" +msgid "The LDAP DN for modifying contents of the LDAP server (for example, changing passwords)" msgstr "" #. translators: error message for share command line action @@ -249,8 +246,7 @@ msgid "" "Because users are currently connected to this Samba server,\n" "the server configuration has been reloaded instead of restarted.\n" -"To confirm that all settings are applied despite possibly disconnecting the " -"users,\n" +"To confirm that all settings are applied despite possibly disconnecting the users,\n" "run '/etc/init.d/smb restart' and '/etc/init.d/nmb restart'" msgstr "" @@ -830,8 +826,7 @@ #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:56 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Workgroup or Domain Selection</big></b><br>\n" -"Select existing name of workgroup or domain or type your own new name and " -"click <b>Next</b>.\n" +"Select existing name of workgroup or domain or type your own new name and click <b>Next</b>.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -839,22 +834,17 @@ #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:62 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Samba Server Type</big></b></p>\n" -"<p>A domain controller allows Windows clients to log in to a Windows NT " -"style domain.</p>\n" +"<p>A domain controller allows Windows clients to log in to a Windows NT style domain.</p>\n" "<p>The backup controller uses another domain controller for validation.\n" -"The primary controller uses its own information about users and their " -"passwords.</p>\n" -"<p>The options available in the configuration dialogs depend on the settings " -"in this selection. Windows NT style domain controller functionality will be " -"phased out in future releases.</p>" +"The primary controller uses its own information about users and their passwords.</p>\n" +"<p>The options available in the configuration dialogs depend on the settings in this selection. Windows NT style domain controller functionality will be phased out in future releases.</p>" msgstr "" #. Samba select Samba Server type - Installation step 2 #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:73 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Samba Server Type</big></b></p>\n" -"<p>A domain controller allows Windows clients to log in to a Windows domain." -"</p>\n" +"<p>A domain controller allows Windows clients to log in to a Windows domain.</p>\n" "<p>The options available in the configuration dialogs \n" "depend on the settings in this selection.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -910,9 +900,7 @@ #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:115 msgid "" "<p>The base settings set up the domain and the\n" -"server role. <b>Backup Domain Controller</b> and <b>Primary Domain " -"Controller</b> allow Windows clients to log in to a Windows domain. The " -"backup controller \n" +"server role. <b>Backup Domain Controller</b> and <b>Primary Domain Controller</b> allow Windows clients to log in to a Windows domain. The backup controller \n" "uses another domain controller for validation. The primary controller\n" "uses its own information about users and their passwords.\n" "If the server should not participate as a domain controller, choose the\n" @@ -950,8 +938,7 @@ #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:144 msgid "" "<p><b>Advanced Settings</b> provides access to \n" -"detailed configuration, user authentication sources, and expert global " -"settings.</p>\n" +"detailed configuration, user authentication sources, and expert global settings.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:147 @@ -1019,8 +1006,7 @@ #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:188 msgid "" "<p><b>Search Base DN</b> (distinguished name) is\n" -"the base at which to start searching the information. <b>Administration DN is used when\n" +"the base at which to start searching the information. <b>Administration DN</b> is used when\n" "creating new users and groups. If the administration DN requires\n" "a password for write access, set the password using\n" "<b>Set LDAP Administration Password</b>.</p>\n" @@ -1028,9 +1014,7 @@ #. Advanced SAMBA configuration dialog help 3/3 #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:196 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Note:</b> Settings are saved before the LDAP administration password " -"is set.</p>\n" +msgid "<p><b>Note:</b> Settings are saved before the LDAP administration password is set.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. passdb backend configuration dialog help 1 @@ -1045,8 +1029,7 @@ #. passdb backend configuration dialog help 2 #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:207 msgid "" -"<p>If you want to change the user authentication source, remove the current " -"one first\n" +"<p>If you want to change the user authentication source, remove the current one first\n" "by pressing <b>Delete</b> and add a new one with <b>Add</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1133,21 +1116,11 @@ #. add new share dialog help #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:276 -msgid "" -"<p>With <b>Expose Snapshots</b> selected, Samba exposes snapshots created by " -"Snapper for access and manipulation by CIFS/SMB clients. This option is only " -"available if Samba offers Snapper support, and the Share Path corresponds to " -"a Btrfs backed Snapper configuration subvolume.<br> Relevant permissions " -"must also be granted, see Samba's <b>vfs_snapper(8)</b> man page for further " -"details.</p>" +msgid "<p>With <b>Expose Snapshots</b> selected, Samba exposes snapshots created by Snapper for access and manipulation by CIFS/SMB clients. This option is only available if Samba offers Snapper support, and the Share Path corresponds to a Btrfs backed Snapper configuration subvolume.<br> Relevant permissions must also be granted, see Samba's <b>vfs_snapper(8)</b> man page for further details.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:283 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Utilize Btrfs Features</b> instructs Samba to take advantage of " -"features specific to the Btrfs filesystem. This option is only available if " -"Samba offers Btrfs support, and the Share Path is a Btrfs subvolume. See " -"Samba's <b>vfs_btrfs(8)</b> man page for further details.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Utilize Btrfs Features</b> instructs Samba to take advantage of features specific to the Btrfs filesystem. This option is only available if Samba offers Btrfs support, and the Share Path is a Btrfs subvolume. See Samba's <b>vfs_btrfs(8)</b> man page for further details.</p>" msgstr "" #. help for LDAP Settings dialog @@ -1157,54 +1130,37 @@ "Here, determine the LDAP server to use for authentication.\n" "</p>\n" "<p>\n" -"Setting <b>LDAP Password Back-End</b> allows storing user information in the " -"LDAP tree specified by the URL. With <b>LDAP Idmap Back-End</b>, store SID/" -"uid/gid mapping tables in LDAP.\n" +"Setting <b>LDAP Password Back-End</b> allows storing user information in the LDAP tree specified by the URL. With <b>LDAP Idmap Back-End</b>, store SID/uid/gid mapping tables in LDAP.\n" "</p><p>\n" -"In the Authentication section, set the credentials for the LDAP server, " -"including full Administrator DN.\n" +"In the Authentication section, set the credentials for the LDAP server, including full Administrator DN.\n" "</p>\n" -"<b>Search Base DN</b> is the LDAP suffix appended to Samba-specific LDAP " -"objects.\n" +"<b>Search Base DN</b> is the LDAP suffix appended to Samba-specific LDAP objects.\n" "</p><p>\n" -"To test the connection to your LDAP server, click <b>Test Connection</b>. To " -"set expert LDAP settings or use default values, click <b>Advanced Settings.<p>" +"To test the connection to your LDAP server, click <b>Test Connection</b>. To set expert LDAP settings or use default values, click <b>Advanced Settings</b>.<p>" msgstr "" #. help for SambaLDAPSettingsSuffixesWidget #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:303 -msgid "" -"<p><b>User Suffix</b> specifies where users are added to the LDAP tree. The " -"value is pre-pended to the value of <b>Search Base DN</b>. Similarly, " -"<b>Group Suffix</b> specifies the place for groups, <b>Machine Suffix</b> " -"for machines and <b>Idmap Suffix</b> for idmap mappings.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>User Suffix</b> specifies where users are added to the LDAP tree. The value is pre-pended to the value of <b>Search Base DN</b>. Similarly, <b>Group Suffix</b> specifies the place for groups, <b>Machine Suffix</b> for machines and <b>Idmap Suffix</b> for idmap mappings.</p>" msgstr "" #. help for SambaLDAPSettingsTimeoutsWidget #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:307 msgid "" -"<p><b>Replication Sleep</b> is the amount of milliseconds Samba will wait " -"after writing to the LDAP server, so LDAP replicas can catch up.</p>\n" -"<p><b>Time-Out</b> specifies the timeout for LDAP operations (in seconds)." +"<p><b>Replication Sleep</b> is the amount of milliseconds Samba will wait after writing to the LDAP server, so LDAP replicas can catch up.</p>\n" +"<p><b>Time-Out</b> specifies the timeout for LDAP operations (in seconds).</p>" msgstr "" #. help for SambaLDAPSettingsSecurityWidget #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:311 -msgid "" -"<p>Define whether to use SSL for LDAP connection with <b>Use SSL or TLS</b>." -"</p>" +msgid "<p>Define whether to use SSL for LDAP connection with <b>Use SSL or TLS</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. help for SambaLDAPSettingsMiscWidget #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:315 msgid "" -"<p><b>Delete DN</b> specifies if the delete operation deletes the complete " -"LDAP entry or only the Samba-specific attributes.</p>\n" -"<p>With <b>Synchronize Passwords</b>, define possible synchronization of the " -"LDAP password with the NT and LM hashes. See the <tt>smb.conf</tt> manual " -"page for details.</p>" +"<p><b>Delete DN</b> specifies if the delete operation deletes the complete LDAP entry or only the Samba-specific attributes.</p>\n" +"<p>With <b>Synchronize Passwords</b>, define possible synchronization of the LDAP password with the NT and LM hashes. See the <tt>smb.conf</tt> manual page for details.</p>" msgstr "" #. translators: warning text @@ -1249,8 +1205,7 @@ #: src/include/samba-server/helps.rb:350 msgid "" "<p><b>Advanced Settings</b> provides access to \n" -"detailed configuration, such as LDAP settings, user authentication sources, " -"and\n" +"detailed configuration, such as LDAP settings, user authentication sources, and\n" "expert global settings.</p>\n" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/samba-users.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/samba-users.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/samba-users.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -26,15 +26,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/users_plugin_samba.rb:78 -msgid "" -"<b>Home Drive</b>, <b>Home Path</b>, <b>Profile Path</b>, and <b>Logon " -"Script</b> " +msgid "<b>Home Drive</b>, <b>Home Path</b>, <b>Profile Path</b>, and <b>Logon Script</b> " msgstr "" #: src/clients/users_plugin_samba.rb:81 -msgid "" -"the default values as defined in your local Samba Configuration will be used." -"</p>" +msgid "the default values as defined in your local Samba Configuration will be used.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/clients/users_plugin_samba.rb:96 @@ -77,16 +73,11 @@ #. help text #: src/clients/users_plugin_samba_groups.rb:82 msgid "" -"<p>This plugin can be used to enable an LDAP group to be available for " -"Samba.\n" -"The only setting that you can edit here is the <b>Samba Group Name</b> " -"attribute,\n" -"which is the Name of the Group as it should appear to Samba-Clients. All " -"other\n" -"settings are computed automatically. If you leave the <b>Samba Group Name\n" -"empty, the same name as configured in the Global Settings of this Group " -"will\n" +"<p>This plugin can be used to enable an LDAP group to be available for Samba.\n" +"The only setting that you can edit here is the <b>Samba Group Name</b> attribute,\n" +"which is the Name of the Group as it should appear to Samba-Clients. All other\n" +"settings are computed automatically. If you leave the <b>Samba Group Name</b>\n" +"empty, the same name as configured in the Global Settings of this Group will\n" "be used.</p>\n" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/scanner.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/scanner.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/scanner.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -260,9 +260,7 @@ #. Do not change or translate "epkowa", it is a driver name. #. Do not change or translate "i386", it is an architecture name. #: src/include/scanner/dialogs.rb:837 -msgid "" -"The epkowa driver is only available for i386-compatible architectures (32-" -"bit i386 and also 64-bit x86_64)." +msgid "The epkowa driver is only available for i386-compatible architectures (32-bit i386 and also 64-bit x86_64)." msgstr "" #. when the epkowa driver was selected on x86_64: @@ -377,8 +375,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "<b><big>Scanner Configuration</big></b><br>\n" -"Set up or change the scanner configuration and show the already active " -"scanners.\n" +"Set up or change the scanner configuration and show the already active scanners.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -388,8 +385,7 @@ "<p>\n" "To set up a new scanner, choose the scanner from the list of\n" "detected scanners and press <b>Edit</b>.\n" -"If your scanner has not been detected, use <b>Add</b> for a manual " -"configuration.\n" +"If your scanner has not been detected, use <b>Add</b> for a manual configuration.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -416,8 +412,7 @@ "configure the scanner unit with this tool.\n" "If you have difficulties configuring your scanner,\n" "check whether it appears in the output of <tt>lsusb</tt>.\n" -"If it is not listed there, the USB system cannot communicate with the " -"scanner.\n" +"If it is not listed there, the USB system cannot communicate with the scanner.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -430,8 +425,7 @@ "If difficulties arise proceeding with <b>Add</b>,\n" "check whether your scanner is shown by the command <tt>lsscsi</tt>.\n" "If not, the SCSI system cannot communicate with the scanner.\n" -"Verify that an appropriate kernel module for the SCSI host adapter has been " -"loaded.\n" +"Verify that an appropriate kernel module for the SCSI host adapter has been loaded.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -445,8 +439,7 @@ "Common parallel port scanners must be configured manually.\n" "To set up the scanner unit in a HP all-in-one device,\n" "which is connected to the parallel port,\n" -"you may have to run <tt>hp-setup</tt> via <b>Other</b> and <b>Run hp-setup\n" +"you may have to run <tt>hp-setup</tt> via <b>Other</b> and <b>Run hp-setup</b>\n" "before you can configure the scanner unit with this tool using <b>Add</b>.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -470,10 +463,8 @@ "connected to another host in the network.\n" "To set up the scanner unit in a HP all-in-one device,\n" "which is connected via a built-in network interface,\n" -"you may have to run <tt>hp-setup</tt> via <b>Other</b> and <b>Run hp-setup\n" -"before it works to configure the scanner unit with this tool using <b>Add.\n" +"you may have to run <tt>hp-setup</tt> via <b>Other</b> and <b>Run hp-setup</b>\n" +"before it works to configure the scanner unit with this tool using <b>Add</b>.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -491,8 +482,7 @@ "Press <b>Add</b> to select model and driver and enable it.\n" "Press <b>Edit</b> to select and enable a driver.\n" "Press <b>Delete</b> to disable the driver.\n" -"If you press <b>Other</b>, you can restart the detection, test enabled " -"drivers,\n" +"If you press <b>Other</b>, you can restart the detection, test enabled drivers,\n" "set up HP all-in-one devices, or set up scanning via network.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -512,8 +502,7 @@ #: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:166 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"If a driver is set up but no scanner is recognized by the driver, possible " -"reasons are:\n" +"If a driver is set up but no scanner is recognized by the driver, possible reasons are:\n" "The scanner is not connected or switched off,\n" "the driver is not the right one for the particular model\n" "(even small differences in model names or internal differences in\n" @@ -530,8 +519,7 @@ "<p>\n" "<b><big>Scanner Model Selection</big></b><br>\n" "All known scanner models, both supported and unsupported, are listed here.\n" -"Read all information carefully before selecting a model and pressing " -"<b>Next</b>.\n" +"Read all information carefully before selecting a model and pressing <b>Next</b>.\n" "The information is based on data of the SANE project at\n" "<tt>http://www.sane-project.org/</tt>.\n" "</p>" @@ -543,19 +531,13 @@ #: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:192 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"A model is supported if there is at least one appropriate scanner driver " -"available.\n" -"Most scanner drivers are from the SANE project and provided in the sane-" -"backends package.\n" -"The support status for a particular model varies from minimal to complete." -"<br>\n" -"When a driver is shown as 'unmaintained', it does not mean that the driver " -"does not work.\n" +"A model is supported if there is at least one appropriate scanner driver available.\n" +"Most scanner drivers are from the SANE project and provided in the sane-backends package.\n" +"The support status for a particular model varies from minimal to complete.<br>\n" +"When a driver is shown as 'unmaintained', it does not mean that the driver does not work.\n" "Even an unmaintained driver could work perfectly well.\n" -"But it means that there is no longer someone who knows about the driver " -"internals\n" -"so that there is usually no help if there are issues with an unmaintained " -"driver.\n" +"But it means that there is no longer someone who knows about the driver internals\n" +"so that there is usually no help if there are issues with an unmaintained driver.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -563,10 +545,8 @@ #: src/include/scanner/helps.rb:204 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Even if a model has no driver available, the manufacturer might have a " -"driver.\n" -"Therefore, you should ask the scanner manufacturer for a driver for an " -"unsupported scanner.\n" +"Even if a model has no driver available, the manufacturer might have a driver.\n" +"Therefore, you should ask the scanner manufacturer for a driver for an unsupported scanner.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -588,18 +568,12 @@ "<p>\n" "Use the <b>Search String</b> to find an appropriate entry quickly.\n" "To find some text anywhere in the table, enter it in the field.\n" -"A more complicated search using a case-insensitive regular expression is " -"also possible.\n" -"If the scanner was detected and the manufacturer name is available in this " -"list,\n" -"the search string is preset with the manufacturer name, such as <tt>^Epson." -"*</tt>.\n" -"To refine the search results, append model-specific details to the search " -"string.\n" -"For example, append a word that is part of the model name as in <tt>^Epson." -"*perfection</tt>\n" -"or append some digits that are part of the model name as in <tt>^Epson." -"*1200</tt>.\n" +"A more complicated search using a case-insensitive regular expression is also possible.\n" +"If the scanner was detected and the manufacturer name is available in this list,\n" +"the search string is preset with the manufacturer name, such as <tt>^Epson.*</tt>.\n" +"To refine the search results, append model-specific details to the search string.\n" +"For example, append a word that is part of the model name as in <tt>^Epson.*perfection</tt>\n" +"or append some digits that are part of the model name as in <tt>^Epson.*1200</tt>.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -609,8 +583,7 @@ "<p>\n" "<b><big>Scanner and Driver Setup</big></b><br>\n" "The driver is activated and the associated scanners are probed.\n" -"This may take a few seconds, so you must wait until you can press <b>Next.\n" +"This may take a few seconds, so you must wait until you can press <b>Next</b>.\n" "If you press <b>Back</b>, the driver is deactivated.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -651,14 +624,10 @@ "<b><big>HP All-in-One Devices</big></b><br>\n" "HP all-in-one devices may require a special setup.\n" "In this case, an appropriate dialog is shown.\n" -"There are two software packages that provide support for HP all-in-one " -"devices:\n" -"the outdated HPOJ software (package hp-officeJet which is no longer " -"available),\n" -"which provides the PTAL system (with the ptal service) to access HP all-in-" -"one devices,\n" -"and the up-to-date HPLIP software (package hplip), which provides the hpaio " -"driver.\n" +"There are two software packages that provide support for HP all-in-one devices:\n" +"the outdated HPOJ software (package hp-officeJet which is no longer available),\n" +"which provides the PTAL system (with the ptal service) to access HP all-in-one devices,\n" +"and the up-to-date HPLIP software (package hplip), which provides the hpaio driver.\n" "Both software packages can be installed at the same time\n" "but the ptal service and the hpaio driver cannot run together.\n" "Therefore either the patl service or the hpaio driver\n" @@ -687,12 +656,9 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "<b><big>Server Settings</big></b><br>\n" -"If you have locally connected scanners and want to make them accessible via " -"the network,\n" -"set up the saned network scanning daemon so that your host becomes a " -"server.\n" -"In <b>Permitted Clients</b>, enter which client hosts are permitted to " -"access saned on your server.\n" +"If you have locally connected scanners and want to make them accessible via the network,\n" +"set up the saned network scanning daemon so that your host becomes a server.\n" +"In <b>Permitted Clients</b>, enter which client hosts are permitted to access saned on your server.\n" "Enter a comma-separated list of client hosts (hostnames or IP addresses)\n" "or subnets (CIDR notation, such as 192.168.1.0/24).\n" "If no client hosts are permitted, saned is not activated.\n" @@ -748,10 +714,8 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "<b><big>Client Settings</big></b><br>\n" -"If you want to access scanners connected to other hosts (servers) in the " -"network,\n" -"set up the net metadriver to access them via the daemon running on the " -"servers.\n" +"If you want to access scanners connected to other hosts (servers) in the network,\n" +"set up the net metadriver to access them via the daemon running on the servers.\n" "The saned and the firewall on the servers must permit the access.\n" "In <b>Servers Used</b>, enter which servers should be used.\n" "Enter a comma-separated list of servers (server names or IP addresses).\n" @@ -810,8 +774,7 @@ #: src/modules/Scanner.rb:399 msgid "" "The third-party Image Scan driver software from Epson/Avasys is required.\n" -"The Image Scan driver software is made and provided by Epson (formerly " -"Avasys)\n" +"The Image Scan driver software is made and provided by Epson (formerly Avasys)\n" "http://download.ebz.epson.net/dsc/search/01/search/?OSC=LXEpson\n" "(formerly Avasys http://avasys.jp/eng/linux_driver/)\n" "where RPM packages for 32-bit (i386) and 64-bit (x86_64) architecture\n" @@ -829,15 +792,12 @@ #. Is the package available to be installed? #. Package::Available returns nil if no package source is available. #: src/modules/Scanner.rb:442 -msgid "" -"Required package %1 is not installed and there is no package repository " -"available." +msgid "Required package %1 is not installed and there is no package repository available." msgstr "" #. Message of a Popup::Error where %1 will be replaced by the package name: #: src/modules/Scanner.rb:457 -msgid "" -"Required package %1 is not installed and not available in the repository." +msgid "Required package %1 is not installed and not available in the repository." msgstr "" #. Only a simple message because: @@ -859,8 +819,7 @@ "with the network, the 'scanimage -L' command may not respond. For example,\n" "this may happen if communication with a server used by the net metadriver\n" "gets distorted because a firewall drops some network traffic.\n" -"In this case, disable the net metadriver until the issue in the network is " -"fixed.\n" +"In this case, disable the net metadriver until the issue in the network is fixed.\n" msgstr "" #. Only a simple message because this error does not happen on a normal system @@ -1071,8 +1030,7 @@ #: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1125 msgid "" "Launched hp-setup.\n" -"You must finish hp-setup before you can proceed with the scanner " -"configuration.\n" +"You must finish hp-setup before you can proceed with the scanner configuration.\n" msgstr "" #. where autodetected scanners are listed in the second column @@ -1219,23 +1177,18 @@ #. Do not change or translate "SANE", it is a project name. #: src/modules/Scanner.rb:1892 msgid "" -"A firmware file contains software that must be uploaded to the scanner's " -"memory.\n" +"A firmware file contains software that must be uploaded to the scanner's memory.\n" "Without firmware, the scanner cannot work.\n" "\n" -"Because firmware is licensed by the scanner manufacturer, we cannot " -"distribute it.\n" +"Because firmware is licensed by the scanner manufacturer, we cannot distribute it.\n" "Usually the firmware file is stored somewhere on the manufacturer's CD.\n" -"Alternatively, it may be possible to download it from the manufacturer's web " -"site.\n" -"Ask the manufacturer how to get the firmware file for your particular " -"scanner.\n" +"Alternatively, it may be possible to download it from the manufacturer's web site.\n" +"Ask the manufacturer how to get the firmware file for your particular scanner.\n" "Find additional useful information on the SANE web site at\n" "http://www.sane-project.org/.\n" "\n" "After you get the firmware file, you must configure the driver manually.\n" -"The man page of the driver describes how to configure it for firmware " -"upload.\n" +"The man page of the driver describes how to configure it for firmware upload.\n" "The following command shows the man page for your driver:\n" msgstr "" @@ -1260,19 +1213,16 @@ "The hpoj driver requires the PTAL system to be set up and running.\n" "In particular, the ptal service must be up and running.\n" "\n" -"Before the ptal service can be started, the PTAL system must be " -"initialized.\n" +"Before the ptal service can be started, the PTAL system must be initialized.\n" "Additionally, the ptal service should be activated for start when booting.\n" "The PTAL system and the hplip service exclude each other.\n" "Therefore a running hplip service would be stopped and deactivated\n" "before the the PTAL system is initialized, activated, and started.\n" "An automated initialization of the PTAL system is only safe for USB.\n" -"If you have a non-USB device or if the automated initialization for USB " -"fails,\n" +"If you have a non-USB device or if the automated initialization for USB fails,\n" "set up the PTAL system manually.\n" "If you have an all-in-one device (scanner+printer), note that\n" -"a running ptal service monopolizes the USB device file (e.g., /dev/usb/" -"lp0),\n" +"a running ptal service monopolizes the USB device file (e.g., /dev/usb/lp0),\n" "so the printer can no longer be addressed via the USB device file.\n" "\n" "Should the PTAL system for USB be initialized, activated, and started now?\n" @@ -1289,8 +1239,7 @@ "and all print queues that use the hplip service would no longer work.\n" "If the scanner is also supported by the hpaio driver, do not proceed.\n" "Instead use hpaio to set up the scanner.\n" -"Alternatively proceed and change the printer configuration to use the ptal " -"service.\n" +"Alternatively proceed and change the printer configuration to use the ptal service.\n" msgstr "" #. %1 will be replaced by the backend name @@ -1405,9 +1354,7 @@ #. Do not change or translate "ptal", it is a service name. #. Do not change or translate "CUPS", it is a subsystem name. #: src/modules/Scanner.rb:2291 -msgid "" -"The driver hpoj is deactivated but the associated service ptal is not " -"deactivated because it is needed by the CUPS printing system." +msgid "The driver hpoj is deactivated but the associated service ptal is not deactivated because it is needed by the CUPS printing system." msgstr "" #. (i.e. a system which is not totally broken or totally messed up). Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/security.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/security.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/security.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -240,9 +240,7 @@ #. richtext message: %1 = runlevel ("3" or "5"), %2 = list of services #: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:404 -msgid "" -"<P>These basic system services are not enabled in runlevel %1:<BR><B>%2</B>" +msgid "<P>These basic system services are not enabled in runlevel %1:<BR><B>%2</B></P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/dialogs.rb:412 @@ -393,20 +391,16 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:72 msgid "" "<p><b>Hibernate System</b>:\n" -"Set the conditions for allowing users to hibernate the system. By default, " -"user on active console has such right.\n" -"Other options are allowing the action to any user or requiring " -"authentication in all cases.</p>\n" +"Set the conditions for allowing users to hibernate the system. By default, user on active console has such right.\n" +"Other options are allowing the action to any user or requiring authentication in all cases.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Main dialog help 1/8 #: src/include/security/helps.rb:78 msgid "" "<P><BIG><B>Configuring Local Security</B></BIG></P>\n" -"<p>Using predefined defaults, change the local security settings, which " -"include\n" -" booting, login, password, user creation, and file permissions. The " -"default\n" +"<p>Using predefined defaults, change the local security settings, which include\n" +" booting, login, password, user creation, and file permissions. The default\n" " settings can be modified as needed.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -449,12 +443,9 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:106 msgid "" "<p><b>Delay after Incorrect Login Attempt:</b>\n" -"It is advisable to wait some time after an incorrect login attempt to " -"prevent\n" -"password guessing. Make the time small enough that users do not need to wait " -"to\n" -"retry if a password is mistyped. A sensible value is three seconds (<tt>3).</p>" +"It is advisable to wait some time after an incorrect login attempt to prevent\n" +"password guessing. Make the time small enough that users do not need to wait to\n" +"retry if a password is mistyped. A sensible value is three seconds (<tt>3</tt>).</p>" msgstr "" #. Login dialog help 3/4 @@ -462,8 +453,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Record Successful Login Attempts:</b> Logging successful login\n" "attempts is useful. It can warn you of unauthorized access to the\n" -"system (for example, a user logging in from a different location than " -"usual).\n" +"system (for example, a user logging in from a different location than usual).\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -471,8 +461,7 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:120 msgid "" "<p><b>Allow Remote Graphical Login:</b> Checking this allows access\n" -"to a graphical login screen for this machine over the network. Remote " -"access\n" +"to a graphical login screen for this machine over the network. Remote access\n" "to your machine using a display manager might be a security risk.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -487,8 +476,7 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:130 msgid "" "<p><b>Check New Passwords</b>: It is wise to choose a password that\n" -"cannot be found in a dictionary and is not a name or other simple, common " -"word.\n" +"cannot be found in a dictionary and is not a name or other simple, common word.\n" "By checking the box, enforce password checking in regard to these rules.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -497,8 +485,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Minimum Acceptable Password Length:</b>\n" "The minimum acceptable size for the new password reduced by the number\n" -"of different character classes (other, upper, lower and digit) used in the " -"new\n" +"of different character classes (other, upper, lower and digit) used in the new\n" "password. See man pam_cracklib for a more detailed explanation.\n" "This option can only be modified when <b>Check New Passwords</b> is set.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -507,8 +494,7 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:144 msgid "" "<p><b>Passwords to Remember</b>:\n" -"Enter the number of user passwords to store and prevent the user from " -"reusing.\n" +"Enter the number of user passwords to store and prevent the user from reusing.\n" "Enter 0 if passwords should not be stored.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -521,24 +507,20 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:152 msgid "" "<p><b>DES</b>, the Linux default method, works in all network environments,\n" -"but it restricts you to passwords no longer than eight characters. If you " -"need\n" +"but it restricts you to passwords no longer than eight characters. If you need\n" "compatibility with other systems, use this method.</p>" msgstr "" #. Password dialog help 5c/8 #: src/include/security/helps.rb:158 msgid "" -"<p><b>MD5</b> allows longer passwords and is supported by all current " -"Linux \n" +"<p><b>MD5</b> allows longer passwords and is supported by all current Linux \n" "distributions, but not by other systems or old software.</p>" msgstr "" #. Password dialog help 5d/8 #: src/include/security/helps.rb:162 -msgid "" -"<p><b>SHA-512</b> is the current standard hash method, using other " -"algorithms is not recommended unless needed for compatibility purpose.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>SHA-512</b> is the current standard hash method, using other algorithms is not recommended unless needed for compatibility purpose.</p>" msgstr "" #. Password dialog help 7/8 @@ -552,8 +534,7 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:170 msgid "" "<p><b>Days before Password Expires Warning</b>: This entry sets the\n" -"number of days users are warned before their passwords expire. The longer " -"the\n" +"number of days users are warned before their passwords expire. The longer the\n" "time, the less likely it is that someone can guess passwords.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -582,28 +563,22 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:188 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Other Security Settings</b></big></P>\n" -"<p>In this dialog, change miscellaneous settings related to local security." +"<p>In this dialog, change miscellaneous settings related to local security.</p>" msgstr "" #. Misc dialog help 2/14 #: src/include/security/helps.rb:192 msgid "" "<p><b>File Permissions</b>: Settings for the permissions\n" -"of certain system files are set according to the data in /etc/permissions." -"secure\n" +"of certain system files are set according to the data in /etc/permissions.secure\n" "or /etc/permissions.easy. Which file is used depends on this selection.\n" -"Launching SuSEconfig sets these permissions according to /etc/permissions." -"*.\n" -"This fixes files with incorrect permissions, whether this occurred " -"accidentally\n" +"Launching SuSEconfig sets these permissions according to /etc/permissions.*.\n" +"This fixes files with incorrect permissions, whether this occurred accidentally\n" "or by intruders.</p><p>\n" "With <b>Easy</b>, most of the system files that are only readable by root\n" "in Secure are modified so other users can also read these files.\n" -"Using <b>Secure</b>, certain system files, such as /var/log/messages, can " -"only\n" -"be viewed by the user root. Some programs can only be launched by root or " -"by\n" +"Using <b>Secure</b>, certain system files, such as /var/log/messages, can only\n" +"be viewed by the user root. Some programs can only be launched by root or by\n" "daemons, not by ordinary users.\n" "The most secure setting is <b>Paranoid</B>. With it, you must\n" "decide which users are able to run X applications and setuid programs.</p>\n" @@ -613,11 +588,9 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:208 msgid "" "<p><b>User Launching updatedb</b>: The program updatedb runs \n" -"once a day. It scans your entire file system and creates a database " -"(locatedb)\n" +"once a day. It scans your entire file system and creates a database (locatedb)\n" "that stores the location of every file. The database can be searched by the\n" -"program \"locate\". Here, set the user that runs this command: <b>nobody\n" +"program \"locate\". Here, set the user that runs this command: <b>nobody</b>\n" " (few files) or <b>root</b> (all files).</p>" msgstr "" @@ -626,8 +599,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Current Directory in root's Path</b> On a DOS system,\n" "the system first searches for executable files (programs) in the current\n" -"directory then in the current path variable. In contrast, a UNIX-like " -"system\n" +"directory then in the current path variable. In contrast, a UNIX-like system\n" "searches for them exclusively via the search path (variable PATH).</p>" msgstr "" @@ -635,8 +607,7 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:223 msgid "" "<p><b>Current Directory in the Path of Regular Users</b><br> A DOS\n" -"system first searches for executable files (programs) in the current " -"directory\n" +"system first searches for executable files (programs) in the current directory\n" "then in the current path variable. In contrast, a UNIX-like system searches\n" "for them exclusively via the search path (variable PATH).</p>" msgstr "" @@ -646,11 +617,9 @@ msgid "" "<p>Some systems set up a work-around by adding the dot (\".\") to the\n" "search path, enabling files in the current path to be found and executed.\n" -"This is highly dangerous because you may accidentally launch unknown " -"programs in\n" +"This is highly dangerous because you may accidentally launch unknown programs in\n" "the current directory instead of the usual systemwide files. As a result,\n" -"executing <i>Trojan Horses</i>, which exploit this weakness and invade your " -"system,\n" +"executing <i>Trojan Horses</i>, which exploit this weakness and invade your system,\n" "is rather easy if you set this option.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -672,36 +641,28 @@ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:247 msgid "" "<p><b>Enable Magic SysRq Keys</b><br> If you check this option, you\n" -"will have some control over the system even if it crashes (for example, " -"during kernel\n" +"will have some control over the system even if it crashes (for example, during kernel\n" "debugging). For details, see /usr/src/linux/Documentation/sysrq.txt</p>" msgstr "" #. help text: security overview dialog 1/ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:253 -msgid "" -"<P><B>Security Overview</B><BR>This overview shows the most important " -"security settings.</P>" +msgid "<P><B>Security Overview</B><BR>This overview shows the most important security settings.</P>" msgstr "" #. help text: security overview dialog 1/ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:257 -msgid "" -"<P>To change the current value, click the link associated to the option.</P>" +msgid "<P>To change the current value, click the link associated to the option.</P>" msgstr "" #. help text: security overview dialog 1/ #: src/include/security/helps.rb:261 -msgid "" -"<P> A check mark in the <B>Security Status</B> column means that the current " -"value of the option is secure.</P>" +msgid "<P> A check mark in the <B>Security Status</B> column means that the current value of the option is secure.</P>" msgstr "" #. an error message (rich text) #: src/include/security/helps.rb:265 -msgid "" -"<P><B>The current value could not be read. The service is probably not " -"installed or the option is missing on the system.</B></P>" +msgid "<P><B>The current value could not be read. The service is probably not installed or the option is missing on the system.</B></P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:271 @@ -709,88 +670,53 @@ "<P>A display manager provides a graphical login screen and can be accessed\n" "across the network by an X server running on another system if so\n" "configured.</P><P>The windows that are being displayed would then transmit\n" -"their data across the network. If that network is not fully trusted, then " -"the\n" -"network traffic can be eavesdropped by an attacker, gaining access not only " -"to\n" -"the graphical content of the display, but also to usernames and passwords " -"that\n" -"are being used.</P><P>If you do not need <EM>XDMCP</EM> for remote " -"graphical\n" +"their data across the network. If that network is not fully trusted, then the\n" +"network traffic can be eavesdropped by an attacker, gaining access not only to\n" +"the graphical content of the display, but also to usernames and passwords that\n" +"are being used.</P><P>If you do not need <EM>XDMCP</EM> for remote graphical\n" "logins, then disable this option.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:281 msgid "" -"<P>Upon startup, the system time is being set from the hardware clock of " -"the\n" -"computer. As a consequence, setting the hardware clock before shutting down " -"is\n" -"necessary.</P><P>Consistent system time is essential for the system to " -"create\n" +"<P>Upon startup, the system time is being set from the hardware clock of the\n" +"computer. As a consequence, setting the hardware clock before shutting down is\n" +"necessary.</P><P>Consistent system time is essential for the system to create\n" "correct log messages.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:287 -msgid "" -"<P>Malfunctions in a system are usually detected by anomalies in its " -"behaviour. Syslog messages about events that reoccur on a regular basis are " -"important to find causes of problems. And the absence of a single record can " -"tell more than the absence of all log records.</P><P>Therefore, syslog " -"messages of system events are only useful if they are present.</P>" +msgid "<P>Malfunctions in a system are usually detected by anomalies in its behaviour. Syslog messages about events that reoccur on a regular basis are important to find causes of problems. And the absence of a single record can tell more than the absence of all log records.</P><P>Therefore, syslog messages of system events are only useful if they are present.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:290 -msgid "" -"<P>Chroot execution environments restrict a process to only access files " -"that it needs by placing them in a separate subdirectory and running the " -"process with a changed root (chroot) set to that directory.</P>" +msgid "<P>Chroot execution environments restrict a process to only access files that it needs by placing them in a separate subdirectory and running the process with a changed root (chroot) set to that directory.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:293 -msgid "" -"<P>The DHCP client daemon should run as the user <EM>dhcpd</EM> to minimize " -"a possible threat if the service is found vulnerable to a weakness in its " -"program code.</P><P>Note that dhcpd must never run as <EM>root</EM> or with " -"the <EM>CAP_SYS_CHROOT</EM> capability for the chroot execution confinement " -"to be effective.</P>" +msgid "<P>The DHCP client daemon should run as the user <EM>dhcpd</EM> to minimize a possible threat if the service is found vulnerable to a weakness in its program code.</P><P>Note that dhcpd must never run as <EM>root</EM> or with the <EM>CAP_SYS_CHROOT</EM> capability for the chroot execution confinement to be effective.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:296 -msgid "" -"<P>Administrators should never log on as <EM>root</EM> into an X Window " -"session to minimize the usage of the root privileges.</P><P>This option does " -"not help against careless administrators, but shall prevent attackers to be " -"able to log on as <EM>root</EM> via the display manager if they guess or " -"otherwise acquire the password.</P>" +msgid "<P>Administrators should never log on as <EM>root</EM> into an X Window session to minimize the usage of the root privileges.</P><P>This option does not help against careless administrators, but shall prevent attackers to be able to log on as <EM>root</EM> via the display manager if they guess or otherwise acquire the password.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:299 msgid "" -"<P>X Window clients, e.g. programs that open a window on your display, " -"connect\n" -"to the X server that runs on the physical machine. Programs can also run on " -"a\n" +"<P>X Window clients, e.g. programs that open a window on your display, connect\n" +"to the X server that runs on the physical machine. Programs can also run on a\n" "different system and display their content on the X server through network\n" -"connections.</P><P>When enabled, the X server listens on a port 6000 plus " -"the\n" -"display number. Since network traffic is transferred unencrypted and " -"therefore\n" +"connections.</P><P>When enabled, the X server listens on a port 6000 plus the\n" +"display number. Since network traffic is transferred unencrypted and therefore\n" "subject to network sniffing, and since the port held open by the X server\n" -"offers attack options, the secure setting is to disable it.</P><P>To display " -"X\n" -"Window clients across a network, we recommend the use of secure shell " -"(<EM>ssh</EM>), which allows the X Window clients to connect to the X server " -"through the encrypted ssh connection.</P>" +"offers attack options, the secure setting is to disable it.</P><P>To display X\n" +"Window clients across a network, we recommend the use of secure shell (<EM>ssh</EM>), which allows the X Window clients to connect to the X server through the encrypted ssh connection.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:309 msgid "" -"<P>The email delivery subsystem is always started. However, it does not " -"expose\n" -"itself outside the system by default, since it does not listen on the SMTP " -"network port 25.</P><P>If you do not deliver emails to your system through " -"the SMTP protocol, then disable this option.</P>" +"<P>The email delivery subsystem is always started. However, it does not expose\n" +"itself outside the system by default, since it does not listen on the SMTP network port 25.</P><P>If you do not deliver emails to your system through the SMTP protocol, then disable this option.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:312 @@ -799,8 +725,7 @@ "updated, the service is restarted after the files in the package have been\n" "installed.</P><P>This makes sense in most cases, and it is safe to do,\n" "considering that many services either need their binaries or configuration\n" -"files accessible in the file system. Otherwise these services would " -"continue\n" +"files accessible in the file system. Otherwise these services would continue\n" "to run until the services are stopped, e.g. running daemons are\n" "killed.</P><P>This setting should only be changed if there is a specific\n" "reason to do so.</P>" @@ -812,32 +737,18 @@ "uninstalled, the service is stopped before the files of the package are\n" "removed.</P><P>This makes sense in most cases, and it is safe to do,\n" "considering that many services either need their binaries or configuration\n" -"files accessible in the file system. Otherwise these services would " -"continue\n" +"files accessible in the file system. Otherwise these services would continue\n" "to run until they are stopped, e.g. running daemons are\n" "killed.</P><P>This setting should only be changed if there is a specific\n" "reason to do so.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:332 -msgid "" -"<P>A system can be overwhelmed with numerous connection attempts so that the " -"system runs out of memory, leading to a Denial of Service (DoS) " -"vulnerability.</P><P>The use of syncookies is a method that can help in such " -"situations. But in configurations with a very large number of legitimate " -"connection attempts from one source, the <EM>Enabled</EM> setting can cause " -"problems with denied TCP connections under high load.</P><P>Still, for most " -"environments, syncookies are the first line of defense against SYN flood DoS " -"attacks, so the secure setting is <EM>Enabled</EM>.</P>" +msgid "<P>A system can be overwhelmed with numerous connection attempts so that the system runs out of memory, leading to a Denial of Service (DoS) vulnerability.</P><P>The use of syncookies is a method that can help in such situations. But in configurations with a very large number of legitimate connection attempts from one source, the <EM>Enabled</EM> setting can cause problems with denied TCP connections under high load.</P><P>Still, for most environments, syncookies are the first line of defense against SYN flood DoS attacks, so the secure setting is <EM>Enabled</EM>.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:335 src/include/security/helps.rb:339 -msgid "" -"<P>IP forwarding means to pass on network packets that have been received, " -"but that are not destined for one of the system's configured network " -"interfaces, e.g. network interface addresses.</P><P>If a system forwards " -"network traffic on ISO/OSI layer 3, it is called a router. If you do not " -"need that routing functionality, then disable this option.</P>" +msgid "<P>IP forwarding means to pass on network packets that have been received, but that are not destined for one of the system's configured network interfaces, e.g. network interface addresses.</P><P>If a system forwards network traffic on ISO/OSI layer 3, it is called a router. If you do not need that routing functionality, then disable this option.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:338 @@ -849,29 +760,19 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:343 -msgid "" -"<P>Magic SysRq Keys enable some control over the system even if it crashes " -"(e.g. during kernel debugging) or if the system does not respond.</P>" +msgid "<P>Magic SysRq Keys enable some control over the system even if it crashes (e.g. during kernel debugging) or if the system does not respond.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:346 -msgid "" -"<P>There are predefined file permissions in /etc/permissions.* files. The " -"most restrictive file permissions are defined 'secure' or 'paranoid' file." +msgid "<P>There are predefined file permissions in /etc/permissions.* files. The most restrictive file permissions are defined 'secure' or 'paranoid' file.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:349 src/include/security/helps.rb:352 -msgid "" -"<P>Basic system services must be enabled to provide system consistency and " -"to run the security-related services.</P>" +msgid "<P>Basic system services must be enabled to provide system consistency and to run the security-related services.</P>" msgstr "" #: src/include/security/helps.rb:355 src/include/security/helps.rb:358 -msgid "" -"<P>Every running service is a potential target of a security attack. " -"Therefore it is recommended to turn off all services which are not used by " -"the system.</P>" +msgid "<P>Every running service is a potential target of a security attack. Therefore it is recommended to turn off all services which are not used by the system.</P>" msgstr "" #. level name Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/services-manager.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/services-manager.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/services-manager.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -37,18 +37,14 @@ #: src/clients/services_proposal.rb:121 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Services</b></big><br>\n" -"This installation proposal allows you to start and enable a service from " -"the \n" +"This installation proposal allows you to start and enable a service from the \n" " list of services.</p>\n" -"<p>It may also open ports in the firewall for a service if firewall is " -"enabled\n" +"<p>It may also open ports in the firewall for a service if firewall is enabled\n" "and a particular service requires opening them.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/clients/services_proposal.rb:145 -msgid "" -"Service %service will be %toggled and port in firewall will be %switched " -"%link" +msgid "Service %service will be %toggled and port in firewall will be %switched %link" msgstr "" #: src/clients/services_proposal.rb:160 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/slp-server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/slp-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/slp-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -233,29 +233,21 @@ #: src/include/slp-server/helps.rb:78 msgid "" -"<p>Here, set the mode in which to run the SLP daemon. The simplest mode is " -"<b>Broadcast</b>.\n" -"In it, the SLP daemon answers all requests sent by broadcast. The next mode " -"is <b>Multicast</b>. In it, the daemon answers queries\n" -"sent by multicast in appropriate SCOPES. In the <b>DA Server</b> mode, it " -"informs DA servers on the specified IP addresses\n" -"about statically and dynamically registered services. The last options is " -"<b>Becomes DA Server</b>. This is a cache server for service\n" +"<p>Here, set the mode in which to run the SLP daemon. The simplest mode is <b>Broadcast</b>.\n" +"In it, the SLP daemon answers all requests sent by broadcast. The next mode is <b>Multicast</b>. In it, the daemon answers queries\n" +"sent by multicast in appropriate SCOPES. In the <b>DA Server</b> mode, it informs DA servers on the specified IP addresses\n" +"about statically and dynamically registered services. The last options is <b>Becomes DA Server</b>. This is a cache server for service\n" "answers.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/slp-server/helps.rb:85 -msgid "" -"<p>With <b>Expert Settings</b>, access all options available in /etc/slp." -"conf.</p>" +msgid "<p>With <b>Expert Settings</b>, access all options available in /etc/slp.conf.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/slp-server/helps.rb:88 msgid "" -"Configuration files for static registration to SLP. With <b>Add</b>, create " -"a new empty file. With <b>Modify</b>,\n" -"change the values of any existing file. With <b>Delete</b>, it is possible " -"to delete files not owned by any package." +"Configuration files for static registration to SLP. With <b>Add</b>, create a new empty file. With <b>Modify</b>,\n" +"change the values of any existing file. With <b>Delete</b>, it is possible to delete files not owned by any package." msgstr "" #: src/include/slp-server/helps.rb:91 @@ -269,8 +261,7 @@ #. check for package openslp-server installed #: src/modules/SlpServer.rb:181 -msgid "" -"<p>To configure the SLP server, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" +msgid "<p>To configure the SLP server, the <b>%1</b> package must be installed.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/modules/SlpServer.rb:184 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/snapper.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/snapper.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/snapper.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -311,8 +311,7 @@ "<p>\n" "%2\n" "</p>\n" -"<p>Files existing in original snapshot will be copied to current system.\n" +"<p>Files existing in original snapshot will be copied to current system.</p>\n" "<p>Files that did not exist in the snapshot will be deleted.</p>Are you sure?" msgstr "" @@ -327,16 +326,10 @@ #: src/include/snapper/helps.rb:40 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Snapshots Configuration</big></b><p>\n" -"<p>The table shows a list of root filesystem snapshots. There are three " -"types\n" -"of snapshots, <b>single</b>, <b>pre</b> and <b>post</b>. Single snapshots " -"are\n" -"used for storing the file system state in a certain time, while Pre and Post " -"are used to define the changes done by special operation performed between " -"taking those two snapshots. Pre and Post snapshots are coupled together in " -"the table.</p>\n" -"<p>Select a snapshot or snapshot couple and click <b>Show Changes</b> to see " -"the\n" +"<p>The table shows a list of root filesystem snapshots. There are three types\n" +"of snapshots, <b>single</b>, <b>pre</b> and <b>post</b>. Single snapshots are\n" +"used for storing the file system state in a certain time, while Pre and Post are used to define the changes done by special operation performed between taking those two snapshots. Pre and Post snapshots are coupled together in the table.</p>\n" +"<p>Select a snapshot or snapshot couple and click <b>Show Changes</b> to see the\n" "new file system changes in the specified snapshot.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -345,15 +338,10 @@ msgid "" "<p><b><big>Snapshot Overview</big></b><p>\n" "<p>\n" -"The tree shows all the files that were modified between creating the first " -"('pre') and second ('post') snapshot. On the right side, you see the " -"description generated when the first snapshot was created and the time of " -"creation for both snapshots.\n" +"The tree shows all the files that were modified between creating the first ('pre') and second ('post') snapshot. On the right side, you see the description generated when the first snapshot was created and the time of creation for both snapshots.\n" "</p>\n" "<p>\n" -"When a file is selected in the tree, you see the changes done to it. By " -"default, changes between selected coupled snapshots are shown, but it is " -"possible to compare the file with different versions.\n" +"When a file is selected in the tree, you see the changes done to it. By default, changes between selected coupled snapshots are shown, but it is possible to compare the file with different versions.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -362,13 +350,10 @@ msgid "" "<p><b><big>Snapshot Overview</big></b><p>\n" "<p>\n" -"The tree shows all the files that differ in a selected snapshot and the " -"current system. On the right side, you see the snapshot description and time " -"of its creation.\n" +"The tree shows all the files that differ in a selected snapshot and the current system. On the right side, you see the snapshot description and time of its creation.\n" "</p>\n" "<p>\n" -"When a file is selected in the tree, you can see the its difference between " -"snapshot version and current system.\n" +"When a file is selected in the tree, you can see the its difference between snapshot version and current system.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/sound.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/sound.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/sound.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -64,9 +64,7 @@ #. - for unknown parameter names #. help text for unknownd parameters; do not translate 'show' #: src/clients/sound.rb:121 -msgid "" -"Value of the specific module parameter. Use the 'show' command to see a list " -"of allowed parameters." +msgid "Value of the specific module parameter. Use the 'show' command to see a list of allowed parameters." msgstr "" #. translators: command line help text for volume action @@ -77,9 +75,7 @@ #. - for unknown parameter names #. help text; do not translate 'channels' as command name #: src/clients/sound.rb:137 -msgid "" -"Value of the specific channel (0-100). Use the 'channels' command to see a " -"list of available channels." +msgid "Value of the specific channel (0-100). Use the 'channels' command to see a list of available channels." msgstr "" #. translators: command line help text for modules action @@ -528,10 +524,8 @@ #. help text - mixer setting #: src/include/sound/mixer.rb:377 msgid "" -"<P>With this dialog you can set volume for each channel of the selected " -"sound card. \n" -"Press <B>Next</B> to save your volume settings, press <B>Back</B> to restore " -"the original settings.</P>" +"<P>With this dialog you can set volume for each channel of the selected sound card. \n" +"Press <B>Next</B> to save your volume settings, press <B>Back</B> to restore the original settings.</P>" msgstr "" #. dialog header, %1 = card id (number), %2 = name @@ -1020,16 +1014,14 @@ #: src/include/sound/texts.rb:273 msgid "" -"<p>The sound device with index 0 is the default device used by system and " -"applications.\n" +"<p>The sound device with index 0 is the default device used by system and applications.\n" "Use <b>Other</b> to set the selected sound device as the primary device.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/sound/texts.rb:276 msgid "" "The applications which use OSS (Open Sound System) can use the software\n" -"mixer by using aoss wrapper. Use command <tt>aoss <application></tt> " -"to\n" +"mixer by using aoss wrapper. Use command <tt>aoss <application></tt> to\n" "start the application." msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/squid.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/squid.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/squid.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -555,9 +555,7 @@ #. Cache Dialog #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:70 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Refresh Patterns</b> define how Squid treats the objects in the cache." -"</p>\n" +msgid "<p><b>Refresh Patterns</b> define how Squid treats the objects in the cache.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:73 @@ -587,9 +585,7 @@ #. Cache 2 Dialog #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:88 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Cache memory</b> defines the ideal amount of memory to be used for " -"objects.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Cache memory</b> defines the ideal amount of memory to be used for objects.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:91 @@ -616,11 +612,9 @@ #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:105 msgid "" -"<p><b>Cache Replacement Policy</b> determines which objects are to be " -"replaced\n" +"<p><b>Cache Replacement Policy</b> determines which objects are to be replaced\n" "when disk space is needed.\n" -"<b>Memory Replacement Policy</b> specifies the policy for object replacement " -"in\n" +"<b>Memory Replacement Policy</b> specifies the policy for object replacement in\n" "memory when space for new objects is not available.\n" "Policies could be:\n" "<table>\n" @@ -646,50 +640,40 @@ #. Cache Directory #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:132 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Directory Name</b> defines a top-level directory where cache swap " -"files will be stored.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Directory Name</b> defines a top-level directory where cache swap files will be stored.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:135 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Size</b> defines the amount of disk space (in MB) to use under this " -"directory.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Size</b> defines the amount of disk space (in MB) to use under this directory.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:138 msgid "" -"<p><b>Level 1 Directories</b> defines a number of first-level " -"subdirectories, \n" +"<p><b>Level 1 Directories</b> defines a number of first-level subdirectories, \n" "which will be created under the <b>Directory Name</b> directory.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:141 msgid "" -"<p><b>Level 2 Directories</b> defines a number of second-level " -"subdirectories,\n" +"<p><b>Level 2 Directories</b> defines a number of second-level subdirectories,\n" "which will be created under each first-level directory.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. ACL Groups #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:145 -msgid "" -"<p>Access to the Squid server can be controlled via <b>ACL Groups</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Access to the Squid server can be controlled via <b>ACL Groups</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:148 msgid "" -"<p><b>ACL Group</b> has various types and the description of ACL Group " -"depends\n" +"<p><b>ACL Group</b> has various types and the description of ACL Group depends\n" "on the particular type.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:151 msgid "" -"<p>In the <b>Access Control</b> table, access can be denied or allowed to " -"ACL Groups.\n" -"If there are more ACL Groups in one line, it means that access will be " -"allowed\n" +"<p>In the <b>Access Control</b> table, access can be denied or allowed to ACL Groups.\n" +"If there are more ACL Groups in one line, it means that access will be allowed\n" "or denied to members who belong to all ACL Groups at the same time.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -701,24 +685,19 @@ #. Logging and Timeouts Dialog #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:160 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Access Log</b> defines the file in which client activities are logged." -"</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Access Log</b> defines the file in which client activities are logged.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:163 msgid "" -"<p><b>Cache Log</b> defines the file in which general information about " -"your\n" +"<p><b>Cache Log</b> defines the file in which general information about your\n" "cache's behavior is logged.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/helps.rb:166 msgid "" -"<p><b>Cache Store Log</b> defines the location of the transaction log of " -"all\n" -"objects that are stored in the object store, as well as the time when an " -"object\n" +"<p><b>Cache Store Log</b> defines the location of the transaction log of all\n" +"objects that are stored in the object store, as well as the time when an object\n" "gets deleted. This option can be left empty.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -886,8 +865,7 @@ #. test if changed ACL is used in other option (not managed by thid module) #: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:467 -msgid "" -"If you change the name of this ACL Group, these options might be affected: \n" +msgid "If you change the name of this ACL Group, these options might be affected: \n" msgstr "" #: src/include/squid/store_del.rb:474 @@ -1200,9 +1178,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:148 -msgid "" -"This refers to the destination domain, i.e. the source domain where the " -"origin server is located." +msgid "This refers to the destination domain, i.e. the source domain where the origin server is located." msgstr "" #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:155 @@ -1262,8 +1238,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:213 -msgid "" -"Matches the URL path minus any protocol, port, and host name information" +msgid "Matches the URL path minus any protocol, port, and host name information" msgstr "" #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:220 @@ -1315,9 +1290,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:278 -msgid "" -"A regular expression that matches the client's browser type based on the " -"user agent header." +msgid "A regular expression that matches the client's browser type based on the user agent header." msgstr "" #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:288 @@ -1325,9 +1298,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:300 -msgid "" -"Matches when the client's IP address has more than the specified number of " -"HTTP connections established." +msgid "Matches when the client's IP address has more than the specified number of HTTP connections established." msgstr "" #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:307 @@ -1348,8 +1319,7 @@ #: src/modules/SquidACL.rb:351 msgid "" -"Regular expression matching the mime type of the reply received by squid. " -"Can\n" +"Regular expression matching the mime type of the reply received by squid. Can\n" "be used to detect file download or some types of HTTP tunnelling requests.\n" msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/storage.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/storage.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/storage.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -507,8 +507,7 @@ #. normally the target is located on hard disks. Here no hard disks #. can be found. YaST2 cannot install. Update CD might have newer drivers. #: src/clients/inst_target_selection.rb:172 -msgid "" -"No disks found. Try using the update CD, if available, for installation." +msgid "No disks found. Try using the update CD, if available, for installation." msgstr "" #. There are several hard disks found. Linux is completely installed on @@ -938,8 +937,7 @@ "You have not assigned a swap partition. In most cases, we highly recommend \n" "to create and assign a swap partition.\n" "Swap partitions on your system are listed in the main window with the\n" -"type \"Linux Swap\". An assigned swap partition has the mount point \"swap" -"\".\n" +"type \"Linux Swap\". An assigned swap partition has the mount point \"swap\".\n" "You can assign more than one swap partition, if desired.\n" "\n" "Really use the setup without swap partition?\n" @@ -967,8 +965,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:516 msgid "" "If in doubt, better go back and mark this partition for\n" -"formatting, especially if it is assigned to one of the standard mount " -"points\n" +"formatting, especially if it is assigned to one of the standard mount points\n" "like /, /boot, /opt or /var.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1029,11 +1026,9 @@ #. popup text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_check_generated.rb:766 msgid "" -"The selected extended partition contains partitions which are currently " -"mounted:\n" +"The selected extended partition contains partitions which are currently mounted:\n" "%1\n" -"We *strongly* recommend to unmount these partitions before you delete the " -"extended partition.\n" +"We *strongly* recommend to unmount these partitions before you delete the extended partition.\n" "Choose Cancel unless you know exactly what you are doing.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1175,8 +1170,7 @@ "Normally, a file system to mount is identified in /etc/fstab\n" "by the device name. This identification can be changed so the file system \n" "to mount is found by searching for a UUID or a volume label. Not all file \n" -"systems can be mounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is " -"disabled, \n" +"systems can be mounted by UUID or a volume label. If an option is disabled, \n" "this is not possible.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1184,8 +1178,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_dialogs.rb:480 msgid "" "<p><b>Volume Label:</b>\n" -"The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually " -"makes sense only \n" +"The name entered in this field is used as the volume label. This usually makes sense only \n" "when you activate the option for mounting by volume label.\n" "A volume label cannot contain the / character or spaces.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1378,8 +1371,7 @@ msgid "" "The selected device contains partitions that are currently mounted:\n" "%1\n" -"We *strongly* recommended to unmount these partitions before deleting the " -"partition table.\n" +"We *strongly* recommended to unmount these partitions before deleting the partition table.\n" "Choose Cancel unless you know exactly what you are doing.\n" msgstr "" @@ -1506,8 +1498,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:708 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"This mount point corresponds to a temporary filesystem like /tmp or /var/" -"tmp.\n" +"This mount point corresponds to a temporary filesystem like /tmp or /var/tmp.\n" "If you leave the encryption password empty, the system will create\n" "a random password at system startup for you. This means, you will lose all\n" "data on these filesystems at system shutdown.\n" @@ -1520,8 +1511,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:723 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"If you forget your password, you will lose access to the data on your file " -"system.\n" +"If you forget your password, you will lose access to the data on your file system.\n" "Choose your password carefully. A combination of letters and numbers\n" "is recommended. To ensure the password was entered correctly,\n" "enter it twice.\n" @@ -1534,8 +1524,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:737 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"You must distinguish between uppercase and lowercase. A password should have " -"at\n" +"You must distinguish between uppercase and lowercase. A password should have at\n" "least %1 characters and, as a rule, not contain any special characters\n" "(e.g., letters with accents or umlauts).\n" "</p>\n" @@ -1573,8 +1562,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_helptexts.rb:159 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"If the encrypted file system does not contain any system file and therefore " -"is\n" +"If the encrypted file system does not contain any system file and therefore is\n" "not needed for the update, you may select <b>Skip</b>. In this case, the\n" "file system is not accessed during update.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -1675,8 +1663,7 @@ #. error popup text #: src/include/partitioning/custom_part_lib.rb:259 -msgid "" -"Invalid character in mount point. Do not use \"`'!\"%#\" in a mount point." +msgid "Invalid character in mount point. Do not use \"`'!\"%#\" in a mount point." msgstr "" #. error popup text @@ -2193,8 +2180,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-dialogs.rb:114 msgid "" "<p>If you want to encrypt all data on the\n" -"volume, select <b>Encrypt Device</b>. Changing the encryption on an " -"existing\n" +"volume, select <b>Encrypt Device</b>. Changing the encryption on an existing\n" "volume will delete all data on it.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -3135,8 +3121,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-loop-dialogs.rb:36 msgid "" "\n" -"<p><b>Path Name of Loop File:</b><br>This must be an absolute path to the " -"file\n" +"<p><b>Path Name of Loop File:</b><br>This must be an absolute path to the file\n" "containing the data for the encrypted loop device to set up.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -3401,8 +3386,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:491 msgid "" "<p>Enter the size as well as the number and size\n" -"of stripes for the new logical volume. The number of stripes cannot be " -"higher\n" +"of stripes for the new logical volume. The number of stripes cannot be higher\n" "than the number of physical volumes of the volume group.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -3448,8 +3432,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:778 msgid "" "<p>You can declare the logical volume as a <b>Normal Volume</b>.\n" -"This is the default and means plain LVM Volumes like all volumes were before " -"the feature of <b>Thin Provisioning</b> existed.\n" +"This is the default and means plain LVM Volumes like all volumes were before the feature of <b>Thin Provisioning</b> existed.\n" "If in doubt this is most probably the right choice</p>" msgstr "" @@ -3457,16 +3440,14 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:787 msgid "" "<p>You can declare the logical volume as a <b>Thin Pool</b>.\n" -"This means <b>Thin Volumes</b> allocate their needed space on demand from " -"such a pool.</p>" +"This means <b>Thin Volumes</b> allocate their needed space on demand from such a pool.</p>" msgstr "" #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-lvm-dialogs.rb:794 msgid "" "<p>You can declare the logical volume as a <b>Thin Volume</b>.\n" -"This means the volume allocates needed space on demand from a <b>Thin Pool.</p>" +"This means the volume allocates needed space on demand from a <b>Thin Pool</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. heading for frame @@ -3521,8 +3502,7 @@ msgid "" "There are not enough suitable unused devices to create a volume group.\n" "\n" -"To use LVM, at least one unused partition of type 0x8e (or 0x83) or one " -"unused\n" +"To use LVM, at least one unused partition of type 0x8e (or 0x83) or one unused\n" "RAID device is required. Change your partition table accordingly." msgstr "" @@ -3738,9 +3718,7 @@ #. fallback dialog content #: src/include/partitioning/ep-nfs.rb:55 -msgid "" -"NFS configuration is not available. Check yast2-nfs-client package " -"installation." +msgid "NFS configuration is not available. Check yast2-nfs-client package installation." msgstr "" #. heading @@ -3770,18 +3748,15 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:87 msgid "" "<p><b>RAID 0:</b> This level increases your disk performance.\n" -"There is <b>NO</b> redundancy in this mode. If one of the drives crashes, " -"data recovery will not be possible.</p>\n" +"There is <b>NO</b> redundancy in this mode. If one of the drives crashes, data recovery will not be possible.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. helptext #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:95 msgid "" "<p><b>RAID 1:</b> <br>This mode has the best redundancy. It can be\n" -"used with two or more disks. This mode maintains an exact copy of all data " -"on all\n" -"disks. As long as at least one disk is still working, no data is lost. The " -"partitions\n" +"used with two or more disks. This mode maintains an exact copy of all data on all\n" +"disks. As long as at least one disk is still working, no data is lost. The partitions\n" "used for this type of RAID should have approximately the same size.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -3789,10 +3764,8 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:106 msgid "" "<p><b>RAID 5:</b> <br>This mode combines management of a larger number\n" -"of disks and still maintains some redundancy. This mode can be used on three " -"disks or more.\n" -"If one disk fails, all data is still intact. If two disks fail " -"simultaneously, all data is lost</p>\n" +"of disks and still maintains some redundancy. This mode can be used on three disks or more.\n" +"If one disk fails, all data is still intact. If two disks fail simultaneously, all data is lost</p>\n" msgstr "" #. helptext @@ -3807,10 +3780,8 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:126 msgid "" "<p>Add partitions to your RAID. According to\n" -"the RAID type, the usable disk size is the sum of these partitions (RAID0), " -"the size\n" -"of the smallest partition (RAID 1), or (N-1)*smallest partition (RAID 5).\n" +"the RAID type, the usable disk size is the sum of these partitions (RAID0), the size\n" +"of the smallest partition (RAID 1), or (N-1)*smallest partition (RAID 5).</p>\n" msgstr "" #. helptext @@ -3872,10 +3843,8 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:338 msgid "" "<p><b>Chunk Size:</b><br>It is the smallest \"atomic\" mass\n" -"of data that can be written to the devices. A reasonable chunk size for RAID " -"5 is 128 kB. For RAID 0,\n" -"32 kB is a good starting point. For RAID 1, the chunk size does not affect " -"the array very much.</p>\n" +"of data that can be written to the devices. A reasonable chunk size for RAID 5 is 128 kB. For RAID 0,\n" +"32 kB is a good starting point. For RAID 1, the chunk size does not affect the array very much.</p>\n" msgstr "" #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:346 @@ -3886,8 +3855,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-raid-dialogs.rb:353 msgid "" "The parity algorithm to use with RAID5/6.\n" -"Left-symmetric is the one that offers maximum performance on typical disks " -"with rotating platters.\n" +"Left-symmetric is the one that offers maximum performance on typical disks with rotating platters.\n" msgstr "" #. helptext @@ -4150,11 +4118,9 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Default Mount by</b> gives the mount by\n" "method for newly created file systems. <i>Device Name</i> uses the kernel\n" -"device name, which is not persistent. <i>Device ID</i> and <i>Device Path\n" +"device name, which is not persistent. <i>Device ID</i> and <i>Device Path</i>\n" "use names generated by udev from hardware information. These should be\n" -"persistent but unfortunately this is not always true. Finally <i>UUID</i> " -"and\n" +"persistent but unfortunately this is not always true. Finally <i>UUID</i> and\n" "<i>Volume Label</i> use the file systems UUID and label.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -4169,9 +4135,7 @@ #: src/include/partitioning/ep-settings.rb:217 msgid "" "<p><b>Alignment of Newly Created Partitions</b>\n" -"determines how created partitions are aligned. <b>cylinder</b> is the " -"traditional alignment at cylinder boundaries of the disk. <b>optimal</b> " -"aligns the \n" +"determines how created partitions are aligned. <b>cylinder</b> is the traditional alignment at cylinder boundaries of the disk. <b>optimal</b> aligns the \n" "partitions for best performance according to hints provided by the Linux \n" "kernel or tries to be compatible with Windows Vista and Win 7.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -4420,8 +4384,7 @@ #: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:316 msgid "" "<p>This dialog is for defining classes for the raid devices\n" -"contained in the raid. Available classes are A, B, C, D and E but for many " -"cases\n" +"contained in the raid. Available classes are A, B, C, D and E but for many cases\n" "fewer classes are needed (e.g. only A and B). </p>" msgstr "" @@ -4429,12 +4392,9 @@ #: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:325 msgid "" "<p>You can put a device into a class by right-clicking on the\n" -"device and choosing the appropriate class from context menu. By pressing " -"the \n" -"Ctrl or Shift key you can select multiple devices and put them into a class " -"in\n" -"one step. One can also use the buttons labeled \"%1\" to \"%2\" to put " -"currently \n" +"device and choosing the appropriate class from context menu. By pressing the \n" +"Ctrl or Shift key you can select multiple devices and put them into a class in\n" +"one step. One can also use the buttons labeled \"%1\" to \"%2\" to put currently \n" "selected devices into this class.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -4457,8 +4417,7 @@ msgid "" "<b>Interleaved</b> uses first device of class A, then first device of \n" "class B, then all the following classes with assigned devices. Then the \n" -"second device of class A, the second device of class B, and so on will " -"follow." +"second device of class A, the second device of class B, and so on will follow." msgstr "" #. dialog help text @@ -4473,16 +4432,12 @@ #: src/modules/DualMultiSelectionBox.rb:379 msgid "" "By pressing button \"<b>%1</b>\" you can select a file that contains\n" -"lines with a regular expression and a class name (e.g. \"sda.* A\"). All " -"devices that match \n" -"the regular expression will be put into the class on this line. The regular " -"expression is \n" +"lines with a regular expression and a class name (e.g. \"sda.* A\"). All devices that match \n" +"the regular expression will be put into the class on this line. The regular expression is \n" "matched against the kernel name (e.g. /dev/sda1), \n" -"the udev path name (e.g. /dev/disk/by-path/pci-0000:00:1f.2-scsi-0:0:0:0-" -"part1) and the\n" +"the udev path name (e.g. /dev/disk/by-path/pci-0000:00:1f.2-scsi-0:0:0:0-part1) and the\n" "the udev id (e.g. /dev/disk/by-id/ata-ST3500418AS_9VMN8X8L-part1). \n" -"The first match finally determines the class if a devices name matches more " -"then one\n" +"The first match finally determines the class if a devices name matches more then one\n" "regular expression.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -4517,8 +4472,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:297 msgid "" "<p><b>Tmpfs Size:</b>\n" -"Size may be either entered as a number followed by K,M,G for Kilo-, Mega- or " -"Gigabyte or\n" +"Size may be either entered as a number followed by K,M,G for Kilo-, Mega- or Gigabyte or\n" "as a number followed by a percent sign meaning percentage of memory.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -4548,8 +4502,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:485 msgid "" "<p><b>Mount Read-Only:</b>\n" -"Writing to the file system is not possible. Default is false. During " -"installation\n" +"Writing to the file system is not possible. Default is false. During installation\n" "the file system is always mounted read-write.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -4588,10 +4541,8 @@ "<p><b>Do Not Mount at System Start-up:</b>\n" "The file system is not automatically mounted when the system starts.\n" "An entry in /etc/fstab is created and the file system is mounted\n" -"with the appropriate options when the command <tt>mount <mount point>\n" -"is entered (<mount point> is the directory to which the file system is " -"mounted). Default is false.</p>\n" +"with the appropriate options when the command <tt>mount <mount point></tt>\n" +"is entered (<mount point> is the directory to which the file system is mounted). Default is false.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. button text @@ -4620,10 +4571,8 @@ "<tt>journal</tt> -- All data is committed to the journal prior to being\n" "written into the main file system. Highest performance impact.<br>\n" "<tt>ordered</tt> -- All data is forced directly out to the main file system\n" -"prior to its metadata being committed to the journal. Medium performance " -"impact.<br>\n" -"<tt>writeback</tt> -- Data ordering is not preserved. No performance impact." -"</p>\n" +"prior to its metadata being committed to the journal. Medium performance impact.<br>\n" +"<tt>writeback</tt> -- Data ordering is not preserved. No performance impact.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. button text @@ -4656,17 +4605,14 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:647 -msgid "" -"Invalid characters in arbitrary option value. Do not use spaces or tabs. Try " -"again." +msgid "Invalid characters in arbitrary option value. Do not use spaces or tabs. Try again." msgstr "" #. help text, richtext format #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:651 msgid "" "<p><b>Arbitrary Option Value:</b>\n" -"In this field, type any legal mount option allowed in the fourth field of /" -"etc/fstab.\n" +"In this field, type any legal mount option allowed in the fourth field of /etc/fstab.\n" "Multiple options are separated by commas.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -4691,8 +4637,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:706 msgid "" "<p><b>Codepage for Short FAT Names:</b>\n" -"This codepage is used for converting to shortname characters on FAT file " -"systems.</p>\n" +"This codepage is used for converting to shortname characters on FAT file systems.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. label text @@ -4704,8 +4649,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:726 msgid "" "<p><b>Number of FATs:</b>\n" -"Specify the number of file allocation tables in the file system. The default " -"is 2.</p>" +"Specify the number of file allocation tables in the file system. The default is 2.</p>" msgstr "" #. label text @@ -4717,9 +4661,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:746 msgid "" "<p><b>FAT Size:</b>\n" -"Specifies the type of file allocation tables used (12, 16, or 32-bit). If " -"auto is specified, YaST will automatically select the value most suitable " -"for the file system size.</p>\n" +"Specifies the type of file allocation tables used (12, 16, or 32-bit). If auto is specified, YaST will automatically select the value most suitable for the file system size.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. label text @@ -4748,8 +4690,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:787 msgid "" "<p><b>Hash Function:</b>\n" -"This specifies the name of the hash function to use to sort the file names " -"in directories.</p>\n" +"This specifies the name of the hash function to use to sort the file names in directories.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. label text @@ -4761,10 +4702,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:803 msgid "" "<p><b>FS Revision:</b>\n" -"This option defines the reiserfs format revision to use. '3.5' is for " -"backwards compatibility with kernels of the 2.2.x series. '3.6' is more " -"recent, but can only be used with kernel versions greater than or equal to " -"2.4.</p>\n" +"This option defines the reiserfs format revision to use. '3.5' is for backwards compatibility with kernels of the 2.2.x series. '3.6' is more recent, but can only be used with kernel versions greater than or equal to 2.4.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. label text @@ -4777,9 +4715,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:823 msgid "" "<p><b>Block Size:</b>\n" -"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 512, 1024, " -"2048 and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the standard block size " -"of 4096 is used.</p>\n" +"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 512, 1024, 2048 and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the standard block size of 4096 is used.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. label text @@ -4805,8 +4741,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:875 msgid "" "<p><b>Percentage of Inode Space:</b>\n" -"The option \"Percentage of Inode Space\" specifies the maximum percentage of " -"space in the file system that can be allocated to inodes.</p>\n" +"The option \"Percentage of Inode Space\" specifies the maximum percentage of space in the file system that can be allocated to inodes.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. label text @@ -4818,8 +4753,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:890 msgid "" "<p><b>Inode Aligned:</b>\n" -"The option \"Inode Aligned\" is used to specify whether inode allocation is " -"or\n" +"The option \"Inode Aligned\" is used to specify whether inode allocation is or\n" "is not aligned. By default inodes are aligned, which\n" "is usually more efficient than unaligned access.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -4841,8 +4775,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:934 msgid "" "<p><b>Log Size</b>\n" -"Set the log size (in megabytes). If auto, the default is 40% of the " -"aggregate size.</p>\n" +"Set the log size (in megabytes). If auto, the default is 40% of the aggregate size.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. label text @@ -4875,9 +4808,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:987 msgid "" "<p><b>Block Size:</b>\n" -"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 1024, 2048, " -"and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the block size is determined " -"by the file system size and the expected use of the file system.</p>\n" +"Specify the size of blocks in bytes. Valid block size values are 1024, 2048, and 4096 bytes per block. If auto is selected, the block size is determined by the file system size and the expected use of the file system.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. label text @@ -4894,8 +4825,7 @@ "bytes-per-inode ratio, the fewer inodes will be created. Generally, this\n" "value should not be smaller than the block size of the file system, or else\n" "too many inodes will be created. It is not possible to expand the number of\n" -"inodes on a file system after its creation. So be sure to enter a " -"reasonable\n" +"inodes on a file system after its creation. So be sure to enter a reasonable\n" "value for this parameter.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -4914,11 +4844,7 @@ #. xgettext: no-c-format #. help text, richtext format #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1033 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Percentage of Blocks Reserved for root:</b> Specify the percentage of " -"blocks reserved for the super user. The default is computed so that normally " -"1 Gig is reserved. Upper limit for reserved default is 5.0, lowest reserved " -"default is 0.1.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Percentage of Blocks Reserved for root:</b> Specify the percentage of blocks reserved for the super user. The default is computed so that normally 1 Gig is reserved. Upper limit for reserved default is 5.0, lowest reserved default is 0.1.</p>" msgstr "" #. checkbox text @@ -4954,8 +4880,7 @@ #: src/modules/FileSystems.rb:1103 msgid "" "<p><b>No Journal:</b>\n" -"Suppressed use of journaling on filesystem. Only activate this when you " -"really\n" +"Suppressed use of journaling on filesystem. Only activate this when you really\n" "know what you are doing.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -5140,8 +5065,7 @@ #. TRANSLATORS: error popup #: src/modules/Storage.rb:5177 -msgid "" -"Partitions cannot be created since other partitions on the disk are used." +msgid "Partitions cannot be created since other partitions on the disk are used." msgstr "" #: src/modules/Storage.rb:5203 @@ -5436,8 +5360,7 @@ #: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:346 msgid "" "<b>Mount by</b> indicates how the file system\n" -"is mounted: (Kernel) by kernel name, (Label) by file system label, (UUID) " -"by\n" +"is mounted: (Kernel) by kernel name, (Label) by file system label, (UUID) by\n" "file system UUID, (ID) by device ID, and (Path) by device path.\n" msgstr "" @@ -5446,8 +5369,7 @@ msgid "" "A question mark (?) indicates that\n" "the file system is not listed in <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>. It is either mounted\n" -"manually or by some automount system. When changing settings for this " -"volume\n" +"manually or by some automount system. When changing settings for this volume\n" "YaST will not update <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>.\n" msgstr "" @@ -5462,8 +5384,7 @@ #: src/modules/StorageFields.rb:374 msgid "" "An asterisk (*) after the mount point\n" -"indicates a file system that is currently not mounted (for example, because " -"it\n" +"indicates a file system that is currently not mounted (for example, because it\n" "has the <tt>noauto</tt> option set in <tt>/etc/fstab</tt>)." msgstr "" @@ -5799,9 +5720,7 @@ #. enable snapshots for root volume if desired #. penalty for not having separate /home #: src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:4552 src/modules/StorageProposal.rb:5675 -msgid "" -"Resize impossible due to inconsistent file system. Try checking file system " -"under Windows." +msgid "Resize impossible due to inconsistent file system. Try checking file system under Windows." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: checkbox text Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/sudo.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/sudo.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/sudo.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -321,32 +321,28 @@ #: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:486 msgid "" "Host alias %1 is being used in one of the sudo rules.\n" -"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really " -"delete it?\n" +"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really delete it?\n" msgstr "" #. No alias name set so far #: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:549 msgid "" "User alias %1 is being used in one of the sudo rules.\n" -"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really " -"delete it?\n" +"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really delete it?\n" msgstr "" #. No alias name set so far #: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:612 msgid "" "RunAs alias %1 is being used in one of the sudo rules.\n" -"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really " -"delete it?\n" +"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really delete it?\n" msgstr "" #. No alias name set so far #: src/include/sudo/dialogs.rb:674 msgid "" "Command alias %1 is being used in one of the sudo rules.\n" -"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really " -"delete it?\n" +"Deleting it may result in an inconsistent sudo configuration file. Really delete it?\n" msgstr "" #. Read dialog help 1/2 @@ -406,10 +402,8 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:74 msgid "" "<b>RunAs</b> column is an\n" -"\toptional parameter, containing user name (or alias) whose access " -"privileges\n" -"\twill be used to run commands. <b>NOPASSWD</b> is a tag, determining " -"whether\n" +"\toptional parameter, containing user name (or alias) whose access privileges\n" +"\twill be used to run commands. <b>NOPASSWD</b> is a tag, determining whether\n" "\tusers need to authorize themselves before running commands.\n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -437,8 +431,7 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:97 msgid "" "<p>To edit existing rule, select an entry from the table and click on \n" -"\t<b>Edit</b> button. To delete selected entry, click on <b>Delete</b> " -"button.\n" +"\t<b>Edit</b> button. To delete selected entry, click on <b>Delete</b> button.\n" "\t</p> \n" "\t" msgstr "" @@ -446,11 +439,9 @@ #. Single User Specification help 1/4 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:104 msgid "" -"<p><b>User Name or Alias</b> may be specified by single username (e.g.foo), " -"group name prefixed\n" +"<p><b>User Name or Alias</b> may be specified by single username (e.g.foo), group name prefixed\n" "\twith '%' (e.g. %bar), or user alias name. If \n" -"\tkeyword 'ALL' is used, it stands for any user. Select from existing users, " -"groups and aliases \n" +"\tkeyword 'ALL' is used, it stands for any user. Select from existing users, groups and aliases \n" "\tin drop-down menu, or enter your own value. \n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -458,14 +449,10 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:112 msgid "" -"<p><b>Hostname or Alias</b> entry consists of either hostname(e.g. www." -"example.com), single IP \n" -"\taddress (e.g. 192.168.0.1), IP address combined with netmask, or host " -"alias. If commands may be\n" -"\trun on any host, use keyword 'ALL'. Hostname or IP address is matched " -"against your own hostname\n" -"\tor IP address, so if you don't intend to share one /etc/sudoers file " -"between multiple machines, \n" +"<p><b>Hostname or Alias</b> entry consists of either hostname(e.g. www.example.com), single IP \n" +"\taddress (e.g. 192.168.0.1), IP address combined with netmask, or host alias. If commands may be\n" +"\trun on any host, use keyword 'ALL'. Hostname or IP address is matched against your own hostname\n" +"\tor IP address, so if you don't intend to share one /etc/sudoers file between multiple machines, \n" "\t'ALL' or 'localhost' entry will be sufficient for almost all purposes. \n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -474,15 +461,11 @@ #. Single User Specification help 2/4 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:122 msgid "" -"<p><b>RunAs Username or Alias</b> is an optional parameter specifying an " -"user, \n" +"<p><b>RunAs Username or Alias</b> is an optional parameter specifying an user, \n" "\twhose access privileges \n" -"\twill be used to execute particular command. If empty, user <b>root</b> is " -"the default\n" -"\tone. It can be again single username, groupname prefixed with '%' or " -"run_as alias name\n" -"\tSelect from existing users, groups and aliases in drop-down menu, or enter " -"your own value.\n" +"\twill be used to execute particular command. If empty, user <b>root</b> is the default\n" +"\tone. It can be again single username, groupname prefixed with '%' or run_as alias name\n" +"\tSelect from existing users, groups and aliases in drop-down menu, or enter your own value.\n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" msgstr "" @@ -490,10 +473,8 @@ #. Single User Specification help 3/4 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:132 msgid "" -"<p><b>No Password</b> is an optional tag. Normally, users have to " -"authenticate\n" -"\tthemselves (i.e. supply their own password, not root's one) before running " -"particular \n" +"<p><b>No Password</b> is an optional tag. Normally, users have to authenticate\n" +"\tthemselves (i.e. supply their own password, not root's one) before running particular \n" "\tcommand. Set No Password tag to 'Yes' if you want to\n" "\tdisable this authentication\n" "\t</p>\n" @@ -504,10 +485,8 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:141 msgid "" "<p><b>Commands to Run</b> table is a list of commands (optionally with\n" -"\tparameters), directories and command aliases that particular user will be " -"allowed \n" -"\tto run. If a directory name is used, any command in that directory can be " -"run. \n" +"\tparameters), directories and command aliases that particular user will be allowed \n" +"\tto run. If a directory name is used, any command in that directory can be run. \n" "\tAgain, keyword 'ALL' stands for any command, so use it with care.\n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -515,10 +494,8 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:149 msgid "" -"To add a new command, click on <b>Add</b> button, fill in command name with " -"optional\n" -"\tparameters and click <b>OK</b>. To remove command, select appropriate " -"entry from the table\n" +"To add a new command, click on <b>Add</b> button, fill in command name with optional\n" +"\tparameters and click <b>OK</b>. To remove command, select appropriate entry from the table\n" "\tand click on <b>Delete</b> button.\n" "\t" msgstr "" @@ -527,10 +504,8 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:156 msgid "" "<p><b><big>User Aliases</big></b><br>\n" -"\tIn this dialog, you can configure user aliases. User alias is a set of " -"users that is given\n" -"\tan unique name. This name is later used to refer to all users in this set " -"in sudo configuration. \n" +"\tIn this dialog, you can configure user aliases. User alias is a set of users that is given\n" +"\tan unique name. This name is later used to refer to all users in this set in sudo configuration. \n" "\t</p> \n" "\t" msgstr "" @@ -538,8 +513,7 @@ #. User Aliases help 2/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:164 msgid "" -"<p>To add a new user alias, click on <b>Add</b> button and fill in " -"appropriate entries. \n" +"<p>To add a new user alias, click on <b>Add</b> button and fill in appropriate entries. \n" "\tAlias name and list of users in the alias must not be empty. \n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -548,8 +522,7 @@ #. User Aliases help 3/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:171 msgid "" -"<p>To edit existing user alias, select an entry from the table and click on " -"<b>Edit</b>\n" +"<p>To edit existing user alias, select an entry from the table and click on <b>Edit</b>\n" "\tbutton. To delete selected entry, click on <b>Delete</b> button. \n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -559,10 +532,8 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:178 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Host Aliases</big></b><br>\n" -"\tIn this dialog, you can configure host aliases. Host alias is a set of " -"hosts that is given\n" -"\tan unique name. This name is later used to refer to all hosts in this set " -"in sudo configuration. \n" +"\tIn this dialog, you can configure host aliases. Host alias is a set of hosts that is given\n" +"\tan unique name. This name is later used to refer to all hosts in this set in sudo configuration. \n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" msgstr "" @@ -570,8 +541,7 @@ #. Host Aliases help 2/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:186 msgid "" -"<p>To add a new host alias, click on <b>Add</b> button and fill in " -"appropriate entries. \n" +"<p>To add a new host alias, click on <b>Add</b> button and fill in appropriate entries. \n" "\tAlias name and list of hosts in the alias must not be empty. \n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -580,8 +550,7 @@ #. Host Aliases help 3/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:193 msgid "" -"<p>To edit existing host alias, select an entry from the table and click on " -"<b>Edit</b>\n" +"<p>To edit existing host alias, select an entry from the table and click on <b>Edit</b>\n" "\tbutton. To delete selected entry, click on <b>Delete</b> button. \n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -591,10 +560,8 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:200 msgid "" "<p><b><big>RunAs Aliases</big></b><br>\n" -"\tIn this dialog, you can configure RunAs aliases. RunAs alias is a set of " -"users that is given\n" -"\tan unique name. This name is later used to refer to all users in this set " -"in sudo configuration. \n" +"\tIn this dialog, you can configure RunAs aliases. RunAs alias is a set of users that is given\n" +"\tan unique name. This name is later used to refer to all users in this set in sudo configuration. \n" "\t</p> \n" "\t" msgstr "" @@ -602,8 +569,7 @@ #. RunAs Aliases help 2/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:208 msgid "" -"<p>To add a new RunAs alias, click on <b>Add</b> button and fill in " -"appropriate entries. \n" +"<p>To add a new RunAs alias, click on <b>Add</b> button and fill in appropriate entries. \n" "\tAlias name and list of users in the alias must not be empty. \n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -612,8 +578,7 @@ #. RunAs Aliases help 3/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:215 msgid "" -"<p>To edit existing RunAs alias, select an entry from the table and click on " -"<b>Edit</b>\n" +"<p>To edit existing RunAs alias, select an entry from the table and click on <b>Edit</b>\n" "\tbutton. To delete selected entry, click on <b>Delete</b> button. \n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -623,10 +588,8 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:222 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Command Aliases</big></b><br>\n" -"\tIn this dialog, you can configure command aliases. Command alias is a set " -"of commands \n" -"\t(optionally with parameters) that is given an unique name. This name is " -"then used to refer\n" +"\tIn this dialog, you can configure command aliases. Command alias is a set of commands \n" +"\t(optionally with parameters) that is given an unique name. This name is then used to refer\n" "\tto all commands in this set in sudo configuration. \n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -635,8 +598,7 @@ #. Command Aliases help 2/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:231 msgid "" -"<p>To add a new command alias, click on <b>Add</b> button and fill in " -"appropriate entries. \n" +"<p>To add a new command alias, click on <b>Add</b> button and fill in appropriate entries. \n" "\tAlias name and list of commands in the alias must not be empty. \n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -645,8 +607,7 @@ #. Command Aliases help 3/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:238 msgid "" -"<p>To edit existing command alias, select an entry from the table and click " -"on <b>Edit</b>\n" +"<p>To edit existing command alias, select an entry from the table and click on <b>Edit</b>\n" "\tbutton. To delete selected entry, click on <b>Delete</b> button. \n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -656,11 +617,8 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:245 msgid "" "<p><b><big>User Alias</big></b><br>\n" -"\tUser alias consists of one or more users, system groups (prefixed with " -"'%') or other\n" -"\tuser aliases. It is given single name (must contain uppercase letters, " -"numbers and underscore\tonly), which is then used to refer to all users in " -"this alias.\n" +"\tUser alias consists of one or more users, system groups (prefixed with '%') or other\n" +"\tuser aliases. It is given single name (must contain uppercase letters, numbers and underscore\tonly), which is then used to refer to all users in this alias.\n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" msgstr "" @@ -669,12 +627,9 @@ #. Single User Alias Help 2/3 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:253 src/include/sudo/helps.rb:306 msgid "" -"<p>Enter unique name into <b>Alias Name</b> text entry. To add users or " -"groups to the\n" -"\talias, select user or group name from the drop-down menu and click on " -"<b>Add</b> button.\n" -"\tTo remove user from the alias, select appropriate entry from the table, " -"and click on\n" +"<p>Enter unique name into <b>Alias Name</b> text entry. To add users or groups to the\n" +"\talias, select user or group name from the drop-down menu and click on <b>Add</b> button.\n" +"\tTo remove user from the alias, select appropriate entry from the table, and click on\n" "\t<b>Remove</b> button. To finish the configuration, click <b>OK</b>.\n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -687,8 +642,7 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:262 src/include/sudo/helps.rb:292 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:315 src/include/sudo/helps.rb:346 msgid "" -"<b>Note:</b> Alias name must not be empty. Each alias must have at least one " -"member.\n" +"<b>Note:</b> Alias name must not be empty. Each alias must have at least one member.\n" "\t" msgstr "" @@ -696,14 +650,10 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:266 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Host Alias</big></b><br>\n" -"\tHost alias consists of one or more hostnames, single IP addresses, IP " -"addresses\n" -"\tcombined with netmask id dotted quad notation (e.g. " -"192.168.0.0/255.255.255.0) or\n" -"\tCIDR number of bits notation (e.g. 192.168.0.0/24), or other host aliases. " -"It is \n" -"\tgiven single name (must contain uppercase letters, numbers and underscore " -"only), which \n" +"\tHost alias consists of one or more hostnames, single IP addresses, IP addresses\n" +"\tcombined with netmask id dotted quad notation (e.g. 192.168.0.0/255.255.255.0) or\n" +"\tCIDR number of bits notation (e.g. 192.168.0.0/24), or other host aliases. It is \n" +"\tgiven single name (must contain uppercase letters, numbers and underscore only), which \n" "\tis then used to refer to all hosts in this alias.\n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -713,8 +663,7 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:277 msgid "" "<p>Enter unique name into <b>Alias Name</b> text entry. To add hosts to the\n" -"\talias, click on <b>Add</b> button. A pop-up window will appear, where you " -"can enter\n" +"\talias, click on <b>Add</b> button. A pop-up window will appear, where you can enter\n" "\tvalid hostname or IP address and then click <b>OK</b>.\n" "\t<p>\n" "\t" @@ -723,8 +672,7 @@ #. Single Host Alias Help 3/4 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:285 msgid "" -"To remove host from the alias, select appropriate entry from the table, and " -"click on\n" +"To remove host from the alias, select appropriate entry from the table, and click on\n" "\t<b>Remove</b> button. To finish the configuration, click <b>OK</b>.\n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -734,12 +682,9 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:296 msgid "" "<p><b><big>RunAs Alias</big></b><br>\n" -"\tRunAs alias is very similar to User Alias. It consists of one or more " -"users, system groups \n" -"\t(prefixed with '%') or other RunAs aliases. It is given single name (must " -"contain \n" -"\tuppercase letters, numbers and underscore only), which is then used to " -"refer to all users \n" +"\tRunAs alias is very similar to User Alias. It consists of one or more users, system groups \n" +"\t(prefixed with '%') or other RunAs aliases. It is given single name (must contain \n" +"\tuppercase letters, numbers and underscore only), which is then used to refer to all users \n" "\tin this alias.\n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -749,15 +694,11 @@ #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:319 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Command Alias</big></b><br>\n" -"\tCommand Alias is a list of one or more commands (with optional " -"parameters), directories, or\n" -"\tother command aliases. It is given single name (must contain uppercase " -"letters, numbers and\n" +"\tCommand Alias is a list of one or more commands (with optional parameters), directories, or\n" +"\tother command aliases. It is given single name (must contain uppercase letters, numbers and\n" "\tunderscore only), which is \n" -"\tthen used to refer to all commands in this alias. A command can optionally " -"have one or more\n" -"\tparameters specified. If so, users can run the command with these " -"parameters only. If a \n" +"\tthen used to refer to all commands in this alias. A command can optionally have one or more\n" +"\tparameters specified. If so, users can run the command with these parameters only. If a \n" "\tdirectory name is used, any command in that directory can be run. \n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -766,12 +707,9 @@ #. Single Command Alias Help 2/4 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:331 msgid "" -"<p>Enter unique name into <b>Alias Name</b> text entry. To add a new command " -"to the alias,\n" -"\tclick on <b>Add</b> button.A pop-up window will appear, where you can " -"enter command name\n" -"\t(or select one from file browser by clicking on <b>Browse</b> button. " -"Additionally, you can\n" +"<p>Enter unique name into <b>Alias Name</b> text entry. To add a new command to the alias,\n" +"\tclick on <b>Add</b> button.A pop-up window will appear, where you can enter command name\n" +"\t(or select one from file browser by clicking on <b>Browse</b> button. Additionally, you can\n" "\tspecify command parameters in <b>Parameters</b> text entry\n" "\t" msgstr "" @@ -779,8 +717,7 @@ #. Single Command Alias Help 3/4 #: src/include/sudo/helps.rb:339 msgid "" -"To remove command from the alias, select appropriate entry from the table, " -"and click on\n" +"To remove command from the alias, select appropriate entry from the table, and click on\n" "\t<b>Remove</b> button. To finish the configuration, click <b>OK</b>.\n" "\t</p>\n" "\t" @@ -793,8 +730,7 @@ #. m["no_passwd"] = (boolean) false; #. } #: src/modules/Sudo.rb:400 -msgid "" -"This rule is a system rule necessary for correct functionality of sudo.\n" +msgid "This rule is a system rule necessary for correct functionality of sudo.\n" msgstr "" #: src/modules/Sudo.rb:407 @@ -811,8 +747,7 @@ #. end Commands #: src/modules/Sudo.rb:545 -msgid "" -"All changes will be lost. Really quit sudo configuration without saving?" +msgid "All changes will be lost. Really quit sudo configuration without saving?" msgstr "" #. Error message Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/support.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/support.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/support.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -326,10 +326,8 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<p><b><big>Opening SUSE Support Center</big></b><br>\n" -"To start a Web browser that opens the SUSE Support Center Portal, use " -"<b>Open SUSE Support Center</b>.\n" -"You can then open a Service Request with Global Technical Support. Make sure " -"you write down\n" +"To start a Web browser that opens the SUSE Support Center Portal, use <b>Open SUSE Support Center</b>.\n" +"You can then open a Service Request with Global Technical Support. Make sure you write down\n" "the Service Request number to include in the supportconfig data upload.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -352,8 +350,7 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:90 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Supportconfig Options</big></b><br>\n" -"Select an option to override the defaults. You can use the default " -"settings,\n" +"Select an option to override the defaults. You can use the default settings,\n" "gather the most data or only gather a minimum amount of data." msgstr "" @@ -370,38 +367,31 @@ msgid "" "<p><b><big>Options</big></b><br>\n" "Collect additional information. Usually these options are not\n" -"necessary, but can be included if circumstances require more information.\n" +"necessary, but can be included if circumstances require more information.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Expert dialog help 1/1 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:108 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Default Options</b></big><br>\n" -"Select or deselect each of the data sets you would like to include in the " -"supportconfig tarball.</p>" +"Select or deselect each of the data sets you would like to include in the supportconfig tarball.</p>" msgstr "" #. Contact dialog help 1/4 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:112 msgid "" "<p><big><b>Contact Information</b></big><br>\n" -"Fill in each of the contact information fields that you would like to " -"include\n" -"in the supportconfig tarball. The fields are saved in the basic-environment." -"txt file.</p>" +"Fill in each of the contact information fields that you would like to include\n" +"in the supportconfig tarball. The fields are saved in the basic-environment.txt file.</p>" msgstr "" #. Contact dialog help 2/4 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:118 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Upload Information</big></b><br>\n" -"The upload target is the supportconfig tarball's destination URI. Supported " -"upload services include\n" -"ftp, http, https, scp. If you need to include the supportconfig tarball " -"filename in your upload target,\n" -"use the <i>tarball</i> keyword. This will get replaced with the actual " -"tarball filename.\n" +"The upload target is the supportconfig tarball's destination URI. Supported upload services include\n" +"ftp, http, https, scp. If you need to include the supportconfig tarball filename in your upload target,\n" +"use the <i>tarball</i> keyword. This will get replaced with the actual tarball filename.\n" "See <i>man supportconfig(1)</i> for further details.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -409,8 +399,7 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:126 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Upload Target Examples</big></b><br>\n" -"https://secure-www.novell.com/upload?appname=supportconfig&file=<i>tarball<br>\n" +"https://secure-www.novell.com/upload?appname=supportconfig&file=<i>tarball</i><br>\n" "ftp://ftp.novell.com/incoming<br>\n" "scp://central.server.foo.com/supportconfig/archives</p>" msgstr "" @@ -418,10 +407,8 @@ #. Contact dialog help 4/4 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:133 msgid "" -"<p><b>Note:</b> If you are uploading a supportconfig tarball to Global " -"Technical Support,\n" -"make sure you include the 11-digit service request number from your open " -"service request.\n" +"<p><b>Note:</b> If you are uploading a supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support,\n" +"make sure you include the 11-digit service request number from your open service request.\n" msgstr "" #. Collecting data dialkog help 1/1 @@ -435,16 +422,14 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:141 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Collected Data Review</big></b><br>\n" -"Review the data collected by supportconfig. If you do not want to share some " -"of the collected data,\n" +"Review the data collected by supportconfig. If you do not want to share some of the collected data,\n" "use <b>Remove from Data</b> and the selected file will be removed.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Configure1 dialog help 1/3 #: src/include/support/helps.rb:148 msgid "" -"<p><b><big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big><br>\n" +"<p><b><big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big></b><br>\n" "If you want to store a copy of the supportconfig tarball, select the target\n" "directory and make sure that this option is checked.\n" "<br></p>\n" @@ -455,8 +440,7 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:155 src/include/support/helps.rb:180 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Upload URL</big></b><br>\n" -"This option has the location to which the supportconfig tarball will be " -"uploaded\n" +"This option has the location to which the supportconfig tarball will be uploaded\n" "as default value.\n" "Change this value only in special cases.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -473,8 +457,7 @@ #: src/include/support/helps.rb:173 msgid "" -"<p><b><big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big><br>\n" +"<p><b><big>Upload supportconfig tarball to Global Technical Support</big></b><br>\n" "If you have already created the supportconfig tarball, write the full path\n" "into the <i>Package with log files</i> field.\n" "<br></p>\n" @@ -555,15 +538,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:57 -msgid "" -"System environment information, including sysctl and root's environment. env." -"txt" +msgid "System environment information, including sysctl and root's environment. env.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:60 -msgid "" -"Recursively gets *.conf files, along with various other configuration files " -"in /etc. etc.txt" +msgid "Recursively gets *.conf files, along with various other configuration files in /etc. etc.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:63 @@ -583,9 +562,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:75 -msgid "" -"Novell Linux User Management-related information, including a root DSE, UNIX " -"Config and workstation object searches. novell-lum.txt" +msgid "Novell Linux User Management-related information, including a root DSE, UNIX Config and workstation object searches. novell-lum.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:78 @@ -641,9 +618,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:117 -msgid "" -"Pluggable Authentication Module-related information, including user account " -"information. pam.txt" +msgid "Pluggable Authentication Module-related information, including user account information. pam.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:120 @@ -663,9 +638,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:132 -msgid "" -"System Activity Reporting-related information, including copies of the SAR " -"data files. sar.txt" +msgid "System Activity Reporting-related information, including copies of the SAR data files. sar.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:135 @@ -678,10 +651,8 @@ #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:141 msgid "" -"Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology-related information for " -"hard disks. WARNING: Some hard disk controllers and drives do not\n" -"behave nicely. Probing SMART data has been known to change file systems to " -"read only mode or even hang the server. Make sure probing SMART data\n" +"Self-Monitoring, Analysis, and Reporting Technology-related information for hard disks. WARNING: Some hard disk controllers and drives do not\n" +"behave nicely. Probing SMART data has been known to change file systems to read only mode or even hang the server. Make sure probing SMART data\n" "works in your environment before enabling this option. fs-smartmon.txt\n" msgstr "" @@ -714,21 +685,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:167 -msgid "" -"Tells supportconfig to search the file system for all eDirectory instances " -"files. If set, ADD_OPTION_FSLIST is automatically set as well. -e" +msgid "Tells supportconfig to search the file system for all eDirectory instances files. If set, ADD_OPTION_FSLIST is automatically set as well. -e" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:170 -msgid "" -"A full file list using find from the root of the filesytem. -L, fs-files.txt" +msgid "A full file list using find from the root of the filesytem. -L, fs-files.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:173 -msgid "" -"Includes the entire log file, including comments, instead of just " -"VAR_OPTION_LINE_COUNT lines of it. Additional rotated logs are included if " -"available. -l" +msgid "Includes the entire log file, including comments, instead of just VAR_OPTION_LINE_COUNT lines of it. Additional rotated logs are included if available. -l" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:176 @@ -736,21 +701,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:179 -msgid "" -"Normally all of the /var/log/YaST2/* logs are included. This option " -"minimizes the amount of each file retrieved." +msgid "Normally all of the /var/log/YaST2/* logs are included. This option minimizes the amount of each file retrieved." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:182 -msgid "" -"Runs an rpm -V on every installed RPM package. This takes some time to " -"complete. -v, rpm-verify.txt" +msgid "Runs an rpm -V on every installed RPM package. This takes some time to complete. -v, rpm-verify.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:185 -msgid "" -"Normally only the base SLP service types are listed. This option allows you " -"to query each of the discovered service types individually. -s, slp.txt" +msgid "Normally only the base SLP service types are listed. This option allows you to query each of the discovered service types individually. -s, slp.txt" msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:188 @@ -770,47 +729,33 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:200 -msgid "" -"The number of lines to include when getting a log file. Zero means get the " -"entire file." +msgid "The number of lines to include when getting a log file. Zero means get the entire file." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:203 -msgid "" -"The supportconfig tarball location. The first valid location in the list is " -"always used." +msgid "The supportconfig tarball location. The first valid location in the list is always used." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:206 -msgid "" -"The maximum number of /var/log/messages lines to get. Zero means get the " -"entire file." +msgid "The maximum number of /var/log/messages lines to get. Zero means get the entire file." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:209 -msgid "" -"The maximum number of heartbeat policy engine log files to include in the " -"supportconfig tarball." +msgid "The maximum number of heartbeat policy engine log files to include in the supportconfig tarball." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:212 -msgid "" -"The maximum number of SAR data files to include in the supportconfig tarball." +msgid "The maximum number of SAR data files to include in the supportconfig tarball." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:215 msgid "" -"When set to 1, supportconfig runs in quiet mode. This option is useful if " -"you\n" -"plan on running supportconfig regularly in a cron job for example. Set with -" -"Q." +"When set to 1, supportconfig runs in quiet mode. This option is useful if you\n" +"plan on running supportconfig regularly in a cron job for example. Set with -Q." msgstr "" #: src/include/support/supportconfig_conf.rb:218 -msgid "" -"Used to specify where the supportconfig tarball will be uploaded, when using " -"the -u srnum startup option. You can specify any FTP server that supports " -"anonymous uploads. The default is SUSE's public ftp server." +msgid "Used to specify where the supportconfig tarball will be uploaded, when using the -u srnum startup option. You can specify any FTP server that supports anonymous uploads. The default is SUSE's public ftp server." msgstr "" #. Initialization dialog caption Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/sysconfig.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/sysconfig.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/sysconfig.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -296,17 +296,13 @@ #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:819 msgid "" "<p>After you save your changes, this editor changes the variables in the\n" -"corresponding sysconfig file. Then it starts activation commands, which " -"changes the underlying configuration files, stops and starts daemons,\n" -"and runs low-level configuration tools so your configuration in sysconfig " -"takes effect.</p>\n" +"corresponding sysconfig file. Then it starts activation commands, which changes the underlying configuration files, stops and starts daemons,\n" +"and runs low-level configuration tools so your configuration in sysconfig takes effect.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. helptext for popup - part 2/2 #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:825 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Important:</b> You still can edit each individual configuration file " -"manually. The name of file is displayed in the variable description.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Important:</b> You still can edit each individual configuration file manually. The name of file is displayed in the variable description.</p>" msgstr "" #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:830 @@ -320,17 +316,12 @@ #. help rich text displayed after module start (1/2) #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:866 -msgid "" -"<P><B>System Configuration Editor</B></P><P>With the system configuration " -"editor, you can change some system settings. You can also use YaST to " -"configure your hardware and system settings.</P>" +msgid "<P><B>System Configuration Editor</B></P><P>With the system configuration editor, you can change some system settings. You can also use YaST to configure your hardware and system settings.</P>" msgstr "" #. help rich text displayed after module start (2/2) #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:870 -msgid "" -"<P><B>Note:</B> Descriptions are not translated because they are read " -"directly from configuration files.</P>" +msgid "<P><B>Note:</B> Descriptions are not translated because they are read directly from configuration files.</P>" msgstr "" #. push button label - displayed only in autoinstallation config mode @@ -360,9 +351,7 @@ #. help text in popup dialog #: src/include/sysconfig/complex.rb:951 -msgid "" -"The search results are displayed here. If you see the item you want, select " -"it then click \"Go to\". Otherwise, click \"Cancel\" to close this dialog." +msgid "The search results are displayed here. If you see the item you want, select it then click \"Go to\". Otherwise, click \"Cancel\" to close this dialog." msgstr "" #. push button label Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/tftp-server.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/tftp-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/tftp-server.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -81,9 +81,7 @@ #. dialog help text #: src/include/tftp-server/dialogs.rb:83 -msgid "" -"<p>Use this to enable a server for TFTP (trivial file transfer protocol). " -"The server will be started using xinetd.</p>" +msgid "<p>Use this to enable a server for TFTP (trivial file transfer protocol). The server will be started using xinetd.</p>" msgstr "" #. enlighten newbies, #102946 @@ -98,8 +96,7 @@ "<p><b>Boot Image Directory</b>:\n" "Specify the directory where served files are located. The usual value is\n" "<tt>/tftpboot</tt>. The directory will be created if it does not exist. \n" -"The server uses this as its root directory (using the <tt>-s</tt> option).\n" +"The server uses this as its root directory (using the <tt>-s</tt> option).</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Radio button label, disable TFTP server Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/tune.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/tune.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/tune.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -18,9 +18,7 @@ #. Command line help text for the hardware detection module, %1 is "hwinfo" #: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:49 -msgid "" -"Hardware Detection - this module does not support the command line " -"interface, use '%1' instead." +msgid "Hardware Detection - this module does not support the command line interface, use '%1' instead." msgstr "" #. translators: popup heading @@ -55,9 +53,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/hwinfo.rb:338 -msgid "" -"<P>You can save hardware information to a file. Click <B>Save to File</B> " -"and enter the filename.</P>" +msgid "<P>You can save hardware information to a file. Click <B>Save to File</B> and enter the filename.</P>" msgstr "" #. installation proposal header @@ -83,9 +79,7 @@ #. help text #: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:95 -msgid "" -"<P><B>Details</B></P><P>The details of the selected hardware component are " -"displayed here.</P>" +msgid "<P><B>Details</B></P><P>The details of the selected hardware component are displayed here.</P>" msgstr "" #. heading text, %1 is component name (e.g. "USB UHCI Root Hub") @@ -137,16 +131,12 @@ #. help text - part 1/3 #: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:180 -msgid "" -"<P><B>Detected Hardware</B><BR>This table contains all hardware components " -"detected in your system.</P>" +msgid "<P><B>Detected Hardware</B><BR>This table contains all hardware components detected in your system.</P>" msgstr "" #. help text - part 2/3 #: src/clients/inst_hwinfo.rb:184 -msgid "" -"<P><B>Details</B><BR>Select a component and press <B>Details</B> to see a " -"more detailed description of the component.</P>" +msgid "<P><B>Details</B><BR>Select a component and press <B>Details</B> to see a more detailed description of the component.</P>" msgstr "" #. help text - part 3/3 @@ -284,38 +274,27 @@ #. PCI ID help text #: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:411 -msgid "" -"<P>It is possible to add a PCI ID to a device driver to extend its internal " -"database of known supported devices.</P>" +msgid "<P>It is possible to add a PCI ID to a device driver to extend its internal database of known supported devices.</P>" msgstr "" #. PCI ID help text #: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:415 -msgid "" -"<P>PCI ID numbers are entered and displayed as hexadecimal numbers. <b>SysFS " -"Dir.</b> is the directory name in the /sys/bus/pci/drivers directory. If it " -"is empty, the driver name is used as the directory name.</P>" +msgid "<P>PCI ID numbers are entered and displayed as hexadecimal numbers. <b>SysFS Dir.</b> is the directory name in the /sys/bus/pci/drivers directory. If it is empty, the driver name is used as the directory name.</P>" msgstr "" #. PCI ID help text #: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:419 -msgid "" -"<P>If the driver is compiled into the kernel, leave the driver name empty " -"and enter the SysFS directory name instead.</P>" +msgid "<P>If the driver is compiled into the kernel, leave the driver name empty and enter the SysFS directory name instead.</P>" msgstr "" #. PCI ID help text, %1 stands for a button name (OK or Finish -- depends on the situation) #: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:424 -msgid "" -"<P>Use the buttons below the table to change the list of PCI IDs. Press <b>" -"%1</b> to activate the settings.</P>" +msgid "<P>Use the buttons below the table to change the list of PCI IDs. Press <b>%1</b> to activate the settings.</P>" msgstr "" #. PCI ID help text #: src/include/hwinfo/newid.rb:431 -msgid "" -"<P><B>Warning:</B> This is an expert configuration. Only continue if you " -"know what you are doing.</P>" +msgid "<P><B>Warning:</B> This is an expert configuration. Only continue if you know what you are doing.</P>" msgstr "" #. tree node string @@ -1068,12 +1047,9 @@ msgid "" "<p><b><big>Global I/O Scheduler</big></b><br>\n" "Select the algorithm which orders and sends commands to disk\n" -"devices. This is a global option, it will be used for all disk devices in " -"the\n" -"system. If the option is not configured, the default scheduler (usually " -"'cfq')\n" -"will be used. See the documentation in the /usr/src/linux/Documentation/" -"block\n" +"devices. This is a global option, it will be used for all disk devices in the\n" +"system. If the option is not configured, the default scheduler (usually 'cfq')\n" +"will be used. See the documentation in the /usr/src/linux/Documentation/block\n" "directory (package kernel-source) for more information.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1086,14 +1062,11 @@ #: src/include/hwinfo/system_settings_dialogs.rb:134 msgid "" "<p><b><big>Enable SysRq Keys</big></b><br>\n" -"If you enable SysRq keys, you will have some control over the system even if " -"it\n" -"crashes (such as during kernel debugging). If it is enabled, the key " -"combination\n" +"If you enable SysRq keys, you will have some control over the system even if it\n" +"crashes (such as during kernel debugging). If it is enabled, the key combination\n" "Alt-SysRq- will start the respective command (e.g. reboot the\n" "computer, dump kernel information). For further information, see\n" -"<tt>/usr/src/linux/Documentation/sysrq.txt</tt> (package kernel-source).\n" +"<tt>/usr/src/linux/Documentation/sysrq.txt</tt> (package kernel-source).</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Short sleep between reads or writes Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/update.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/update.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/update.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -95,8 +95,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_backup.rb:120 msgid "" "<p><b>Create a Complete Backup of\n" -"/etc/sysconfig:</b> This covers all configuration files that are part of " -"the\n" +"/etc/sysconfig:</b> This covers all configuration files that are part of the\n" "sysconfig mechanism, even those that will not be replaced.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -199,8 +198,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>With New Software:</b> This default setting\n" "updates the existing software and installs all new features and benefits of\n" -"the new <tt>%1</tt> version. The selection is based on the former " -"predefined\n" +"the new <tt>%1</tt> version. The selection is based on the former predefined\n" "software selection.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -209,8 +207,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Only Installed Packages:</b> This selection\n" "only updates the packages already installed on your system. <i>Note:</i>\n" -"New software in the predefined software selection, such as new YaST modules, " -"is\n" +"New software in the predefined software selection, such as new YaST modules, is\n" "not available after the update. You might miss new features.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -218,8 +215,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_update.rb:175 msgid "" "<p>After the update, some software might not\n" -"function anymore. Activate <b>Delete Unmaintained Packages</b> to delete " -"those\n" +"function anymore. Activate <b>Delete Unmaintained Packages</b> to delete those\n" "packages during the update.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -326,9 +322,7 @@ #. error message in proposal #: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:101 -msgid "" -"The installed product is not compatible with the product on the installation " -"media." +msgid "The installed product is not compatible with the product on the installation media." msgstr "" #. TRANSLATORS: unknown product (label) @@ -344,8 +338,7 @@ #. %2 is the version being installed #: src/clients/update_proposal.rb:143 msgid "" -"Updating system to another version (%1 -> %2) is not supported on the " -"running system.<br>\n" +"Updating system to another version (%1 -> %2) is not supported on the running system.<br>\n" "Boot from the installation media and use a normal upgrade\n" "or disable software repositories of products with different versions.\n" msgstr "" @@ -500,8 +493,7 @@ #. pop-up question #: src/include/update/rootpart.rb:394 msgid "" -"A possibly incomplete installation has been detected on the selected " -"partition.\n" +"A possibly incomplete installation has been detected on the selected partition.\n" "Are sure you want to use it anyway?" msgstr "" @@ -605,8 +597,7 @@ #: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1166 msgid "" "Your /boot partition is too small (%1 MB).\n" -"We recommend a size of no less than %2 MB or else the new Kernel may not " -"fit.\n" +"We recommend a size of no less than %2 MB or else the new Kernel may not fit.\n" "It is safer to either enlarge the partition\n" "or not use a /boot partition at all.\n" "\n" @@ -679,10 +670,8 @@ #. a popup message #: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1463 msgid "" -"Your system uses a separate /var partition which is required for the " -"upgrade\n" -"process to detect the disk-naming changes. Select the /var partition " -"manually\n" +"Your system uses a separate /var partition which is required for the upgrade\n" +"process to detect the disk-naming changes. Select the /var partition manually\n" "to continue the upgrade process." msgstr "" @@ -714,11 +703,9 @@ #. Calling a script because otherwise this module would depend on yast2-country #: src/modules/RootPart.rb:1698 msgid "" -"Some partitions in the system on %1 are mounted by kernel-device name. This " -"is\n" +"Some partitions in the system on %1 are mounted by kernel-device name. This is\n" "not reliable for the update since kernel-device names are unfortunately not\n" -"persistent. It is strongly recommended to start the old system and change " -"the\n" +"persistent. It is strongly recommended to start the old system and change the\n" "mount-by method to any other method for all partitions." msgstr "" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/users.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/users.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/users.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -95,9 +95,7 @@ #. translators: command line help text for 'user' option #: src/clients/groups.rb:218 -msgid "" -"List of group members, usually usernames, separated by commas. The list of " -"LDAP user DNs must be separated by colons." +msgid "List of group members, usually usernames, separated by commas. The list of LDAP user DNs must be separated by colons." msgstr "" #. translators: command line help text for new_groupname option @@ -145,18 +143,12 @@ #. helptext 2/3 #. help text for dialog "User Authentication Method" 2/2 #: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:125 src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:162 -msgid "" -"<p>Select <b>Local</b> to authenticate users only by using the local files " -"<i>/etc/passwd</i> and <i>/etc/shadow</i>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Select <b>Local</b> to authenticate users only by using the local files <i>/etc/passwd</i> and <i>/etc/shadow</i>.</p>" msgstr "" #. optional helptext 2.5/3 (local users continued) #: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:133 -msgid "" -"If you have a previous installation or alternative system, it is possible to " -"create users based on this source. To do so, select <b>Read User Data from a " -"Previous Installation</b>. This option uses an existing or creates a new " -"home directory for each user in the location specified for this installation." +msgid "If you have a previous installation or alternative system, it is possible to create users based on this source. To do so, select <b>Read User Data from a Previous Installation</b>. This option uses an existing or creates a new home directory for each user in the location specified for this installation." msgstr "" #. radiobutton to select ldap user auth. @@ -196,8 +188,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:185 msgid "" "<p>If you are using a NIS or LDAP server to store user data or if you want\n" -"to authenticate users against an NT server, choose the appropriate value. " -"Then\n" +"to authenticate users against an NT server, choose the appropriate value. Then\n" "press <b>Next</b> to continue with configuration of your client.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -205,8 +196,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:195 msgid "" "<p>If you are using a NIS or LDAP server to store user data, choose the\n" -"appropriate value. Then press <b>Next</b> to continue with configuration of " -"your client.</p>" +"appropriate value. Then press <b>Next</b> to continue with configuration of your client.</p>" msgstr "" #. helptext 3/3 -- samba &ldap available @@ -221,15 +211,12 @@ #: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:215 msgid "" "<p>If you are using an LDAP server to store user data, choose the\n" -"appropriate value. Then press <b>Next</b> to continue with configuration of " -"your client.</p>" +"appropriate value. Then press <b>Next</b> to continue with configuration of your client.</p>" msgstr "" #. helptext: additional kerberos support #: src/clients/inst_auth.rb:225 -msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Set Up Kerberos Authentication</b> to configure Kerberos after " -"configuring the user data source.</p>" +msgid "<p>Check <b>Set Up Kerberos Authentication</b> to configure Kerberos after configuring the user data source.</p>" msgstr "" #. check box label @@ -320,8 +307,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "Because the root user is equipped with extensive permissions, the password\n" -"for \"root\" should be chosen carefully. A combination of letters and " -"numbers\n" +"for \"root\" should be chosen carefully. A combination of letters and numbers\n" "is recommended. To ensure that the password was entered correctly,\n" "reenter it in a second field.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -334,8 +320,7 @@ "<p>\n" "All the rules for user passwords apply to the \"root\" password:\n" "Distinguish between uppercase and lowercase. A password should have at\n" -"least 5 characters and, as a rule, not contain any accented letters or " -"umlauts.\n" +"least 5 characters and, as a rule, not contain any accented letters or umlauts.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -358,9 +343,7 @@ #. help text for 'test keyboard layout' entry' #: src/clients/inst_root.rb:187 -msgid "" -"<p>To check whether your current keyboard layout is correct, try entering " -"text into the <b>Test Keyboard Layout</b> field.</p>" +msgid "<p>To check whether your current keyboard layout is correct, try entering text into the <b>Test Keyboard Layout</b> field.</p>" msgstr "" #. report misspellings of the password @@ -502,9 +485,7 @@ #. Help text for password expert dialog #. Help text for password expert dialog 4/5 #: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:168 src/include/users/widgets.rb:491 -msgid "" -"<p><b>SHA-512</b> is the current standard hash method. Using other " -"algorithms is not recommended unless needed for compatibility purposes.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>SHA-512</b> is the current standard hash method. Using other algorithms is not recommended unless needed for compatibility purposes.</p>" msgstr "" #. text entry @@ -582,8 +563,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:448 src/include/users/helps.rb:73 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"With the current password encryption (%1), the password length should be " -"between\n" +"With the current password encryption (%1), the password length should be between\n" " %2 and %3 characters.\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -609,21 +589,16 @@ #: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:467 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"For the <b>Username</b> use only letters (no accented characters), digits, " -"and <tt>._-</tt>.\n" -"Do not use uppercase letters in this entry unless you know what you are " -"doing.\n" +"For the <b>Username</b> use only letters (no accented characters), digits, and <tt>._-</tt>.\n" +"Do not use uppercase letters in this entry unless you know what you are doing.\n" "Usernames have stricter restrictions than passwords. You can redefine the\n" -"restrictions in the /etc/login.defs file. Read its man page for " -"information.\n" +"restrictions in the /etc/login.defs file. Read its man page for information.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" #. help text for main add user dialog #: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:473 -msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Use this password for system administrator</b> if the same " -"password as entered for the first user should be used for root.</p>" +msgid "<p>Check <b>Use this password for system administrator</b> if the same password as entered for the first user should be used for root.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for main add user dialog @@ -632,9 +607,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:476 src/include/users/helps.rb:259 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"The username and password created here are needed to log in and work with " -"your Linux system. With <b>Automatic Login</b> enabled, the login procedure " -"is skipped. This user is logged in automatically.</p>\n" +"The username and password created here are needed to log in and work with your Linux system. With <b>Automatic Login</b> enabled, the login procedure is skipped. This user is logged in automatically.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. help text for main add user dialog @@ -642,8 +615,7 @@ #: src/clients/inst_user_first.rb:480 src/include/users/helps.rb:264 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Have mail for root forwarded to this user by checking <b>Receive System " -"Mail</b>.</p>\n" +"Have mail for root forwarded to this user by checking <b>Receive System Mail</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. Dialog for expert user settings: authentication method as well @@ -817,8 +789,7 @@ #: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_all.rb:105 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Here, see the table of all allowed attributes for the current LDAP entry " -"that were not set in previous dialogs.</p>" +"Here, see the table of all allowed attributes for the current LDAP entry that were not set in previous dialogs.</p>" msgstr "" #. helptext 1/3 (don't translate objectclass"), @@ -837,8 +808,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "Edit each attribute using <b>Edit</b>. Some attributes \n" -"could be required, as defined in the user template in the <b>LDAP Client " -"Module</b>.</p>\n" +"could be required, as defined in the user template in the <b>LDAP Client Module</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. table header 1/2 @@ -858,10 +828,7 @@ #. helptext #: src/clients/users_plugin_ldap_passwordpolicy.rb:91 -msgid "" -"<p>Assign a password policy object to this user in <b>DN of Password Policy " -"object</b>. Activate <b>Reset Password</b> to reset the password of modified " -"user.</p>" +msgid "<p>Assign a password policy object to this user in <b>DN of Password Policy object</b>. Activate <b>Reset Password</b> to reset the password of modified user.</p>" msgstr "" #. check box label @@ -964,27 +931,17 @@ #: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:101 msgid "" "<p>Define a size limit by specifying the number of 1 KB blocks the\n" -"user may have on this file system. Additionally, you can define an inode " -"limit specifying the number of inodes the user may have on the file system.\n" +"user may have on this file system. Additionally, you can define an inode limit specifying the number of inodes the user may have on the file system.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. helptext for quota, cont. #: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:105 -msgid "" -"<p>You can specify both soft and hard limits for size and number of inodes. " -"The soft limits define a warning level at which users are informed they are " -"nearing their limit, whereas the hard limits define the limit at which write " -"requests are denied.</p>" +msgid "<p>You can specify both soft and hard limits for size and number of inodes. The soft limits define a warning level at which users are informed they are nearing their limit, whereas the hard limits define the limit at which write requests are denied.</p>" msgstr "" #. helptext for quota, cont. #: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:109 -msgid "" -"<p>As soon as the user has reached the soft limit, the input fields for the " -"grace interval are activated. Specify the time period for which the user is " -"allowed to exceed the soft limits set above. The countdown of the grace " -"interval starts immediately.</p>" +msgid "<p>As soon as the user has reached the soft limit, the input fields for the grace interval are activated. Specify the time period for which the user is allowed to exceed the soft limits set above. The countdown of the grace interval starts immediately.</p>" msgstr "" #. helptext for quota @@ -996,27 +953,17 @@ #: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:119 msgid "" "<p>Define a size limit by specifying the number of 1 kB blocks the\n" -"group may use on this file system. Additionally, you can define an inode " -"limit specifying the number of inodes the group may use on the file system.\n" +"group may use on this file system. Additionally, you can define an inode limit specifying the number of inodes the group may use on the file system.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. helptext for quota, cont. #: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:123 -msgid "" -"<p>You can specify both soft and hard limits for size and number of inodes. " -"The soft limits define a warning level at which groups are informed they are " -"nearing their limit, whereas the hard limits define the limit at which write " -"requests are denied.</p>" +msgid "<p>You can specify both soft and hard limits for size and number of inodes. The soft limits define a warning level at which groups are informed they are nearing their limit, whereas the hard limits define the limit at which write requests are denied.</p>" msgstr "" #. helptext for quota, cont. #: src/clients/users_plugin_quota.rb:127 -msgid "" -"<p>As soon as the group has reached the soft limit, the input fields for the " -"grace interval are activated. Specify the time period for which the group is " -"allowed to exceed the soft limits set above. The countdown of the grace " -"interval starts immediately.</p>" +msgid "<p>As soon as the group has reached the soft limit, the input fields for the grace interval are activated. Specify the time period for which the group is allowed to exceed the soft limits set above. The countdown of the grace interval starts immediately.</p>" msgstr "" #. combo box label @@ -1323,8 +1270,7 @@ "'%1' and '%2'\n" "were found. Use them for current user?\n" "\n" -"This means that data from this image will be used instead of current home " -"directory." +"This means that data from this image will be used instead of current home directory." msgstr "" #. popup label, %1 is path to directory @@ -1619,8 +1565,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "When entering a password, distinguish between uppercase and\n" -"lowercase. Passwords should not contain any accented characters or " -"umlauts. \n" +"lowercase. Passwords should not contain any accented characters or umlauts. \n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1654,16 +1599,14 @@ #: src/include/users/helps.rb:123 msgid "" "<p><b>Default Login Shell</b><br>\n" -"The name of the new user's login shell. Select one from the list or enter " -"your own path to the shell.</P>\n" +"The name of the new user's login shell. Select one from the list or enter your own path to the shell.</P>\n" msgstr "" #. Help text 3/6 #: src/include/users/helps.rb:127 msgid "" "<p><b>Default Home</b><br>\n" -"The initial path prefix for a new user's home directory. The username is " -"added\n" +"The initial path prefix for a new user's home directory. The username is added\n" "to the end of this value to create the default name of the home directory.\n" "</P>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1672,8 +1615,7 @@ #: src/include/users/helps.rb:134 msgid "" "<p><b>Skeleton Directory</b><br>\n" -"The contents of this directory are copied to a user's home directory when a " -"new user is added. </p>\n" +"The contents of this directory are copied to a user's home directory when a new user is added. </p>\n" msgstr "" #. Help text 4.5/6 @@ -1688,8 +1630,7 @@ #: src/include/users/helps.rb:143 msgid "" "<p><b>Expiration Date</b><br>\n" -"The date on which the user account is disabled. The date must be in the " -"format\n" +"The date on which the user account is disabled. The date must be in the format\n" "YYYY-MM-DD. Leave it empty if this account never expires.</P>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1753,11 +1694,9 @@ "Create the <b>Username</b> from components of the full name by\n" "clicking <b>Suggestion</b>. It may be modified, but use only\n" "letters (no accented characters), digits, and <tt>._-</tt>.\n" -"Do not use uppercase letters in this entry unless you know what you are " -"doing.\n" +"Do not use uppercase letters in this entry unless you know what you are doing.\n" "Usernames have stricter restrictions than passwords. You can redefine the\n" -"restrictions in the /etc/login.defs file. Read its man page for " -"information.\n" +"restrictions in the /etc/login.defs file. Read its man page for information.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -1767,19 +1706,15 @@ "<p>\n" "For the <b>Username</b>, use only\n" "letters (no accented characters), digits, and <tt>._-</tt>.\n" -"Do not use uppercase letters in this entry unless you know what you are " -"doing.\n" +"Do not use uppercase letters in this entry unless you know what you are doing.\n" "Usernames have stricter restrictions than passwords. You can redefine the\n" -"restrictions in the /etc/login.defs file. Read its man page for " -"information.\n" +"restrictions in the /etc/login.defs file. Read its man page for information.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" #. help text 6/7 (only during installation) #: src/include/users/helps.rb:269 -msgid "" -"<p>Press <b>User Management</b> to add more users or groups to your system." +msgid "<p>Press <b>User Management</b> to add more users or groups to your system.</p>" msgstr "" #. alternative help text 4/7 @@ -1795,8 +1730,7 @@ #: src/include/users/helps.rb:286 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"To edit various password settings of this user, such as expiration date, " -"click <b>Password Settings</b>.</p>\n" +"To edit various password settings of this user, such as expiration date, click <b>Password Settings</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. help text 7/7 @@ -1843,8 +1777,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "<b>Password:</b>\n" -"To require users who are not members of the group to identify themselves " -"when\n" +"To require users who are not members of the group to identify themselves when\n" "switching to this group (see the man page of <tt>newgrp</tt>), assign a\n" "password to this group. For security reasons, this password is not shown\n" "here. This entry is not required.\n" @@ -1919,9 +1852,7 @@ #. help text for user's home directory mode #: src/include/users/helps.rb:430 -msgid "" -"<p>Optionally, set the <b>Home Directory Permission Mode</b> for this user's " -"home directory different from the default.</p>" +msgid "<p>Optionally, set the <b>Home Directory Permission Mode</b> for this user's home directory different from the default.</p>" msgstr "" #. alternate helptext 4.5/8; %1 is directory (e.g. '/etc/skel') @@ -1934,33 +1865,22 @@ #. help text for Move to new location checkbox #: src/include/users/helps.rb:452 -msgid "" -"<p>If changing the location of a user's home directory, move the contents of " -"the current directory with <b>Move to New Location</b>, activated by " -"default. Otherwise a new home directory is created without any of the " -"existing data.</p>" +msgid "<p>If changing the location of a user's home directory, move the contents of the current directory with <b>Move to New Location</b>, activated by default. Otherwise a new home directory is created without any of the existing data.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for directory encryption #: src/include/users/helps.rb:464 msgid "" "<p>To encrypt the user's home directory, enable <b>Use Encrypted Home\n" -"Directory</b> and set the directory size. Encrypting a user's home " -"directory\n" -"does not provide strong security from other users. If this machine is " -"shared\n" +"Directory</b> and set the directory size. Encrypting a user's home directory\n" +"does not provide strong security from other users. If this machine is shared\n" "among multiple users, it may be possible for a user to compromise system\n" -"security by obtaining another user's key and gaining access to the encrypted " -"data. If strong security is required, the system should not be physically " -"shared.</p>" +"security by obtaining another user's key and gaining access to the encrypted data. If strong security is required, the system should not be physically shared.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for directory encryption #: src/include/users/helps.rb:476 -msgid "" -"<p>Home directories cannot be encrypted if a fingerprint reader device is " -"used. To encrypt the user's home directory, disable fingerprint " -"configuration first.</p>" +msgid "<p>Home directories cannot be encrypted if a fingerprint reader device is used. To encrypt the user's home directory, disable fingerprint configuration first.</p>" msgstr "" #. alternate helptext 5/8 @@ -2027,9 +1947,7 @@ #. helptext for plugin dialog 3/3 #: src/include/users/helps.rb:552 -msgid "" -"<p>Start the detailed configuration of a particular plug-in by selecting " -"<b>Launch</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Start the detailed configuration of a particular plug-in by selecting <b>Launch</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. help texts 1/1 @@ -2071,16 +1989,14 @@ #. Help text 4/6 #: src/include/users/helps.rb:595 msgid "" -"<P><B>Maximum Number of Days for the Same Password</B><BR>Set how many days " -"a user \n" +"<P><B>Maximum Number of Days for the Same Password</B><BR>Set how many days a user \n" "can use the same password before it expires.</P>\n" msgstr "" #. Help text 5/6 #: src/include/users/helps.rb:599 msgid "" -"<P><B>Minimum Number of Days for the Same Password</B><BR>Set the minimum " -"age of \n" +"<P><B>Minimum Number of Days for the Same Password</B><BR>Set the minimum age of \n" "a password before a user is allowed to change it.</P>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2107,125 +2023,83 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "<b>Changing the Values</b><br>\n" -"You can configure these settings by running appropriate modules. Select the " -"module with <b>Configure</b>.\n" +"You can configure these settings by running appropriate modules. Select the module with <b>Configure</b>.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" #. help text for Password Policy Dialog #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:62 -msgid "" -"<p>Select the <b>Password Change Policies</b>, <b>Password Aging Policies, and <b>Lockout Policies</b> tabs to choose LDAP password policy groups " -"of attributes to configure.</p>" +msgid "<p>Select the <b>Password Change Policies</b>, <b>Password Aging Policies</b>, and <b>Lockout Policies</b> tabs to choose LDAP password policy groups of attributes to configure.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for pwdInHistory attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:70 -msgid "" -"<p>Specify the <b>Maximum Number of Passwords Stored in History</b> to set " -"how many previously used passwords should be saved. Saved passwords may not " -"be used.</p>" +msgid "<p>Specify the <b>Maximum Number of Passwords Stored in History</b> to set how many previously used passwords should be saved. Saved passwords may not be used.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for pwdMustChange attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:74 -msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>User Must Change Password after Reset</b> to force users to " -"change their passwords after the the password is reset or changed by an " -"administrator.</p>" +msgid "<p>Check <b>User Must Change Password after Reset</b> to force users to change their passwords after the the password is reset or changed by an administrator.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for pwdAllowUserChange attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:78 -msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>User Can Change Password</b> to allow users to change their " -"passwords.</p>" +msgid "<p>Check <b>User Can Change Password</b> to allow users to change their passwords.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for pwdSafeModify attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:82 -msgid "" -"<p>If the existing password must be provided along with the new password, " -"check <b>Old Password Required for Password Change</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>If the existing password must be provided along with the new password, check <b>Old Password Required for Password Change</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for pwdCheckQuality attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:86 -msgid "" -"<p>Select whether the password quality should be verified while passwords " -"are modified or added. Select <b>No Checking</b> if passwords should not be " -"checked at all. With <b>Accept Uncheckable Passwords</b>, passwords are " -"accepted even if the check cannot be performed, for example, if the user has " -"provided an encrypted password. With <b>Only Accept Checked Passwords</b> " -"passwords are refused if the quality test fails or the password cannot be " -"checked.</p>" +msgid "<p>Select whether the password quality should be verified while passwords are modified or added. Select <b>No Checking</b> if passwords should not be checked at all. With <b>Accept Uncheckable Passwords</b>, passwords are accepted even if the check cannot be performed, for example, if the user has provided an encrypted password. With <b>Only Accept Checked Passwords</b> passwords are refused if the quality test fails or the password cannot be checked.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for pwdMinLength attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:90 -msgid "" -"Set the minimum number of characters that must be used in a password in " -"<b>Minimum Password Length</b>.</p>" +msgid "Set the minimum number of characters that must be used in a password in <b>Minimum Password Length</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for pwdMinAge attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:94 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Minimum Password Age</b> sets how much time must pass between " -"modifications to the password.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Minimum Password Age</b> sets how much time must pass between modifications to the password.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for pwdMaxAge attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:98 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Maximum Password Age</b> sets how long after modification a password " -"expires.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Maximum Password Age</b> sets how long after modification a password expires.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for pwdExpireWarning attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:102 -msgid "" -"<p>In <b>Time before Password Expiration to Issue Warning</b> set how long " -"before a password is due to expire that an expiration warning messages " -"should be given to an authenticating user.</p>" +msgid "<p>In <b>Time before Password Expiration to Issue Warning</b> set how long before a password is due to expire that an expiration warning messages should be given to an authenticating user.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for pwdGraceAuthNLimit attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:106 -msgid "" -"<p>Set the number of times an expired password can be used to authenticate " -"in <b>Allowed Uses of an Expired Password</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Set the number of times an expired password can be used to authenticate in <b>Allowed Uses of an Expired Password</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for pwdLockout attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:110 -msgid "" -"<p>Check <b>Enable Password Locking</b> to forbid use of a password after a " -"specified number of consecutive failed bind attempts.</p>" +msgid "<p>Check <b>Enable Password Locking</b> to forbid use of a password after a specified number of consecutive failed bind attempts.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for pwdMaxFailure attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:114 -msgid "" -"<p>Set the number of consecutive failed bind attempts after which the " -"password may not be used to authenticate in <b>Bind Failures to Lock the " -"Password</b>.</p>" +msgid "<p>Set the number of consecutive failed bind attempts after which the password may not be used to authenticate in <b>Bind Failures to Lock the Password</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for pwdLockoutDuration attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:118 -msgid "" -"<p>Set how long the password cannot be used in <b>Password Lock Duration</b>." -"</p>" +msgid "<p>Set how long the password cannot be used in <b>Password Lock Duration</b>.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for pwdFailureCountInterval attribute #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:122 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Bind Failures Cache Duration</b> sets how long before password " -"failures are purged from the failure counter even though no successful " -"authentication has occurred.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Bind Failures Cache Duration</b> sets how long before password failures are purged from the failure counter even though no successful authentication has occurred.</p>" msgstr "" #. tab label @@ -2356,8 +2230,7 @@ #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:675 msgid "" "<p>Press <b>Configure</b> to configure settings stored on the\n" -"LDAP server. You will be asked for the password if you are not connected yet " -"or\n" +"LDAP server. You will be asked for the password if you are not connected yet or\n" "have changed your configuration.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2369,8 +2242,7 @@ #. password policy help #: src/include/users/ldap_dialogs.rb:683 msgid "" -"<p>Configure the selected password policy with <b>Edit</b>. Use <b>Add</b> " -"to add a new password policy. The configuration is only possible,\n" +"<p>Configure the selected password policy with <b>Edit</b>. Use <b>Add</b> to add a new password policy. The configuration is only possible,\n" " if the password policies are already enabled on the LDAP server.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -2650,8 +2522,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "Choose a password encryption method for local and system users.\n" -"<b>DES</b>, the Linux default method, works in all network environments, but " -"it\n" +"<b>DES</b>, the Linux default method, works in all network environments, but it\n" "restricts passwords to eight characters or less.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2685,8 +2556,7 @@ #. help text 2/3 #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:586 msgid "" -"<p>It seems that you are running a NIS server. In some network " -"environments,\n" +"<p>It seems that you are running a NIS server. In some network environments,\n" "you might be unable to log in to a NIS client when a user password is\n" "encrypted with a method other than DES.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -2714,17 +2584,14 @@ #. helptext 2/4 #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:730 -msgid "" -"<p>Here, extend the search filters for users and groups beyond the default " -"search filters.</p>" +msgid "<p>Here, extend the search filters for users and groups beyond the default search filters.</p>" msgstr "" #. helptext 3/4 #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:734 msgid "" "<p>With <b>Default</b>, load the default filter from the user and group\n" -"configuration modules saved on the LDAP server (values of 'suseSearchFilter' " -"attributes).\n" +"configuration modules saved on the LDAP server (values of 'suseSearchFilter' attributes).\n" "If you are not connected yet, you are prompted for the password.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2813,8 +2680,7 @@ #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:969 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"The features described below are only available if you are using KDM or GDM " -"as the login manager.\n" +"The features described below are only available if you are using KDM or GDM as the login manager.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -2822,8 +2688,7 @@ #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:975 msgid "" "<p><b>Auto Login</b><br>\n" -"By setting <b>Auto Login</b>, skip the login procedure. The user chosen from " -"the list is logged in automatically.</p>\n" +"By setting <b>Auto Login</b>, skip the login procedure. The user chosen from the list is logged in automatically.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. helptext 3/3 @@ -2831,8 +2696,7 @@ msgid "" "<p><b>Passwordless Logins</b><br>\n" "If this option is checked, all users are allowed to log in without entering\n" -"passwords. Otherwise, you are asked for the password even if you set a user " -"to log in automatically.</p>\n" +"passwords. Otherwise, you are asked for the password even if you set a user to log in automatically.</p>\n" msgstr "" #. dialog label @@ -2988,8 +2852,7 @@ #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1518 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Linux is a multiuser system. Several different users can be logged in to " -"the\n" +"Linux is a multiuser system. Several different users can be logged in to the\n" "system at the same time. To avoid confusion, each user must have\n" "a unique identity. Additionally, every user belongs to at least one group.\n" "</p>\n" @@ -2999,8 +2862,7 @@ #: src/include/users/widgets.rb:1535 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"Users and groups are arranged in various sets. Change the set currently " -"shown in the table with <b>Set Filter</b>.\n" +"Users and groups are arranged in various sets. Change the set currently shown in the table with <b>Set Filter</b>.\n" "Customize your view with <b>Customize Filter</b>.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -3009,8 +2871,7 @@ msgid "" "<p>\n" "Click <b>Expert Options</b> to edit various expert settings, such as\n" -"password encryption type, user authentication method, default values for " -"new\n" +"password encryption type, user authentication method, default values for new\n" "users, or login settings. With <b>Write Changes Now</b>, save\n" "all changes made so far without exiting the configuration module.</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -3065,8 +2926,7 @@ msgid "" "\n" "<p>\n" -"Use this dialog to get information about existing groups and add or modify " -"groups.\n" +"Use this dialog to get information about existing groups and add or modify groups.\n" "</p>\n" msgstr "" @@ -4282,7 +4142,7 @@ msgstr "" #. the ']' is or-ed... -#. error popup +#. error popup #: src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:505 msgid "" "The password may only contain the following characters:\n" @@ -4294,8 +4154,7 @@ #: src/modules/UsersSimple.pm:540 msgid "" "<p>\n" -"For the password, use only characters that can be found on an English " -"keyboard\n" +"For the password, use only characters that can be found on an English keyboard\n" "layout. In cases of system error, it may be necessary to log in without a\n" "localized keyboard layout.\n" "</p>" Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/vm.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/vm.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/vm.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -29,9 +29,7 @@ #. check for kernel-bigsmp #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:158 -msgid "" -"x86_64 is the only supported architecture for hosting virtual machines. Your " -"architecture is " +msgid "x86_64 is the only supported architecture for hosting virtual machines. Your architecture is " msgstr "" #. we are already in UML, nested virtual machine is not supported @@ -59,31 +57,22 @@ #. xen domain0 installation help text - 1/4 #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:214 -msgid "" -"<p><big><b>VM Server Configuration</b></big></p><p>Configuration of the VM " -"Server (domain 0) has two parts.</p>" +msgid "<p><big><b>VM Server Configuration</b></big></p><p>Configuration of the VM Server (domain 0) has two parts.</p>" msgstr "" #. xen domain0 installation help text - 2/4 #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:218 -msgid "" -"<p>The required packages are installed into the system first. Then the boot " -"loader is switched to GRUB (if not already used) and the Xen section is " -"added to the boot loader menu if it is missing.</p>" +msgid "<p>The required packages are installed into the system first. Then the boot loader is switched to GRUB (if not already used) and the Xen section is added to the boot loader menu if it is missing.</p>" msgstr "" #. xen domain0 installation help text - 3/4 #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:222 -msgid "" -"<p>GRUB is needed because it supports the multiboot standard required to " -"boot Xen and the Linux kernel.</p>" +msgid "<p>GRUB is needed because it supports the multiboot standard required to boot Xen and the Linux kernel.</p>" msgstr "" #. xen domain0 installation help text - 4/4 #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:226 -msgid "" -"<p>When the configuration has finished successfully, you can boot the VM " -"Server from the boot loader menu.</p>" +msgid "<p>When the configuration has finished successfully, you can boot the VM Server from the boot loader menu.</p>" msgstr "" #. error popup @@ -197,9 +186,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:506 -msgid "" -"<p>For normal network configurations hosting virtual machines, a network " -"bridge is recommended.</p><p>Configure a default network bridge?</p>" +msgid "<p>For normal network configurations hosting virtual machines, a network bridge is recommended.</p><p>Configure a default network bridge?</p>" msgstr "" #. Firewall stage - modify the firewall setting, add the xen bridge to FW_FORWARD_ALWAYS_INOUT_DEV @@ -216,15 +203,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:570 -msgid "" -"KVM components are installed. Reboot the machine and select the native " -"kernel in the boot loader menu to install KVM guests." +msgid "KVM components are installed. Reboot the machine and select the native kernel in the boot loader menu to install KVM guests." msgstr "" #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:573 -msgid "" -"For installing Xen guests, reboot the machine and select the Xen section in " -"the boot loader menu." +msgid "For installing Xen guests, reboot the machine and select the Xen section in the boot loader menu." msgstr "" #: src/modules/VirtConfig.rb:576 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/wagon.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/wagon.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/wagon.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -158,9 +158,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/wagon_dup_repositories.rb:106 -msgid "" -"The installed packages will be switched to the versions available in the " -"selected migration repositories." +msgid "The installed packages will be switched to the versions available in the selected migration repositories." msgstr "" #. The version is the same, release can be different @@ -238,26 +236,19 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/wagon_registration_check.rb:212 -msgid "" -"Registration for product <b>%1</b> has been refunded, the product is not " -"registered." +msgid "Registration for product <b>%1</b> has been refunded, the product is not registered." msgstr "" #: src/clients/wagon_registration_check.rb:228 -msgid "" -"Registration for product <b>%1</b> has expired, the registration is not " -"valid anymore." +msgid "Registration for product <b>%1</b> has expired, the registration is not valid anymore." msgstr "" #: src/clients/wagon_registration_check.rb:244 -msgid "" -"Registration for product <b>%1</b> is provisional only, no updates available" +msgid "Registration for product <b>%1</b> is provisional only, no updates available" msgstr "" #: src/clients/wagon_registration_check.rb:278 -msgid "" -"The registration status is %1 days old. The summary above might not be " -"correct, run registration to update the status." +msgid "The registration status is %1 days old. The summary above might not be correct, run registration to update the status." msgstr "" #. display a critical warning @@ -266,16 +257,12 @@ msgstr "" #: src/clients/wagon_registration_check.rb:306 -msgid "" -"We strongly recommend to register unregistered or expired products before " -"starting migration." +msgid "We strongly recommend to register unregistered or expired products before starting migration." msgstr "" #: src/clients/wagon_registration_check.rb:312 #: src/clients/wagon_registration_check.rb:339 -msgid "" -"Migrating an unregistered or partly registered system might result in a " -"broken system." +msgid "Migrating an unregistered or partly registered system might result in a broken system." msgstr "" #. heading text @@ -486,9 +473,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/modules/Wagon.rb:396 -msgid "" -"Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is missing. Use " -"xmlfile= command line option." +msgid "Target file name ('xmlfile' option) is missing. Use xmlfile= command line option." msgstr "" #. popup heading, with rich text widget and Yes/No buttons @@ -498,19 +483,11 @@ #. du contains maps: $[ "dir" : [ total, used, pkgusage, readonly ], .... ] #: src/modules/Wagon.rb:586 -msgid "" -"There is not enough free space to migrate the system using download in " -"advance mode. Partition %1 needs at least %2MB more free disk space. (The " -"needed size is estimated, it is recommended to add slightly more free " -"space.) Add more disk space or disable download in advance mode." +msgid "There is not enough free space to migrate the system using download in advance mode. Partition %1 needs at least %2MB more free disk space. (The needed size is estimated, it is recommended to add slightly more free space.) Add more disk space or disable download in advance mode." msgstr "" #: src/modules/Wagon.rb:613 -msgid "" -"There might not be enough free space for download in advance mode migration. " -"The estimated free space after migration is %2MB, it is recommended to " -"increase the free space in case the estimation is inaccurate to avoid " -"installation errors." +msgid "There might not be enough free space for download in advance mode migration. The estimated free space after migration is %2MB, it is recommended to increase the free space in case the estimation is inaccurate to avoid installation errors." msgstr "" #. 'Product Long Name (product-libzypp-name)' @@ -541,16 +518,13 @@ #. Removing another product might be an issue #. (nevertheless selected by user or directly by YaST) #: src/modules/Wagon.rb:772 -msgid "" -"<font color='red'><b>Warning:</b> Product <b>%1</b> will be removed.</font>" +msgid "<font color='red'><b>Warning:</b> Product <b>%1</b> will be removed.</font>" msgstr "" #. Not selected by user #. @see BNC #575117 #: src/modules/Wagon.rb:792 -msgid "" -"<font color='red'><b>Error:</b> Product <b>%1</b> will be automatically " -"removed.</font>" +msgid "<font color='red'><b>Error:</b> Product <b>%1</b> will be automatically removed.</font>" msgstr "" #: src/modules/Wagon.rb:862 @@ -584,8 +558,7 @@ #. help text #: src/modules/Wagon.rb:945 -msgid "" -"<p>To change the update settings, go to <b>Packages Proposal</b> section.</p>" +msgid "<p>To change the update settings, go to <b>Packages Proposal</b> section.</p>" msgstr "" #. Product removal MUST be confirmed by user, otherwise migration will not continue. Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/xpram.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/xpram.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/xpram.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -53,11 +53,7 @@ #. help text for XPRAM 2/4 #: src/include/s390/xpram/ui.rb:53 -msgid "" -"<p>This tool currently only supports assigning the entire XPRAM to one " -"partition. To have multiple partitions, look at \"Device Drivers, Features " -"and Commands November 30, 2004\" for the Linux kernel 2.6 - April 2004 " -"stream.</p><p>In this case disable XPRAM in this module.</p>" +msgid "<p>This tool currently only supports assigning the entire XPRAM to one partition. To have multiple partitions, look at \"Device Drivers, Features and Commands November 30, 2004\" for the Linux kernel 2.6 - April 2004 stream.</p><p>In this case disable XPRAM in this module.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text for XPRAM 3/4 Modified: trunk/yast/eo/po/yast2-apparmor.eo.po =================================================================== --- trunk/yast/eo/po/yast2-apparmor.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:06:30 UTC (rev 90697) +++ trunk/yast/eo/po/yast2-apparmor.eo.po 2014-11-03 16:10:21 UTC (rev 90698) @@ -55,9 +55,7 @@ #. Read the profiles from the SCR agent #: src/clients/AA_DeleteProfile.rb:90 -msgid "" -"Make a selection from the listed profiles and press Next to delete the " -"profile." +msgid "Make a selection from the listed profiles and press Next to delete the profile." msgstr "" #: src/clients/AA_DeleteProfile.rb:93 @@ -137,9 +135,7 @@ #. #. *************************************************************************** #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:52 -msgid "" -"This operation generated the following error. Check your installation and " -"AppArmor profile settings." +msgid "This operation generated the following error. Check your installation and AppArmor profile settings." msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:91 src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:103 @@ -252,8 +248,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/aa-config.rb:441 msgid "" -"<p><b>AppArmor Status</b><br>This reports whether the AppArmor policy " -"enforcement \n" +"<p><b>AppArmor Status</b><br>This reports whether the AppArmor policy enforcement \n" "module is loaded and functioning.</p>" msgstr "" @@ -337,9 +332,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_profile_check.rb:57 -msgid "" -"<p>These problems must be corrected before AppArmor can be started or the " -"profile management tools can be used.</p> " +msgid "<p>These problems must be corrected before AppArmor can be started or the profile management tools can be used.</p> " msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_profile_check.rb:64 @@ -347,9 +340,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/apparmor_profile_check.rb:70 -msgid "" -"<p>Comprehensive documentation about AppArmor is available in the " -"Administration guide located in the directory: " +msgid "<p>Comprehensive documentation about AppArmor is available in the Administration guide located in the directory: " msgstr "" #. encoding: utf-8 @@ -774,41 +765,31 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:43 msgid "" "<ul><li>Override all DAC access, including ACL execute access if \n" -"[_POSIX_ACL] is defined. Excluding DAC access covered by CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE." -"</li></ul>" +"[_POSIX_ACL] is defined. Excluding DAC access covered by CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE.</li></ul>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:49 msgid "" "<ul><li>Overrides all DAC restrictions regarding read and search \n" -"on files and directories, including ACL restrictions if [_POSIX_ACL] is " -"defined. \n" +"on files and directories, including ACL restrictions if [_POSIX_ACL] is defined. \n" "Excluding DAC access covered by CAP_LINUX_IMMUTABLE. </li></ul>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:57 msgid "" -"<ul><li>Overrides all restrictions on allowed operations on files, where " -"file\n" +"<ul><li>Overrides all restrictions on allowed operations on files, where file\n" "owner ID must be equal to the user ID, except where CAP_FSETID is\n" "applicable. It does not override MAC and DAC restrictions. </li></ul>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:65 -msgid "" -"<ul><li>Overrides the following restrictions: user ID must match the file " -"owner ID when setting the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits on that file; the " -"effective group ID (or one of the supplementary group IDs) must match the " -"file owner ID when setting the S_ISGID bit on that file; the S_ISUID and " -"S_ISGID bits are cleared on successful return from chown(2) (not " -"implemented). </li></ul>" +msgid "<ul><li>Overrides the following restrictions: user ID must match the file owner ID when setting the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits on that file; the effective group ID (or one of the supplementary group IDs) must match the file owner ID when setting the S_ISGID bit on that file; the S_ISUID and S_ISGID bits are cleared on successful return from chown(2) (not implemented). </li></ul>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:71 msgid "" "<ul><li>Overrides the restriction that the real or effective user ID \n" -"of a process sending a signal must match the real or effective user ID of " -"the process \n" +"of a process sending a signal must match the real or effective user ID of the process \n" "receiving the signal.</li></ul>" msgstr "" @@ -831,9 +812,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:97 -msgid "" -"<ul><li>Allows modification of S_IMMUTABLE and S_APPEND file attributes</ul>" +msgid "<ul><li>Allows modification of S_IMMUTABLE and S_APPEND file attributes</li></ul>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:103 @@ -849,16 +828,14 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:115 msgid "" "<ul><li> Allows interface configuration</li> \n" -"<li> Allows administration of IP firewall, masquerading and accounting \n" +"<li> Allows administration of IP firewall, masquerading and accounting</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting debug option on sockets</li> \n" "<li> Allows modification of routing tables</li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:121 msgid "" -"<li> Allows setting arbitrary process / process group ownership on sockets \n" +"<li> Allows setting arbitrary process / process group ownership on sockets</li> \n" "<li> Allows binding to any address for transparent proxying</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting TOS (type of service)</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting promiscuous mode</li> \n" @@ -881,8 +858,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:143 msgid "" -"<ul><li> Allows locking of shared memory segments</li> <li> Allows mlock " -"and\n" +"<ul><li> Allows locking of shared memory segments</li> <li> Allows mlock and\n" "mlockall (which does not really have anything to do with IPC) </li></ul>" msgstr "" @@ -892,8 +868,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:153 msgid "" -"<ul><li> Insert and remove kernel modules - modify kernel without limit \n" +"<ul><li> Insert and remove kernel modules - modify kernel without limit</li> \n" "<li> Modify cap_bset </li></ul>" msgstr "" @@ -944,8 +919,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:199 msgid "" "<li> Allows removing semaphores</li> \n" -"<li> Used instead of CAP_CHOWN to \"chown\" IPC message queues, semaphores " -"and shared memory</li> \n" +"<li> Used instead of CAP_CHOWN to \"chown\" IPC message queues, semaphores and shared memory</li> \n" "<li> Allows locking/unlocking of shared memory segment</li> \n" "<li> Allows turning swap on/off</li> \n" "<li> Allows forged pids on socket credentials passing</li>" @@ -956,8 +930,7 @@ "<li> Allows setting read ahead and flushing buffers on block devices</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting geometry in floppy driver</li> \n" "<li> Allows turning DMA on/off in xd driver</li> \n" -"<li> Allows administration of md devices (mostly the above, but some extra " -"ioctls)</li>" +"<li> Allows administration of md devices (mostly the above, but some extra ioctls)</li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:212 @@ -970,8 +943,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:218 msgid "" -"<li> Allows reading non-standardized portions of pci configuration space \n" +"<li> Allows reading non-standardized portions of pci configuration space</li> \n" "<li> Allows DDI debug ioctl on sbpcd driver</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting up serial ports</li> \n" "<li> Allows sending raw qic-117 commands</li>" @@ -990,10 +962,8 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:236 msgid "" -"<ul><li> Allows raising priority and setting priority on other (different " -"UID) processes</li> \n" -"<li> Allows use of FIFO and round-robin (realtime) scheduling on own " -"processes and setting \n" +"<ul><li> Allows raising priority and setting priority on other (different UID) processes</li> \n" +"<li> Allows use of FIFO and round-robin (realtime) scheduling on own processes and setting \n" "the scheduling algorithm used by another process.</li> \n" "<li> Allows setting cpu affinity on other processes </li></ul>" msgstr "" @@ -1003,14 +973,12 @@ "<ul><li> Override resource limits. Set resource limits.</li> \n" "<li> Override quota limits.</li> \n" "<li> Override reserved space on ext2 filesystem</li> \n" -"<li> Modify data journaling mode on ext3 filesystem (uses journaling " -"resources)</li>" +"<li> Modify data journaling mode on ext3 filesystem (uses journaling resources)</li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/capabilities.rb:251 msgid "" -"<li> NOTE: ext2 honors fsuid when checking for resource overrides, so you " -"can override using fsuid too</li> \n" +"<li> NOTE: ext2 honors fsuid when checking for resource overrides, so you can override using fsuid too</li> \n" "<li> Override size restrictions on IPC message queues</li> \n" "<li> Allows more than 64hz interrupts from the real-time clock</li> \n" "<li> Override max number of consoles on console allocation</li> \n" @@ -1183,8 +1151,7 @@ "individual occurrences, including the date of the last occurrence. \n" "<br>For example:<br> <tt>AppArmor: PERMITTING access to capability\n" "'setgid' (httpd2-prefork(6347) profile /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork \n" -"active /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork) 2 times, the latest at Sat Oct 9 16:05:54 " -"2004.</tt>\n" +"active /usr/sbin/httpd2-prefork) 2 times, the latest at Sat Oct 9 16:05:54 2004.</tt>\n" "</p>" msgstr "" @@ -1249,8 +1216,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:99 msgid "" "<li>Select <b>Include unknown security events</b> if \n" -"you would like to include events that are not rated with a severity number." +"you would like to include events that are not rated with a severity number.</li>" msgstr "" #. ---------------------------- @@ -1260,8 +1226,7 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:106 msgid "" -"This wizard presents entries generated by the AppArmor access control " -"module. \n" +"This wizard presents entries generated by the AppArmor access control module. \n" "You can generate highly optimized and robust security profiles \n" "by using the suggestions made by AppArmor." msgstr "" @@ -1289,9 +1254,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:126 -msgid "" -"File permission access modes consists of combinations of the following six " -"modes:" +msgid "File permission access modes consists of combinations of the following six modes:" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:129 @@ -1426,14 +1389,11 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:196 -msgid "" -"<li><b>*</b> can substitute for any number of characters, except '/'<li>" +msgid "<li><b>*</b> can substitute for any number of characters, except '/'<li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:199 -msgid "" -"<li><b>**</b> can substitute for any number of characters, including '/'" +msgid "<li><b>**</b> can substitute for any number of characters, including '/'</li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:202 @@ -1441,19 +1401,15 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:205 -msgid "" -"<li><b>[abc]</b> will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>" +msgid "<li><b>[abc]</b> will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:208 -msgid "" -"<li><b>[a-c]</b> will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>" +msgid "<li><b>[a-c]</b> will substitute for the single character a, b, or c</li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:211 -msgid "" -"<li><b>{ab,cd}</b> will expand to one rule to match ab, one rule to match " -"cd</li>" +msgid "<li><b>{ab,cd}</b> will expand to one rule to match ab, one rule to match cd</li>" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/helps.rb:214 @@ -1610,17 +1566,13 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:889 -msgid "" -"The profile already contains the provided hat name. Enter a different name " -"or press Abort to cancel this wizard." +msgid "The profile already contains the provided hat name. Enter a different name or press Abort to cancel this wizard." msgstr "" #. FIXME: format these texts better #. help text #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:928 -msgid "" -"<p>View and modify the contents of an individual profile. For existing " -"entries double click the permissions to access a modification dialog.</p>" +msgid "<p>View and modify the contents of an individual profile. For existing entries double click the permissions to access a modification dialog.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text @@ -1635,9 +1587,7 @@ #. help text #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:942 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Add Entry:</b><br>Select the type of resource to add from the drop " -"down list.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Add Entry:</b><br>Select the type of resource to add from the drop down list.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text - part x1 @@ -1659,16 +1609,14 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:959 msgid "" "<li><b>Include</b><br>Add an include entry to this profile. This option \n" -"includes the profile entry contents of another file in this profile at load " -"time.</li>" +"includes the profile entry contents of another file in this profile at load time.</li>" msgstr "" #. help text - part x5 #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:963 msgid "" "<li><b>Network Entry</b><br>Add a network rule entry to this profile. \n" -"This option will allow you to specify network access privileges for the " -"profile. \n" +"This option will allow you to specify network access privileges for the profile. \n" "You may specify a network address family and socket type.</li>" msgstr "" @@ -1676,12 +1624,10 @@ #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:969 msgid "" "<li><b>Hat</b><br>Add a sub-profile for this profile, called a Hat. This\n" -"option is analogous to manually creating a new profile, which can be " -"selected\n" +"option is analogous to manually creating a new profile, which can be selected\n" "during execution only in the context of being asked for by a <b>changehat\n" "aware</b> application. \n" -"For more information on changehat, see <b>man changehat</b> on your system " -"or the Novell AppArmor Administration Guide.</li>" +"For more information on changehat, see <b>man changehat</b> on your system or the Novell AppArmor Administration Guide.</li>" msgstr "" #. help text - part x7 @@ -1691,18 +1637,15 @@ #. help text #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:982 -msgid "" -"<p><b>Delete Entry:</b><br>Removes the selected entry from this profile.</p>" +msgid "<p><b>Delete Entry:</b><br>Removes the selected entry from this profile.</p>" msgstr "" #. help text - part y1 #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:987 msgid "" "<p><b>*Clean Exec</b><br>The Clean Exec option for the discrete profile \n" -"and unconstrained execute permissions provide added security by stripping " -"the environment \n" -"that is inherited by the child program of specific variables. These " -"variables are:" +"and unconstrained execute permissions provide added security by stripping the environment \n" +"that is inherited by the child program of specific variables. These variables are:" msgstr "" #. help text - part y2 @@ -1766,9 +1709,7 @@ #. Widget activated in the table #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1145 -msgid "" -"Include entries can not be edited. Select add or delete to manage Include " -"entries." +msgid "Include entries can not be edited. Select add or delete to manage Include entries." msgstr "" #. Make sure that the entry doesn't already exist @@ -1781,9 +1722,7 @@ msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1335 -msgid "" -"Invalid #include file. Include files must be located in one of these " -"directories: \n" +msgid "Invalid #include file. Include files must be located in one of these directories: \n" msgstr "" #: src/include/apparmor/profile_dialogs.rb:1379 -- To unsubscribe, e-mail: opensuse-translation-commit+unsubscribe@opensuse.org To contact the owner, e-mail: opensuse-translation-commit+owner@opensuse.org